Ricoh B202_B178_B180 service manual.pdf

8/15/2019 Ricoh B202_B178_B180 service manual.pdf

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/ricoh-b202b178b180-service-manualpdf 1/904

B202/B178/B180

SERVICE MANUAL

002366MIU





B2 0 2 / B1 7 8 / B1 8 0

S E

RV I C E MAN U

AL









It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information containedwithin this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the bestinterest of Ricoh Corporation and its member companies.

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANYFASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR

PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, includingdesktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registeredtrademarks or the property of their respective companies.They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashiononly and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of

any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.

2005 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.





The Service Manual contains informationregarding service techniques, procedures,

processes and spare parts of office equipment distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this

manual should be either service trained ocertified by successfully completing a RicohTechnical Training Program.

Untrained and uncertified users utilizing information contained in this service manual torepair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal injury, damage to property or loss of warrant

protection.

Ricoh Corporation

WARNING





LEGENDPRODUCT CODE COMPANY

GESTETNER LANIER RICOH SAVIN

B202 DSc428 LD328c Aficio 3228C C2824



DOCUMENTATION HISTORY

REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS

* 06/2005 Original Printing





SM i B202/B178/B180

B202/B178/B180

TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTALLATION

1. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 1-1

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................1-11.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................1-11.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL.............................................................................1-11.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT.................................................1-21.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................1-2

1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS ..........................................................1-3

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS........................................................................1-31.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS................................................................1-3

1.3 COPIER.....................................................................................................1-41.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS ....................................... 1-41.3.2 INSTALLATION FLOW CHART .......................................................1-5

1.4 MACHINE INSTALLATION........................................................................1-61.4.1 COPIER............................................................................................1-6

Accessory Check ..................................................................................1-6Installation Procedure ...........................................................................1-7Settings Relevant to Contract .............................................................1-11

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE........................................................................1-121.4.3 TRANSPORTING MACHINE.......................................................... 1-131.5 OPTIONAL UNIT.....................................................................................1-15

1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT ....................................................1-15 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-15Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-16

1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT.................................................... 1-19 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-19Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-20

1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY.............................................................. 1-23 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-23

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-241.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER ...................................... 1-27

Accessory Check ................................................................................1-27Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-27

1.5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER...................................................................1-30 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-30Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-30

1.5.6 PUNCH UNIT .................................................................................1-33 Accessory Check ................................................................................1-33Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-34

1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY ...........................................................1-37

Accessories Check List.......................................................................1-37



B202/B178/B180 ii SM

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray.....................................................1-381.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER.....................................................................1-39

Accessory Check ................................................................................1-39 Adjusting the Height............................................................................1-40

Main Body...........................................................................................1-41Optional Punch Unit ............................................................................1-441.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION............................................1-48

INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.....................................................1-48 ACCESSARY CHECK ........................................................................1-49INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ..........................................................1-50

1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER............................................................1-551.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER................................................1-571.5.12 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER................................................1-591.5.13 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION) .......................................1-61

1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS................................................................................1-641.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................1-64

I/F Card Slot........................................................................................1-64SD Card Slot.......................................................................................1-64

1.6.2 POSTSCRIPT 3.............................................................................. 1-651.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER ........................................................1-661.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)..................................................................1-67

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-67UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-68SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394........................................................1-68

1.6.5 IEEE 1284 ......................................................................................1-69

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-691.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN) ...................................................1-70

Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-70UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN...................................................1-72SP MODE SETTINGS FOR IEEE 802.11B WIRELESS LAN.............1-73

1.6.7 BLUETOOTH..................................................................................1-741.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ...............................1-75

ACCESSORY CHECK........................................................................1-75Seal Check And Removal ...................................................................1-75Installation Procedure .........................................................................1-76

1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ........................................................1-77

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE.................................................... 2-1

2.1 SETTINGS.................................................................................................2-1New Unit Set.........................................................................................2-1PM Counter Reset ................................................................................2-1

2.2 PM TABLES ..............................................................................................2-22.3 OTHERS ...................................................................................................2-4

Rev. 11/2005



SM iii B202/B178/B180

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 3-1

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS ......................................................................................3-1

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT..............................................................................3-23.2.1 SCANNING.......................................................................................3-2

Scanner sub-scan magnification...........................................................3-2Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration..............................3-2Main scan dot position correction .........................................................3-3

3.2.2 ARDF................................................................................................3-4 ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration .................................3-4

3.2.3 REGISTRATION...............................................................................3-5Image Area ...........................................................................................3-5Leading Edge........................................................................................3-5Side to Side ..........................................................................................3-5 Adjustment Standard ............................................................................ 3-5Paper Registration Standard.................................................................3-5 Adjustment Procedure ..........................................................................3-6

3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION.................................................................3-6Line Position Adjustment ......................................................................3-6 Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper............................................3-6

3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION .................................................. 3-7Copy Mode ...........................................................................................3-7Printer Mode .......................................................................................3-12

3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT......................................................................3-14

3.3.1 TOP COVER ..................................................................................3-143.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD .........................................................3-143.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1.....................................................3-153.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH .............................3-163.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR..................3-163.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2 .................................................................3-16

3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT ..............................................................................3-173.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD................................................................3-173.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR ................................................................3-173.4.3 DUPLEX FEED SENSOR...............................................................3-18

3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS..............................................................................3-19

3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES..............................................3-193.5.2 LEFT SIDE .....................................................................................3-213.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS...........................3-22

3.6 SCANNER UNIT......................................................................................3-233.6.1 EXPOSURE GLASS.......................................................................3-233.6.2 ORIGINAL LENGTH/WIDTH SENSOR ..........................................3-233.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU).......................................................3-24

When reassembling ............................................................................3-243.6.4 EXPOSURE LAMP STABILIZER ...................................................3-263.6.5 XENON LAMP ................................................................................3-263.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (PSU) ....................................3-28

3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR........................................................................3-28



B202/B178/B180 iv SM

3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE ..............................................................3-293.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE.................................................................3-323.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT.................................3-35

3.7 LASER OPTICS ......................................................................................3-36

3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS.....................................................3-363.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT ..................................................3-37 Adjustments after Replacing the Laser Optics Housing Unit............... 3-43

3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR........................................................3-443.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD ..............................3-453.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS ........................3-45

3.8 PCU AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...........................................................3-463.9 PAPER FEED..........................................................................................3-47

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS .......................... 3-47Tray 1 and Tray 2 ...............................................................................3-47By-pass Tray.......................................................................................3-47

3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD ...........................................3-493.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR...............................................3-503.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT .......................................................................3-503.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS.....................3-513.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES............................................................. 3-513.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH.............................................................. 3-523.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .......................................................................3-523.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR...................................................................3-53

3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT .....................................3-543.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT.........................................................................3-543.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT............................................3-55

3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER ...........................3-563.10.4 TRANSFER BELT ........................................................................3-58

When you reinstall the transfer belt ....................................................3-593.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR...............................................3-60

3.11 ID SENSORS ........................................................................................3-613.12 FUSING.................................................................................................3-62

3.12.1 FUSING UNIT............................................................................... 3-623.12.2 UPPER COVER............................................................................ 3-633.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR............ 3-643.12.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR AND FUSE.......................3-65

Reassembling .....................................................................................3-653.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP ....3-663.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT.....................................................................3-673.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER...................................... 3-68

Reassembling .....................................................................................3-683.12.8 UPPER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS........... 3-693.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS..........3-703.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER ....................3-713.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER.................................................................3-72

Reassembling .....................................................................................3-723.12.12 DRIVE GEAR .............................................................................3-72

3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN.....................................................................3-733.12.14 PAPER EXIT ..............................................................................3-74



SM v B202/B178/B180

3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..............................................................3-753.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY ............. 3-753.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C,

B OUT OF THE WAY ...................................................................3-76

3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU ...................................................3-763.13.4 HDD..............................................................................................3-78When reassembling the HDD .............................................................3-78

3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE.....................................3-79NVRAM on the BCU ...........................................................................3-79NVRAM on the Controller ...................................................................3-80

3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B .......3-813.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT .......................................................3-813.13.8 PSU ..............................................................................................3-823.13.9 DRIVER BOARD ..........................................................................3-82

3.14 DRIVE UNIT ..........................................................................................3-83

3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH ...........................................................3-833.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES ......................................................3-833.14.3 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR - CMY ................................................. 3-843.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K .... 3-863.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K...........................................3-87

3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT .........................................................................3-88M Toner Supply Unit ...........................................................................3-88C and Y Toner Supply Units ...............................................................3-92K Toner Supply Unit............................................................................3-93

TROUBLESHOOTING

4. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................. 4-1

4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS .........................................4-14.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT .........................................4-14.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT...............................4-34.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT .......................................4-4

4.2 SCANNER TEST MODE...........................................................................4-84.2.1 VPU TEST MODE ............................................................................4-8

SP4-907-1 VPU Test Pattern: R ...........................................................4-8SP4-907-2 VPU Test Pattern: G ...........................................................4-8

SP4-907-3 VPU Test Pattern: B ...........................................................4-84.2.2 IPU TEST MODE..............................................................................4-8

SP4-904-1 Register Access..................................................................4-8SP4-904-2 Image Path .........................................................................4-8

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ...............................................................4-104.3.1 SUMMARY .....................................................................................4-10

SC Code Classification .......................................................................4-114.4 SC TABLE ...............................................................................................4-124.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 .............................................................4-51

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-51Work-flow............................................................................................4-51

4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2 .............................................................4-53



B202/B178/B180 vi SM

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY............................................................................4-53Detailed Explanation...........................................................................4-57Copy Image processing ......................................................................4-62

4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT ...............................................................................4-64

Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 mm..................................................4-66How to measure the gap between color lines .....................................4-724.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT .........4-74

Check the color shift level ...................................................................4-74Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment ...................................4-74

4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT.....................................................................4-77Black Over Print Disabled...................................................................4-77Black Over Print Enabled....................................................................4-77

4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ................................................4-784.7.1 SENSORS......................................................................................4-78

4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS .................................................................4-80

4.9 LEDS (BCU) ............................................................................................4-80

SERVICE TABLES

5. SERVICE TABLES....................................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE....................................................................5-15.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........5-1

Entering SP Mode.................................................................................5-1Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................5-1

5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES....................................................................5-2

SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................5-3Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ...........5-4Selecting the Program Number.............................................................5-4Exiting Service Mode ............................................................................5-4Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................5-5

5.1.3 REMARKS........................................................................................5-6Display on the Control Panel Screen ....................................................5-6Others...................................................................................................5-7

5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE............................................................................ 5-85.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE..................................................................5-8

SP1-XXX (Feed) ...................................................................................5-8

SP2-XXX (Drum).................................................................................5-19SP3-XXX (Process) ............................................................................5-35SP4-XXX (Scanner)............................................................................5-45SP5-XXX (Mode) ................................................................................5-55SP6-XXX (Peripherals) .......................................................................5-83SP7-XXX (Data Log)...........................................................................5-86SP8-xxx: Data Log2............................................................................5-97

5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE.................................................................5-134 ARDF Input Check: SP6-007............................................................5-136Table 1: Paper Height Sensor...........................................................5-137Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2) .................................................5-137

Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table) ................................................5-137



SM vii B202/B178/B180

Table 4: Original Size Detection .......................................................5-1385.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE.............................................................5-1395.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997) .........................................................5-143

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE ..................................................................5-144

SP1-XXX (Service Mode) .................................................................5-1445.4 SCANNER SP MODE ........................................................................... 5-146SP1-xxx (System and Others) ..........................................................5-146SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality) .................................................. 5-146

5.5 REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET .................................................. 5-1475.5.1 SOFTWARE RESET ....................................................................5-1475.5.2 SYSTEM SETTINGS AND COPY SETTING RESET...................5-147

System Setting Reset .......................................................................5-147Copier Setting Reset.........................................................................5-148

5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE ...........................................................................5-1495.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE.................................................................. 5-149

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN..................................................................5-1505.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE...............................................................5-1515.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL............. 5-1545.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA .................................................. 5-1555.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................ 5-156

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card ...................................5-156Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM................................................5-156

5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE .........................................5-1575.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS...............................5-160

5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE........................................................................5-1615.7.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-161

5.7.2 MOVE EXEC ................................................................................5-1625.7.3 UNDO EXEC ................................................................................5-163

5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS .................................................. 5-1645.8.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................5-1645.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS ................................................ 5-165

5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG.....................................................................5-1665.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG...........5-1665.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD.....................5-1695.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY ...........................................5-1705.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES .........................................................5-171

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key ............. 5-171SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log .......................... 5-171SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log ....................5-171

5.10 DIP SWITCHES...................................................................................5-172Controller Board................................................................................5-172BCU Board........................................................................................5-172

DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS....................................... 6-1

6.1 OVERVIEW ...............................................................................................6-1

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT...................................................................6-1



B202/B178/B180 viii SM

6.1.2 PAPER PATH...................................................................................6-26.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ...............................................................................6-36.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE......................................................................6-4

Overview...............................................................................................6-4

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS......................................................................6-66.2 PROCESS CONTROL ..............................................................................6-86.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................6-86.2.2 POTENTIAL CONTROL ...................................................................6-8

Overview...............................................................................................6-8Process Control Self Check ..................................................................6-9

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE ....................6-10Step 1: VSG Adjustment .....................................................................6-10Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation .......................................6-11Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection .......................................................6-11Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation ......................................................6-11

Step 5: VD, VB, VL Selection and VREF Adjustment ......................... 6-12Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation .................................6-13Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection...........................................6-13Step 8: VL (LD Power) Selection ........................................................6-13

6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB..........................6-14Highlight Pattern .................................................................................6-14 Adjustment Process............................................................................6-14

6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL .........................................................6-15Overview.............................................................................................6-15Toner Supply Control Modes ..............................................................6-15

6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION............................6-16

Introduction .........................................................................................6-16Toner Near End Detection 1 ...............................................................6-17Toner Near End Detection 2 ...............................................................6-17Toner End Detection...........................................................................6-18Toner End Recovery...........................................................................6-18

6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION ......................................................6-196.3 SCANNING..............................................................................................6-20

6.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-206.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE..........................................................................6-216.3.3 ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION........................................................6-226.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER.................................................. 6-23

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING ............................................................................6-246.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-246.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM ................................................................. 6-25

Signal Processing...............................................................................6-25 A/D Conversion...................................................................................6-25White Level Correction........................................................................6-25Others.................................................................................................6-25Black Level Correction........................................................................6-26 Adjustments ........................................................................................6-26VPU Test Mode ..................................................................................6-26

6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................6-27Shading Correction .............................................................................6-27



SM ix B202/B178/B180

Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction ..........................................6-28Scan Line Correction ..........................................................................6-28Image Separation................................................................................6-28 ACS (Auto Color Select) .....................................................................6-29

Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction) .....................6-30Filtering...............................................................................................6-31 ADS (Auto Image Density Selection) .................................................. 6-31Color Conversion................................................................................6-32Main Scan Magnification.....................................................................6-33Printer Gamma Correction..................................................................6-34Error Diffusion.....................................................................................6-36IPU Board Test ...................................................................................6-36

6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH................................................................................6-37Copier Application...............................................................................6-37Printer Application...............................................................................6-37

Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits) ........................................................6-37Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)..........................................6-37

6.6 LASER EXPOSURE................................................................................6-386.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-386.6.2 OPTICAL PATH..............................................................................6-396.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR ........................................ 6-40

Overview.............................................................................................6-40Main Scan Start Detection ..................................................................6-40Clock Frequency Adjustment ..............................................................6-40

6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING ..................................................................6-41Dual Beam Mechanism.......................................................................6-41

Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism...............................................6-41Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position ..........................................6-42

6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH.....................................................................6-43Front and Upper Left Cover Switch.....................................................6-43Error Messages ..................................................................................6-44

6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..............................6-45Overview.............................................................................................6-45Summary of Each Adjustment ............................................................6-46 Adjustment Conditions........................................................................6-47Main Scan Skew Adjustment ..............................................................6-48

6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES ...............6-486.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT ...................................................................6-49

6.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................6-496.7.2 DRIVE.............................................................................................6-506.7.3 DRUM GEAR POSITION SENSORS .............................................6-51

Mechanism .........................................................................................6-51Initialization Process and SC Codes...................................................6-52

6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING .............................................6-536.7.5 DRUM CLEANING..........................................................................6-546.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION .....................................................6-55

Waste Toner Path...............................................................................6-55

Waste Toner Vibrator..........................................................................6-566.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION...............................6-57





SM xi B202/B178/B180

6.12 FUSING.................................................................................................6-906.12.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-906.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE...................................................................6-91

Belt and Rollers ..................................................................................6-91

Fusing Clutch......................................................................................6-916.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL..........................................6-92Fusing Temperatures..........................................................................6-92Temperature Corrections ....................................................................6-93Overheat Protection............................................................................6-93

6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES ...........................................................6-94Overview.............................................................................................6-94Panel Off Mode...................................................................................6-95 Auto Off Mode.....................................................................................6-96

6.13 PAPER EXIT .........................................................................................6-976.13.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-97

6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION ..............................................6-986.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS......................................................................... 6-99

6.14.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................6-996.14.2 HARD DISK ................................................................................6-101

Overview...........................................................................................6-101Data Transfer....................................................................................6-101

6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING ..................................................... 6-102RPCS Driver .....................................................................................6-102PCL5e/PCL6c Driver.........................................................................6-102PS3 Driver ........................................................................................6-103CMS (Color Management System) ................................................... 6-103

Gray Correction ................................................................................6-103BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)..........................6-103Gamma Correction............................................................................6-103Toner Limitation ................................................................................6-104Dither Processing and ROP/RIP.......................................................6-104

6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS .....................................................6-105Sample Print .....................................................................................6-105Locked Print......................................................................................6-105

6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING.........................................................................6-106Related SP Modes............................................................................6-106Paper Source Selection ....................................................................6-107 Auto Continue ...................................................................................6-108Paper Output Tray ............................................................................6-109Stapling.............................................................................................6-109Punching...........................................................................................6-110

6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)...................................................6-1116.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735) ....................................6-112

6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY ...........................................................6-112Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten ...............................6-112Overwrite timing................................................................................6-112





SM xiii B202/B178/B180

BOOKLET FINISHER B602

SEE SECTION B602 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS

FAX OPTION TYPE 3245 B712SEE SECTION B712 FOR DETAILED TABLE OF CONTENTS





IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY

1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.

2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.

3. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers offor open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrifiedor mechanically driven components.

4. The copier drives some of its components when it completes the warm-upperiod. Be careful to keep hands away from the mechanical and electricalcomponents as the copier starts operation.

5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot whilethe copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components withyour bare hands.

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes byaccident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Immediately wash eyes withplenty of water. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

The copier and its peripherals must be serviced by a customer servicerepresentative who has completed the training course on those models.

CAUTION

1. The NVRAM module installed on the controller has a lithium battery whichcan explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the NVRAM only with an

identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire NVRAM.Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used NVRAM must be handled inaccordance with local regulations.

2. The optional fax and memory expansion units contain lithium batteries, whichcan explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace only with the same or anequivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Do not recharge or burnthe batteries. Used batteries must be handled in accordance with localregulations.



SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate toner bottles or used toner. Toner dust may ignite suddenly

when exposed to an open flame.2. Dispose of used toner, the maintenance unit which includes developer or the

organic photoconductor in accordance with local regulations. (These arenon-toxic supplies.)

3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.

4. When keeping used lithium batteries in order to dispose of them later, do notput more than 100 batteries per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or notsealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.

LASER SAFETY

The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) prohibits the repair oflaser-based optical units in the field. The optical housing unit can only be repairedin a factory or at a location with the requisite equipment. The laser subsystem isreplaceable in the field by a qualified Customer Engineer. The laser chassis is notrepairable in the field. Customer engineers are therefore directed to return allchassis and laser subsystems to the factory or service depot when replacement ofthe optical subsystem is required.

WARNING Use of controls, or adjustment, or performance of procedures other thanthose specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

WARNING

WARNING: Turn off the main switch before attempting any of theprocedures in the Laser Optics Housing Unit section. Laserbeams can seriously damage your eyes.

CAUTION MARKING:

CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN

AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM

LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3B

WENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET

NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN

CAUTION-

VORSICHT-

>PS<

CAUTION

VORSICHTCLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN





CAUTION-

VORSICHT-

CAUTION

VORSICHT

>PS<



Trademarks

Microsoft®, Windows®, and MS-DOS® are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation in the United States and /or other countries.

PostScript® is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.

PCL® is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

Ethernet® is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.

PowerPC® is a registered trademark of International Business MachinesCorporation.

Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and may betrademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights involvedwith those marks.

Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols.

Symbol What it means

Refer to section number

See Core Tech Manual for details

Screw

Connector E-ring

Clip ring

Long Edge Feed (LEF)Short Edge Feed (SEF)





INSTALLATION

B712 FAX OPTION TYPE 3245


TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED B598

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600

TROUBLESHOOTING

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599


PUNCH KIT B377

SERVICE TABLES


SPECIFICATIONS

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

T A B

P O S I T I O N

2

T A B

P

O S I T I O N

1

T A

B

P O S I T

I O N

3

T A B

P O S I T I O N

4

T A B

P O S I T I O N

6

T A B

P O S I T I O N

5

T A B

P O

S I T I O N

8

T A B

P O S I T I O N

7





INSTALLATION





INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

SM 1-1 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1. INSTALLATION

1.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1.1.1 ENVIRONMENT

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH

3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)

4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more

5. Do not exposed the machine to the following:1) Cool air from an air conditioner2) Heat from a heater

6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.

7. Install the machine at locations lower than 2,500 m (8,200 ft.) above sea level.

8. Install the machine on a strong, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no

more than 5 mm.)

9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.

1.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")

B178I901.WMF

Ambient Humidity (%RH)

80%

70%

54%

30%

10°C 15°C 30°C 32°C

15%

Recommended conditions:

15 to 25°C30 to 70 %RH




B202/B178/B180 1-2 SM

1.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENT

Install the machine near the power source, with the clearance as shown.

A: Over 100 mm (3.9")B: Over 100 mm (3.9")C: Over 550 mm (22")D: Over 75 mm (3.0")

1.1.4 POWER REQUIREMENTS

CAUTION

1. Insert the plug firmly in the outlet.2. Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.

3. Ground the machine.

1. Input voltage level: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 10 A220 V ~ 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 6 A

2. Permissible voltage fluctuation: ±10 %

3. Do not put things on the power cord.

B178I902.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

SM 1-3 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.2 OPTIONAL UNIT COMBINATIONS

1.2.1 MACHINE OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks1 1-tray paper feed unit

2 2-tray paper feed unit

3 Large capacity tray

One from the three

4 Platen cover

5 ARDFOne from the two

6 Multi-bin output tray One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

7 Two-tray finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

8 Punch kit (3 types) No. 7 required; One of the three types

9 Booklet finisher One from No. 6, No. 7, and No. 9

10 Punch unit (4 types) No. 9 required; One of the four types

11 Scanner accessibility option

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)

1.2.2 CONTROLLER OPTIONS

No. Options Remarks

12 IEEE 1394

13 IEEE 802.11b

14 IEEE 128415 Bluetooth

One from the four

16 PostScript 3

17 File Format Converter

18 Data overwrite security unit

Italic: Child options (Child options require a parent option.)



COPIER

B202/B178/B180 1-4 SM

1.3 COPIER

1.3.1 POWER SOCKETS FOR PERIPHERALS

CAUTION Rating voltage for peripherals.

Make sure to plug the cables into the correct sockets.

B178I903.WMF

1. ARDF

Rating voltage outputconnector for accessoryMax. DC24V

2. Duplex unit


3. Finisher








MACHINE INSTALLATION

SM 1-7 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n Installation Procedure

CAUTION

Remove the tape from the development units (see step 2) before you turn

the main switch on. The development units can be severely damaged if youdo not remove the tape.

Put the copier on the paper tray unit or the LCT first if you will install an optionalpaper tray unit or the optional LCT at the same time. Then install the copier andother options.

NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after you install the machine. You may needthem in the future if you transport the machine to another location.

1. Remove the tape and padding on the copier.

2. Remove the pin [A].NOTE: Keep the pin. You may need it if you want to transport the machine

( 1.4.3).

3. Remove all tapes from the four development units.

4. Turn the transfer belt release lever clockwise.

B178I502.WMFB178I501.WMF

[A]




B202/B178/B180 1-8 SM

5. Shake the toner cartridge five or sixtimes.

6. Install the toner cartridges to the copier.

7. Check that the hooks [A] hold thecartridge correctly.

8. Install the external tray [B].

9. Attach the cloth holder [C] to the left side of thescanner unit.

10. Put the contract glass cleaning cloth [D] in theholder.

B178I506.WMF

B178I507.WMF

B178I508.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]




SM 1-9 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n

11. Attach the duplex inverter guide [A].

12. Attach the guide cover [B].

13. Attach the correct model name decal [C] to thefront cover with the cover [D].

14. Pull each paper tray out. Then adjust the sideguides and end guide to match the paper size.

NOTE: To move the side guides, first pull outthe tray fully. Then push down thegreen lock at the rear inside the tray.

15. Attach the correct paper tray number decals[E] to the paper trays.

NOTE: Paper tray number decals are alsoused for the optional paper tray or theoptional LCT. Keep these decals foruse with these optional units.

16. Install the optional ARDF or the optional platencover.

17. Plug in the machine.

18. Make sure that the platen or ARDFis closed and the main power isturned off.

19. Check if the “ –” mark on the breakerswitch [F] appears. It means thebreaker switch has been turned on.

20. Press the test button [G] of thebreaker. This turns off the breakerswitch (switching from right to thecenter position).

B178I509.WMF

B178I510.WMF

B178R016.WMF

[C]

[E]

[B]

[A]

[D]

[F]

[G]




B202/B178/B180 1-10 SM

IMPORTANT

If the breaker switch does not move to the center position:

• Make sure that the power cord of the copier is securely connected to the

power supply.• Push the test button again. If the breaker switch does not move to the center

position, replace the breaker switch.

21. Check that the breaker switch is turned off and “” mark appears on the switch.

22. Turn the breaker switch to the right position first. Then turn it to the “On”position (left position).

23. Turn the main power switch on. The machine automatically starts the

initialization procedure. The Start button LED () turns green when thisprocedure has finished.NOTE: The machine makes a sound that is not the same as other machines in

the field. This is normal and there are no defective parts in the machine.This sound is made by the drum drive motor.

24. Make copies of image samples (text, photo, and text/photo modes).

25. Do the Automatic Color Calibration process (ACC) as follows:

1) Print the ACC test pattern (UP mode > Maintenance > ACC > Start).2) Put the printout on the exposure glass.3) Put 10 sheets of white paper on top of the test chart.4) Close the ARDF or the platen cover.5) Press “Start Scanning” on the LCD panel. The machine starts the ACC.

26. Check that the sample image has been copied normally.

27. Check that the circuit breaker works correctly.




SM 1-11 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n Settings Relevant to Contract

Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer hasmade a service contract.

NOTE: You must select one of the counter methods (developments/prints) inaccordance with the contract ( SP5-045-001).

Item SP No. Function Default

Countingmethod

SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method used inmeter charge mode is based ondevelopments or prints.

NOTE: You can set this one time only.You cannot change the settingafter you have set it for the firsttime.

“0”:Developments

/11" x 17"

doublecounting

SP5-104-001

(Special ServiceProgram)

Specifies whether the counter is

doubled for 11" x 17" paper.NOTE: When you change this setting,

contact your supervisor.

“No”: Single

counting

Service Tel.No. Setting

SP5-812-001through 004

Programs the service station faxnumber.

The number is printed on the counterlist when the meter charge mode isselected. This lets the user fax thecounter data to the service station.




B202/B178/B180 1-12 SM

1.4.2 MOVING MACHINE

CAUTION

Make sure that the transfer belt is in its correct position before moving the

machine, otherwise the transfer belt and the black PCU may be damaged.

This section shows you how to manually move the machine from one floor toanother floor. See section 1.4.3, “Transporting Machine” if you will use sometransport equipment.

The machine stands make it difficult to move the copier with an optional paper trayor LCT installed. You can remove them as necessary.

1. Check that the transfer belt is in itscorrect position.

2. Remove all trays from the optionalpaper feed unit or LCT.

3. Remove the front stand [A]

( x 2).

4. Remove the rear stand [B]

( x 2, 2 brackets).

CAUTION: Reinstall the machine stands after you move the machine. Themachine can fall over when you pull out a paper tray or when you workon the machine if you do not do this.

B178I511.WMF

B178I512.WMF

[A]

[B]






B202/B178/B180 1-14 SM

9. Do one of the following:

Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.

Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.

NOTE: 1) Make sure you do the Auto Adjust (User Program mode) or forced LinePosition Adjustment (SP5-993-002 after you move the machine. Thisoptimizes color line alignment.

2) Make sure that the side fences in the trays are correctly positioned toprevent color shifting.



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-15 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5 OPTIONAL UNIT

1.5.1 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Accessory CheckCheck the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty

1. Securing Bracket ................................................................1

2. Right Stand Bracket ............................................................1

3. Left Stand Bracket ..............................................................1

4. Front Stand..........................................................................1

5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1

6. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................4

7. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

B601I929.WMF

1 2 3 6 7

54



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-16 SM

Installation Procedure

CAUTION

1. Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord beforeyou start the installation procedure.

2. You need two or more persons to lift the copier. The copier is highlyunstable when lifted by one person, and may cause human injury orproperty damage.

3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle andgrips can be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper trayunit.

2. Remove the paper tray. Thenremove all tape and padding.

3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

B601I919.WMF

B601I103.WMF

[A]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-17 B202/B178/B180/


4. Install the rear stand [A].

5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]

( x 1 for each).

6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] ofthe copier.

7. Lift the copier and install it on thepaper feed unit [F].

B601I921.WMF

B601I007.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]





OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-19 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.2 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.

Description Q’ty




4. Front Stand..........................................................................1

5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1

6. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................47. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

B598I929.WMF

1 2 3 6 7

54



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-20 SM


CAUTION



3. Do not lift the copier with the paper feed unit installed. The handle andgrips may be damaged.

1. Remove all tape on the paper trayunit.

2. Remove the paper trays. Thenremove all tape and padding.

3. Install the front stand [A] ( x 2).

B598I002.WMF

B598I103.WMF[A]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-21 B202/B178/B180/


4. Install the rear stand [A].

5. Attach the stand brackets [B][C]

( x 1 for each).

6. Grasp the handle [D] and grips [E] ofthe copier.

7. Lift the copier and install it on thepaper feed unit [F].

B598I901.WMF

B598I005.WMF

[D]

[F]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-22 SM

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].

10. Install tray 2.

11. Open the right cover.

12. Install the link bracket [B](1 knob screw).

13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B598I904.WMF

B598I903.WMF

[A]

[B]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-23 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.3 LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty




4. Front Stand..........................................................................1

5. Rear Stand ..........................................................................1

6. Screw M 4 x 10....................................................................47. Stepped Screw ....................................................................2

B600I929.WMF

1 2 3 6 7

54



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-24 SM


CAUTION



3. Do not lift the copier with the LCT installed. The handle and grips may bedamaged.

1. Remove all tape.

2. Press the stopper [A]. Then pull outthe tray [B].

3. Install the front stand [C] ( x 2).

B600I002.WMF

B600I004.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]





OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-26 SM

8. Remove tray 2 of the copier.

9. Fasten the knob screw [A].

10. Install tray 2.

11. Open the right cover.

12. Install the link bracket [B](1 knob screw).

13. Turn on the main switch.

14. Check the machine's operation and copy quality.

B600I904.WMF

B600I918.WMF

[A]

[B]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-27 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.4 AUTO REVERSE DOCUMENT FEEDER

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Left stopper bracket.............................................................1

2. Right stopper bracket...........................................................1

3. Knob screw..........................................................................4

4. Stud screw...........................................................................2

5. Screw M4 x 10.....................................................................2

6. Decal ...................................................................................1

7. Decal ...................................................................................1


CAUTION

Turn off the main switch of the copier and unplug the power cord beforeyou start the installation procedure.

1. Unpack the ARDF, and then remove alltapes and shipping retainers.

B714I501.WMF

B714I502.WMF

1 2 3 4 5

6 7



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-28 SM

2. Attach and tighten [A] ( x 2 stud).

3. Mount the ADF. To do this, align the screw keyholes [B] of the ARDF support

plate over the stud screws, and then slide the ARDF toward the front of themachine.

NOTE: To avoid damaging the ADF, hold it as shown above.

4. Secure the ARDF [C] ( x 2).

5. Attach the left [D] and right [E] stopper brackets ( x 2 knob).

6. Connect the I/F cable [F] ( x 1) to the main machine.

B714I503.WMF

B714I504.WMF

[A]

[B]

[F]

[D] [E]

[C]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-29 B202/B178/B180/


7. Peel off the platen sheet [A] and place iton the exposure glass [B].

8. Align the rear left corner (of the platensheet) flush against the corner [C] onthe exposure glass.

9. Close the ARDF.

10. Open the ARDF and check that theplaten sheet is correctly attached.

11. Attach the decal [D]. Select the mostsuitable language for the installedmachine. Attach the decal to the cover.The arrow on the decal must align withthe groove [E] on the left scale asshown.

12. Attach the decal [F] to the top cover asshown. Select the most suitable

language for the installed machine.13. Turn the main switch on, and check

the operation.

14. Make a full size copy, and check thatthe registrations (side-to-side andleading edge) and image skew arecorrect. If they are not, adjust theregistrations and image skew with theSP mode.

B714I505.WMF

B714I506.WMF

B714I507.WMF

B714I508.WMF

[F]

[D]

[A]

[E]

[B]

[C]







OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-32 SM

6. Adjust the position of the connection

bracket [A] as necessary ( x 2):

•Upper position for the copier with thetwo-tray paper feed unit or LCT.

• Lower position for the copier with theone-tray paper feed unit.

7. Connect the finisher [B] with the copier(Long screw x 1).

8. Connect the finisher cable to theconnector of the copier.

9. Install the two trays [C] (Short screw x 1for each).

10. Extend the external tray of the copier(see step 2).

11. Turn the main switch on and check theoperation.

B599I908.WMF

B599I902.WMF

B599I910.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]







OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-35 B202/B178/B180/


4. Remove the hopper cover [A] ( x 2).

5. Install the sensor bracket [B] (stepped x 1).

6. Install the spring [C].

7. Install the 2 mm spacer [D].

8. Install the punch unit [E] ( x 2, stepped x 1).

B178I518.WMF

B178I519.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-36 SM

9. Connect the harnesses [A] and clamp them as shown.

10. Slide in the hopper [B].

11. Fasten the two 1-mm spacers [C] to the rear frame for future adjustment.NOTE: The spacers are used to adjust the horizontal positioning of the punch

holes.

12. Reassemble the finisher. Then check the punch operation.

B178I520.WMF

B178I521.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-37 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Accessories Check List


Description Q’ty

1. Front Tray Holder.................................................................1

2. Rear Tray Holder .................................................................1

3. Tray .....................................................................................2

4. Screw (M3 x 14)...................................................................4

5. Discharge Brush ..................................................................2

6. Ground Plate for Left Cover.................................................17. Ground Plate for Upper Exit.................................................1

8. Ground Plate for Lower Exit.................................................1

B178I522.WMF

1 2 3 43

5 6 7 8



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-38 SM

Installing the Multi-Bin Output Tray

NOTE: Install the duplex unit before you install the multi-bin output tray.

1. Open the left cover [A] of the duplexunit.

2. Install the ground plate [B] behind themagnet.

3. Install the ground plate [C] on the rearof the left cover.

4. Attach the ground plate to the topcover. Then align the bottom edges of

the plate [D] and cover [E].

5. Attach the discharge brushes [F][G] tothe upper edges of the paper exits.Make sure that the ends of the brushes[H][I] touch the ground plates [C][D]respectively.NOTE: Make sure the brushes do not

stop paper at the exits.

6. Install the front [A] and rear [B] tray

holders on the top cover ( x 2 foreach).

7. Install the upper [C] and lower [D]trays.

8. Turn the main switch on. Then selectthe SP mode menu, SP6–901–1. Thenchange the multi-bin output traysetting.

NOTE: The multi-bin output tray is notautomatically recognized by theprinter mainframe. You cannotuse the multi-bin output tray until you have changed this SP mode setting.

B178I523.WMF

B178I524.WMF

B178I525.WMF

[B][C]

[D][E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I][A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-39 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.8 BOOKLET FINISHER

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Regular tray.........................................................................1

2. Rail holder ...........................................................................1

3. Magnet catch–rear...............................................................1

4. Magnet catch–front..............................................................1

5. Duplex-unit support .............................................................1

6. Rail joint...............................................................................1

7. Screw M4 x 12.....................................................................6

8. Screw M4 x 6.......................................................................8

9. Screw M3 x 14.....................................................................4

10. Rail ....................................................................................1

11. Stapler unit ........................................................................1

12. Staple cartridge .................................................................1

13. Pad ....................................................................................3

NOTE: Make sure that you keep the pads. The pads are white and made ofStyrofoam.

B602I912.WMF

10

1

5

2 3 4

6

7

9

8 11

1213



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-40 SM

Adjusting the Height

1. Check the optional paper tray type:

• Go to step 2 if the optional two-tray paper feed unit or the optional LCT isinstalled.

• Go to “Main Body.” if either of them is not installed.

2. Tape the pads [A] to the right-hand side of the machine.

3. Lay the machine on its right-hand side.

4. Remove the adjuster plates [B] ( x 2).

5. Change the height [C].

6. Reinstall the adjuster plates [D] ( x 2).

7. Take the machine out of the box and stand it up.

8. Check that the height is correct. Then remove the pads.

B602I901.WMF

B602I008.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-41 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n Main Body

1. Remove all tape and padding.

2. Remove the screw cover [A].3. Install the rail joint [B] ( x 4).

4. Reinstall the screw cover.

5. Install the regular tray [C] ( x 4).

B602I001.WMF

B602I902.WMF

B602I903.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-42 SM

6. Install the magnet catches [A][B]

( x 2 for each).

7. Install the duplex-unit support [C] ( x 3).

8. Set the rail [D] through the rail holder [E].

9. Install the rail holder (with the rail) to the

copier ( x 2).

B602I004.WMF

B602I904.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-43 B202/B178/B180/


10. Connect the booklet finisher unit to

the copier ( x 1).

11. Install the stapler unit [A].

12. Turn the knob [B] clockwise until thestaple-cartridge holder [C] goes to thefront-most position.

13. Install the staple cartridge [D] firmly tothe staple-cartridge holder.

14. Turn on the main switch and check the operation.

B602I905.WMF

B602I907.WMF

B602I908.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-44 SM

Optional Punch Unit


Description Q’ty

1. Punch unit............................................................................1

2. Decal ...................................................................................1

3. Screw M4 x 6 (with the base) ..............................................1

4. Cable ...................................................................................2

1. Remove the front lower cover

[A] ( x 2).

B602I512.WMF

B602I009.WMF

2

4

1

[A]

3



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-45 B202/B178/B180/


2. Remove the joint guard [A] ( x 2).

3. Open the front door [B].

4. Release the stopper and remove the knob [C].

5. Remove the front cover [D] ( x 2).

6. Remove the rear cover [E] ( x 3).NOTE: Do not damage the mylar when you remove the screw.

7. Remove the right top cover with the paper entrance cover [F] ( x 4).

B602I513.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A][D]

[E]

[F]





OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-47 B202/B178/B180/


11. Install the cable to the connectors as follows:

• J1003 (punch unit) [A] to CN12 (booklet finisher unit) [D]

• J1004 (punch unit) [B] to CN14 (booklet finisher unit) [C]

12. Fasten the cable with the clamps.

13. Reassemble the booklet finisher unit.NOTE: Check that the side guide and the front cover correctly join with each

other [E].

14. Attach the decal [F].

15. Turn on the main switch. Then check the punch operation.

B602I517.WMF

B602I911.WMF

B602I518.WMF

[A][B]

[D][C]

[E]

[F]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-48 SM

1.5.9 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION


Machine Level

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5°

Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")/ 5°

Location Requirement

Put the scanner on the right side of the mainframe as shown.

NOTE: 1) Make sure that the scanner is placed 660~724 mm above the floor.2) Make sure that the scanner cable does not touch the floor.3) Make sure to tell the user not to let the scanner cable get caught in

things such as a wheelchair.

Requirement Conditions

Attach the platen cover option to the mainframe to cover the exposure glass.

Install the scanner on a solid base. Do not install the scanner in areas where theunit can fall down when the ADF cover is opened.

Make sure you install the unit in areas that let the user get easy access to operatethe unit. Ask the customer what their requirements are before you install the unit.

G570I311.WMF





OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-50 SM

INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

NOTE: This installation procedure uses the following symbols.

: Screws

CAUTION

Unplug the copier power cord before you do the following procedure.

1. Remove the all tapes.

2. Remove rear cover [A] ( x 5).

3. Remove the ground cable [B]

( x 2).

4. Remove the duct [C]

( x 2, x 1).

G570I301.WMF

G570I302.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-51 B202/B178/B180/


5. Remove the DF connector cable [A] ( x 2, x1).NOTE: Keep these screws. You will use these screws later.

6. Remove the connector bracket [B].

7. Disconnect the connector [C] of the IPU harness and release the clamp [D].

8. Remove the core [E] from the I/F cable.NOTE: Keep this core. You will use this core later.

9. Disconnect the I/F cable [F] from the IPU ( x 2). Then put it behind the groundbracket [G] and to the left side.

10. Disconnect the harness [H] from the scanner unit to the scanner PSU ( x 3,

x 1). Then put this harness inside the scanner frame.

11. Connect the connector of the DF connector cable [I] to the scanner PSU.

12. Bind the IPU harness [J] and DF connector cable [I] with the clamp [K]. Keepthese in the machine.

13. Attach the connector bracket [L] to the scanner PSU to keep this bracket.

G570I303.WMF

G570I304.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[J]

[I]

[K]

[L]

[H]





OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-53 B202/B178/B180/


20. Put the I/F cable [A] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the core [B]to the I/F cable.

21. Connect the I/F cable connector [C]. Then attach the cable holder [D] ( x 1)

and the ground [E] ( x 1) to the frame.

22. Put the IPU cable [F] through the opening on the frame. Then attach the twocores [G] to the IPU cable.

23. Connect the IPU cable connector [H] and attach the ground [I] ( x 1).

G570I307.WMF

G570I308.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][E]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-54 SM

24. Connect the PSU cable connector [A] and attach the ground [B](ground screw x 1).

25. Attach the scanner bracket [C] to the supports ( x 3) and the ground [D] ( x1).

26. Install the duct ( x 2, x 1) and ground cable ( x 2).

27. Cut the panel [E] along the cutoutline.NOTE: File the edge of the cutout

line.

28. Make a hole [F] for a screw in therear cover with a screwdriver.

29. Attach the rear cover(M3x8 screw x 6).

G570I309.WMF

G570I310.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-55 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.10 KEY COUNTER HOLDER

1. Remove the rear cover [A] ( x 5).

2. Cut a 15-mm (0.6") piece [B] off thetape.NOTE: You do not need the

smaller piece for theinstallation.

3. Remove the scanner right

cover [C] ( x 2).

4. Clean the area [D] withalcohol.

5. Attach the tape.

B178I542.WMF

B178I543.WMF

B178I544.WMF

[B]15 mm(0.6")

[A]

[C]

[D]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-56 SM

The view from the back The view from the top

6. Attach the key counter holder as follows.

• The bottom end of the key counter holder [B] is 62 mm (2.4") below thebottom end of the scanner right cover [A].

• The bracket on the back of the key counter holder [C] is aligned to the rearend of the scanner cover [D].

7. The CN227 connector on the BCU has 8 pins. Pins # 1 to 4 are used for theKey Counter, pins # 5 and 6 are used for the mechanical counter and pins # 7and 8 are not used for US models. The intermediate harness [E] for the key

counter is connected to CN 227. The connector for this harness is locatedinside the rear cover by the lower rear. (As shown in the illustration below).Please connect the harness for Key Counter to this connector.

8. Reassemble the covers.

9. Set SP 5-113-1 to 8.

B178I546.WMFB178I545.WMF

B178I547.WMF

[A]

[B]

62 mm(2.4")

[C]

[D]

⇒

[E]

⇒

Rev. 09/2005



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-57 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.5.11 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER


2. Remove the scanner right cover [B]

( x 2).

3. Remove the rear scale [C] ( x 3).

4. Remove the exposure glass [D] with

the left scale [E] ( x 2).

NOTE: You do not have to remove the ARDF exposure glass. Put theglass marker [F] at the rear-leftcorner when you reattach it ifthe glass is removed.

B178I542.WMF

B178I548.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E][B]

[F]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-58 SM

5. Install the anti-condensation heater [A]in the rear-left corner of the scanner

unit (

x 2).6. Pass the cable through the opening

[B] in the rear.

7. Attach the clamps [C] to the rearframe.

8. Fasten the cable with the clamps.

9. Connect the connector [D].

10. Reassemble the copier.

B178I549.WMF

B178I550.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-59 B202/B178/B180/


CAUTION

1. Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following

procedure.2. After you cut the lower-most rectangular piece off the right-bottom

corner of the rear cover, file the edges to smooth them. Rough edgescan hurt the user. The user pushes the tray-heater switch through thisrectangular opening.


2. Cut the lower-most rectangular piece[B] off the right-bottom corner (viewed

from the rear) of the rear cover.

3. File the edges to smooth them.

4. Remove tray 1 and tray 2.

5. Swing out the high voltage supply

unit [C] ( x 2).

6. Release the cable [D] for the anti-

condensation heater ( x 2).

B178I565.WMF

B178I566.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



OPTIONAL UNIT

B202/B178/B180 1-60 SM

7. Align the caution decal [A] with themark [B] on the front of the heatercover [C]. Then attach the caution

decal at this location.

8. Attach the anti-condensation heater [D]

( x 1).

9. Connect the anti-condensation heaterconnector [E] to the connector [F] fromthe sub PSU.

10. Reassemble the copier. Then put tray 1and tray 2 back into the machine.

11. Attach the anti-condensation heater decal [G].

12. Attach the “On/Stand by” decal on the left-hand side of the main switch (not the trayheater switch).

B178I555.WMF

B178I567.WMF

B178I552.WMF

On

Stand by

B178I557.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-61 B202/B178/B180/


(SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION)

1. Remove the rear scale [A] ( x 3).

2. Remove the exposure glass [B] with

the left scale [C] ( x 2).

3. Remove the rear cover [D] ( x 3).

4. Remove the right cover [E] ( x 3).

5. Remove the left cover [F] ( x 3).

6. Remove the rear frame [G]

( x 12, x 2).

7. Install the anti-condensation heater [H]in the rear-left corner of the scanner

unit ( x 2).

8. Pass the cable through the opening [I]in the rear rail.

G570I351.WMF

G570I352.WMF

G570I353.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]





OPTIONAL UNIT

SM 1-63 B202/B178/B180/


17. Remove the scanner bracket [A] of the scanner accessibility option ( x 4).NOTE: If the scanner accessibility option has not been installed, do the

procedures for installing the scanner accessibility option ( 1.5.9)before this step.

18. Remove the plate [B] in the scanner.

19. Put the cable [C] from the anti-condensation heater through the opening [D] ofthe scanner bracket.

20. Connect the connector [E] of the cable to the connector [F] of the copier.

21. Attach the ground cable [G] ( x 1).

22. Attach the scanner bracket [A] ( x 4).

23. Attach the rear cover ( x 6).

G570I356.WMF[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-64 SM

1.6 PRINTER OPTIONS

1.6.1 OVERVIEW

This machine has I/F card slots and SD card slots for optional I/F connections andapplications.

I/F Card Slot

• Slot A is used for the standard Ethernet and USB ver.2.0 only.

• Slot B is used for the File Format Converter only.

• Slot C is used for one of the optional I/F connections: (IEEE1394, IEEE1284,IEEE802.11 (Wireless LAN) or Bluetooth).

SD Card Slot

• Slot 1 is used for the standard printer/scanner application only.

• Slot 2 is used for one of the optional applications such as postscript 3 or dataoverwrite security.

• Slot 3 is used for service only.

A

B C3

2

1

B178I561.WMF

I/F Card Slot

A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)

B File Format Converter

C Option

SD Card Slot

1 Option

2 Option

3 Service

B178I562.WMF





PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-66 SM

1.6.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER

CAUTION

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following

procedure.

1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot B [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the file format converter board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B178I535.WMF

[A]

[B]



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-67 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.6.4 IEEE 1394 (FIREWIRE)


CAUTION

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the followingprocedure.

You can only install one of the following network interfaces at a time: (IEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN), IEEE1284, IEEE1394 (FireWire), Bluetooth).

1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the FireWire board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B178I536.WMF

[A]

[B]



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-68 SM

UP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interfacesettings for IEEE 1394. These settings take effect every time the machine ispowered on.

1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.

2. On the touch panel, press “System Settings”.

3. Press “Interface Settings”.

4. Press “IEEE1394”.

5. Press following soft keys on the touch panel. Then set up the following settings:

• “IP Address”Set the IP Address and Subnet Mask.

• “IP over 1394”

Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables IP over 1394as the default setting for the printing method.

• “SCSI Print”Enable or disable this setting as required. This setting enables SCSI Print asthe default setting for the printing method.

• “Bi-directional SCSI Print”Switch bi-directional printing on or off for SCSI print.

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 1394

The following SP commands can be set for IEEE 1394.SP No. Name Function

5839 004 Host Name Sets the name of the device used on the network.

Example: RNPXXXXXXXXXX

5839 007 Cycle Master Enables or disables cycle master function of the IEEE1394 standard bus.

5839 008 BCR Mode Sets the BCR (Broadcast Channel Register) setting forthe Auto Node operation for the standard IEEE1394 busfor when IRM is not in use. The following three settingsare available: “Standard,” “IRM Color Copy,” and“Always Effective.”

5839 009 IRM 1394aCheck

Determines whether an IRM check for IEEE 1394a isconducted for the Auto Node when IRM is not used.

5839 010 Unique ID Enables the “Node_Unique_Id” setting for enumerationon the standard IEEE 1394 bus.

5839 011 Logout Determines how successive initiator login requests arehandled during login in for SBP-2.

5839 012 Login Enables or disables exclusive login for SBP-2.

5839 013 Login MAX Sets the limit for the number of logins for SBP-2. Range:1 ~ 62.



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-69 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.6.5 IEEE 1284


CAUTION



1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).

2. Install the interface board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B178I537.WMF

[A]

[B]



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-70 SM

1.6.6 IEEE 802.11B (WIRELESS LAN)


CAUTION



1. Remove the slot cover [A] from I/F Card Slot C ( x 2).

2. Install the wireless LAN board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

B178I538.WMF

[A]

[B]



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-71 B202/B178/B180/


3. If the extended antennas (option) are to be installed, pull off the edge connector

protector [A] and discard it.4. Insert the card [B] into the PCMCIA slot. Make sure the card label faces to the

front of the machine.

5. Use the provided double-sided tape to install the antennas [C] on the left rearcorner of the machine.NOTE: The antennas should be separated by at least 40 ~ 60 mm (1.5~2.5").

Always detach the antennas from the corners of the machine anddisconnect them before you move the machine.

6. Put the antennas through the hole in the cover [F].

7. Connect the antennas to the terminals [D].8. Coil the cables [E]. Then hang them over the antennas as shown.

9. Attach the cover [F] ( x 2).

10. You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.

• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type ofequipment that generates strong magnetic fields.

• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.

B178I539.WMF[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-72 SM

UP Mode Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Then do the procedure below to perform the initial interfacesettings for IEEE 802.11b. These settings take effect every time the machine ispowered on.

NOTE: You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

1. Press the “User Tools/Counter” key.

2. On the touch panel, press “System Settings”.NOTE: The Network I/F (default: Ethernet) must be set for either Ethernet or

wireless LAN.

3. Select “Interface Settings” → “Network” (tab) → “Network I/F Setting”

4. Press “IEEE 802.11b”. Only the wireless LAN options show.

5. Communication Mode. Select either “802.11 Ad hoc”, “Ad hoc” or

“Infrastructure”.

6. SSID Setting. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)

7. Channel. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected.Range: 1 ~ 14 (default: 11)NOTE: The allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different

countries.

8. WEP (Encryption) Setting. The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting isdesigned to protect wireless data transmission. The same WEP key is requiredon the receiving side in order to unlock encoded data. There are 64 bit and 128

bit WEP keys.WEP:

Selects “Active” or “Inactive”. (“Inactive” is default.)

Range of Allowed Settings:

64 bit 10 characters128 bit 26 characters

9. Transmission Speed. Press the Next button to show more settings. Thenselect the transmission speed for the mode: Auto, 11 Mbps, 5.5 Mbps, 2 Mbps,1 Mbps (default: Auto). This setting should match the distance between the

closest machine or access point. This depends on which mode is selected.NOTE: For the Ad Hoc Mode, this is the distance between the machine andthe closest PC in the network. For the Infrastructure Mode, this is thedistance between the machine and the closest access point.

11 Mbps 140 m (153 yd.)5.5 Mbps 200 m (219 yd.)2 Mbps 270 m (295 yd.)1 Mbps 400 m (437 yd.)



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-73 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 10. Press “Return to Default” to initialize the wireless LAN settings.

Press “Yes” to initialize the following settings:

• Transmission mode

• Channel

• Transmission Speed• WEP

• SSID

• WEP Key

SP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11b Wireless LAN

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11b

SP No. Name Function

5840 006 Channel MAX Sets the maximum range of the channel settings for thecountry.

5840 007 Channel MIN Sets the minimum range of the channels settingsallowed for your country.

5840 011 WEP Key Select Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).

UP mode Name Function

SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.

WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.

WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that canbe used for the WEP Key entry.



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-74 SM

1.6.7 BLUETOOTH

CAUTION

Unplug the main machine power cord before you do the following

procedure.


1. Remove the slot cover from I/F Card Slot C [A] ( x 2).

2. Install the Bluetooth board [B] (Knob-screw x 2).

3. Insert the Bluetooth card [C] into the slot in the interface board.

4. Press the antenna [D] to extend it.

5. Attach the antenna cap [E].

B178I540.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-75 B202/B178/B180/

I n s t a l l a t i o n 1.6.8 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

ACCESSORY CHECK


Description Q’ty

1. SD Card..............................................................................1

2. Operating Instructions (CD-ROM) ......................................1

Seal Check and Removal

CAUTION

You must check the box seals to make sure that they were not removedafter the items were sealed in the box at the factory before you do theinstallation.

1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.

• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.

• The surfaces of the tapes must be blank. If you see “VOID” on the tapes, donot install the components in the box.

2. If the surfaces of the tapes do not show “VOID”, remove them from the cornersof the box.

3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this

condition, they cannot be attached to the box again.

B735I901.WMF

B735I903.WMF

[B]

[A]



PRINTER OPTIONS

B202/B178/B180 1-76 SM


CAUTION

The machine must always be turned off and its power cord disconnectedbefore you do this procedure.

NOTE: You must install the data overwrite protection unit in SD Card slot 2.However, the postscript option for this machine is also installed in SD Cardslot 2. You must do the SD Card Appli move procedure first if you have thepostscript option installed and you want to install the data overwriteprotection unit. Move the Data Overwriting Security application (slot 3) tothe SD Card that contains the Printer/ Scanner application (slot 1).( 5.7).

1. If the machine is on, turn OFF the main power switch.

2. Disconnect the network cable, if the NIB is installed.

3. Turn the main power switch ON.

4. Turn the operation switch and mainpower switch OFF.

5. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 2).

6. Turn the SD-card face [B] to therear of the machine. Then push it

slowly into slot 2 until you hear aclick.

7. Connect the network cable, if theNIB option is installed.

8. Turn the main power switch ON.

9. Go into the SP mode and push“EXECUTE” with SP5-878.

10. Exit the SP mode and turn theoperation switch OFF. Then turn the

main power switch OFF.

11. Turn the machine power ON.

12. Go into the User Tools mode, and select System Settings> AdministratorTools> Auto Erase Memory Setting> On.

13. Exit the User Tools mode.

B735I111.WMF

[A]

[B]

⇒

Rev. 11/2005



PRINTER OPTIONS

SM 1-77 B202/B178/B180


14. Check the display and make sure that the overwrite erase icon [C] shows.

15. Make a Sample Copy.

16. Check the overwrite erase icon.

• The icon [C] changes to [D] when job data is stored in the HDD.

• The icon goes back to its usual shape [E] after this function has completed adata overwriting in the HDD.

Remove the Document Server and Scanner key-tops, and replace them with theblank key-tops that are supplied with the kit.

1.6.9 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS

1. Plug in the power cord. Then turn ON the main switch.

2. Enter the printer user mode. Then print the configuration page.

User Tools > Printer Settings > List Test Print > Config. Page

Do SP1-004 – Print Summary if you want to print the same data. All installedoptions show in the “System Reference” column.

CopiesTotalOrigi.

0 1 0

09/09/2003 14:13

B735I904.WMF

B735I905.WMF

⇒

Rev. 11/2005

[C] [D] [E]








SETTINGS

SM 2-1 B202/B178/B180

P r e v e n t i v e

M a i n t e n a n c e

2. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE

2.1 SETTINGS

New Unit Set

You must enable New Unit Set (SP5-999) before you replace these units:

• PCU–K (SP5-999-001)

• PCU–Y (SP5-999-002)

• PCU–M (SP5-999-003)

• PCU–C (SP5-999-004)

• Development Unit–K (SP5-999-005)

• Development Unit–Y (SP5-999-006)

• Development Unit–M (SP5-999-007)

• Development Unit–C (SP5-999-008)

• Fusing Unit (SP5-999-009)

Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):

1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).2. Select a program from SP5-999-001 to 009.3. Select “1. Enable.”4. Select “OK.”5. Quit the SP mode.6. Turn the main switch off.7. Replace the unit.8. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts the initialization for the new unit.

PM Counter Reset

Reset the counter (SP7-804) after you replace these units:• By-pass tray (SP7-804-011)

• Tray 1 (SP7-804-012)

• Tray 2 (SP7-804-013)

• Tray 3 (SP7-804-014)

• Tray 4 (SP7-804-015)

• Transfer unit (SP7-804-017)

• Transfer belt cleaning unit (SP7-804-018)

Do this procedure to enable the New Unit Set program (and to replace a unit):

1. Start the SP mode ( 5.1.1).2. Select a program from SP7-804-011 to 018.3. Select “EXECUTE.”4. Quit the SP mode.



PM TABLES

B202/B178/B180 2-2 SM

2.2 PM TABLES

Chart: A4 (LT)/5%Mode: 3 copies/original (prints/job)

Environment: Normal temperature and humidityYield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.

Symbol key: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricate, I: Inspect

Copier

B178/B180 B202Item

60K 120K 150K EM 52K 104K 130K EMRemarks

Scanner

1st/2nd/3rd mirrors C C Optics cloth

Front and Rear Rails C C Dry cloth

Exposure Glass C C C C Dry cloth; alcohol

ADF Exposure Glass C C C C Dry cloth; alcoholExposure Lamp I I Dry cloth; alcohol

APS Sensor C C Dry cloth

Development

Dev. Unit–K R R 2.1

Dev. Unit–C R R 2.1

Dev. Unit–M R R 2.1

Dev. Unit–Y R R 2.1

PCU R R 2.1

Transfer

Waste Toner Bottle R R

Fusing 2.1

Pressure Roller R R

Fusing Roller R R

Heat Roller R R

Pressure Cleaning Roller R R

Oil Supply Roller R R

Fusing Belt R R

Pick-off Pawl Ass’y R R

Stripper Pawls C C Dry cloth; alcohol

Pressure Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol

Heating Roller Thermistor C C Dry cloth; alcohol

Spurs C C Dry cloth; alcohol

Paper Path

Registration Sensor C C Blower brush

Duplex Unit Inverter Roller C C Damp cloth

Transport Roller C C Damp cloth

Inverter Sensor C C Blower brush

Miscellaneous

Dust Filter R RDistributed withdevelopment unit-K

Breaker I I

Tray

Feed rollers R R

Pick-up Rollers R R

Separation Rollers R R

⇒

⇒

Rev. 09/2005



PM TABLES

SM 2-3 B202/B178/B180

P r e v e n t i v e

M a i n t e n a n c e

ARDF

Item 240K EM Remarks

Pick-up Roller R C Damp cloth; alcohol

Feed Belt R C Damp cloth; alcohol

Separation Roller R C Damp cloth; alcoholSensors C C Blower brush

Platen Sheet Cover C Damp cloth; alcohol (Replace if required.)

White Plate C Dry or damp cloth

Drive Gear L Grease G501

Transport Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Exit Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Inverter Roller C Damp cloth; alcohol

Idle Rollers C Damp cloth; alcohol

NOTE: 240k copies (= 80k originals x 3 copies/original)

One-Tray Paper Feed UnitItem 150K EM Remarks

Feed Roller R Damp cloth

Pick-up Roller R Damp cloth

Separation Roller R Damp cloth

Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit


Feed Rollers R Damp cloth

Pick-up Rollers R Damp cloth

Separation Rollers R Damp cloth

LCT


Relay Roller C Damp cloth

Bottom Plate Pad C Damp cloth

Feed Rollers R Damp cloth

Pick-up Rollers R Damp cloth

Separation Rollers R Damp cloth

Two-Tray FinisherItems 240K EM Remarks

Rollers C Damp cloth

Discharge Brush C Dry cloth

Sensors C Blower brush

Jogger Fences I Replace if required.

Two-Tray Finisher Punch Kit


Punch Chad C Discard chad.



OTHERS

B202/B178/B180 2-4 SM

Booklet Finisher

Item 60K EM Remarks

Rollers C Damp cloth

Shafts C Damp cloth

Sensors C Blower brush

Jogger fences I

Booklet Finisher Punch Kit

Item 60K EM Remarks

Punch Chad C C Discard chad.

2.3 OTHERS

NOTE: These units are considered as EM parts since their expected lifetimes arerelatively long.

Copier

Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks

Transfer

Transfer Unit R 2.1 Belt Cleaning Unit R 2.1

Bypass Tray

Feed Roller R 2.1 Pickup Roller R 2.1

Separation Roller R 2.1

LCT

Item 150K 250K 500K 1000K Remarks

Relay Roller R

Bottom Plate Pad R







SPECIAL TOOLS

SM 3-1 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

CAUTION

Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do theprocedures in this section.

3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS

Part Number Description Q’ty

B6455010 SD Card 1

B6456700 PCMCIA Card Adapter 1

B6456800 USB Reader/Writer 1

A029 9387 Digital Multimeter – FLUKE87 1

G021 9350 Loop-back Connector – Parallel NOTE 1

C401 9503 20X Magnification Scope 1

A2579300 Grease Barrierta – S552R 1

52039501 Silicon Grease G-501 1

A0929503 C4 Color Test Chart (3 pcs/set) 1

A0069104 Scanner Positioning Pin (4pcs/set) 1

G5885140 Plug - IEEE1284 Type C 1

NOTE: The “Loop-back Connector–Parallel” requires the “Plug-IEEE1284 Type C”.



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B202/B178/B180 3-2 SM

3.2 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

3.2.1 SCANNING

Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank marginadjustment before you do the following scanner adjustments.

NOTE: Use a C4 test chart to do the following adjustments.

Scanner sub-scan magnification

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then makea copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008 ifnecessary.

Standard: ±1.0%.

Scanner leading edge and side-to-side registration

1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then makea copy from one of the feed stations.

2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary.

Standard: 0 ± 2mm.

SP mode

Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001

Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001

A

B178R505.WMF

B

A

B178R506.WMF

A: Sub-scan magnification

A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-3 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Main scan dot position correction

NOTE: Adjust the printer registration before you adjust the scanner.

1. Enter the SP mode and open SP4-010 and SP4-011.

2. Check that each value is the same as the factory-set value.

3. Press the “COPY Window” key and copy the C-4 chart in the full-color photomode.NOTE: Make sure you copy in photo mode. This is because you cannot

correctly check color displacement in text mode.

4. Check the yellow and cyan vertical lines. (Use a Magnification Scope to do this)Exit the SP mode to end the adjustment if they exactly overwrite the black lineat the edges of the copy. Go to the next step if the yellow and cyan lines extendpast the black line.

5. Press the “SP Mode” key to go back to the SP mode. Then open SP4-932.Compare the current values with this table.

SP4-932-1 Dot Position correction R left edge

SP4-932-2 Dot Position correction R right edge

SP4-932-3 Dot Position correction B left edge

SP4-932-4 Dot Position correction B right edge



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B202/B178/B180 3-4 SM

3.2.2 ARDF

ARDF side-to-side and leading edge registration

Use 11 X 17 Inch paper to make a temporary test chart as shown above.

1. Put the temporary test chart on the ARDF. Then make a copy from one of thefeed stations.

2. Check the registration. Use the following SP modes to adjust if necessary.

SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range

SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Registration ± 3.0 mm

SP6-006-002 Leading Edge Registration (Simplex) ± 42 stepsSP6-006-003 Buckle: Duplex Front ± 42 steps

SP6-006-004 Buckle: Duplex Rear ± 45 steps

B178R507.WMF

B

A

B178R508.WMF

A: Leading edge registrationB: Side-to-side registration



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-5 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.2.3 REGISTRATION

Image Area

Make sure that the registration is

adjusted within the adjustment standardrange as shown below.

Leading Edge Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.

Side to Side

Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode(SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit,LCT, and duplex unit.

Adjustment Standard

• Leading edge (sub-scan direction): 3 ± 0 mm• Side to side (main-scan direction): 2 ± 0 mm

Paper Registration Standard

The registration in both main- and sub-scan directions can change within thefollowing tolerance.

1st side

• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 1.5 mm

• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 2 mm

2nd side in duplex

• Sub-scan direction: 0 ± 3 mm

• Main-scan direction: 0 ± 4 mm

A

B

C

B178R509.WMF

Feed direction

Image Area

A = B = C = 4.2mm (1.6")



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B202/B178/B180 3-6 SM

Adjustment Procedure

1. Enter SP5-997.

2. Print out the pattern (trimming pattern) with SP5-997.

NOTE: Registration can change slightly as shown above. Print some pages ofthe trimming pattern for step 3 and 4. Then average the leading edgeand side-to-side registration values and adjust each SP mode.

3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).

3) Input the value. Then press the key.4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.

2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).3) Input the value. Then press the key.4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.

3.2.4 COLOR REGISTRATION

Line Position Adjustment

The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition toget the best color prints.Do the following if color registration shifts: Do “Auto Color Registration” with the user tools (Maintenance menu – Color

Registration) or SP5-993-2 to do the forced line position adjustment. Youshould also do the line position adjustment at these times:

• After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced lineposition adjustment if you install the machine at the user location.) if themachine is pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location,

• When you open the drum positioning plate

• When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related tothe drum/development/transfer sections

• When you remove or replace the transfer belt, transfer belt unit or laser

optical housing unit

Adjustment of Line Speed for Thick Paper

You must adjust the line speed of the fusing unit (the speed of developmentmotor-K) at these times:

• The color registration shifts more on the trailing edge than on the leadingedge.

• The problem has not been solved by the line position adjustment.



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-7 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.2.5 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION

NOTE: The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the bestprint output. You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune tomeet user requirements.

Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC.You can adjust the gamma data for the following:

• Highlight

• Middle

• Shadow areas

• IDmax.

The adjustable range is from 0 to 15 (16 steps).

Copy Mode

KCMY Color Balance Adjustment

The adjustment uses only “Offset” values.

NOTE: Never change “Option” values (default value is 0).

Highlight (Low ID) Levels 2 through 5 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Middle (Middle ID) Levels 3 through 7 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

Shadow (High ID) Levels 6 through 9 in the C4 chart 10-level scale

ID maxLevel 10 in the C4 chart 10-level scale (affects the entire imagedensity.)

Offset The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID,middle ID, high ID, and ID max, the greater the density.

There are four adjustable modes (SP4-918-009):

• Copy Photo mode

• Copy Letter mode

• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode

• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B202/B178/B180 3-8 SM

B178R510.WMF



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-9 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t


1. Copy the C-4 chart in the mode that you want to adjust.

2. Enter the SP mode.

3. Select “Copy SP.”

4. Select SP4-918-009.

5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard ( thetable below).

NOTE: 1) Never change “Option” value (default value is 0).2) Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max,” “Middle,” “Shadow,”

“Highlight.”

- Photo Mode, Full Color -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K, C, M, and Y)

Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 10 matchesthat of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

2

B178R968.WMF Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 6 matchesthat of level 6 on the C-4 chart.

3

B178R969.WMF Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 8 matches

that of level 8 on the C-4 chart.

4

B178R970.WMF Adjust the offset value so thatdirty background does not showon the copy and the density oflevel 3 is slightly lighter than thatof level 3 on the C-4 chart.

B178R972.WMF

B178R971.WMF Adjust the offset value so thatthe color balance of black scalelevels 3 through 5 in the copy isseen as gray (no C, M, or Yshould be visible). If the blackscale contains C, M, or Y, dosteps 1 to 4 again.





IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-11 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -

Step Item to Adjust Level on the C-4 chart (K) Adjustment Standard

1ID max:(K)

Adjust the offset value so thatthe density of level 10 matchesthat of level 10 on the C-4 chart.

2


3


B178R984.WMF

B178R983.WMF Adjust the offset value so thatdirty background does not showon the copy and the density oflevel 3 is slightly lighter than thatof level 3 on the C-4 chart.

NOTE: Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust“shadow” as shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern ateach corner is printed clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of “shadow”again until it is.



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

B202/B178/B180 3-12 SM

Printer Mode

There are six adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):

• 1200 x 1200 photo mode

• 600 x 600 text mode• 1800 x 600 text mode



• 1200 x 1200 text mode

K C M Y

HighlightShadowMiddleIDmax

SP1-104-1

SP1-104-2

SP1-104-3

SP1-104-4

SP1-104-21

SP1-104-22

SP1-104-23

SP1-104-24

SP1-104-41

SP1-104-42

SP1-104-43

SP1-104-44

SP1-104-61

SP1-104-62

SP1-104-63

SP1-104-64


1. Do ACC for the printer mode.

2. Turn the main power off and on.

3. Enter SP mode.

4. Select “Printer SP”.

5. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust.

6. Choose SP1-103-1 to print out a tone control test sheet if you want to examinethe image quality for these settings.

7. Adjust the color density with SP1-104 as shown following table lists. Comparethe tone control test sheet with the C4 test chart.NOTE: Adjust the density in this order: “ID Max”, “Shadow”, “Middle”,

“Highlight”.

8. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.



IMAGE ADJUSTMENT

SM 3-13 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Adjustment Reference For Gamma Correction

The following tables show the adjustment reference for gamma correction. Thetables show the following:

•Level of the color scale on the C4 test chart

• Tone control test sheet printed in the printer SP mode.

For example, for K at text mode, grade 12 on the tone control test sheet should bethe same as grade 7 on the C4 chart.

It is not usually necessary to adjust the gamma data as shown in the table since ACC adjusts the gamma curve automatically. You only need fine-tune of colorbalance by gamma data adjustment when the result from ACC and ColorCalibration does not meet the customer’s requirements.

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 6 8 10 12 15 16

600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 16 -

K Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 5 6 9 11 12 15 16

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 12 13 14

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 8 10 11 12 13Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13

600 x 600 - 1 3 4 5 8 10 11 12 13

1800 x 600 - 1 3 5 6 9 10 11 12 14

C Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 - 1 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 14 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 12 15 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -

600 x 600 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 14 16 -

1800 x 600 - 1 4 6 8 11 13 14 16 -

M Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 - 1 4 6 7 10 12 13 16 -

C4 test chart 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

600 x 600 1 3 4 9 11 12 14 15 16 -

1800 x 600 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -Photo

1200 x 1200 1 3 5 8 10 11 14 15 16 -

600 x 600 1 2 5 8 10 11 1414/15

15 16

1800 x 600 1 3 6 9 10 12 14 15 16 -

Y Testsheet

Text

1200 x 1200 1 2 4 7 9 10 13 15 16 -



DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-14 SM

3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

3.3.1 TOP COVER

1. External tray [A]2. Open the duplex left cover [B].

3. Top cover [C] ( x 4)

3.3.2 DUPLEX CONTROL BOARD

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Duplex control board [A] ( x 4, x 7)

B178R511.WMF

B178R512.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[A]




SM 3-15 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.3.3 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 1

1. Top cover ( 3.3.1)

2. Exit tray [A]

3. Duplex unit [B] ( x 1, x 1)

4. Inner cover [C] ( x 2)

5. Duplex control board bracket [D]

( x 2, x 7)

6. Duplex inverter motor 1 [E]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)

B178R513.WMF

B178R514.WMF

B178R515.WMF

[E]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]




B202/B178/B180 3-16 SM

3.3.4 DUPLEX INVERTER MOTOR 2 AND SWITCH

1. Duplex control board bracket ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex inverter unit switch [A]

( x 1, x 1)

3. Duplex inverter motor 2 [B]

( x 2, 1 timing belt)

3.3.5 EXIT SENSOR 3 AND DUPLEX INVERTER SENSOR

1. Open the duplex inverter unit [A]

2. Exit sensor 3 [B] ( x 1)

3. Duplex inverter sensor [C]

( x 1, x 2)

3.3.6 EXIT SENSOR 1 AND 2

1. Top cover (

3.3.1)2. Open the duplex unit.

3. Exit sensor 1 [A]

( x 1, x 1, 1 bracket)

4. Exit sensor 2 [B] ( x 1)

B178R516.WMF

B178R517.WMF

B178R518.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[A][B]



DUPLEX FEED UNIT

SM 3-17 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.4 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

3.4.1 DUPLEX DRIVE BOARD

1. Open the front cover

2. Duplex feed unit [A] ( x 1)

3. Inner cover [B] ( x 1)

4. Duplex drive board [C] ( x 2, x 3)

3.4.2 DUPLEX FEED MOTOR

1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)

2. Inner cover [A] ( x 1)

3. Duplex feed motor [B]

( x 1, x 1, 1 timing belt)

B178R520.WMFB178R519.WMF

B178R521.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[C]





EXTERIOR COVERS

SM 3-19 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.5 EXTERIOR COVERS

NOTE: 1) Go to section 3.7.2, “Laser Optics Housing Unit” if you want the removalprocedure for the paper exit tray.

2) Go to section 3.12.14, “Paper Exit” if you want the removal procedurefor the paper exit cover.

3.5.1 REAR, FRONT, AND RIGHT SIDES

1. ARDF or platen cover (if installed)

2. Rear cover [A] ( x 5, 2 hooks)

3. Front cover [B] (2 pins)

B178R523.WMF

B178R524.WMF

[A]

[B]



EXTERIOR COVERS

B202/B178/B180 3-20 SM

4. Open the by-pass tray [A].

5. Right cover [B] ( x 2)

6. Upper right cover [C] ( x 1,strap x 1)

7. Upper front cover [D] ( x 2)

CAUTION: Do not put things on the operation panel. The operation panel canbecome unstable when you remove the upper front cover.

8. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear right cover [E]

( x 4, 1 hook)

B178R525.WMF

B178R905.WMF

[A]

[D][C]

[B]

[E]



EXTERIOR COVERS

SM 3-21 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.5.2 LEFT SIDE

1. Duplex unit ( 3.3.3)

2. Duplex unit base cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Duplex inverter guide [B]

4. Duplex unit base [C] ( x 6)

5. Left cover [D] ( x 6, 1 hook)

6. Rear cover ( 3.5.1)

7. Open the upper left cover [E]

8. Scanner left cover ( 3.5.3)

9. Rear left cover [F] ( x 4)

B178R527.WMF

[A]

[C]

[E]

[F]

[D]

[B]



EXTERIOR COVERS

B202/B178/B180 3-22 SM

3.5.3 OPERATION PANEL AND SCANNER COVERS



3. Upper front cover ( 3.5.1)

4. Operation panel [A] ( x 4, x 1)

5. Scanner left cover [B] ( x 2, 1 hook)

6. Scanner right cover [C] ( x 2)

7. Scanner rear cover [D] ( x 1)

B178R528.WMF

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]





SCANNER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-24 SM

3.6.3 SENSOR BOARD UNIT (SBU)


2. Exposure glass ( 3.6.1)

3. Scanner right cover ( 3.5.3)

4. Inner cover [A] ( x 4)

5. Sensor board unit

[B] ( x 5, x 4)NOTE: Connect the connectors to

the SBU holding the SBUwith your hand when youreplace the SBU.

When reassembling

Adjust the following SP modes after you replace the sensor board unit:

• SP4–008 (Sub Scan Mag)

• SP4–010 (Sub Mag Reg.)

• SP4–011 (Main Scan Mag)

• SP4–688 (DF: Density Adjustment)

• SP4–800 (DF: Density Correction for R, G or B)

B178R531.WMF

B178R532A.WMF

[A]

[B]



SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-25 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

Input the barcode numbers with following SPs. These barcode numbers are printedon the paper that is provided with the SBU.

Adjusting the gray valance level for each color

Input "4" with SP4-885: Level Convert Adjustment for R

Input "5" with SP4-886: Level Convert Adjustment for G

Input "6" with SP4-887: Level Convert Adjustment for B

Adjusting the printer vector correction

Input "7" with SP4-540-001: Printer Vector for R: Option

Input "8" with SP4-540-002: Printer Vector for R: Red

Input "9" with SP4-540-003: Printer Vector for R: Green

Input "10" with SP4-540-004: Printer Vector for R: Blue

Input "11" with SP4-540-021: Printer Vector for M: Option

Input "12" with SP4-540-022: Printer Vector for M: Red

Input "13" with SP4-540-023: Printer Vector for M: Green

Input "14" with SP4-540-024: Printer Vector for M: Blue

B178R633.WMF







SCANNER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-28 SM

3.6.6 SCANNER POWER SUPPLY UNIT (SCANNER I/O BOARD)


2. Scanner power supply unit [A]

(all's, x 5)

3.6.7 SCANNER MOTOR

1. Rear cover (3.5.1)

2. Scanner PSU with bracket [A] ( x 4)

3. Scanner motor [B] ( x 2, Spring x 1)

4. Timing belt [C]

Reassembling

1. Install the motor.

2. Install the timing belt.

3. Install the spring.

4. Fasten the screws.

B178R537.WMF

B178R538.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B][C]



SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-29 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.6.8 FRONT SCANNER WIRE

1. Front frame ( 3.6.5)

2. Front scanner wire clamp [A]

3. Front scanner wire bracket [B]

( x 1)

4. Front scanner wire and scanner

drive pulley [C] ( x 1)

Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]in the middle of the forkedholder.

2. Pass the right end (withthe ring) [B] through thesquare hole. Pass the leftend (with the ball) [C]

through the notch.

3. Wind the right endcounterclockwise (shownfrom the machine’s front)five times. Wind the leftend clockwise three times.

NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you have done this. Stick

the wire to the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle theassembly at the time of installation.

B178R539.WMF

B178R540.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[A]



SCANNER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-30 SM

4. Install the drive pulley onthe shaft [A].

NOTE: Do not attach thepulley to the shaftwith the screw atthis time.

5. Insert the left end into theslit [B]. The end should govia the rear track of the leftpulley [C] and the reartrack of the movable pulley[D].

6. Hook the right end ontothe front scanner wirebracket [E]. The endshould go via the fronttrack of the right pulley [F]

and the front track of themovable pulley [G].

NOTE: Do not attach thescanner wire bracketwith the screw at thistime.

B178R541.WMF

B178R542.WMF

[A]

[B] [C] [D]

[E]

[F]

[G]





SCANNER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-32 SM

3.6.9 REAR SCANNER WIRE

CAUTION: Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagrambelow. Image adjustment gets difficult if you remove these screws.


2. Operation panel and scanner covers ( 3.5.3)

3. Exposure glass with left scale ( 3.6.1)

4. Left frame ( 3.6.5)

5. Scanner PSU ( 3.6.6)

6. Five screws on the right-hand side [A] (shown from the front)

7. Two screws on the left-hand side [B] (shown from the front)

8. Pivot brackets [C][D] ( x 1 for each)

B178R544.WMF

[B]

[C]

[S1]

[S2]

[A]

[S3]

[D]



SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-33 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

9. Rear frame [A] ( x 2, x 7)

NOTE: Lift the right-hand side (shown from the front) of the scanner unit toremove the screw [B] on the bottom-right corner (shown from the front).

10. Rail frame [C] ( x 5)

NOTE: Make sure that the home position sensor [D] is not damaged by thesensor blade near the rear end of the xenon lamp when youreassemble.

11. Rear scanner wire clamp [E]

12. Rear scanner wire bracket [F]

( x 1)

13. Loosen the two screws on thescanner-motor bracket ( 3.6.7)

14. Scanner motor gear [G] ( x 1)

15. Rear scanner wire and scanner

drive pulley [H] ( x 1)

B178R545.WMF

B178R546.WMF

[E][F]

[G] [H]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



SCANNER UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-34 SM

Reassembling the Rear Scanner Wire

1. Position the center ball [A]in the middle of the forked

holder.2. Pass the left end (with the

ball) [B] through the drivepulley notch. Pass theright end (with the ring) [C]through the drive pulleyhole.

3. Wind the left end [B]clockwise (shown from themachine’s front) five times.

Wind the right end [C]counterclockwise threetimes.

NOTE: The two red marks [D] come together when you do this. Attach the wireto the pulley with tape. This lets you easily handle the assembly at thetime of installation.

4. Install the drive pulley on the shaft.

NOTE: Do not attach the pulley on the shaft with the screw at this time.

5. Install the wire.NOTE: The winding of the wire on the three pulleys at the rear of the scannershould be the same as the winding on the three pulleys at the front.This must show as a mirror image.

Example: At the front of the machine, the side of the drive pulley with the threewindings must face the front of the machine. At the rear of the machine, it mustface the rear.

6. Do steps 7 through 13 again in the “Reassembling the Front Scanner Wire”Section.

B178R547.WMF

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]



SCANNER UNIT

SM 3-35 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.6.10 TOUCH PANEL POSITION ADJUSTMENT

NOTE: It is necessary to calibrate touch panel at the following times:

• When you replace the operation panel.

• When you replace the controller board.• When the touch panel detection function does not operate correctly

Do not use items [2] to [9] on the Self-Diagnostic Menu. These items are for designuse only.

1. Press, press, press 5 times to open the Self-Diagnosticsmenu.

2. On the touch screen press “Touch Screen Adjust” (or press).

3. Use a pointed (not sharp) tool to press the upper left mark .

4. Press the lower right mark when “ ” shows.

5. Touch a few spots on the touch panel to make sure that the marker “+” shows

exactly where the screen is touched.

Press Cancel. Then start from Step 2 again if the “+” mark does not show

where the screen is touched.

6. Press [#] OK on the screen (or press) when you are finished.

7. Touch [#] Exit on the screen to close the Self-Diagnostic menu. Save thecalibration settings.

B178R548.WMF

B178R549.WMF



LASER OPTICS

B202/B178/B180 3-36 SM

3.7 LASER OPTICS

WARNING

Turn off the main switch and unplug the machine before you do theprocedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injury.

3.7.1 CAUTION DECAL LOCATIONS

The caution decals locations are shown below.

WARNING

Make sure you turn off the main switch and disconnect the power plugfrom the power outlet before you disassemble or adjust the laser unit. Thismachine uses a class IIIb laser beam with a wavelength of 655 nm and anoutput of 7 mW. The laser can cause serious eye injury.

CLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN


LASERSTRAHLUNG KLASSE 3BWENN ABDECKUNG GEOFFNET


CAUTION-

VORSICHT-

>PS<

CAUTION

VORSICHT

CAUTION.WMF

B178R550.WMFCLASS 3B LASER RADIATION

WHEN OPEN





CAUTION-

VORSICHT-

CAUTION

VORSICHT

>PS<

CAUTION2.WMF



LASER OPTICS

SM 3-37 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.7.2 LASER OPTICS HOUSING UNIT

CAUTION: Remove the sponge padding and the tag from the new unit before youinstall the new laser optics-housing unit.

Steps 1 through 4 show the procedurefor a newly supplied unit that replacesthe current one.

1. Top cover of the laser optics

housing unit [A] ( x 4)

2. Sponge padding [B]

3. Tag [C]

4. Reinstall the top cover.


6. Rear cover (

3.5.1)7. Open the duplex inverter unit [D].

8. Open the front cover [E].

9. Right cover, upper right cover, and upper front cover ( 3.5.1)

10. Operation panel, scanner left cover, scanner right cover, and scanner rearcover ( 3.5.3)

B178R551.WMF

B178R552.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[E]



LASER OPTICS

B202/B178/B180 3-38 SM

11. Remove the support [A] on the front ofthe scanner unit.

CAUTION: 1) Make sure that the cables on the rear of the scanner unit are notcaught on anything before you go to the next step. The wholefunction (not only the scanner unit) can be disabled if some of thecables are damaged.

2) Do not remove screw [S1], screw [S2], or screw [S3] in the diagrambelow. Image adjustment can be difficult if you remove thesescrews.

12. Lift the scanner unit [B] ( x 7) andprop the unit with the support [C].

NOTE: Remove screw [D] andscrew [E].

CAUTION: Do not lift the scanner unithigher than the supportprop after you set thesupport under the scanner

unit. The support can comeoff the opening [F] if you dothis.

B178R553.WMF

B178R554.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[S1]

[S2][D]

[E]

[F]

[S3]



LASER OPTICS

SM 3-39 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

13. Securing screws for the paper exit tray

[A] ( x 2)

NOTE: Do not remove the paper exittray at this time.

14. Securing screws for the toner supply

unit [B] ( x 4)

15. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [C] ( x 2)

16. Hold the toner supply unit [D] up . Then lower it . The pins [E] on the

front and rear shafts hold the unit.

B178R555.WMF

B178R556.WMF

2

1

B178R557.WMF

[E]

[C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[D]



LASER OPTICS

B202/B178/B180 3-40 SM

17. Paper exit tray [A]

18. Connector cover [B] ( x 3)

19. Three connectors [C] ( x 1)

20. Release the clamps [D] ( x 4).

21. Release the cable from the clamps [E].

B178R558.WMF

B178R909.WMF

B178R913.WMF

[B]

[A]

[D]

[C]





LASER OPTICS

B202/B178/B180 3-42 SM

22. Duct [A]

23. Securing screws for the laser optics

housing unit [B] ( x 2)

24. Put a sheet of paper [C] between thelaser optic housing unit and the machinerear frame.NOTE: This does not let the cables be

caught by the brackets when youlift the laser optics-housing unit.

25. Hold the unit with both hands and slowlylift it up. Make sure that the cables fromthe laser diode board are not caught by

the brackets when you do this.NOTE: The cables can be caught by the

brackets and the laser diodeboard may be damaged if you arenot careful.

26. Do adjustments ( go to the procedures on the following page) after youreinstall the laser optics-housing unit.

Do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-2 or User Tools > Maintenance >Color Registration > Auto Color Registration > OK) after you install the laser optics-housing unit.

B178R561.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]





LASER OPTICS

B202/B178/B180 3-44 SM

3.7.3 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR

1. Laser optics housing unit( 3.7.2)

2. Top cover [A] ( x 4)

3. Harness cable on the polygon-mirror-motor drive-board [B]

4. Twelve connectors [C] on the four LDboards

5. Upper cover [D] ( x 11, x 6)NOTE: Two of the eleven

connectors are on thereverse side of the uppercover.

6. Air-current rectifier [E] ( x 3)

7. Polygon mirror motor [F]

(

x 4,

x 1)

B178R566.WMF

B178R567.WMF

B178R568.WMF

[D]

[F]

[E]

[C][A]

[B]



LASER OPTICS

SM 3-45 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.7.4 POLYGON MIRROR MOTOR DRIVE BOARD

1. Laser optics housing unit( 3.7.2)

2. Polygon mirror motor drive

board [A] ( x 2, x 2)

3.7.5 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR BOARDS

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)

2. Synchronizing detector boards [A]

( x 1 for each, x 1 for each)

B178R569.WMF

B178R570.WMF

[A]

[A]





PAPER FEED

SM 3-47 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9 PAPER FEED

3.9.1 PICK-UP, FEED, AND SEPARATION ROLLERS

Tray 1 and Tray 21. Tray 1 and Tray 2

2. Pick-up roller [A] ( x 1)

3. Feed roller [B] ( x 1)

4. Separation roller [C] ( x 1)

By-pass Tray

1. Open the right door.

2. By-pass tray cover [A] (1 hook, x1)

3. Raise the paper end sensor actuator[B].

4. Pick-up roller [C] (1 hook)

B178R574.WMF

B178R575.WMF

[C][A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[C]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 3-48 SM

5. Feed roller [D] ( x 1)

6. Vertical transport cover [E] ( x 4)

NOTE: Remove the right rear

cover (

3.5.1). This letsyou have easier access tothe four screws.

7. Separation roller [F] ( x 1)

B178R576.WMF

[D]

[F]

[E]



PAPER FEED

SM 3-49 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9.2 PAPER WIDTH DETECTION BOARD

1. Open the by-pass tray.

2. Center the side fences [A].

3. By-pass tray cover [B] ( x 2, 2 hooks)

NOTE: There is a square opening [C] on each side. Push the hooks throughthese openings to release them.

4. Paper width detection board [D] ( x 1)

NOTE: Open the bottom cover [E] toremove the connector.

B178R577.WMF

B178R578.WMF

[B][A]

[D]

[C]

[E]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 3-50 SM

3.9.3 VERTICAL TRANSPORT SENSOR


2. Vertical transport cover [A] ( x 4)

NOTE: Remove the right rear cover ( 3.5.1). This lets you have easieraccess to the four screws.

3. Vertical transport sensor [B] ( x 1)

3.9.4 RIGHT DOOR UNIT

1. Rear right cover ( 3.5.1)

2. Open the right door [A].

3. Lift the vertical transport unit [B]. This removes it from its hinges ( x 3, x1).

B178R579.WMF

B178R580.WMF

B178R581.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A] [B]



PAPER FEED

SM 3-51 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9.5 REGISTRATION SENSOR AND RELAY SENSORS

1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. Registration guide [A] ( x 2)

3. Registration sensor [B] ( x 1, x 1)

4. Relay sensor [C] ( x 1, x 1)

3.9.6 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES

1. Paper trays


3. Swing out the high voltage supply unit(3.13.2).

4. Clutch holder [A] ( x 2, 1 bearing)

5. Paper feed clutch for tray 1 [B] ( x 1)

6. Clutch holder [C] ( x 2, 1 bearing)

7. Paper feed clutch for tray 2 [D] ( x 1)

B178R582.WMFB178R583.WMF

B178R584.WMF

[D] [C]

[A][B]

[A]

[B]

[C]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 3-52 SM

3.9.7 BY-PASS FEED CLUTCH

1. Right door unit ( 3.9.4)

2. By-pass tray cover [A]

( x 1, 1 hook)

3. Loosen the screw on the rightdoor latch [B].

4. Turn the latch in the oppositedirection.

5. Upper guide plate [C]

( x 4, x 1)

6. Support plate [D] ( x 2)

7. Relay gear [E] (1 hook)8. By-pass feed clutch [F] ( x 1)

3.9.8 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Swing out the high voltage supplyunit ( 3.13.2).

3. Sub power supply unit [A]

( x 9, x 3)

4. Tray lift motors (tray 1 [B], tray 2 [C])

( x 2, x 1)

B178R585.WMF

B178R586.WMF

B178R587.WMF

[A]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[C]

[A]



PAPER FEED

SM 3-53 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.9.9 PAPER FEED MOTOR


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2).

3. Paper feed motor [A] ( x 3, x 1)NOTE: The connector is CN604 on the driver board.

B178R588.WMF

[A]



TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-54 SM

3.10 TRANSFER AND PAPER TRANSPORT UNIT

3.10.1 TRANSFER UNIT

NOTE: Grasp the central areas of the front and rear frame when you remove orinstall the transfer unit.

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt [A]. Do not damage the entrance mylar [B].

Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-17). Then do the output check, (SP5-804-66) after you replace the transfer unit.

1. Duplex feed unit ( 3.4.1)

2. Turn the release lever counterclockwise. ( 3.8)

3. Pull out the transfer unit [C] until the whole unit shows ( x 2).

4. Grasp the transfer unit grips as shown above. Lift the unit to remove it.

NOTE: Grasp the front grip. Use caution not to damage the actuator on the rear.

Do the following after you replace the transfer unit:

• Set the adjustment value in SP5-995-020 to “FbOn, DncOn".

• Execute SP5-993-031 and SP5-993-033. This SP mode measures the beltspeed (middle and low) and stores the data.

• Execute SP5-995-027. This SP mode checks the belt regularity and stores thedata.

• Execute SP5-995-025. This SP clears the speed control error counter.

• Turn the main power off and on after executing above SPs.

• Forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > ColorRegistration).

• Print the 1-dot grid pattern on A3/11" x 17" paper. Then check the color shift level( 4.6.3).

B178R589.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]




SM 3-55 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.10.2 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING UNIT

NOTE: Reset the maintenance counter, (SP7-804-18) after you replace thetransfer belt-cleaning unit.

Pull out the transfer belt-cleaning unit [A] ( x 1) at the same time you push thelever.

NOTE: 1) The blade [B] can damage the belt if you do not continue to push thelever.2) Make sure that the transfer unit release lever is put back to the original

position ( 3.8) when you reassemble.

Do a forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or > Maintenance > ColorRegistration) after you replace the transfer belt-cleaning unit.

1

2

B178R590.WMF

[A]

[B]




B202/B178/B180 3-56 SM

3.10.3 CLEANING BLADE AND CLEANING ROLLER

1. Transfer belt cleaning unit ( 3.10.2)

2. Cleaning blade [A] ( x 2)

3. Tension spring [B]

4. Lever [C]

5. Ground plate [D] ( x 1)

6. 3 gears [E] ( x 1)

7. Gear box [F] ( x 1)

B178R591.WMF

B178R592.WMF[C]

[E] [F]

[A]

[B]

[D]






B202/B178/B180 3-58 SM

3.10.4 TRANSFER BELT

NOTE: Do not touch the transfer belt. Hold the belt at its end position when youreplace the belt.


2. Transfer unit ( 3.10.1)

3. Transfer entrance guide [A] ( x 3)

4. Right bracket [B] ( x 2)

5. Left bracket [C] ( x 2)

6. Tension roller [D] ( x 2, Spacer [E] x 1)

NOTE: Attach the spacer [E] to the original position when you reassemble.

B178R594.WMF

B178R595.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]




SM 3-59 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

7. Lay the transfer unit on its side.

8. Grasp the upper end of the transfer belt. Then pull the transfer belt [ A] up andout.

9. Clean the transfer belt mark sensor [C] with Blower brush.

NOTE: Clean the drive rollers with a damp cloth if they are dirty.

When you reinstall the transfer belt

The transfer belt must be installed with the mark “[B]” at the front side of themachine.

Do the same procedures mentioned in 3.10.1 after you replace the transfer belt.

B178R632.WMF

B178R575A.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]




B202/B178/B180 3-60 SM

3.10.5 TRANSFER UNIT DRIVE MOTOR


2. Pull out the transfer unit ( 3.10.1).

3. Release lever [A] ( x 1)

4. Front cover [B] ( x 3)

5. Front plate [C] ( x 5, x 1, Timing belt x 1, spring x 1)

6. Transfer unit drive motor [D] ( x 2)

B178R597.WMF

B178R598.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



ID SENSORS

SM 3-61 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.11 ID SENSORS


2. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)

3. Black PCU ( 3.8)

4. ID sensor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1)

Make sure that the ID sensor bracket fits on the drum-positioning plate correctlywhen you reassemble.

B178R599.WMF

[A]



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-62 SM

3.12 FUSING

CAUTION

Be careful when you handle the fusing unit. It is very hot.

3.12.1 FUSING UNIT

1. Start the SP mode. Then execute the New Unit Set (SP5-999-009).

2. Turn the main switch off.

3. Detach the finisher from the copier if it is installed.

4. Open the duplex inverter unit if it is installed.

5. Open the upper left cover. Then pull it out.

6. Fusing unit [A]

7. Turn the main switch on. The machine starts initialization for the new unit.

If the customer uses thick paper, make some test prints on a sample of the paperused by the customer after you replace the fusing unit. Adjust the line speed forthick paper with the following SP if there are any color registration problems:

• SP1-004-007 (Development Motor Speed–[K] L Thick)

B178R173.WMF

[A]





FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-64 SM

3.12.3 THERMOSTAT AND HEATING ROLLER THERMISTOR

1. Upper cover ( 3.12.2)

2. Thermostats [A] ( x 3)

3. Heating roller thermistor [B] ( x 1, x 1, bracket x 1)

B178R002.WMF

[A]

[B]





FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-66 SM

3.12.5 HEATING ROLLER LAMP AND PRESSURE ROLLER LAMP


2. Heating roller lamp [A] ( x 2, terminal bracket x 2)NOTE: Make sure the front [C] and rear [D] ends of the lamp are on the correct

terminals when you reinstall.

3. Pressure roller lamp [B] ( x 2)

B178R009.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



FUSING

SM 3-67 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.6 FUSING BELT UNIT


2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.5)

3. Pressure brackets [A] [B] (spring x 1 each)NOTE: Use caution when you remove or attach the springs. The springs have

strong tension and require more force than usual to remove them.

4. Fusing upper unit [C] ( x 5, x 1)

5. Tension roller [D] (spring x 2, roller holder x 2)

6. Fusing belt unit [E]

B178R010.WMF

B178R011.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-68 SM

3.12.7 HOT ROLLER AND HEATING ROLLER


2. Heating roller lamp ( 3.12.5)

3. Fusing belt unit ( 3.12.6)

4. Hot roller gear [A] ( x 1)5. Hot roller [B]

6. Heating roller [C]

Reassembling

Do the following procedures when you reassemble this unit:

• Apply grease to the roller shaft bearing of the pressure roller frame.

• Make sure that the edges of the bushings are positioned inside the shaftbearings.

B178R011.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]





FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-70 SM

3.12.9 LOWER PAPER GUIDE PLATE AND STRIPPER PAWLS


2. Pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)

3. Lower paper guide unit [A] ( x 4)NOTE: The screw [B] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw [B]

is positioned as shown above.

4. Lower paper guide plate [C] ( x 3)

5. Stripper pawls [D] (spring x 1 each)NOTE: The screw [E] is different from the others. Make sure that the screw is

positioned as shown above.

B178R006.WMF

B178R007.WMF

[A]

[C] [D]

[B]

[E]



FUSING

SM 3-71 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.10 CLEANING ROLLER AND OIL SUPPLY ROLLER


2. Pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)

3. Lower paper guide unit ( 3.12.9)

4. Remove the springs [A].

5. Slide off the roller holder [B].

6. Cleaning roller [C] and oil supply roller [D]

B178R008.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[C]

[D]



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-72 SM

3.12.11 PRESSURE ROLLER


2. Heating roller lamp and pressure roller lamp ( 3.12.5)

3. Fusing upper unit

4. Lower paper guide unit

5. Pressure roller gear [A] and bushings [B] (C-ring x 2)

6. Pressure roller [C]

Reassembling

Apply grease to both ends of the pressure roller shaft when you reassemble thisunit.

3.12.12 DRIVE GEAR

1. Fusing unit ( 3.12.1)

2. Gear hold bracket [A] ( x 1)

3. Drive gear [B] ( x 1)

B178R013.WMF

B178R014.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[A]

[B]



FUSING

SM 3-73 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.12.13 FUSING UNIT FAN

CAUTION

Make sure that the fan faces to the correct direction when you reinstall it.

The arrow on the fan [D] and the arrow on the duct [D] must face to thesame direction.


2. Left cover, rear left cover ( 3.5.2)

3. Connector cover (on the top of thecontroller box) (3.13.1)

4. Fusing fan duct [A] ( x 2, x 1)

5. Release the hooks. Then removethe upper cover [B].

6. Fusing fan [C]

B178R600.WMF

B178R601.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 3-74 SM

3.12.14 PAPER EXIT

1. Lift the scanner unit ( 3.7.2).

2. Paper exit cover [A] ( x 2)

3. Exit upper limit sensor [B]

4. Paper exit sensor [C]

B178R938.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

SM 3-75 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.13 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

3.13.1 MOVING THE CONTROLLER BOX OUT OF THE WAY


2. Connector cover [A] ( x 3)

3. Three cables [B]

4. Ground cable ( x 2) [C]

5. Duct [D] ( x 1, x 2)

6. Ground cable [E] ( x 1)

7. Two connectors [E]

8. Swing out the controller box [F]

( x 5).

B178R911.WMF

B178R603.WMF

[D]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[C]

[B]




B202/B178/B180 3-76 SM

3.13.2 MOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY UNIT - C, B OUTOF THE WAY


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit

[A] ( x 2).

3.13.3 CONTROLLER, IPU, AND BCU

NOTE: 1) Print out the SMC reports (“SP Mode Data” and “Logging Data”) beforeyou replace the BCU or controller.

2) Remove the NVRAM on the old board. Then install it on the new boardafter you replace the BCU or controller.

1. Controller [A] ( x 3)

2. IPU [B] ( x 2, x 2)

3. Option bracket [C] ( x 2)

4. Rear cover [D] ( 3.5.1)

B178R604.WMF

B178R605.WMF

[D]

[C]

[A]

[A]

[B]






B202/B178/B180 3-78 SM

3.13.4 HDD

You cannot separate the hard-disk drive into two different hard-disk drives. Thecontroller does not recognize the hard disk drive if you separate it.

1. Controller ( 3.13.3)

2. HDD [A] ( x 4, Shoulder-screw x 3)

When reassembling the HDD

Connect the cable as shown.

NOTE: There are two hard disks. Eachhard disk has a specifiedconnector. Do not connect thecable to the wrong connector.

B178R608.WMF

A

B

AB

B178R015.WMF

[A]




SM 3-79 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.13.5 NVRAM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

NVRAM on the BCU

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comeswith the machine.

2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.


4. Install an SD card into SD card slot 3. Then turn the main power on.

5. Copy the NVRAM data to an SD card ( SP5-824-001) if possible.

6. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.

7. Replace the NVRAM on the BCU and reassemble the machine.

8. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.9. Select a paper-size type ( SP5-131-001).

10. Specify the device number and destination code of the machine.

NOTE: 1) Contact your supervisor for details on how to enter the devicenumber and destination code.

2) SC 999 or “Fusing Unit Setting Error” can be show until the devicenumber and destination code are correctly programmed.

11. Turn the main switch off and on.

12. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) if you have

successfully copied them to the SD card.

13. Turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD card from SD card slot 3.

14. Turn the main switch on.

15. Reset the settings for meter charge ( SP5-930-002).

16. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.

17. Do the process control self-check.

18. Do ACC for the copier application program.

19. Do ACC for the printer application program.




B202/B178/B180 3-80 SM

NVRAM on the Controller

1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comeswith the machine.

2. Output the SMC data ( SP5-990-001) if possible.

3. Turn the main switch off. Then put a blank formatted SD card into SD card slot3.


5. Copy the NVRAM data ( SP5-824-001) and the address book data in theHDD ( SP5846-051) to an SD card if possible.NOTE: 1) An error message shows if local user information cannot be stored in

an SD card because the capacity is not enough.2) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.

6. Enter SP mode. Then print out the SMC reports ( SP5-990-001) if possible.

7. Turn off the main switch. Then unplug the power cord.

8. Replace the NVRAM on the controller. Then reassemble the machine.

9. Check if the serial number shows on the operation panel. ( SP5-811-002).Input the serial number if it does not show. (Contact your supervisor about thissetting.)

10. Plug in the power cord. Then turn the main switch on.

11. Copy the data from the SD card to the NVRAM ( SP5-825-001) and HDD( SP5-846-52) if you have successfully copied them to the SD card.NOTE: 1) The counter data in the user code information clears even if step 11

is done correctly.2) An error message shows if the download is incomplete. However,

you can still use the part of the address book data that has alreadybeen downloaded in step 11.

3) An error message shows when the download data does not exist inthe SD card, or, if it is already deleted.

4) You cannot do this procedure if the SD card is write-protected.

12. Go out of SP mode. Then turn the main switch off. Then remove the SD cardfrom SD card slot 3.


14. Specify the SP and UP mode settings.

15. Do ACC for the copier application program.

16. Do ACC for the printer application program.




SM 3-81 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.13.6 REMOVING THE HIGH VOLTAGE SUPPLY BOARD - C, B


2. High voltage supply board [A] (All's, x 8)

3.13.7 SUB POWER SUPPLY UNIT


2. Swing out the high voltage supply unit ( 3.13.2)

3. Sub power supply unit [A] (All's, x 3)

B178R609.WMF

B178R586.WMF

[A]

[A]





DRIVE UNIT

SM 3-83 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.14 DRIVE UNIT

3.14.1 REGISTRATION CLUTCH


2. Swing out the controller box ( 3.13.1).

3. Registration clutch [A] ( x 1, x 1)

3.14.2 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCHES

1. Drum gears ( 3.14.3).

2. Development clutch assembly [A]

( x 1, x 1)

3. Clutch holder [B]

4. Clutch shaft [C] (1 bushing, x 1,1 hook)

B178R613.WMF

B178R614.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[C]







DRIVE UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-86 SM

10. Development drive motor - CMY [A] ( x 5, x 1, Spring x 1)

NOTE: Remove the three bushings [B] and install the development drive motorfirst when you reassemble. Then install the bushings.

3.14.4 DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - CMY AND DRUM DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Swing out the controller box( 3.13.1)

2. Drum drive motor - CMY [A]

( x 4, x 1)

3. Drum drive motor - K [B]

( x 4, x 1)

B178R619.WMF

B178R620.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]



DRIVE UNIT

SM 3-87 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

3.14.5 DEVELOPMENT DRIVE MOTOR - K

1. Fusing fan duct ( 3.12.13)

2. Development clutch securing plate( 3.14.3)

3. Solenoid cover [A] ( x 2)

4. Development drive motor – K [B] (with the fusing clutch [C]) ( x 4, x 2)

NOTE: Remove the bushing [D] and install the development drive motor–K(with the fusing clutch) first when you reassemble. Then install thebushing.

B178R621.WMF

3

2

1 B178R622.WMF

[B]

[C]

[A]

[D]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-88 SM

3.15 TONER SUPPLY UNIT

NOTE: 1) Do not touch the PCU drum. Do not let metal objects touch thedevelopment sleeve.

2) Cover the PCUs with paper or cloth after you remove them. Keep themin a dark place.

M Toner Supply Unit

1. Laser optics housing unit ( 3.7.2)

2. All development units and PCUs ( 3.8)


4. Development clutch securing plate ( 3.14.3)

5. Right inner cover with the drum positioning plate [A] ( x 3)

6. M development unit plate [B] ( x 1)

B178R623.WMF

[A]

[B]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

SM 3-89 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

7. Development unit left guide [A] ( x 1)


9. Registration upper stay [B] ( x 4)

CAUTION: 1) Toner spills out when you remove the toner path cover and tonersupply pipe. Put some paper or cloth under the toner supply unit andwaste toner collection path before you remove them.

2) Use a paper clip or tape to close the pipe after you remove it.

10. Toner path cover [C] ( x 2)

11. Toner supply pipe [D]

12. Toner supply unit [E] ( x 2, x 1)

B178R624.WMF

B178R625.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C] [D]

[E]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-90 SM

Reinstalling the M Toner Supply Unit

1. Wind the harness [A] on the shaft.

2. Insert the toner collection pipe [B].

NOTE: Make sure that the pipe does not come off the unit.

3. Remove the toner supply unit bushing [C].

B178R626.WMF

B178R627.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

SM 3-91 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

4. Install the unit [A] and secure it with the screws.

5. Unwind the harness and connect it.

6. Install the bushing.

7. Connect the toner supply pipe and the waste toner collection pipe [B].

8. Check that the pipes [C] do not comeoff the unit.

9. Attach the toner path cover andsecure it with screws.

10. Reassemble the machine.

B178R628.WMF

B178R629.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

B202/B178/B180 3-92 SM

C and Y Toner Supply Units

1. Development drive motor - CMY ( 3.14.3)

2. Development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)

NOTE: Remove the C and M development unit plates to replace the C toner

supply unit. Remove the Y and C development plates to replace the Ytoner supply unit.

3. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)

4. PCU 3C guide rail [A] ( x 2)

NOTE: 1) To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the M PCU guide. Toreplace the Y toner supply unit, remove the C PCU guide.

2) Pull the front plate [B] slightly to the front side.

B178R630.WMF

[A]

[B]



TONER SUPPLY UNIT

SM 3-93 B202/B178/B180

R e p l a c

e m e n t

a n

d

A d j u s

t m e n t

5. Toner path cover [A] ( x 2)

6. Branch toner path covers [B][C] ( x 1)

NOTE: To replace the C toner supply unit, remove the cover on the right-hand

side [B]. To replace the Y toner supply unit, remove the cover on theleft-hand side [C].

7. Toner supply pipe and toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

K Toner Supply Unit

1. K and Y development unit plates ( M Toner Supply Unit)

2. Development unit left guide ( M Toner Supply Unit)

3. PCU 3C guide rail ( C and Y Toner Supply Units)NOTE: Remove the Y PCU guide.

4. Toner supply unit ( M Toner Supply Unit)

B178R631.WMF

[B][A]

[C]





TROUBLESHOOTING





PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

SM 4-1 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4. TROUBLESHOOTING

4.1 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS

4.1.1 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION RESULT

SP-3-005-006 (Developer Initialization Result)

No. Result Description Possible Causes Action

0

Notperformed

Developerinitialization is notperformed.

When initializing onlythe black developer, theinitialization resultbecomes “1000”.

When done in SP mode, dothe developer initializationagain. Reinstall the enginemain firmware if the result isthe same.

Do the following when done at

unit replacement:• Check if a new unit is

installed

• Check if the unit detectionsystem works correctly

• Check if SP2-223-001 (autoinitialization at unitreplacement) is enabled.

1

Successfullycompleted

Developerinitialization issuccessfullycompleted.

-

2

Forcedtermination

Developerinitialization wasforcibly terminated.

A cover was opened orthe main switch wasturned off during theinitialization.

When done in SP mode, dothe developer initializationagain. Reinstall the enginemain firmware if the result isthe same.

Turn the main switch off andon when done at unitreplacement.

3

Vt error Vt is less than 0.5Vand “Resetdevelopment unit”

is displayed.

1. Check if the drum stay is correctly set and secured.

2. Check if the development unit is correctly set.

3. Check the following if the problem stays:

• Poor connection of connectors

• TD sensor defective

• Harness damage

• BCU board failure

• Firmware problem (engine main or MUSIC)




B202/B178/B180/ 4-2 SM


8

Toner supplyerror

During toner fill-upmode, Vt does notreach the targetvalue.

1. Check if the toner cartridge correctly set.

2. Check if the amount of toner left in the toner cartridgeis sufficient.

3. Check if toner is coagulated. (Shake the tonercartridge well if it is.)

4. Check if the connectors of the following parts arecorrectly set, and/or replace the parts.Toner attraction pump / Air Pump / Valves

5. Check if the toner supply tube is bent, caught, ordamaged.

1. Shielding tape is notremoved.

1. Remove the shielding tapeto supply developer to theunit.

2. Development unit isnot firmly installed,causing poorconnection of the TDsensor connector.

2. Reinstall the developmentunit.

9

Failure Vt cannot beadjusted within 3.0

± 0.1V.

SC370 - 373 willbe displayed.Turning the mainswitch off and onclears this SCcode. 3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace the development

unit.

NOTE: The machine starts developer initialization after you set “Enable” in SP5-999-005, 006, 007, or 008. Developer initialization automatically resumeswhen you open and close the front door or turn the main switch off and onif an error other than Error 8 occurs.




SM 4-3 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.1.2 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT

SP3-975-001 (Process Control Self-check Result)


0 Notperformed

Process control self-check is not done.

- Do the process controlself-check again.

1Successfullycompleted

Process control self-check successfullycompleted.

- -

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner,dust, or foreign material)

1. Clean the ID sensor.

2. Dirty transfer belt 2. Check the beltcleaning. Clean orreplace the transferbelt.

3. Scratched or damaged

transfer belt

3. Replace the transfer

belt.

2

ID sensoradjustmenterror

Vsg cannot be

adjusted within 4.0 ± 0.5V.

4. Defective ID sensor 4. Replace the IDsensor.

3

Vmin error Vmin is not withinthe specified range.

Vmin is calculated during the self-check. Even whenthe calculated Vmin value is out of the specified range,an optimum value is automatically used instead.Therefore, this error code does not usually occur.

If no problem is observed with image density and/ordevelopment gamma, nothing needs to be done.

If an image problem such as low image density isobserved, check the following points:

Transfer belt / Belt guide plate / ID sensor

4

Sampling

data error

Not enough data can

be sampled.

5

Gammaerror

Gamma is out ofrange.

0.3 > Gamma, or6.0 < Gamma

6

Vk error Vk is out of range.

-150 > Vk or 150 <Vk

1. ID sensor pattern

density is too high orlow.

2. Residual image ontransfer belt

3. Toner dropped fromdevelopment unit

4. Scratched or damagedtransfer belt

1. Check the image

development processand correct tonerdensity if necessary.

2. Check the transferbelt-cleaning unit.

3. Clean the developmentunit and correct tonerdensity.

4. Replace the transferbelt.

1. Development unit notcorrectly installed.

1. Check.

2. Toner density is too lowor high.

2. Check and/or correcttoner density.

7

Vt error Vt is out of range.

0.5 > Vt or 4.8 < Vt

3. TD sensor defective. 3. Replace developmentunit.

8

Samplingdata errorduring LDpowercorrection

Not enough data canbe sampled duringthe LD powercorrection (if “LDPower” is set in SP3-125-002).

See the possible causes and action for error codes 4,5, and 6.

9Forcedtermination

Process control self-check was forciblyterminated.

A cover was opened or themain switch was turned offduring the self-check.

Do the process controlself-check again.




B202/B178/B180/ 4-4 SM

4.1.3 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP5-993-007 (Line Position Adjustment Result)

This SP shows the six digits number as a line position adjustment result on the

LCD. It shows which parts of the transfer belt has an error (front, center or rear).

• The first and second digits from left-hand indicate the result detected by the frontID sensor.

• The third and fourth digits indicate the result detected by the canter ID sensor.

• The fifth and sixth digits indicate the result detected by the rear ID sensor.

No. Result Description Note

01Successfullycompleted

Data sampling was correctly done and line positionadjustment was successfully completed.

02

Out of adjustment

range(over ±2 mm)

The calculated result for line position correction is

greater than ±2.0 mm.

03 Calculation Error Distance between the lines is greater than ±1.4 mm.

04 Sampling Error Data sampling cannot be done correctly.

05Descending slopeerror (See Note 1)

06 Ascending slopeerror

The ascending or descending slope of the ID sensorsignal wave is out of specification.

(See Note 1)

07Pattern linesmismatch(less than 64 lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is less than 64lines. (See Note 1)

08

Sampling time-out Data sampling cannot be done within the allocated

time.

09Sampling starterror

The start mark cannot be detected within theallocated time.

10Pattern lengthmismatch

The pattern length is shorter or longer than specified.

(See Note 1)

11Pattern linesmismatch(over 64 lines)

The detected number of pattern lines is over 64lines.

12Magnificationmismatch

The calculated magnification value does not matchany data in the laser power frequency adjustmentdata table.

13Toner condition The machine is in the toner near-end or toner end

condition.

17Not executed The machine is not ready to do the line position

adjustment manually from the user menu.

18Potential controlerror

Line position adjustment cannot be done due tofailed potential control.

19Cyan line error The necessary mirror angle correction is outside the

adjustment range (cyan only).

26Yellowmagnification error

The detected magnification value is out of theadjustment range (yellow only).

27Yellow sub scanregistration error

The detected sub scan registration is out of theadjustment range (yellow only).

28Yellow main scan

registration error

The detected main scan registration is out of the

adjustment range (yellow only).






B202/B178/B180/ 4-6 SM

No. Result Description Note

86Yellow & cyan &magentamagnification error

The detected magnification value is out of theadjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).

87

Yellow & cyan &

magenta sub scanregistration error

The detected sub scan registration is out of the

adjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).

88

Yellow & cyan &magenta mainscan registrationerror

The detected main scan registration is out of theadjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).

89Yellow & cyan &magenta skewcorrection error

The detected skew correction value is out of theadjustment range (yellow + cyan + magenta).

Note 1: Error codes (05, 06, 07 or 10) stop sampling data at he following time: Thefront, center, or, rear ID sensor detect an error. The machine can show the

error codes for all ID sensors in some cases.

Possible causes of errors in the line position adjustment

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

The pattern does not reach the proper density.

1. Dirty ID sensor (toner, dust, orforeign material)

1. Clean the ID sensors.

2. Incorrect toner densityLow: ID sensor cannot detect thepattern lines.High: Lines may be partially blankdue to incorrect toner density and/orpaper transfer current.

2. Correct the toner density.

1

3. Incorrect transfer current

04, 05, 06, 07,08, 09, 10

3. Correct the transfer current.

The ID sensors are affected by electrical noise or dirt/damage on the transfer belt.

1. Scratched or damaged OPC drum 1. Replace PCU

2. Scratched or damaged transfer belt 2. Replace transfer belt

3. Dirty transfer belt 3. Clean or replace transfer belt

4. High voltage leak in transfer unit 4. Fix the high voltage leak

5. Residual image on transfer belt 5. Check transfer belt cleaning andclean the belt

6. Toner dropped from developmentunit 6. Clean the development unit andadjust the toner density

2

7. Carrier dropped from developmentunit

02, 03, 04, 05,06, 10, 11, 12

7. Clean the development unit andadjust the toner density

The transfer belt is covered with toner.3

Development does not work correctly. All error codes Check all units and high voltagecable connectors.

None of the patterns are developed.4

Development does not work correctly. 09, 04 Check all units and high voltagecable connectors.

Some of the patterns are not developed;5

Development does not work correctly. 07, 08 Check all units and high voltage

cable connectors.




SM 4-7 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Possible CausePossible

Error CodeAction

The machine is not in the condition to execute the line position adjustment;

The machine is in the toner near endor end condition.

13 Replenish toner.

The machine is not ready to do theline position adjustment manually fromthe user menu.

17 Wait until machine goes to the readycondition from the energy saver orauto off mode.

6

Line position adjustment cannot bedone due to failed potential control.

18 Fix the problem causing the potentialcontrol error.

The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (1)7

No error code shows. However, themachine continues to show“execution” on the screen.In addition, the green LED on theBICU stays on or off under thefollowing condition.

1. The MUSIC CPU resets due toelectrical noise generated by a highvoltage leak on a damaged OPCdrum.

1. Fix the bias leak and/or replacePCU

The MUSIC CPU is abnormal (2)8

No error code shows. However, themachine continues to show“execution” on the screen.

The green LED on the BICU keepsblinking faintly (this is normal) evenunder the following conditions:

1. Poor connection between the tonercartridge detection board and thememory chip on the toner cartridge

2. The memory chip on the tonercartridge fails.

1. Check the connection betweenthe detection board and memorychip.

2. Replace the toner cartridge.







SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

B202/B178/B180/ 4-10 SM

4.3 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

4.3.1 SUMMARY

Section 4.4 shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter(not controller errors) are put into four types. The type is determined by their resetprocedures. The table shows the classification of the SC codes.

Key Definition Reset Procedure

Controllererrors

CTLThe error has occurred in thecontroller.

See “Troubleshooting Procedure” inthe table.

AThe error involves the fusing unit.The machine operation is disabled.The user cannot reset the error.

Turn the main switch off and on.Reset the SC (set SP5-810-1). Turnthe main switch off and on.

B

The error involves one or somespecific units. The machineoperates as usual, excluding the

related units.

Turn the operation switch off andon.

CThe error is logged. The SC-codehistory is updated. The machineoperates as usual.

The SC will not show. Only the SChistory is updated.

Othererrors

D

The machine operation is disabled.You can reset the machine byturning the operation switch or mainswitch off and on. If the error occursagain, the same SC code isdisplayed.

Turn the operation switch or mainpower switch off and on.

After you turn the main switch off, wait for one second or more before you turn the

main switch on ( SC 672). All SCs are logged. The print log data (SP5-990-004)in SP mode can check the latest 10 SC codes detected and total counters whenthe SC code is detected.

NOTE: 1) If the problem is related to electrical circuit boards, first disconnect thenreconnect the connectors before you replace the PCBs.

2) If the problem is related to a motor lock, first check the mechanical loadbefore you replace motors or sensors.



SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS

SM 4-11 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

SC Code Classification

The table shows the classification of the SC codes:

Class 1 Section SC Code Detailed section

100 - Scanner1XX Scanning 190 - Unique for a specific model

200 - Polygon motor

220 - Synchronization control

230 - FGATE signal related

240 - LD control

260 - Magnification

2XX Laser exposure

280 - Unique for a specific model

300 - Charge

330 - Drum potential

350 - Development3XX Image development 1


400 - Image transfer

420 - Paper separation430 - Cleaning

440 - Around drum

460 - Unit

4XX Image development 2

480 - Others

500 - Paper feed

515 - Duplex5XX Paper feed / Fusing

520 - Paper transport

530 - Fan motor

540 - Fusing

560 - Others5XX Paper feed / Fusing


600 - Electrical counters620 - Mechanical counters

630 - Account control

640 - CSS

650 - Network

670 - Internal data processing

6XX Communication


700 - Original handling

720 - Two-tray finisher7XX Peripherals

740 - Booklet finisher

800 - Error after ready condition

820 - Diagnostics error

860 - Hard disk8XX Controller


900 - Counter

920 - Memory9XX Others

990 - Others



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-12

4.4 SC TABLE

SC No. Item Definition Possible CauseRelated

SCsTrouble

SC 101 Exposure lamp

error

• The standard white level is

not correctly detected whenscanning the shading plate.(The shading data peakdoes not reach the specifiedthreshold)

• Exposure lamp

defective• Lamp stabilizer

defective

• Exposure lampconnector defective

• Standard white platedirty

• Scanner mirror orscanner lens out ofposition or dirty

• SBU defective

1. Turn the ma

2. Turn the po3. Check and

mirror(s) an4. Check and 5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

scanner len8. Replace the

SC 120 Scanner homeposition error 1

• The scanner home position

sensor does not detect the“on” condition duringscanning.

• Scanner I/O board or

SBU defective• Scanner motordefective

• Harness betweenscanner I/O boardand scanner motordisconnected

• Scanner HP sensordefective

• Harness betweenSBU and HP sensordisconnected

• Scanner wire, timing

belt, pulley, orcarriage defective

SC 121and 122

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c

the scannermotor.

3. Check the cthe SBU an

4. Replace theboard.

5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

• Scanne

• Timing

• Pulley

• Carriag



SM 4-13


SCsTrouble

SC 121 Scanner homeposition error 2

• The scanner home positionsensor does not detect the“off” condition during

scanning.

• Scanner I/O board orSBU defective

• Scanner motor

defective• Harness between

scanner I/O boardand scanner motordisconnected

• Scanner HP sensordefective

• Harness betweenSBU and HP sensordisconnected

• Scanner wire, timingbelt, pulley, orcarriage defective

SC 120and 122


the scanner

motor.3. Check the cthe SBU an

4. Replace theboard.


• Scanne

• Timing

• Pulley

• Carriag

SC141-001

Black leveldetection error

• The black level cannot beadjusted within the targetvalue during the zero clampafter the home positiondetection.

• Defective SBU 1. Replace the

SC141-002

Black leveldetection error

• The black level cannot beadjusted within the targetvalue during the zero clampafter the AGC.

• Defective SBU 1. Replace the

SC 142 White leveldetection error

• The white level cannot beadjusted within the targetduring auto gain control.

• Dirty exposure glassor optics section

• SBU board defective

• IPU board defective• Exposure lampdefective

• Lamp stabilizerdefective

1. Turn on the2. Clean the e

mirrors, an3. Check if the

during init4. Check the h

between S5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-14


SCsTrouble

SC 144 SBUcommunicationerror

• The SBU hardware isinconsistent with thesoftware.

• Defective SBUhardware

• Incorrect software

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Update the

SC 161 IPU error • After the command iswritten into the DFID self-diagnosis startup register,the correct value is notstored in the register in thespecified duration.NOTE: This error isdetected when the mainswitch is turned on.

• After the negate interruptionof FGATE occurs, IPU is notrecognized in the specifiedduration.

NOTE: This error isdetected during scanningoperations.

• IPU board defective(defective connectionbetween ASIC andDFID, or DefectiveLSYNC)

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 195 Serial NumberMismatch

• Serial number stored in thememory does not have thecorrect code.

• NVRAM defective

• BCU replaced withoutoriginal NVRAM

• Incorrect DIP-switchsetting

Open the fronmain switch. Cwith SP5-811-If the stored secontact your sFor DIP-switch5.10.



SM 4-15


SCsTrouble

SC 201 Polygon motorerror

• The polygon mirror motordoes not reach the targetedoperating speed within 10

seconds after turning on.• The lock signal does notbecome high within 3seconds after turning off thepolygon motor.

• The lock signal does notbecome low within 0.2second after the polygonmotor reaches the targetedoperating speed.

• Polygon mirror motorerror

• Abnormal GAVD

behavior• Cable disconnection

SC 221-1 to 4

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Replace the

SC 220 Synch.detection signalerror 1

220-001: Y220-002: M220-003: C220-004: K0220-005: K1

The front (for K&Y) or rear (forC&M) laser synchronizingdetector board, (used to

determine the start timing oflaser writing), does not send asignal while the polygon motoroperates normally and the LDis on.

• Disconnection of thecable between front(K&Y) or rear (C&M)

synchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (K&Y) or rear(C&M) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective LD unit

• Defective BCU

• Defective +5VLDcircuit


front (for K&

synchroniziLD unit.

3. Check or reor rear (for detector bo

4. Replace the(for C&M) sboard.




SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-16


SCsTrouble

SC 221 Synch.detection signalerror 2

221-001: Y221-002: M221-003: C221-004: K

Main scan length detection isnot correctly completed tenconsecutive times.

The front (for C&M) or rear (forK&Y) laser synchronizingdetector boards are used forthe main scan lengthdetection, which automaticallycorrects the main-scanmagnification.

• Damaged ordisconnected cablebetween front (C&M)

or rear (K&Y) lasersynchronizingdetector board andthe LD unit

• Incorrect installationof front (C&M) or rear(K&Y) synchronizingdetector board (thebeam does not targetthe photo detector.)

• Defective front (C&M)or rear (K&Y)synchronizing

detector board• Defective LD unit

After doing on jobs or more tshows:

1. Turn the ma2. Check or reconnecting K&Y) synchand the LD

3. Check or reor rear (for detector bo

4. Replace the(for K&Y) syboard.

5. Replace the6. Replace the

Do the followinmeasure if yousynch. detecto

• Disable ma(SP 2-919-0



SM 4-17


SCsTrouble

SC 230 FGATE error230-001: Y230-002: M

230-003: C230-004: K

The BCU generates theFGATE signal based on theregistration sensor ON timing.

Then it sends the signal to theLD units. The LD units send afeedback signal to the BCU.When the LD units startemitting laser beams, thefeedback signal changes fromHigh to Low.

The SC code generates whenthe BCU receives no feedbacksignal (stays High) from the LDunit 1 second after paperreaches the position where the

laser should start writing.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU• Defective LD unit


units and th


SC 231 FGATE timeout231-001: Y231-002: M231-003: C231-004: K

When LD units emit laserbeams to print a job, thefeedback signal stays Low.The signal becomes High afterlaser exposure for a page iscompleted. The SC code isdetected in the followingcases:

• When the feedback signalstays Low 7 seconds aftercompleting the laserexposure, or

• When the feedback signalstays Low until the laserexposure timing for the nextpage in multi-page printmode.

• Poor connectionbetween BCU and LDunits

• Defective BCU

• Defective LD unit


units and th3. Replace the4. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-18


SCsTrouble

SC 240 LD over240-001: Y240-002: M

240-003: C240-004: K

The power supply for the LDunit exceeds 110 mA.

• LD worn out(current/light outputcharacteristics have

changed.)• LD broken (shortcircuit)

1. Replace the

SC 260 LD HP sensornot switched on(for K only)

During homing, it takes morethan five seconds to switch theHP sensor on (the sensoractuator does not cover thesensor).

• Defective motor

• Defective sensor

• Mechanical problemwhen switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit

1. Check the sthe LD posi


sensor.4. Check and/

SC 261 LD HP sensornot switched off

(for K only)

After the laser beam pitch ischanged, it takes more than

five seconds for the HP sensorto switch off.

• Defective motor


• Mechanical problemwhen switching theactuator

• Brown fuse (FU81) onthe Power supply unit

1. Check the sthe LD posi

2. Replace the3. Replace thesensor.

4. Check and/



SM 4-19


SCsTrouble

SC 285 Line positionadjustment(MUSIC) error

Line position adjustment failsfour consecutive times.

• Pattern samplingerror due toinsufficient image

density of patternsused for theadjustment

• Inconsistency in thesampling line positionadjustment patterndue to dust on thepattern, damage tothe OPC drum,damage or tonerdropped on thetransfer belt, or a dirtyor defective ID sensor

1. Check and causes low

2. Clean or re

and/or the I3. Replace thedevelopmendrop on the

SC 370 TD sensor [K]: Adjustmenterror

SC 371 TD sensor [Y]: Adjustmenterror

SC 372 TD sensor [C]: Adjustmenterror

SC 373 TD sensor [M] : Adjustmenterror

During the developerinitialization, the output valueof the TD sensor is out of the

adjustment range (X ± 0.2V).

NOTE: “X” is adjusted withSP3-006-005.

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the re

unit.3. Replace the

developmen

SC 374 Vt error [K]SC 375 Vt error [Y]

SC 376 Vt error [C]

SC 377 Vt error [M]

During the imagedevelopment, Vt value is lessthan 0.78V.

• Poor connection (TDsensor outputs is lessthan 0.5V.)

• Defective TD sensor

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the reunit.

3. Replace thedevelopmen



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-20


SCsTrouble

SC 380 Blackdevelopmentmotor error

SC 381 Colordevelopmentmotor error

When the motor speed iswithin the target level, themotor sends a lock signal

(High to Low at CN214-5) tothe BCU.SC380 is detected under thefollowing conditions:

• The Lock signal stays High2 seconds after the motorturns on.

• The Lock signal stays Low 2seconds after the motorturns off.

• The Lock signal stays Highfor more than 2 secondswhile the motor is on.

• Defective motor

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Replace the

SC 385 ID sensor VSGadjustmenterror

Vsg is the out of adjustmentrange during a process controlself-check.

Adjustment range:

4.0 ± 0.5V

• Defective ID sensor• Dirty ID sensor

• ID sensordisconnected

• Dirty drum (cleaningincomplete)

1. Turn the ma2. Clean the ID

parts.3. Check the d4. Check the I5. Replace the

SC 386 Developmentgamma error K

SC 387 Developmentgamma error Y

SC 388 Developmentgamma error C

SC 389 Developmentgamma error M

If the following conditionshappen three consecutivetimes:

• When the developmentgamma is out of thefollowing range:

0.3 ≤ γ ≥ 6.0

• When Vk is out of thefollowing range:

-150V ≤ Vk ≥ 150V

• Development gammacalculation error

• Unsuitable tonerdensity

• Toner supplymechanism problem

• Laser exposureproblem

• Image transferproblem

1. Turn the ma2. Check the p

result (SP3“1”, fix the ptable in sec

3. Print a full cSC detectiocheck if theimage qualproblem. Thdetection ag



SM 4-21


SCsTrouble

SC 390 DevelopmentBias outputerror

The high voltage supply board(C/B) checks the circuit anddetects abnormal conditions

such as a voltage leak or nooutput condition. If thishappens, the high voltagesupply board sends an errorsignal (High to Low at CN204- A18) to the BCU.

The BCU checks this signalevery 2 ms and generates thisSC code when the errorcondition occurs 250consecutive times.

• Loose connection

• Defective power packC/B output

• Damaged cable• Defective

development unit

• Defective BCU

1. Turn the ma2. Check if the

correctly co

3. Disconnect cables fromhigh voltageMeasure thmeter.

• Replaceboard if

4. If the result the high voldevelopmen

• Replacecable if i

• Replace

is dama5. Check if the

the high volthe BCU. Rharness betvoltage sup0.

SC 391 Charge AC:output error391-01: K391-02: Y391-03: M391-04: C

The high voltage supply boardsends the feedback signal(CN228-2 to 5; MCYK). TheBCU checks these feedbacksignals every 8 ms. If theaverage of the sampled data is

not within the control target 20consecutive times, this SCcode is generated.

• Power packdisconnected

• Charge receptacle orterminal

• Defective PCU biasinput terminal

• Incorrect power packB/C output

• Damaged cable

• Defective BCU

• PCU not found

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Check that

installed.4. Check the P

(the spring/

replace the5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the





SM 4-23


SCsTrouble

SC461-001

Thermistor 2error (opencircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paper

feed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is less than -30°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that thecircuit is open and shows thisSC code.

• Thermistor 2defective

• Cable connection

error• BCU defect

1. Check the c2. Replace the4. Replace the

SC461-002

Thermistor 2error (shortcircuit)

When the temperaturedetected by the thermistor 2,which is at the right (paperfeed section) side of the laseroptics unit, is higher than 70°Cfor 10 seconds consecutively,the BCU determines that the

circuit is shorted and showsthis SC code

• Thermistor 2defective

• Cable connectionerror

• BCU defect

1. Check the c2. Replace the3. Replace the

SC 471 Transfer beltH.P. error

The transfer belt HP sensorsignal does not change fromLow to High (home position) orvice-versa 1 second after thetransfer belt contact motorturns on.

• Transfer belt unit notset correctly

• Defective transfer beltH.P. sensor and/ortransfer belt sensor

• Defective transfer beltcontact motor

• Transfer belt unitproblem

1. Turn the ma2. Reset the tr3. Clean or re

sensor.4. Replace the

motor.5. Check the c

mechanism

SC 481 Waste tonervibrator error

The waste toner vibrator doesnot operate.

• Loose connector

• Defective motor






SM 4-25


SCsTrouble

SC503-01

Tray 3 error

(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

For the paper feed unit:

When the tray lift motor isturned on, (if the upper limit is

not detected within 18seconds), the machine asksthe user to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs threeconsecutive times, the SC isgenerated.

For the LCT:

This SC is generated underthe following conditions:

• If the upper or lower limit isnot detected within 15seconds when the tray lift

motor is turned on to lift upor lower the tray

• If the paper stack is nottransported within a specificnumber of pulses after thetray motor and stacktransport clutch turn on totransport the paper stack

• If the end fence homeposition sensor stays ON fora specific number of pulsesafter the tray motor andstack transport clutch turnon to transport the paperstack.


• Defective tray liftmotor or connector

disconnection• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection

For the LCT:

• Defective stacktransport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection

• Defective upper limitsensor or connectordisconnection

• Defective tray liftmotor or connectordisconnection

1. Turn the ma2. Check the c3. Check and/

component



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-26


SCsTrouble

SC503-02

Tray 3 error

(Paper FeedUnit or LCT)

• This SC is generated if thefollowing condition occurs 3consecutive times.


When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is alreadydetected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.

If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.

For the LCT:

When the main switch isturned on or when the LCT isset, if the end fence is not inthe home position (homeposition sensor ON), the traylift motor stops.


• Defective tray liftmotor or connector

disconnection• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection

For the LCT:

• Defective stacktransport clutch orconnectordisconnection

• Defective tray motoror connectordisconnection

• Defective end fencehome position sensoror connectordisconnection


component

SC504-01

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the tray lift motor isturned on, (if the upper limit isnot detected within 18seconds), the machine asksthe user to reset the tray. If thiscondition occurs three

consecutive times, the SC isgenerated.


• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection


component



SM 4-27


SCsTrouble

SC504-02

Tray 4 error (3Tray PaperFeed Unit)

When the main switch isturned or when the tray is setand if the upper limit is already

detected, the lift motor turns onto lower the bottom plate untilthe lift sensor goes off.

If the motor turns on for 7seconds or more, the machineasks the user to reset the tray.If this condition occurs 3consecutive times, this SC isgenerated.


• Defective lift sensoror connectordisconnection


component

SC 530 Fusing fanmotor error

The BCU does not receive thelock signal (CN210-B5) 5seconds after turning on thefusing fan.

• Defective fusing fanmotor or connectordisconnection

• Defective BCU


the fusing fa3. Replace the

SC 541 Heating rollerthermistor error

The temperature measured bythe heating roller thermistordoes not reach 7 °C for tenseconds.

• Loose connection ofthe heating rollerthermistor

• Defective heatingroller thermistor

• Defective BCU

1. Check if theis firmly con






SM 4-29


SCsTrouble

SC 552 Pressure rollerwarm-up error

After the main switch is turnedon or the door is closed, thepressure roller temperature

does not reach the readytemperature within 210seconds during fusing unitwarm-up.

• Pressure roller fusinglamp broken

• Defective pressure

roller thermistor• Defective BCU

SC 542 1. Check if theis firmly con

2. Replace the

3. Replace the

SC 553 Pressure rollerfusing lampoverheat

The detected pressure rollertemperature stays at 210°C ormore for five seconds.

• Defective PSU

• Defective BCU

SC 543 1. Replace the2. Replace the3. Replace the

SC 555 Pressure rollerfusing lampconsecutive fullpower

When the fusing unit is notrunning in the Ready condition,the pressure roller-fusing lampkeeps ON with full power for300 consecutive seconds.

• Pressure rollerthermistor out ofposition

SC 545 1. Replace the

SC 560 Zero cross error When the main switch is

turned on, the machine checkshow many zero-cross signalsare generated during 500 ms.If the number of zero-crosssignal generated is either morethan 66 or less than 45 andwhen this condition is detected10 consecutive times, thiscode is displayed.

• Electrical noise in the

supply from thepower cord

1. Replace the

SC 620 ARDFcommunicationerror

• After the ARDF is detected,the break signal occurs orcommunication timeoutoccurs.

• Incorrect installationof ARDF

• ARDF defective

• IPU board defective• External noise


ARDF.3. Shut out the4. Replace the5. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-30


SCsTrouble

SC 621 Two-trayfinisher/bookletfinisher

communicationerror

SC 622 Bankcommunicationerror

• Cable problems

• BCU problems

• PSU problems in the

machine• Main board problems

in the peripherals


correctly co

3. Replace thesupplied to 4. Replace the

peripherals

SC 623 Duplex unitcommunicationerror

While the BCU communicateswith an optional unit, an SCcode is displayed if one of

following conditions occurs.1. The BCU receives thebreak signal which isgenerated by theperipherals only just afterthe main switch is turnedon.

2. When the BCU does notreceive an OK signal from aperipheral 100ms aftersending a command to it.The BCU resends thecommand. The BCU does

not receive an OK signalafter sending the command3 times.

• Cable problems

• BCU problems

• PSU problems in themachine

• Duplex control boardproblem


inverter uni3. Replace the

supplied to 4. Replace the

the inverter

SC 630 CSScommunicationerror

An communication error hasoccurred duringcommunication with the CSS.

• Communication lineerror

Logging only.

SC 632 MF accountingdevice error 1

The controller sends data tothe accounting device, but thedevice does not respond. Thisoccurs three times.


After communication isestablished, the controllerreceives the brake signal fromthe accounting device.

• Loose connectionbetween thecontroller and theaccounting device




SM 4-31


SCsTrouble


The accounting device sendsthe controller the report thatindicates a backup RAM error

has occurred.SC 635 MF accountingdevice error 4

The accounting device sendsthe controller the report thatindicates the battery voltageerror has occurred.

• Defective controller ofthe MF accountingdevice

• Battery error


accounting

3. Replace the

SC 670 No responsefrom BCU atpower on

When the main power isturned on or the machinestarts warming up fromenergy-saving mode, thecontroller does not receive acommand signal from theBCU.


• Defective controller

• Defective BCU


BCU and co3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 672 Controller-to-

operation panelcommunicationerror at startup

• After the machine is

powered on, thecommunication between thecontroller and the operationpanel is not established, orcommunication withcontroller is interrupted aftera normal startup.

• After startup reset of theoperation panel, theattention code or theattention acknowledge codeis not sent from thecontroller within 15 seconds.

• After the controller issues acommand to check thecommunication line with thecontroller at 30-secondintervals, the controller failsto respond twice.

• Controller stalled

• Controller boardinstalled incorrectly

• Controller boarddefective

• Operation panelconnector loose ordefective

• The controller is notcompletely shutdownwhen you turn themain switch off.

1. Turn the m

2. Check the board.

3. Check the panel.

4. Replace th5. Replace th6. Turn the m

second or mswitch on.



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-32


SCsTrouble

SC 680 BCU/ MUSICcommunicationerror

After the engine CPU sends amessage, the Music CPU doesnot respond within five

seconds three consecutivetimes.

• Toner cartridgememory chip looseconnection

• Memory chip problem• Memory chip cable

wiring problem


installed co

3. Replace the4. Check if thedamaged.

5. Replace the

SC 685 SBU-IPUcommunicationerror

• During data transfer, achecksum error occurs.

• During any operation exceptinitialization, the SBU sendsa hardware-resetacknowledgement to theIPU.

• Loose connectionbetween SBU andIPU

• SBU board defective

• IPU board defective

• External noise

1. Turn the ma2. Shut out the3. Check the c

scanner un4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 686 BCU-IPUcommunication

error

• After the machine ispowered on or recovering

from the power save mode,timeout occurs during BCUcommunication.

• The break signal is receivedafter the communication isnormally established withthe BCU.

• Timeout occurs while thecommunication with theBCU is retried after acommunication error.

• Board connectorbetween BCU and

controller loose• Board connector

between controllerand motherboardloose

• Board connectorbetween motherboardand IPU loose

• BCU board defective

• IPU board defective

• Controller boarddefective

• Motherboarddefective


the board c3. Check the c

controller a4. Check the c

motherboar5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the8. Replace the

SC 687 Memoryaddresscommand error

The BCU does not receive amemory address commandfrom the controller 120seconds after paper is in theposition for registration.



• Defective BCU


connected t3. Replace the4. Replace the



SM 4-33


SCsTrouble

SC690-001

GAVDcommunicationerror

690-001: Y690-002: M690-003: C690-004: K

• The I2C bus device ID is notidentified duringinitialization.

• A device-status error occursduring I2C buscommunication.

• The I2C bus communicationis not established due to anerror other than a buffershortage.


• Defective BCU

• Defective LD

controller board


4. Replace the

SC 692 GAPCI2Ccommunicationerror

• The I2C bus device ID is notidentified duringinitialization.

• A device-status error occursduring I2C buscommunication.

• The I2C bus communicationis not established due to anerror other than a buffershortage.


• Defective BCU

• Defective LDcontroller board


SC 700 ARDF originalpick-upmalfunction

• After the pick-up motor isturned on, the originalstopper HP sensor is notactivated.

• Original stopper HPsensor defective

• Pick-up motordefective (notrotating)

• Timing belt out ofposition

• ARDF main board

defective

SC 701 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Turn the ma4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 701 ARDF originalpick-up/paperlift mechanismmalfunction

• The original pick-up HPsensor is not activated afterthe pick-up motor is turnedon.

• Original pick-up HPsensor defective

• Pick-up motordefective

• ARDF main boarddefective

SC 700 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. Replace the4. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-34


SCsTrouble

SC 722 Two-trayfinisher joggermotor error

• The jogger fences of thetwo-tray finisher donotreturn to home position

within a specific time.• The two-tray finisher joggermotor does not leave homeposition within a given time.

• Defective jogger H.P.sensor


• Defective joggermotor


sensor and


SC 724 Two-trayfinisher staplehammer motorerror

Stapling does not finish within150 ms after the staplehammer motor turns on.

• Staple jam


• Overload caused bystapling too manypages

• Defective staplehammer motor


connector is3. Check if the4. Replace the

SC 725 Two-trayfinisher stack

feed-out motorerror

The stack feed-out belt H.P.sensor does not activate within

a specified time after the stackfeed-out motor turns on.

• Defective stack feed-out H.P. sensor

• Loose connection• Stack feed-out motor

overload

• Defective stack feed-out motor


feed-out H.correctly co

3. Replace thesensor.

4. Replace the





SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-36


SCsTrouble

SC 731 Two-trayfinisher exitguide plate

motor error

The exit guide plate opensensor is not activated within aspecified time after the exit

guide plate motor turns on.


• Defective exit guideplate open sensor

• Defective exit guideplate motor


and motor a

3. Replace thesensor.4. Replace the

SC 732 Two-trayfinisher tray 1shift motor error

Tray 1 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 1 shift motorturns on.


• Defective tray shift 1sensor

• Defective tray 1 shiftmotor


and motor a3. Replace the4. Replace the

SC 733 Two-trayfinisher tray 2lift motor error

• The lower stack height 1sensor is activatedconsecutively (detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts moving

up.• The lower stack height

sensor 1 is deactivatedconsecutively (not detectingpaper) for 15 seconds afterthe shift tray starts movingdown.


• Defective lower stackheight 1 sensor

• Defective tray 2 liftmotor

• Motor overload


and motor a3. Replace the

sensor.

4. Replace the

SC 734 Two-trayfinisher tray 2shift motor error

Tray 2 home position is notdetected within a specifiedtime after the tray 2 shift motorturns on.


• Defective tray shift 2sensor

• Defective tray 2 shiftmotor


and motor a3. Replace the4. Replace the



SM 4-37


SCsTrouble

SC 740 Booklet finishertransport motorerror

• The folder home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 2 seconds after the

folder rollers start to move.• The folder home positionsensor does not turn onwithin 2 seconds after thefolder rollers starttransporting the paper to thebooklet tray.

• Defective transportmotor

• Loose connection of

the transport motor• Defective folder home

position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe holder homeposition sensor


motor.

3. Check the chome positi4. Replace the

SC 741 Booklet finisherpaddle motorerror

• The paddle home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 2 seconds after thepaddles start to move.

• The paddle home positionsensor does not turn on

within 2 seconds after thepaddles start to operate.

• The stack-tray upper rollerhome position sensor doesnot turn off within 2 secondsafter the paddle motor startsto lower the roller.

• The stack-tray upper-rollerhome-position sensor doesnot turn on with in 2seconds after the paddlemotor starts to lower theroller.

• Defective paddlemotor

• Loose connection ofthe paddle motor

• Defective paddlehome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe paddle homeposition sensor

• Defective stack-trayupper-roller home-position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe stack-tray upper-roller home-positionsensor

1. Turn the ma2. Check that

paddle mot3. Check the c

home positi4. Check the c

tray upper-rsensor.

5. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-38


SCsTrouble

SC 742 Booklet finisherstapler slidemotor error

• The stapler home positionsensor does not turn offwithin 1 second after this

same sensor turns on.• The stapler home positionsensor does not turn onwithin 1 second when thestapler is coming back to itshome position.

• Defective stapler slidemotor


the stapler slidemotor

• Defective staplerhome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe stapler homeposition sensor


slide motor

3. Check the chome positi4. Replace the

sensor.5. Replace the

SC 743 Booklet finisherfront joggerfence motorerror

• The front-jogger-fencehome-position sensor doesnot turn off within 3 secondsafter the front-jogger-fencemotor starts.

• The front-jogger-fence

home-position sensor doesnot turn on within 3 secondswhen the front-jogger-fencemotor is driving the fence toits home position.

• Incorrect assemblingof the front joggerfence

• Loose connection ofthe front jogger fencemotor

• Defective front- jogger-fence home-position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe front-jogger-fencehome-position sensor


jogger fenc3. Check the c

jogger-fenc4. Replace the

position sen5. Replace the

SC 744 Booklet finisherrear joggerfence motorerror

• The rear-jogger-fencehome-position sensor doesnot turn off within 3 secondsafter the rear-jogger-fencemotor starts.

• The rear-jogger-fence

home-position sensor doesnot turn on within 3 secondswhen the rear-jogger-fencemotor is driving the fence toits home position.

• Incorrect assemblingof the rear joggerfence

• Loose connection ofthe rear jogger fencemotor

• Defective rear-jogger-fence home-positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe rear-jogger-fencehome-position sensor


jogger fenc3. Check the c

jogger-fenc4. Replace the




SM 4-39


SCsTrouble

SC 745 Booklet finisherstack-tray exitmotor error

• The stack-tray-belt home-position sensor does notturn off within 394

milliseconds after the stack-tray exit roller starts to drive

the belts. → The stack-trayexit motor retries to drivethe belts, but the stack-tray-belt home-position sensorstill does not turn off withinanother 394 milliseconds.

• The stack-tray-belt home-position sensor does notturn on within 1,084milliseconds after the samehome-position sensor turns

off. → The stack-tray exitmotor retires to drive thebelts, but the stack-tray belthome-position sensor stilldoes not turn on withinanother 1,084 milliseconds.

• Defective stack-trayexit motor


the stack-tray exitmotor

• Defective stack-tray-belt home-positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe stack-tray-belthome-position sensor


tray exit mo

3. Check the ctray-belt ho4. Replace the




SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-40


SCsTrouble

SC 746 Booklet finisherstapler/foldermotor error

• The stapler/folder motorstarts. However, thecontroller does not receive

the signal from the encodersensor within 0.1 second.

• The stapler/folder motorstarts to drive the staplerunit, and the stapler switchis on. However, thecontroller does not receivethe signal from the homeposition sensor for 0.5second.

• The stapler starts to staplethe paper. However, thecontroller does not receive

any signal from the homeposition sensor, and thestapler switch is off.

• The stapler/folder motorstarts to drive the folderrollers. However, the homeposition sensor does notturn off within 9.247seconds.

• The home position sensordoes not turn on within9.247 seconds after thissame sensor turns off.

• Malfunction of thestapler/folder motor


the stapler/foldermotor

• Loose connection ofthe encoder sensor

• Defective encodersensor

• Loose connection ofthe stapler switch

• Defective staplerswitch

• Loose connection ofthe stapler homeposition sensor

• Defective staplerhome position sensor

• Loose connection ofthe folder-rollerhome-position sensor

• Defective folder-rollerhome-position sensor


stapler/fold

3. Check the csensor.4. Check the c

switch.5. Check the c

home positi6. Check the c

roller home7. Replace the8. Replace the9. Replace the10. Replace th

sensor.

11. Replace thposition sen



SM 4-41


SCsTrouble

SC 747 Booklet finisherlift motor error

• The upper limit sensordetects the regular traywhile the lift motor is lifting

the regular tray.• The paper height sensordoes not turn off within 10seconds after the lift motorstarts to lower the regulartray.

• The upper limit sensor doesnot turn off within 10seconds after the lift motorstarts to lower the regulartray.

• The paper height sensordoes not turn on within 10

seconds after the lift motorstarts to lift the regular tray.

• The controller does notreceive the signal from thelift motor encoder sensorwithin 50 milliseconds afterthe lift motor starts.

• Defective paperheight sensor


the paper heightsensor

• Defective upper limitsensor

• Loose connection ofthe upper limit sensor

• Defective lift motor

• Loose connection ofthe lift motor

• Incorrect assemblingof the lift motor

• Defective lift motorencoder sensor

• Loose connection ofthe lift motor encodersensor


height sens

3. Check the climit sensor4. Check the c

encoder se5. Check the c6. Replace the7. Replace the8. Replace the9. Replace the

SC 748 Booklet finisherbackup dataerror

The CPU tries to write data inthe EEPROM three times, butfails to write data.

• Defective EEPROM

• EEPROM notinstalled

1. Turn the ma2. Check that 3. Replace the

SC 749 Booklet finisherpunch-unitcommunicationerror

A communication-error alarmis not cleared for 3 seconds.

• The finisher controllercannot communicatewith the punch-unitcontroller.


finisher concontroller.

SC 750 Booklet finisherpunch-unitcontroller error

The checksum in the backupdata is inconsistent.

• Defective EEPROM(on the punch-unitcontroller)

• EEPROM notinstalled

1. Turn the ma2. Check that 3. Replace the



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-42


SCsTrouble

SC 751 Booklet finisherpunch-unitsensor error 1

The paper edge and sizesensors receive the 2.5-voltlight or weaker light even when

the source emits 4.4-volt light.

• Defective sensors

• Dirty sensors

1. Turn the ma2. Clean the s3. Replace the

SC 752 Booklet finisherpunch-unitregistrationmotor error

• The registration motordrives the slide unit to therear side for 1 second.However, the home positionsensor does not turn on.

• The registration motordrives the slide unit to thefront side for 1 second.However, the home positionsensor does not turn off.

• Incorrect assembly ofthe registration motor

• Loose connection ofthe registration motor

• Defective homeposition sensor

• Loose connection ofthe home positionsensor


registration3. Check the c

position sen4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 753 Booklet finisherpunch-unit

punch motorerror

• The punch motor starts todrive the punch cams.

However, the controllerdoes not receive theencoder-lock signal for 60milliseconds.

• The punch motor start todrive the punch cams.However, the homepositions sensor does notturn on for 250 milliseconds.

• Malfunction of thepunch motor

• Loose connection ofthe punch motor

• Defective homeposition sensor

• Loose connection ofthe home positionsensor

• Loose connection ofthe encoder sensor

• Defective encodersensor

1. Turn the ma2. Check that

punch moto3. Check the c

position sen4. Check the c

sensor.5. Replace the6. Replace the7. Replace the

SC 754 Booklet finisher

punch-unitsensor error 2

The A/D inputs of the sensor

are not corrected by varyingthe D/A outputs.


• Dirty sensor

1. Turn the ma

2. Clean the s3. Replace the

SC 818 Watch-dogerror

While the system program isrunning, other processes donot operate at all.


• Software error

1. Turn the ma2. Replace the3. See NOTE

table



SM 4-43


SCsTrouble

SC 819 Fatal error

[696E] Process error System completely down

[766D] Memory error Unexpected system memory

size

• Defective RAM DIMM

• Defective ROM DIMM

• Defective controller• Software error

1. Turn the ma2. Check and/

3. Check and/DIMM.4. Replace the5. See NOTE

table.

[4361] Kernel stoperror

The cache error trap occurs inthe CPU.

• CPU cache error 1. Replace the

Kernel stoperror

Any error in the operationsystem (An error message isoutput.)

• Defective CPU

• Defective memory

• Defective flashmemory

• Incorrect software


SC 820 Self-diagnostics error: CPU [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0001]

to

[06FF]

CPU error During the self-diagnostic, thecontroller CPU detects anerror. There are 47 types oferror code (0001 to 4005)depending on the cause of theerror. The CPU detects anerror and displays the specificerror code with the programaddress where the erroroccurs.

• System firmwareproblem


1. Turn the ma2. Reinstall the

firmware.3. Replace the

When the probthe above proinformation disneeds to be fesupport cente

• SC code• Detailed err

• Program ad





SM 4-45


SCsTrouble

SC 824

[1401]

Self-diagnosiserror: StandardNVRAM

The controller cannotrecognize the standardNVRAM installed or detects

that the NVRAM is defective.


• Defective standardNVRAM


1. Turn the ma2. Check the s

inserted into


SC 826 Self-diagnostic error: RTC [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[1501] Self-diagnosticError: RTC/OptionalNVRAM

• An RTC device isrecognized, and thedifference between the RTCdevice and the CPUexceeds the defined limit.

• No RTC device isrecognized.

• RTC defective

• NVRAM without RTCinstalled

• Backup batterydischarged


NVRAM wit

[15FF] Self-diagnosticError: RTC/Optional

NVRAM

• The RTC device is notdetected.

• NVRAM without RTCinstalled

• Backup battery

discharged


NVRAM wit

SC 827 Self-diagnostic error: Standard SDRAM DIMM [XXXX]: Detailed error

[0201] Verificationerror

Error detected during awrite/verify check for thestandard RAM (SDRAMDIMM).


• Defective SDRAMDIMM



[0202] Residentmemory error

The SPD values in all RAMDIMM are incorrect orunreadable.


• Defective SPD ROMon RAM DIMM

• Defective 12C bus

1. Replace the

SC 828 Self-diagnostic error : ROM [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0101] Check sum

error 1

The boot monitor and OS

program stored in the ROMDIMM is checked. If the checksum of the program isincorrect, this SC code isdisplayed.

• Defective ROM DIMM


1. Turn the ma




SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-46


SCsTrouble

[0104] Check sumerror 2

All areas of the ROM DIMMare checked. If the check sumof all programs stored in the

ROM DIMM is incorrect, thisSC code is displayed.

SC 829 Self-diagnosis error: optional RAM [XXXX]: Detailed error code

[0302] Compositionerror (Slot 0)

The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 0 (CN5) on thecontroller is incorrect.

[0401] Verificationerror (Slot 1)

The data stored in the RAM inSlot 1 does not match the datawhen reading.

[0402] Compositionerror (Slot 1)

The result of checking thecomposition data of the RAMin Slot 1 (CN6) on the

controller is incorrect.

• Not specified RAMDIMM installed



SC 840 EEPROMaccess error

An error has occurred duringI/O processing.

Defective EEPROM 1. Replace thecontroller.

SC 841 EEPROM readerror

The EEPROM stores threedifferent data in mirroredareas.

Defective EEPROM 1. Replace thecontroller.

SC 850 Networkinterface error

The network is unusable. • Defective controller 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 851 IEEE1394interface error

The 1394 interface isunusable.

• Defective IEEE1394

• Defective controller.


board.3. Replace the

SC 853 Wireless LANcard notdetected

The wireless LAN card is notdetected beforecommunication is established,though the wireless LAN boardis detected.

• Loose connection SC 854 1. Check the c



SM 4-47


SCsTrouble

SC 854 Wireless LANcard notdetected

The wireless LAN card is notdetected after communicationis established, though the

wireless LAN board isdetected.

• Loose connection SC 853 1. Check the c

SC 855 Wireless LANcard error

An error is detected in thewireless LAN card.


• Defective wirelessLAN card

1. Check the c2. Replace the

SC 856 Wireless LANcard error

An error is detected in thewireless LAN board.

• Defective wirelessLAN board



SC 857 USB interfaceerror

The USB interface cannot beused due to a driver error.

• Defective USB driver



SC 860 HDD:Initializationerror

The controller detects that thehard disk fails.

• HDD not initialized

• Defective HDD

1. Turn the ma2. Reformat th3. Replace the

SC 861 HDD: Rebooterror

The HDD does not becomeready within 30 seconds afterthe power is supplied to theHDD.


• Defective cables

• Defective HDD



HDD and co3. Check and 4. Replace the5. Replace the

SC 863 HDD: Readerror

The data stored in the HDDcannot be read correctly.

• Defective HDD



SC 864 HDD: CRCerror

While reading data from theHDD or storing data in theHDD, data transmission fails.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 865 HDD: Accesserror

An error is detected whileoperating the HDD.

• Defective HDD 1. Turn the ma2. Replace the

SC 866 SD cardauthenticationerror

A correct license is not foundin the SD card.

• SD-card data hascorrupted.

1. Store corre



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-48


SCsTrouble

SC 867 SD card error The SD card is ejected fromthe slot.

• The SD card isejected from the slot.

1. Install the S2. Turn the ma

SC 868 SD card access

error243-252: File

system error

253: Deviceerror

An error report is sent from the

SD card reader.

• An error is detected in

the SD card.

1. For a file sy

card on you2. For a devicswitch off a


SC 870 Address bookerror

An error is detected in the datacopied to the address bookover a network.

• Defective softwareprogram

• Defective HDD

• Incorrect path to thesever

1. Turn the ma2. Initialize the

846-050).3. Initialize the

832-006).4. Replace the

SC 872 HDD mail dataerror

An error is detected in theHDD at machine initialization.

• Defective HDD

• Power failure duringan access to the HDD


007).3. Replace the

SC 873 HDD mailtransfer error

An error is detected in theHDD at machine initialization.

• Defective HDD

• Power failure duringan access to the HDD


008).3. Replace the

SC 880 File formatconverter error

The file format converter doesnot respond.

• Defective file formatconverter


SC 900 Electric countererror

Abnormal data is stored in thecounters.

• Defective NVRAM



NVRAM an3. Replace the

4. Replace theSC 920 Printerapplication error

An error is detected in theprinter application program.

• Defective software

• Unexpected hardwareresource (e.g.,memory shortage)

1. Turn the ma



SM 4-49


SCsTrouble

SC 921 Printer fonterror

A necessary font is not foundin the SD card.

• A necessary font isnot found in the SDcard.

• The SD card data iscorrupted.

1. Check that data.

SC 925 Net file functionerror

The management area ormanagement file on the HDDis corrupted.

• Defective HDD

• Data inconsistency(e.g., caused bypower failure)

• When SC 861. Follow the t

procedures

• In other case2. Turn the ma3. Initialize the4. Initialize the5. Replace the

SC 990 Softwareperformanceerror

The software makes anunexpected operation.

• Defective software


• Software error

1. Turn the ma2. Reinstall the

main firmwa

3. See NOTE table.

SC 991 Softwarecontinuity error

The software has attempted toperform an unexpectedoperation. However, unlike SC990, the object of the error iscontinuity of the software.

• Software programerror

• Internal parameterincorrect, insufficientworking memory.

This SC is not(logging only).

SC 992 Undefined error An undefined error hasoccurred.

• Defective softwareprogram

SC 995 BCU error The DIP switch on the BCU isincorrectly set.

• The DIP switch on theBCU is incorrectlyset.

1. Set the DIP2. Turn the ma



SC TABLE

B202/B178/B180 4-50


SCsTrouble

SC 997 Applicationfunctionselection error

• The application selected bythe operation panel keydoes not start or ends

abnormally.

• Software (includingthe softwareconfiguration)

defective• An option required bythe application (RAM,DIMM, board) is notinstalled

SC 998 1. Check the dapplication devices hav

install them2. Check that correctly co

3. Take necesspecific to tthe logs canoperation p

SC 998 Application starterror

No applications start within 60seconds after the power isturned on.

• Loose connection ofRAM-DIMM, ROM-DIMM


• Software problem


DIMM are c3. Reinstall the

firmware.4. Replace the

NOTE 1: If a problem always occurs in a specific condition (for example. printer driver setting, image file), the probleerror. In this case, the following data and information needs to be sent back to your product specialist.

• Symptom / Possible Causes / Action taken

• Summary sheet (SP mode “Printer SP”, SP1-004 [Print Summary])

• SMC - All (SP5-990-001)

• SMC - Logging (SP5-990-004)

• Printer driver settings used when the problem occurs

• All data displayed on the screen (SC code, error code, and program address where the problem is logg

• Image file which causes the problem, if possible



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1

B202/B178/B180 4-51 SM

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.5 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1

4.5.1 IMAGE QUALITY

Work-flowThe following workflow shows the basic troubleshooting steps for the considerableimage quality problems on this product.

No problem on patternPossible Symptoms

Start

Verification of

problem reported

from users

Ask customer to

duplicate it.No

Yes

Yes

Make copy in the

enlargement or

reduction mode.

Location of

the image problem

shifted?

Copy

Yes

Make a test pattern

in SP5-997.

Print

No

No

Yes

Troubleshoot using

the service manual

or technical bulletin.

No

Troubleshoot

depending on the

type of problem.

Image Quality?

Copy or Print?

Colour related?

A B

Vertical white dotted lines

Check the transfer bias or paper

condition.Vertical white lines on thick paper

Check the timing when the problem

occurs.

Dirty lines

Check the transfer belt cleaning section.

Poor fusing / Fusing offset

Check the paper types selected in the

printer driver.

Smeared image at trailing edge

Check the fusing unit speed.

Crow marks

Check the humidity condition and adjust

the transfer bias if necessary.

* Font problem

* Image data missing

Especially, problems

related to the above

symptoms and if no

problem is found on the

test pattern, it may be

related to the application

used or driver. Collect a

capture file for further

investigation (select

'Print to File' in the

driver).

Can the

problem beduplicated?

B146T901.WMF



TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 1 15 February 2005

B202/B178/B180 4-52 SM

(From previous page)

Check the scanner section

(exposure glass, mirrors,

scanner movement, etc.)

Yes

NoYes

No

Faint image (K)

Check the image transfer unit position lever.

Cyan/Magenta jitter

Check if the registration roller speed is suitable for the type of paper used.

Toner blastingCheck which colour is blasting and adjust the toner limit or transfer bias.

Image density change

Check when the problem is reported and follow the necessary steps.

Dirty Background

Check in which condition the problem is reported, and follow the required procedure.

Colour vertical bands/lines/dirty background

Check the OPC drum and/or development unit.

Colour shift

Check the level of the colour shift and follow the troubleshooting guide if required.

Colour lines/bands/dirty background

When the PCU/development unit is close to its life end, the developer or the cleaning blade of the

PCU wears out, causing vertical colour lines, bands, or dirty background. Check the related colour

unit and replace it if necessary.

Considerable Symptom

A B

Problem is related to

the scanner section.

No

No

All colour?

Colour missing

Can the

problem beduplicated?

Possible Symptoms

Colour shift

Check the level of the

colour shift and follow

the troubleshooting

guide if required.

Check Points

Connection of flat cable

between the controller

and laser optic housing

unit.

Mirror position of related

colour located in the laser

optic housing unit. Controller or BCU board

defective

Yes

Yes

Make a test print

from SBU in SP4-

907 in each colour.

Make a test print

from IPU in SP4-417

by selecting related

colour.

Specify the colour

that caused the

image problem.

Check the image

processing area of

the colour specified

in the previous step

Check the connection

between the SBU/IPU or

replace the SBU.

Can the

problem be

duplicated?

Check connection

between the IPU/

Controller, or

replace the IPU.

B146T902.WMF



SM 4-53

4.6 TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE 2

4.6.1 IMAGE QUALITY

The table below shows the troubleshooting procedure for the following image problems.

• Smeared image for 4C thin lines or White lines in solid image areas

• Dirty background

• Fireflies

• Crow marks

• Image density change

• Toner blasting

Subject Symptom Cause

Smeared image for 4Cthin lines or white lines

in solid image areas

4C thin lines becomesmeared in the paper feed

direction or white linesappear in solid image areas.

Spurs are located just before the fusingsection to prevent paper from touching

the fusing unit. When paper touches thespurs and the spurs do not rotate, thespurs scratch the mage.

Clean the edgposition of the

If 4C thin lines

If white lines a





SM 4-55


Crow marks When making duplex prints inlow temperature and humidityconditions, crow marks mayappear on black images,

especially in halftone areason the 2

nd side.

A charge is applied to the paper at eachcolor station in order to attract eachtoner onto the paper. Therefore, theinitial toner colors will receive multiple

charging as they pass each station,which increases the attractive forcebetween the toner and paper. Sinceblack is the last toner to be applied, theattractive force between it and the paperis lowest. Black toner moves on thepaper during transport to the fusingsection, due to discharge from the tonerto the surrounding guide plates.

Using SP2-30paper transferwhich the prob

NOTE: White if the trmuch.transfethe resimage

Image density change(1)

When the machine is tunedon in the morning (havingbeen unused for a while), theID of the initial outputs maybe relatively low or high, inwhich case the machineneeds to compensate byraising or lowering the IDduring machine operation.

When the machine is off, theenvironmental conditions can begin toaffect the machine’s developmentcapability. When the main switch istuned on, the machine starts a processcontrol self-check and adjusts thedevelopment parameters to achieve theproper development potential gapwithout adjusting the tonerconcentration. Over the course of theprint operation, the ID will then get closer

and closer to the target level.

If this is often particular abou Adjustment (S

NOTE: It takesself-ch




B202/B178/B180 4-56



Image density is too low orhigh.

If the machine has never been turned offand Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) isdisabled, the machine has neverperformed the initial process control self-

check, causing the image density tobecome low or high.

Change the se

SP3-906-3 No0 (Default)

SP3-906-4 No0 to 2550 (

• If Energy Sanon-use timfunction. ThSaver 1 is O

• With the abautomaticaprints have hours). Basvolume of 5performed f

settings areused duringstatus throumode shoulthe custome

Toner blasting Toner may blast, causingsmeared text charactersand/or lines in 2C or processblack mode (depending onthe PDL setting or type ofpaper used.)

An excessive amount of toner is used fordevelopment.

Change the to

• If toner blasin 2C, decreto 150 - 170

• If toner blasrecognized processed a

setting for PNOTE: If the to

may cabe not






B202/B178/B180 4-58


Crow marks When making duplex prints inlow temperature and humidityconditions, crow marks mayappear on black images,

especially in halftone areason the 2

nd side.

A charge is applied to the paper at eachcolor station in order to attract eachtoner onto the paper. Therefore, theinitial toner colors will receive multiple

charging as they pass each station,which increases the attractive forcebetween the toner and paper. Sinceblack is the last toner to be applied, theattractive force between it and the paperis lowest. Black toner moves on thepaper during transport to the fusingsection, due to discharge from the tonerto the surrounding guide plates.

Using SP2-30paper transferwhich the prob

NOTE: Whiteif the tmuchtransfthe reimage

Symptoms related to color

Faint image (black) Only black becomes lighter. The transfer belt position is not in thecorrect position.

Check the trantransfer belt u

Magenta and/or cyan jitter

Magenta jitter may appear at67 mm and/or cyan jitter at165 mm from the trailingedge.

If the registration roller speed is too fastfor the paper types used, the shockwhen the trailing edge has just passedthe registration roller generatesvibration, causing the jitter.

This may appear especially when usingthick paper because of its stiffness.

Adjust the regthe paper type

SP1-004-4: NoSP1-004-5: NoSP1-005-3: Th

If SP1-005-3 csetting it to “-1

1. Set SP1-00

2. Print the sa100% (-0.2

After adjuquality alsmode. Relevel is acpaper if ne



SM 4-59


Toner blasting (1) Toner may blast, causingsmeared text charactersand/or lines in 2C or processblack mode (depending on

the PDL setting or type ofpaper used.)

An excessive amount of toner is used fordevelopment.

Change the to

• If toner blasin 2C, decre

to 150 - 170• If toner blasrecognized processed asetting for P

NOTE: If the may cbe no

Toner blasting (2) Black toner may blast on the2nd side of paper under thelow temperature.

Black toner moves on the paper duringtransport to the fusing section, due todischarge from the toner to thesurrounding guide plates.

Increase the pfrom the defaudepending on

SP2-301-3 ([K

SP2-301-4 ([KSP2-301-16 ([SP2-301-17 ([

NOTE: If the may cbe no


When the machine is tunedon in the morning (havingbeen unused for a while), theID of the initial outputs maybe relatively low or high, inwhich case the machine

needs to compensate byraising or lowering the IDduring machine operation.

When the machine is off, theenvironmental conditions can begin toaffect the machine’s developmentcapability. When the main switch istuned on, the machine starts a processcontrol self-check and adjusts the

development parameters to achieve theproper development potential gapwithout adjusting the tonerconcentration. Over the course of theprint operation, the ID will then get closerand closer to the target level.

If this is often particular abou Adjustment (S

NOTE: It takeself-c




B202/B178/B180 4-60



Image density is too low orhigh.

If the machine has never been turned offand Energy Saver 2 (Auto Off mode) isdisabled, the machine has neverperformed the initial process control self-

check, causing the image density tobecome low or high.

Change the se

SP3-906-003 0 (Default)

SP3-906-004 0 to 2550 (

• If Energy Sanon-use timfunction. ThSaver 1 is O

• With the abautomaticaprints have hours). Basvolume of 5performed f

settings areused duringstatus throumode shoulthe custome

Dirty background Dirty background maycontinuously appear on theleft side (relative to paperfeed) under very lowtemperature and humidityconditions.

When the developer has deteriorated orwhen prints are made in a very lowhumidity condition, dirty background mayappear continuously.

Perform forcedor 002).The machine afollowing sequcomplete this

4. Consumeswithout ton

5. Starts tone

6. Starts proc

NOTE: It takemode



SM 4-61


Color Shift Color shift level is out of theadjustment standard.

The adjustment standard on this product

is “maximum 150 µm”.The color shift level may changedepending on a type of paper used.

Check the leveuser and followdescribed in s

Color missing Color(s) is missing on theoutputs.

• The position of 3rd mirror moves dueto the rough transportation of servicepart; and then, becomes out ofposition.

• Flat cable(s) is not correctlyconnected to the BCU board.

• When repladue to anythe UP mounit and re

• Reconnect





SM 4-63

Symptom Mode Cause

Letters are not clear whenthe background is shaded.

B&W,Text/Photo,

ACS

This symptom is based on the copiercharacteristics.

• Raise the “Sharp” l

> Copy Quality

• Specify the full-colo

• Specify the text mo

originals.

Letters are not clear whenthe background is slightlyshaded.

B&W,Text/Photo,

ACS

This symptom is based on the copiercharacteristics. This symptom tends to occurwhen the background is shaded with a rough dotpattern.

• Raise the “Sharp” l

> Copy Quality

• Specify the full-colo

• Specify the text mooriginals.




B202/B178/B180 4-64

4.6.2 COLOR SHIFT

The following briefly explain the factors causing color shifts and what to do on the machine to cor

• Temperature change causes the optical components in the laser

optics housing unit to contract, causing the main scanmagnification to change. To correct the line position, the machineautomatically does the line position adjustment when the

temperature changes by 5°C since the last position adjustment.If the line position adjustment functions correctly, no color shiftoccurs. If the line position adjustment fails (result: SP5-993-007),color lines may shift anywhere on the outputs.

• The process speed at each stage (registration roller, transfer belt,and fusing belt/roller) affects the paper transport speed. If thepaper transport speed changes during image transfer of a color,the color line being transferred shifts with respect to the color line

already transferred to the paper. The registration roller speed(adjusted by color development motor speed) and fusing belt/rollerspeed (adjusted by black development motor speed) are adjustedby the manufacturer.Paper speed may slightly change due to the type of paper used orafter replacing the parts related to the drive sections of theregistration section, transport unit, and fusing unit. (After replacingthe fusing unit, the speed adjustment should be done in the UserProgram mode.) Also, the position where color shift occursdepends on which section starts moving at the incorrect speed.

• Paper skew directly affects the color shift between the front andrear sides. There are several factors. One of them is the position ofthe side fences.

The color dthe registraspeed is ad

The bfusingspeed

The transfer motor drives thetransfer belt. The motor speeis not ad ustable.



SM 4-65

As explained on the previous page, there are several types of color shift problem. The following tafactors, action required, and the page to see for details.

Symptom Factors Action Required

1 Color shift on entire image in

main-scan and/or sub-scandirections

• Line position adjustment does not

function correctly.• Transfer belt unit has just been

replaced.

• Check the result of the line p

adjustment (SP5-993-007) aproblem if an error was detec

• Check which color lines are sblack line and adjust the SP m

registration and magnifica2 Color shifts only at the

leading edge area(sometimes causing shock jitter, magenta or cyan lines)

Registration roller speed is notappropriate.

Adjust the color development m(SP1-004-4, 5, and SP1-005-00on the process speed.

3 Color shifts only at the trailingedge area

Fusing belt/roller speed is notappropriate.

Adjust the black development m(SP1-004-001, 002, and 007, o Adjust” in the User Program mo

on the process speed.

4 Color shifts between the frontand rear sides

Paper skew on transfer belt

• Side fences are not correctly set.

• Pressure between the paperattraction roller and transfer belt isnot even at the front and rearsides.

Reposition the side fences.

Reposition the paper attraction




B202/B178/B180 4-66

Adjustment Standard: Max. 150 m

EndA

Start

Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).

SP2-103-055 (M: [K] 64.3 MHz) is ...

Execute the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).

Less than 250

Less than 2 mm

Print out a pattern with the following settings:

SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"

SP5-997-004 "Full Color"

SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Set the factory settings in the following

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003

SP2-103-055, 056, 057, and 058

Set the factory settings in the following

SP2-909-001, 002, and 003

SP2-916-008, 009, and 010

SP2-103-056, 057, and 058

250 or higher

How much do the lines shift?

Has the SP ended normally?

2 mm or more

Yes


SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"

SP5-997-004 "Full Color"

SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Do the lines shift?

Yes

No

No

Are the

transfer belt and ID sensors

clean?

Execute the forced toner-density

adjustment with the following SP:

SP3-126-002

Yes

Replace o

transfer b

ID sensor

No

The flowchart illustrates the procedur

NOTE: The allowance of color shift is 150µm

150µm.



SM 4-67

Execute the line position adjustment with the

following SP:SP5-993-002

Main-scan direction

Sub-scan direction


SP5-997-002 "1 dot grid (R)"

SP5-997-004 "Full Color"SP5-997-005 "600 x 600"

Check the transfer-belt speed with

the following SPs:SP5-993-031

SP5-993-033

A

refo

S

SS

S

S

S

A

How the lines shift?

W

Are the black

lines and color lines parallel?Which part

of the lines shift?

Yes

Adjust the main-scan registration with the

following SPs:

SP5-993-010SP5-993-011

SP5-993-012

Do the lines shift?

End

Yes

No

No

Adjust the magnificationwith the following SPs:

SP5-993-013

SP5-993-014SP5-993-015

Leading or trailing edge

Disable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:

SP5-995-020

Leading or trailing edge

Which

edges of the color lines hasshifted?

Trailing edges Adjust the development-

motor speed with thefollowing SPs:

SP1-004-005

SP1-004-004SP1-005-003

SP1-007-001

Adjust the development-motor speed

with the following SPs:

SP1-004-002SP1-004-001

SP1-004-007

Pfo

SSS

a

Do the lines shift?No

Leading edges

Enable the transfer-belt feedback

feature with the following SP:SP5-995-020

E

a

foS




B202/B178/B180 4-68

Action RequiredDirection Area Symptom Possible Cause

Output Mode SP ModePro

Normal Paper1200 dpi

SP1-004-004

Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP1-004-005

Leadingedge Color shift,especially 100 mmfrom the leadingedge.

(Refer to pattern 1 inthe "How to measurethe gap betweencolor lines"described after thistable.)

Registration rollerspeed is notsuitable for thepaper used.

Thick Paper

1200 dpi

(by-pass feed)

SP1-005-003

Check the magentaIf the registration roline appears above

Above: Speed is too

Below: Speed is too

When adjusting the steps, and check theThen, repeat this unblack is minimized.

NOTE: If the registmay appea

mm from ththe mechanthe paper p

Normal Paper

1200 dpi

SP1-004-001

Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP1-004-002

Sub-scan

Trailingedge

Color shift,especially 100 mmfrom the trailingedge.

(Refer to pattern 2 inthe "How to measurethe gap between

color lines"described after thistable.)

Fusing rollerspeed is notsuitable for thepaper used.

Thick Paper

1200 dpi

(by-pass feed)

SP1-004-007

Check the magentaIf the fusing roller isappears above or b

Above: Speed is too

Below: Speed is too

When adjusting the steps, and check theThen, repeat this ste

and black is minimiz



SM 4-69



Normal Paper

600 dpi

SP5-993-016 (Y)

SP5-993-017 (M)

SP5-993-018 (C)

Sub-scan Entireimage

Color shift on theentire image, and

the amount of shiftfrom leading totrailing edge isalmost the same.

SP mode settingis not suitable for

the paper used.

Normal Paper

1200 dpi

SP5-993-019 (Y)

SP5-993-020 (M)

SP5-993-021 (C)

Measure the gap becolors (YMC) using

Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tdot value in the SP

Correction [dots] = M

600 dpi mode: 1 dot

1200 dpi mode: 1 do

If color (YMC) has sabove value to the c

If color (YMC) has ssubtract the above v

Examples

• If the magenta lin

by 40µm in 600dpof SP5-993-017.Correction [dots]


black by 70µm incurrent setting of Correction [dots]




B202/B178/B180 4-70



Main-scan Entireimage

Color shifts on theentire image, and

the amount of shiftdiffers at front,center, and rear.

(Refer to pattern 3 inthe How to measurethe gap betweencolor lines describedafter this table.)

Main-scanmagnification is

not correctlyadjusted.

- SP5-993-013 (Y)

SP5-993-014 (M)

SP5-993-015 (C)


Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tvalue in the SP mod

Correction [%] = Me

If the color line is encorrection value to t

If the color line is rethe correction value

NOTE: Line positio Adjust” in Uto check the

scan magnchanges wi

Examples

• If the magenta linthe black line, add993-014.Correction [%] = (

• If the magenta linto the black line, of SP5-993-014.Correction [%] = -



SM 4-71



Entireimage

Color shifts on theentire image and

amount of shifts isalmost the same atfront, center, andrear sides.

(Refer to pattern 4 inthe How to measurethe gap betweencolor lines describedafter this table.)

Main-scanregistration is not

correctlyadjusted.

- SP5-993-010 (Y)

SP5-993-011 (M)

SP5-993-012 (C)


Convert the measurfollowing formula. Tdot value in the SP

Correction [dots] = M

If color (YMC) has sadd the above value

If color (YMC) has ssubtract the above v

Examples


add 4 to the curreCorrection [dots]

• If the magenta linsubtract 3 from thCorrection [dots]

Main-scan

Front orrear

The amount of colorshift at the front andrear sides becomesgradually biggertoward the trailingedge.

• Side fenceposition

• Transfer beltposition

- - • Check if the side correctly positionpaper and the sidduring paper tran

• Check if the transtension springs aattraction roller is( 3.7.4 Transfe




B202/B178/B180 4-72 SM

How to measure the gap between colorlines

Use a magnification scope to measure thegap [A] between the two lines. Measure thedistance between the same sides of the twolines. For example (see the illustration),measure between the left edges of the lines.

Pattern 1

Color shift in the sub-scan direction at theleading edge

This illustration shows that the colored(dotted) line is above the black line. Thismeans that the registration roller speed is toohigh for the paper used. Therefore, theregistration roller speed needs to be reduced.To do this, decrease the setting (percentage)of SP1-004-004, 005, and SP1-005-003. Thisdepends on the mode selected.

• SP1-004-004 Normal paper,Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)

• SP1-004-005 Normal Paper,Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s,C2b: 162 mm/s)

• SP1-005-003 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)

Pattern 2

Color shift in the sub-scan direction at thetrailing edge

This illustration shows that the colored(dotted) line is above the black line. This

means that the fusing roller speed is too highfor the paper used. Therefore, the fusingroller speed needs to be slower. To do this,decrease the setting (percentage) of SP1-004-001, 002, or 007. This depends on themode selected.

• SP1-004-001 Normal paper,Color mode, 1200 dpi (81 mm/s)

• SP1-004-002 Normal Paper,Color mode, 600 dpi (C2a/k: 125 mm/s, C2b: 162 mm/s)

• SP1-004-007 Thick Paper (81 mm/s)

A A

B178T908.WMF

B178T909.WMF

B178T913.WMF

Magnificationscope

Blackline Color

line




SM 4-73 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Pattern 3

Color shift (magnification change) in the main-scan direction

Fig. 1 and 2 shows that the colored (dotted) line has shifted away from the blackline. The amount of shift is not the same as at the front, center, and rear. Both Fig.1 and Fig. 2 show that the color grid is larger than the black grid. Yellow becomeslarger from left to right in Fig. 1. Cyan and magenta become larger from right to left.This is because the laser writing direction for B&Y is different from C&M.

Pattern 4

Color shift (registration) in the main-scan direction

Colored line shifts in the main-scan

direction. This keeps the amount ofshift the same at the left, center, andright.This is caused by incorrect colorregistration.

B178T910.WMFB178T911.WMF

B178T912.WMF

Fig. 2 (Cyan & Magenta)Fig. 1 (Yellow)




B202/B178/B180 4-74 SM

4.6.3 COLOR SHIFT AFTER TRANSFER UNIT REPLACEMENT

Do the following procedure below if the color shift level is not within the target

range (max 150µm) after you replace the transfer unit and do the forced line

position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or Auto Color Registration):

Check the color shift level

1. Make sure that OPC Refresh (SP3-920-005) has been done.2. Print out the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002).3. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper. Refer to the following table

for detailed SP mode settings:

SP5-997 (Test Pattern) SettingMode Tray

selectionPattern Color mode Resolution

Paper size

(By-pass)

Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 —

Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 —

NOTE: You need to do each adjustment with the paper type normally used bythe customer.

4. Check the tendency of color shift in the grid pattern printed in step 3. At times,a magnification scope must be used to measure the amount of color shiftbetween colors.

5. Go to the next step (fusing/registration roller speed adjustment) if the result isnot within the target.

Fusing/ Registration Roller Speed Adjustment

SP mode (sub-scan registration) reset

1. Make sure that the SMC sheets (SP5-990-002) have been printed out.

2. Reset the setting of SP5-993-016 to 021 to "0."

Transfer belt aging

1. Remove all PCUs. Place them on clean sheets of paper. Cover the drums witha few sheets of paper to keep the drums away from light. Then secure the drum

positioning plate (2 screws). Then return the transfer unit release lever to theoriginal position.

2. Perform the transfer belt idling with SP5-804-066 (Drum M M CW) for about 3minutes. (This stabilizes the transfer belt side-to-side movement.)

3. Reinstall the PCUs.

4. Perform adjustments ( 3.10.1).

5. Print a 1-dot grid pattern with A3/11" x 17" paper in 600 dpi mode.

6. Follow the troubleshooting guide if the color shift in the main-scan direction isnot within the adjustment standard.




SM 4-75 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Fusing roller speed adjustment

1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto Adjust” in User Programmode).

2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"paper.(1) Normal, 600 dpi(2) Normal, 1200 dpi(3) Thick, 1200 dpi

3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Trailing edge) if the color hasshifted within 100 mm from the trailing edge.

Registration roller speed adjustment (for color mode)

1. Do the line position adjustment (SP5-993-002 or “Auto Adjust” in User Program

mode).2. Print a 1-dot grid pattern for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"

paper.(1) Normal, 600 dpi(2) Normal, 1200 dpi

3. Do the troubleshooting procedure (Sub-scan/Leading edge) if the color hasshifted within 100 mm from the leading edge.

NOTE: The registration roller speed for by-pass paper feed is the same as fornormal 1200 dpi mode.

Line position fine adjustment for sub-scan1. Print a 1-dot grid pattern each for each of the following modes with A3/11" x 17"

paper.


selectionPattern

Colormode

ResolutionPaper size(By-pass)

Normal, color, 600 dpi 2 05 Full Color 600x600 -

Normal, color, 1200 dpi 2 05 Full Color 1200x1200 -

Thick paper 0 05 Full Color 1200x1200 A3 / 11x17

2. Check if there is any color shift from the black line by the same amount all theway down the page from leading to trailing edge. Follow the troubleshootingprocedure (Sub-scan/Whole image) if there is.




B202/B178/B180 4-76 SM

Registration roller speed adjustment (For B&W mode)

1. Input the following values in the SP modes:SP1-004-006 = (Value of SP1-004-005)SP1-007-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005)SP1-005-002 = (Value of SP1-004-005) – 0.2%

2. Print a 2-dot pattern (pattern 12) with A3/11" x 17" paper.


selectionPattern

SingleColor

Color Mode Resolution

Normal color 600 dpi 2 12 6 (Black) Single Color 600x600

3. A horizontal band may show at 60 mm (2.76") from the leading edge on A3 (11"x 17") paper. This depends on the paper used. Decrease the setting of SP1-

004-006 in 0.05% steps until the problem is solved if the horizontal band showson the 2-dot pattern.




SM 4-77 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

4.6.4 BLACK OVER PRINT

Black over print does not let unexpected white lines show when black letters orlines are printed with color background. You can enable or disable this feature from

the printer driver (default: disabled).Black over print has the following bad effects when it is enabled:

• Crispness may deteriorate because the black toner spreads out.

• More toner is consumed.

• The background color may be seen through black letters or lines.

Black Over Print Disabled

Black lines and color background areprinted as follows:

1. The color toner (for example,magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)is transferred on the paper [C].Some space [D] is left blank forthe black toner.

2. The black toner [E] is transferredin the blank space.

An unexpected white line [F] shows ifthe line position of the black toner is

not correct.

Black Over Print Enabled

Black lines and color background areprinted as follows:

1. The color toner (for example,magenta [B] and yellow [A] toner)

is transferred on the paper [C].2. The black toner [D] is transferred

on the color toner.

An unexpected white line does notshow even if the line position of theblack toner is not correct.

1

11

K

K

Y Y

Y Y

Y Y

1 M M

M M

M M

B178T920.WMF

1

K

K

1

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

Y Y Y

M M M

M M M

M M M

B178T921.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[C]



ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

B202/B178/B180 4-78 SM

4.7 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

4.7.1 SENSORS

Component CN Condition Symptom

Open SC121Scanner HomePosition

648-5Shorted SC120

Open APS and ARE do not functioncorrectly.Platen Cover 648-2

Shorted No symptom

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizeproperly. APS and ARE do notfunction correctly.

Original Width632-13

632-14

Shorted

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizecorrectly. APS and ARE do not

function correctly.Original Length-1

632-8

632-9Shorted

OpenCPU cannot detect the original sizeproperly. APS and ARE do notfunction correctly.

Original Length-2 632-3

Shorted

Open SC261LD H.P. sensor 220-B12

Shorted SC260

Open SC370/371/372/373

TD sensor

K: 210-A3C: 210-B9M: 209-A19Y: 210-A9

ShortedSC370/371/372/373 orSC374/375/376/377

OpenTransfer beltsensor

210-A12Shorted

SC471

Open

ID sensor

Rear: 228-3

Center: 228-4, 7

Front: 228-8Shorted

SC385

OpenThe Paper End indicator lights evenif paper is placed in the paper tray.

Paper end sensorTray1: 205-A5Tray2: 205-B9By-pass: 209-A15 Shorted

The Paper End indicator does notlight even if there is no paper in thepaper tray.

Open

The bottom plate of the paper feed

unit is not lifted up.Paper lift sensor Tray1: 205-A2Tray2: 205-B6Shorted SC501/502

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.

Relay sensor 205-A8

ShortedPaper Jam is detected even if thereis no paper.

Open

Paper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.

Vertical transportsensor

208-B11

Shorted

Paper Jam is detected even if thereis no paper.



ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS

SM 4-79 B202/B178/B180

T r o u b l e -

s h o o t i n g

Component CN Condition Symptom

OpenPaper Jam is detected whenever aprint is made.Registration

sensor209-B2



Fusing exit sensor 212-A7



Paper exit sensor 212-B5


Open

The paper overflow message is notshown even when a paper overflowcondition exists. This causes a

paper jam.

Paper overflow

sensor

212-A2

ShortedThe paper overflow messageshows.

OpenToner near end may not bedetected even when the toner nearend condition is satisfied.

Toner end sensor

K: 209-A2

Y: 206-A7

C: 206-A4

M: 206-A1 ShortedToner near end may be detectedeven when the toner near endcondition is not satisfied.

OpenDrum gearposition sensor

K: 213-13

CMY: 210-B12 Shorted

SC440

Open

Belt mark sensor 215-3 Shorted

Dancing control does not function.

OpenWaste toner near full messageshows, even when a waste tonernear full condition does not exist.

Waste tonersensor

213-4

Shorted

Waste toner near full message isnot shown even when a waste tonernear full condition exists. Thiscauses a waste toner leak.

NOTE: The CN numbers are the connector numbers on the BCU.



BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

B202/B178/B180 4-80 SM

4.8 BLOWN FUSE CONDITIONS

RatingFuse

115 V 220 - 240 V

Symptom when turning on themain switch

Power Supply Unit FU1 15A/125V —

CB1 — 8A/250V

No response (No power is suppliedto the electrical components.)

FU2 10A/125V 5A/250VNo response (24V DC power is notsupplied to the all electricalcomponents.)

FU91 10A/125V 10A/125V

24V DC power to the duplex feedmotor, DRB, high voltage supplyboard and fusing control is not

supplied. The LED lights. But yousee no other response.

FU92 10A/125V 10A/125V

24V DC power to the scanner unit,

finisher and duplex inverter motor isnot supplied.

FU94 6.3A/125V 6.3A/125V24V DC power to the BCU and DRBis not supplied. SC902 (NA)/ SC471(EU/ASIA) occurs.

Sub Power Supply Unit

FU3 4A/125V 4A/250VNo response (No power is suppliedto the electrical components.)

FU101 4A/250V 4A/250V12VE power to the BCU andcontroller is not supplied.

FU201 6.3A/250 6.3A/250V5VE power to the BCU and controlleris not supplied.

4.9 LEDS (BCU)

StatusLED

Blinking Stays OFF or ON

LED 3 (Red) The Main CPU functionscorrectly.

The Main CPU does not functioncorrectly.

LED 2 (Green)The MUSIC CPU functionscorrectly.

The MUSIC CPU does not functioncorrectly.

LED 1 (Yellow) The DSP functions correctly. The DSP does not function correctly.



SERVICE TABLES





SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

SM 5-1 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5. SERVICE TABLES

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

!CAUTION

Make sure that the data-in LED (!) is not on before you go into the SP mode.This LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED ison, wait for the copier to process the data.

5.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

NOTE: The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. Ifthis mode is used by anyone other than service representatives for anyreason, data might be deleted or settings might be changed. In such case,product quality cannot be guaranteed any more.

Entering SP Mode

" 1. Press the Clear Mode key.

$%& 2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.

' 3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

4. Enter the Service Mode.

Exiting SP Mode

Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.




B202/B178/B180 5-2 SM

5.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

Copy SP ...........SP modes related to the engine functions

Printer SP .........SP modes related to the controller functions

Scanner SP ......SP modes related to the scanner functions

Fax SP..............SP modes related to the fax functions

Select one of the Service Program modes (Copy, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) fromthe touch panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode.This section explains the functions of the Printer/Copy/Scanner SP modes. Refer tothe Fax service manual for the Fax SP modes.

B178S910.WMF




SM 5-3 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels, and restores the initial SP mode display.

# Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,

$ Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press

(. (The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing(. If not, justpress the required SP Mode number.)

% Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normaloperation.

& Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.

' Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.

( Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display(page).

) Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).

* Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.

B178S911.WMF

&+

+ + #+ $+ %+

'+

(+

)+

,+




B202/B178/B180 5-4 SM

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press Copy Window.2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings

(paper size, etc.) for the test print.

3) Press Start) to start the test print.4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat

from step 1.

Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.

1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before youbegin.

2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SPthat you want to adjust.

3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SPnumber that you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.

4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the itemthat you want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates andshows the below default or the current settings.

NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:

! Press" to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter

the appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previoussetting.

! Press( to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter anumber that is out of range.)

! Press “Yes” when you are prompted to complete the selection.

6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window

and select the settings for the test print. Press Start) and then press SPMode (highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode display.

7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.

Exiting Service Mode

Press the Exit key on the touch-panel.

B178S912.WMF




SM 5-5 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

NOTE: You must turn the main switch off and on after exiting service mode tomake the following settings effective.

SP Modes Related to the Engine SP Modes Related to the Controller

SP2-208-009

SP2-213-001SP2-224-001 to 004

SP5-150-001

SP5-994-001 and 002

SP5-998-001

SP5-999

SP5-302-002

SP5-801-003 to 013SP5-824-001

SP5-825-001

SP5-832-001 to 011

NOTE: If the settings of SP modes 5-993-013 to 015 are changed, these changeswill affect the next line position adjustment.

Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineercannot operate the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off.This function makes sure that work on the machine is always done with thepermission of the Administrator.

1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the UserTool and then set “Service Mode Lock” to OFF after he or she logs in:

User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > Service Mode Lock >OFF

! This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.

! The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is notnecessary to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine isturned on.

2. Go into the SP mode and set SP 5169 to “1” if you must use the printer bitswitches.

3. After machine servicing is completed:

! Change SP 5169 from “1” to “0”.

! Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completedservicing the machine.

! The Administrator will then set the “Service Mode Lock” to ON.




B202/B178/B180 5-6 SM

5.1.3 REMARKS

Display on the Control Panel Screen

The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is

limited to 20 characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on thescreen need to be abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SPmodes for which the full description is over 20 characters.

Paper TypeN: Normal paperMTH: Middle thick paperTH: Thick paper

Paper Feed StationP: Paper trayB: By-pass table

Color Mode [Color][K]: Black in B&W mode

[Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan[FC]: Full Color mode[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in fullcolor mode

Fusing SectionH: Heating rollerP: Pressure roller

Print ModeS: SimplexD: Duplex

Process SpeedL: Low speed – 81 mm/s (for all models)M: Middle speed – 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)H: High speed – 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)

As shown in the following table, the process speed (mm/s) depends on the model,the print mode (B&W or Color), resolution, and/or type of paper selected. Some SPmode settings depend on the process speed.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)

600 x 600

1,800 x 600

C2a/k: 162

C2b: 222

C2a: 35

C2b: 45C2k: 28B/W

1,200 x 1,200 162C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

600 x 6001,800 x 600

C2a/k: 125C2b: 162

C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

Color

1,200 x 1,200 81 17

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

81 17




SM 5-7 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Others

The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.

FA: Factory setting

(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factorysetting sheets enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)

DFU: Design/Factory Use onlyDo not touch these SP modes in the field.

A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the mainswitch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that thismode is stored in the NVRAM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset tothe default value. “BCU” and “CTL” show which NVRAM contains the data.

! BCU: NVRAM on the BCU board

! CTL: NVRAM on the controller board

The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SPtable in the following way.

[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric

NOTE: If “Alphanumeric” is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, thesetting of the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumericcharacters instead of only numbers. However, the settings in the bracket inthe SP mode table are explained by using only the numbers.

SP number set in bold-italic (e.g. x-001-1):

This denotes a “Special Service Program” mode setting.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-8 SM

5.2 COPY SERVICE MODE

5.2.1 SERVICE MODE TABLE

SP1-XXX (Feed)[Lead Edge Reg.] Leading Edge Registration(Paper Type, [Color], Process Speed), Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP, TH: Thick

1001

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the registration clutch operationtiming for each mode.

1001 1 Normal [K] L *BCU

1001 2 Normal [K] M *BCU

1001 3 Normal [K] H *BCU

1001 4 Normal [FC] L *BCU

1001 5 Normal [FC] M *BCU

1001 6 Thick [K] *BCU

1001 7 Thick [FC] *BCU

1001 8 OHP [K] *BCU1001 9 OHP [FC] *BCU

[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[Side to Side Reg.] Side-to-Side Registration 1002

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the laser main scan start position foreach mode.

1002 1 By-pass Table *BCU

1002 2 Paper Tray 1 *BCU


[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA



1002 6 Duplex *BCU

[-10.0 to 10.0 / 0.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

[Paper Buckle] Paper Buckle(Paper Tray or By-pass, Paper Type, Process Speed), Paper Type: N: Normal, TH:Thick

1003

Adjusts the amount of paper buckle at the registration roller by changing the paperfeed timing.

1003 1 Paper Tray L *BCU

1003 2 Paper Tray M *BCU

1003 3 Paper Tray H *BCU

1003 4 By-pass N L *BCU

1003 5 By-pass N M *BCU

1003 6 By-pass N H *BCU1003 7 By-pass TH *BCU

1003 8 By-pass OHP *BCU

[-5 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-9 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Dev. Motor Speed] Development Drive Motor Speed([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick

1004

Adjusts the development drive motor speed for correcting color shifts at the leading

edge or trailing edge area.Black Motor [K]: Adjusts fusing roller speed for the trailing edge area.Color Motor [YMC]: Adjusts registration roller speed for the leading edge area.NOTE:

! SP1-004-002 and 005 is for color mode. Fine adjustment for B&W mode can bedone with SP1-005-001 and 002.

! SP1-004-004 is for normal paper. Fine adjustment for thick paper can be done withSP1-005-003.

1004 1 [K] L Normal *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]

1004 2 [K] M *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.6 / 0.1 %/step]

1004 3 [K] H *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.2 / 0.1 %/step]

1004 4 [YMC] L *BCU

1004 5 [YMC] M *BCU

1004 6 [YMC] H *BCU

[96.00 to 104.00 / 100.00 / 0.05 %/step] FA

1004 7 [K] L Thick *BCU [90.0 to 108.0 / 93.9 / 0.1 %/step]

1005 [Dev. Motor Speed2] Development Drive Motor Speed 2([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> TH: Thick

[K] *BCU [-0.2 to 1.0 / 0.2 / 0.1 %/step]1005 1

Adjusts the black development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-002 (see the note for SP1-004). At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than forcolor mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport quality, causing thepaper to flip up at the fusing section if the same speed as color mode is used for B&Wmode. To minimize the occurrence of paper flipping up, which causes smearedimages in the trailing area, this SP mode can change the motor speed in B&W mode.

[YMC] *BCU [-1.00 to 1.00 / 0 / 0.05 %/step] FA 1005 2

Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for the B&W middle process speed.The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-005 (see the note for SP1-004). At the middle process speed, the transfer unit position for B&W is different than forcolor mode. The transfer unit position affects the paper transport speed slightly. ThisSP mode can adjust the motor speed for B&W mode.

[YMC] Thick *BCU [-0.30 to 0.30 / 0 / 0.05 %/step]1005 3

Adjusts the color development drive motor speed for thick paper in by-pass mode.The value stored in this SP mode is different from SP1-004-004 (see the note for SP

1-004).Normal and thick paper are different types of paper, and this sometime causes colorshift due to paper slippage. This SP mode can change the motor speed for thickpaper.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-10 SM

[Dev. Motor Speed3] Development Drive Motor Speed 3([Color], Process Speed, Paper Type), Paper Type -> SP: Special

1006

Adjusts the development motor speed for special paper.

1006 1 [K] L Special *BCU1006 2 [K] M Special *BCU [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

1006 3 [YMC] L Special *BCU

1006 4 [YMC] M Special *BCU

[-4.00 to 4.00 / -0.1 / 0.05 %/step]

1007 [Dev. Motor Speed4] Development Drive Motor Speed 4

[YMC] Post Card *BCU [-1.00 to 0.00 / -0.40 / 0.05%/step]1007 1

Adjusts the development motor speed for postcards.

[YMC] L [K]Thick [-0.40 to 0.40 / 0.00 / 0.05%/step]1007 2

Adjusts the development motor speed in black mode for thick paper.

[Drum Motor Speed] Drum Motor Speed Adjustment1008 Adjusts the drum speed of each line-speed mode (low, middle and high speed); thisadjusts drum speed but not transfer belt speed.

1008 1 [CL] L *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 2 [CL] M *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 3 [Bk] L *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 4 [Bk] M *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 5 OHP *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 6 MUSIC *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU

1008 8 [Bk] H *BCU [0 to 10 / 3 / 1 /step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-11 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

1104 [Fusing Control]

Control Method *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: ON/OFF Control

1: Phase Control

1104 1

Selects the fusing control method.NOTE: This mode can be used only for N. America models

Process Speed *BCU [0 to 6 / 4 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Color: Low (temperature specified by SP 1- 105-8 and 19)1: Color: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1- 105-9 and 20)2: Thick / OHP (temperature specified by SP 1- 105-13 and 24)3: B/W: Mid (temperature specified by SP 1- 105-4 and 15)4: B/W: High (temperature specified by SP 1-

105-5 and 16)5: Color Mid MTH (temperature specified by

SP 1-105-60 and 68)6: B/W: High MTH (temperature specified by

SP1-105-56 and 64)

1104 25

Selects the power-on default target fusing operation temperature.The target operating fusing temperature depends on the process speed. When themachine is switched on, it starts warming up for the process speed specified in thisSP mode.

1104 [Fusing Stand By]

H: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]1104 26

Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after the heatingroller temperature reaches the ready temperature.

P: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]1104 27Sets the pressure roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition after thepressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.

H: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 15 / 1oC /step]1104 28

Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before the heatingroller temperature reaches the ready temperature.

P: Offset Temp *BCU [–20 to 20 / 5 / 1oC /step]1104 29

Sets the heating roller offset temperature for the 1st print condition before thepressure roller temperature reaches the ready temperature.

Temp Control *BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1 /step]0: off

1: out of FD/FUS S ON

2: on

1104 31

Selects the temperature control.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-12 SM

1105 [Fusing Temperature]

(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: Special

Some settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia

H: Ready *BCU [10 to 100 / 10 / 1oC/step]1105 1

Sets the heating roller temperature for the print ready condition. After the main switch has been turned on, the machine enters the print readycondition when the heating roller temperature reaches the temperature specified inthis SP mode.When the machine is in the recovery mode from the energy saver or auto off mode,the machine becomes ready when both heating and pressure roller temperaturesreach the specified temperature.Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30) –Temperature specified in this SP mode.

P: Ready *BCU [10 to 100 / 30 / 1oC/step]Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing ready condition.Ready temperature = (Target temperature specified in SP1-104-25 or 105-4 to 30) –Temperature specified in this SP mode

1105 2

The following SPs set the target operating temperatures of the heating and pressurerollers in various modes. (The default settings are different for C2a and C2b)

1105 4 H:N [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5"C/step]

1105 5 H:N [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 160, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 6 H:N [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5"C/step]

1105 7 H:N [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 160, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 8 H:N[FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5"C/step]

1105 9 H:N[FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5"C/step]

1105 10 H:N[FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5"C/step]1105 11 H:N[FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 160 / 5"C/step]

1105 13 H:OHP *BCU [100 to 190 / 145 / 5"C/step]

1105 15 P:N [K] S M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5"C/step]

1105 16 P:N [K] S H *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 145, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 17 P:N [K] D M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5"C/step]

1105 18 P:N [K] D H *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 145, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 19 P:N[FC] S L *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5"C/step]

1105 20 P:N[FC] S M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5"C/step]

1105 21 P:N[FC] D L *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5"C/step]

1105 22 P:N[FC] D M *BCU [0 to 190 / C2a/k: 130, C2b: 145 / 5"C/step]

1105 24 P:OHP *BCU [0 to 190 / 130 / 5"C/step]

1105 26 H:TH *BCU [0 to 190 / 155 / 5"C/step]1105 28 P:TH *BCU [0 to 190 / 5"C/step] 155 for (B180)

150 for (B178, B202) 1105 29 H:Envelope *BCU [ 0 to 190 / 155 / 5"C/step]

1105 30 P:Envelope *BCU [0 to 190 / 135 / 5"C/step]

H: Slow Down *BCU [1 to 20 / 5 / 1"C/step]1105 31

Sets the heating roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing theprocess speed.Fusing temperature must be decreased when the machine changes to a processspeed that is slower than the current process speed (for example, when the speedchanges from high speed to low speed). The machine idles while reducing the fusingtemperature. When the fusing temperature becomes lower than the ready

temperature, the machine starts printing.Ready Temperature = Target temperature + Temperature specified in this SP mode.

#

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-13 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

1105 [Fusing Temperature]

(Heating or Pressure roller: Paper Type, [Color], Simplex/Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> N: Normal, OHP. MTH: Middle Thick, TH: Thick, SP: SpecialSome settings of fusing temperature depend on the destination (US or Europe/Asia).US: Setting for US, EU: Setting for Europe/Asia

P: Slow Down *BCU [1 to 20 / 10 / 1"C/step]1105 32Sets the pressure roller temperature for the printing start condition when changing theprocess speed.

1105 33 H:SP L *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 34 H:SP M *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 35 H:SP H *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 36 P:SP L *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 37 P:SP M *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 38 P:SP H *BCU [-20 to 30 / -5 / 1"C/step]

1105 55 H: MTH [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 56 H: MTH [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 175, C2b: 180 / 5"C/step]

1105 57 H: MTH [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 58 H: MTH [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 175, C2b: 180 / 5"C/step]1105 59 H: MTH [FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5"C/step]

1105 60 H: MTH [FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 61 H: MTH [FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 140 / 5"C/step]

1105 62 H: MTH [FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 155, C2b: 175 / 5"C/step]

1105 63 P: MTH [K] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 64 P: MTH [K] S H *BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 65 P: MTH [K] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 66 P: MTH [K] D H *BCU [100 to 190 / 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 67 P: MTH [FC] S L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5"C/step]

1105 68 P: MTH [FC] S M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

1105 69 P: MTH [FC] D L *BCU [100 to 190 / 135 / 5"C/step]

1105 70 P: MTH [FC] D M *BCU [100 to 190 / C2a/k: 140, C2b: 150 / 5"C/step]

[Temperature Display] Fusing Temperature Display (Heating or Pressure)1106

Displays the current temperature of the heating and pressure rollers.

1106 1 Heat Roller

1106 2 Pressure Roller[0 to 230 / - / 5"C/step]

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-14 SM

1902 [Paper Size] Tray Paper Size

Tray 1 A4/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: A4 sideways, 1: LT sideways

Tray 1 can only use these two sizes.US: 1 FA

1902 1

Specifies the paper size for tray 1.

Tray 2 B4/LG *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: B4 lengthwise, 1: LG lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for asensor output of 1101 (see section 6 fordetails).US: 1 FA

1902 2


Tray 2 A4/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: A4 lengthwise, 1: LT lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for a

sensor output of 0110 (see section 6 fordetails).US: 1 FA

1902 3


Tray 2 B5/LT *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: LT, 1: B5 lengthwiseThis specifies which size is detected for asensor output of 1011 (see section 6 fordetails).

1902 4


Fix Size *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric0: OFF, 1: ON

ON: The by-pass tray automatically detects the

paper size and orientation. The process speedis decreased to 1/2.

OFF: The by-pass tray does not detect thepaper size. The process speed stays at normalspeed.

1902 5

Turns On or Off auto paper size diction for the by-pass tray

[Fusing Idling Time] 1910

Specifies the timer for deciding whether to do fusing idling when receiving a printcommand.When receiving a new job within the time specified in this SP mode after the last job

is completed, fusing idling is not done because the fusing section was alreadywarmed up during the last job.

1910 1 Idling Time *BCU [0 to 180 / 1 / 1 minute/step] DFU

#

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-15 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Machine Temp. Cor.] Machine Temperature CorrectionTh: Threshold, Heating or Pressure roller

1912

Corrects the fusing temperature depending on the temperature inside the machine.If the temperature inside the machine is too high or low, this may cause hot or coldoffset image at the fusing section. To avoid the offset image, the fusing temperature is

corrected depending on the temperature inside machine. This is monitored by thethermistor located on the right side of the laser optics-housing unit.

If the temperature inside the machine is detected as high or low (based on thesettings of SP1-912-001 or 002), the fusing temperature is decreased or increased bythe temperature specified in SP1-912-003 to 006. Also, see SP 1-917-1.

Th:High Temp *BCU [0 to 50 / 30 / 1"C/step]1912 1

Sets the threshold for entering the high temperature condition.

Th:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 50 / 17 / 1"C/step]1912 2

Sets the threshold for entering the low temperature condition.

H:High Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1"C/step]1912 3

Sets the fusing temperature decrease for the high temperature condition.

1912 4 P:High Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 0 / 1"C/step]H:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1"C/step]1912 5

Sets the fusing temperature increase for the low temperature condition.

1912 6 P:Low Temp *BCU [0 to 15 / 5 / 1"C/step]

H: Temp Control *BCU [10 to 50 / 34 / 1"C/step]1912 7

Decreases the fusing temperature by 10 "C if the temperature inside machine, whichis monitored by the thermistor located on the left side of the laser optics housing unit,reaches the set temperature in this SP.

[Temperature. Cor. 1] Fusing Temperature Correction (Correction Timing)1913

Specifies the number of sheets to determine whether or not to apply the fusing

temperature correction.During a multi print job, the fusing temperature tends to slightly overshoot around the10th sheet and then stabilize. Temperature overshooting may cause the glossiness toincrease.To minimize the overshooting, both fusing and pressure roller temperatures aredecreased by the amount specified in SP1-914 at the number of sheets specified inthis SP mode, until the end of the job.The temperatures are decreased in two steps.Example: Middle speedFirst step (also called “Mode 1”): After 5 sheets (SP 1-913-2), temperature drops by

5"C (SP 1-914-2).Second step (also called “Mode 2”): After 20 sheets (SP 1-913-7), temperature drops

by 10"C (SP 1-914-7).

Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or lessWide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF

1913 1 Mode 1 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 2 Mode 1 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 3 Mode 1 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 4 Mode 1 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 5 Mode 1 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 20 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 6 Mode 2 H *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 7 Mode 2 M *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 8 Mode 2 L *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 9 Mode 2 H narrow *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

1913 10 Mode 2 H wide *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-16 SM

[Temperature Cor. 2] Fusing Temperature Correction (Temperature Setting)1914

Specifies the temperature to be subtracted from the targeted temperatures specifiedin SP1-105-4 to-30.

Narrow: LT/A4 SEF width or lessWide: Wider than LT/A4 SEF

1914 1 Temp 1 H *BCU [0 to 20 / C2a/k: 0, C2b: 5 / 5"C /step]

1914 2 Temp 1 M *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 3 Temp 1 L *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 4 Temp 1 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 5 Temp 1 OHP wide *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 6 Temp 2 H *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 7 Temp 2 M *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 8 Temp 2 L *BCU [0 to 20 / 0/ 5"C /step]

1914 9 Temp 2 OHP narrow *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1914 10 Temp 2 OHP wide *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 5"C /step]

1915 [Stand-by Time]

Job Receiving *BCU [0 to 180 / 60 / 10 seconds/step]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

1915 1

Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode when not receiving aprint start command after receiving a print preparation command.

Job End *BCU [0 to 180 / 30 / 10 seconds/step]0: The machine does not shift to the stand-bymode.

1915 2

Specifies the time to shift the machine into the stand-by mode after the last job iscompleted.

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-17 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Idling Mode]1916

(High speed, Middle speed)

Mode Set *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Off

1: On

1916 1

Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready just after themain switch has been turned on.

Idling Time *BCU [10 to 120 / 30 / 10 sec/step]1916 2

Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed.

Pre-Job Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Off

1: On (4 sec)2: On (Specifies the extra idling operation timeset with SP 1916 7)

1916 3

Executes the extra idling operation after the fusing unit becomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.

Idling Time *BCU [0 to 360 / 0 / 1 sec/step]1916 4Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed when special paper is usedand the line speed is 185 mm/s.

Pre Job Mode *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: H: on, M: off

1: H: on, M: on

2: H: off, M: on

3: H: off, M: off

1916 5

Executes the idling operation if the process speed of a job meets this setting(combination between high and middle speed) after meeting following conditions. Theidling operation continues until the fusing temperature reaches the printing readycondition.

! Turning the main power on! Recovering energy saver mode and off mode

! Jam recovery

! Door open

! Using Fax

L: Low speed 81 mm/s (for all models)M: Middle speed 125 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 165 mm/s (for C2b)H: High speed 185 mm/s (for C2a/k) or 222 mm/s (for C2b)

Pre Job Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

1916 6

Executes the idling operation for 2 seconds if the fusing temperature reaches the

printing ready condition when receiving a job for middle thick paper in color printingmode.

Pre Job Mode *BCU [1 to 9 / 4 / 1 /step]1916 7

Specifies how long the extra idling operation is executed after the fusing unitbecomes ready when a print job arrives at the copier.

1917 [Env Condition] Environmental Correction Condition

Time *BCU [0 to 23.5 / 23.5 / 0.5 hour/step]1917 1

The machine cancels the environmental correction for low temperature(SP1-912) after a prescribed time has passed after the machine is turned on, or,recovers from energy saver mode.

#

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-18 SM

1996 [OHP/TH Fusing] OHP/Thick Paper Fusing Temperature Correction(Heating or Pressure Roller)

Specifies the temperature for starting a print job.

The fusing section is already warmed up when the last print job was completed. Ifprints are made on OHP or thick paper at this time, the fusing temperature tends tobe higher than the target, causing exit roller marks or a paper jam in the fusingsection.To prevent this, the print job will not start if the heating and pressure rollertemperatures are higher than the following:(Target temperature specified by SP1-105-13, -24, -26, -28) - (Temperature specified

by this SP mode (default: 5"C for heating roller, 10"C for pressure roller))

1996 4 H:Print Temp *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1"C /step]

1996 5 P:Print Temp *BCU [0 to 20 / 0 / 1"C /step]

PreJob Mode *BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Off1: On

1996 6

This SP enables or disables the 30-second fusing unit idling at the start of an OHPprint job. When enabled, idling is done even if the machine is in the ready condition.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-19 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP2-XXX (Drum)

2001 [Charge Bias] Charge Roller Bias (DC or AC component: [Color], Process Speed)U: Upper, L: Lower

Adjusts the DC component of the charge roller bias in the various print modes.

Charge bias (DC component) is automatically adjusted during process control;therefore, adjusting these settings does not effect while process control mode (SP3-125 Default: ON) is activated. When deactivating process control mode with SP3-125,the values in these SP modes are used for printing.

2001 1 DC:[K] *BCU

2001 2 DC:[Y] *BCU

2001 3 DC:[M] *BCU

2001 4 DC:[C] *BCU

[300 to 1000 / 620 / 10 -volts/step] DFU

! Displays the AC component of the charge roller bias adjusted during machineinitialization or process control self-check.

! Sets AC bias in the various print modes for test purposes.

2001 5 AC:[K] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 6 AC:[K] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 7 AC:[K] H [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU 2001 8 AC:[Y] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 9 AC:[Y] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 10 AC:[M] L [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 11 AC:[M] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

2001 12 AC:[C] L [0 to 255 / 170 0 / 1/step] DFU

2001 13 AC:[C] M [0 to 255 / 170 / 1/step] DFU

Sets the target of the AC bias for black.The actual target of AC bias is calculated by the machine.

2001 14 AC Target [K] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU

2001 15 AC Target [Y] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU

2001 16 AC Target [M] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 79, C2b: 117 / 1/step] DFU

2001 17 AC Target [C] *BCU [0 to 255 / C2a/k: 78, C2b: 116 / 1/step] DFU

[TrimAdjust] Trimming Adjustment 2101

This program adjusts the trimming area (the area in which no image is created).

2103 1 front *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 2 back *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 3 lead *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]

2103 4 trail *BCU [0.0 to 6.0 / 2.0 / 0.1 mm/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-20 SM

2103 [LD Control] LD Power Control([Color Mode, Color], Process Speed, K or Color mode) P: Power, M: Magnification

Adjusts the laser power by changing the current applied to LD.

Laser power is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore, adjustingthese data has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) is activated. After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes areused for printing.

2103 1 P:[K] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 2 P:[K] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 4 P:[Y] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 5 P:[Y] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 7 P:[M] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 8 P:[M] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 10 P:[C] L C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 11 P:[C] M C *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 13 P:[K] L K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 14 P:[K] M K *BCU [0 to 1023 / C2a/k: 711, C2b: 702 / 1/step] DFU2103 15 P:[K] H K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 26 P:[0 1] M K *BCU [0 to 1023 / C2a/k: 711, C2b: 702 / 1/step] DFU

2103 27 P:[0 1] H K *BCU [0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

Main Scan Magnification ([Color], Laser Exposure Frequency)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themain scan magnification; however, this will be automatically corrected at the nextline position adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-013 to 015 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will beeffective from the next line position adjustment).NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position canbe adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case, theline position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

2103 55 M:[K] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU

2103 56 M:[Y] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU

2103 57 M:[M] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU

2103 58 M:[C] 64.3/83.4MHz *BCU

2103 59 M:[K] 57.1MHz *BCU

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]

1 dot = 20$ DFU

2103 63 M:[K] 83.4MHz *BCU

2103 64 M:[Y] 83.4MHz *BCU

2103 65 M:[M] 83.4MHz *BCU

2103 66 M:[C] 83.4MHz *BCU

[0 to 560 / 280 / 1/2 dot/step]

1 dot = 20$ DFU

2103 101 CF:[K,K] 1 *BCU

2103 102 CF:[K,K] 2 *BCU

2103 103 CF:[FC,K] *BCU

2103 104 CF:[FC:Y] *BCU

2103 105 CF:[FC,M] *BCU

2103 106 CF:[FC,C] *BCU

[0 to 1023 / 683 / 1/step] DFU

2103 107 CF:[K] OHP/TH *BCU

2103 108 CF:[Y] OHP/TH *BCU

2103 109 CF:[M] OHP/TH *BCU

2103 110 CF:[C] OHP/TH *BCU

[0 to 1023 / 635 / 1/step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-21 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[LD Beam Pitch] LD Beam Pitch 2109

Sets the beam pitch for black in 1200 dpi or 600 dpi mode.NOTE: After replacing the laser optics-housing unit, the data printed on the decal

attached to the new unit must be input with this SP mode.2109 2 Pitch 1200 *BCU [0 to 255 / 50 / 50 pulse/step] FA

2109 3 Pitch 600 *BCU [0 to 255 / 42 / 50 pulse/step] FA

2109 5 Display 1200 [0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]

2109 6 Display 600 [0 to 255 / - / 1 pulse/step]

2112 [Polygon OFF Timing 1] Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

Warming-up *BCU [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step]0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

2112 1

The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print start command forthe time specified in this SP mode after receiving the print preparation command.

Job End *BCU [0 to 60 / 10 / 1 second/step]

0: Not turned off except for Energy Saver mode

2112 2

The polygon mirror motor turns off if the machine receives no print job for the timespecified in this SP mode after the previous job was completed.

2113 [Polygon OFF Timing 2]Polygon Mirror Motor OFF Timing

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Enable, 1: Disable

2131 1 The polygon mirror motor does not turn on until the copier enters the ready conditioneven after receiving the print start command.NOTE: When a user complains about high frequency noise, enabling this mode canminimize the noise.

[LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA 2150

Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left sideof an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.

1 pulse = 1/16 dot

2150 1 Y: Area1 *BCU





2150 6 Y: Area6 *BCU2150 7 Y: Area7 *BCU



2150 10 Y: Area10 *BCU

2150 11 Y: Area11 *BCU

2150 12 Y: Area12 *BCU

[–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

2150 13 M: Area1 *BCU

2150 14 M: Area2 *BCU

2150 15 M: Area3 *BCU

2150 16 M: Area4 *BCU

2150 17 M: Area5 *BCU

2150 18 M: Area6 *BCU2150 19 M: Area7 *BCU

[–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-22 SM

[LD Pulse] LD Pulse Area Correction (Color, Area) FA 2150

Adjusts the area correction value for color shift comparing with black. The main scan(320 mm) is divided into 12 areas. The area 1 is at front side of the machine (left sideof an image) and area 12 is at rear side of the machine (right side of an image).When you decrease this value, an image shifts to the left side on a print.

When you increase this value, an image shifts to the right side on a print.1 pulse = 1/16 dot

2150 20 M: Area8 *BCU

2150 21 M: Area9 *BCU

2150 22 M: Area10 *BCU

2150 23 M: Area11 *BCU

2150 24 M: Area12 *BCU

2150 25 C: Area1 *BCU

2150 26 C: Area2 *BCU

2150 27 C: Area3 *BCU

2150 28 C: Area4 *BCU

2150 29 C: Area5 *BCU

2150 30 C: Area6 *BCU2150 31 C: Area7 *BCU

2150 32 C: Area8 *BCU

2150 33 C: Area9 *BCU

2150 34 C: Area10 *BCU

2150 35 C: Area11 *BCU

2150 36 C: Area12 *BCU

[–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[LD Mag. Pulse] LD Pulse Magnification Correction (Color) DFU

2151 Adjusts the correction value for main scan magnification.When you decrease this value, an image is reduced.

When you increase this value, an image is enlarged.

1 pulse = 1/16 dot

2151 1 Bk *BCU

2151 2 Y *BCU

2151 3 M *BCU

2151 4 C *BCU

[–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse/step]

[LD Control] LD Power Control (Color, Area) DFU

2152 Adjusts the LD power for each area. The main scan (320 mm) is divided into 32areas. The areas from 2 to 31 are effective image areas. The area 2 is at front sideof the machine (left side of an image) and area 31 is at rear side of the machine(right side of an image).

2152 1 Bk: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 108.19 / 0.01%/step]














COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-23 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s



2152 13 Bk: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.67 / 0.01%/step]2152 14 Bk: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]



2152 17 Bk: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 18 Bk: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]






2152 24 Bk: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.63 / 0.01%/step]2152 25 Bk: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.42 / 0.01%/step]








2152 33 Y: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.31 / 0.01%/step]

2152 34 Y: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.92 / 0.01%/step]

2152 35 Y: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.89 / 0.01%/step]

2152 36 Y: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.44 / 0.01%/step]

2152 37 Y: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.78 / 0.01%/step]

2152 38 Y: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.04 / 0.01%/step]

2152 39 Y: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.33 / 0.01%/step]

2152 40 Y: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.70 / 0.01%/step]

2152 41 Y: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.19 / 0.01%/step]

2152 42 Y: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.81 / 0.01%/step]

2152 43 Y: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]

2152 44 Y: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.43 / 0.01%/step]

2152 45 Y: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.40 / 0.01%/step]

2152 46 Y: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.46/ 0.01%/step]

2152 47 Y: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.58/ 0.01%/step]2152 48 Y: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.73/ 0.01%/step]

2152 49 Y: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 50 Y: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 51 Y: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.28 / 0.01%/step]

2152 52 Y: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]

2152 53 Y: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]

2152 54 Y: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.80 / 0.01%/step]

2152 55 Y: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.99 / 0.01%/step]

2152 56 Y: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.20 / 0.01%/step]

2152 57 Y: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]

2152 58 Y: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]

2152 59 Y: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.11 / 0.01%/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-24 SM



2152 60 Y: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.52 / 0.01%/step]2152 61 Y: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.98 / 0.01%/step]

2152 62 Y: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.45 / 0.01%/step]

2152 63 Y: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.88 / 0.01%/step]

2152 64 Y: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.18 / 0.01%/step]

2152 65 M: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 112.42/ 0.01%/step]

2152 66 M: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 111.23 / 0.01%/step]

2152 67 M: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.63 / 0.01%/step]

2152 68 M: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.55 / 0.01%/step]

2152 69 M: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.49 / 0.01%/step]

2152 70 M: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.48 / 0.01%/step]

2152 71 M: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.56 / 0.01%/step]2152 72 M: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.75 / 0.01%/step]

2152 73 M: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.06/ 0.01%/step]

2152 74 M: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.49/ 0.01%/step]

2152 75 M: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.06/ 0.01%/step]

2152 76 M: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.75 / 0.01%/step]

2152 77 M: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.56 / 0.01%/step]

2152 78 M: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.49/ 0.01%/step]

2152 79 M: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.52/ 0.01%/step]

2152 80 M: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.64/ 0.01%/step]

2152 81 M: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 82 M: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 83 M: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]

2152 84 M: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.96/ 0.01%/step]

2152 85 M: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.45 / 0.01%/step]

2152 86 M: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.99 / 0.01%/step]

2152 87 M: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.59 / 0.01%/step]

2152 88 M: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.23 / 0.01%/step]

2152 89 M: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.91 / 0.01%/step]

2152 90 M: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 104.64 / 0.01%/step]

2152 91 M: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 105.42 / 0.01%/step]

2152 92 M: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 106.24 / 0.01%/step]

2152 93 M: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 107.12 / 0.01%/step]

2152 94 M: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 108.05 / 0.01%/step]2152 95 M: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 109.04 / 0.01%/step]

2152 96 M: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 110.10 / 0.01%/step]

2152 97 C: Area0 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.04/ 0.01%/step]

2152 98 C: Area1 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.60 / 0.01%/step]

2152 99 C: Area2 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.79 / 0.01%/step]

2152 100 C: Area3 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.50 / 0.01%/step]

2152 101 C: Area4 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.86 / 0.01%/step]

2152 102 C: Area5 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.08 / 0.01%/step]

2152 103 C: Area6 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.29 / 0.01%/step]

2152 104 C: Area7 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.59 / 0.01%/step]

2152 105 C: Area8 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.03/ 0.01%/step]

2152 106 C: Area9 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.63/ 0.01%/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-25 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s



2152 107 C: Area10 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]2152 108 C: Area11 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.27/ 0.01%/step]

2152 109 C: Area12 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.28/ 0.01%/step]

2152 110 C: Area13 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.38/ 0.01%/step]

2152 111 C: Area14 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.54/ 0.01%/step]

2152 112 C: Area15 *BCU [50 to 150 / 99.72/ 0.01%/step]

2152 113 C: Area16 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 114 C: Area17 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100 / 0.01%/step]

2152 115 C: Area18 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.23 / 0.01%/step]

2152 116 C: Area19 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.35/ 0.01%/step]

2152 117 C: Area20 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.45 / 0.01%/step]

2152 118 C: Area21 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.53 / 0.01%/step]2152 119 C: Area22 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.62 / 0.01%/step]

2152 120 C: Area23 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.73 / 0.01%/step]

2152 121 C: Area24 *BCU [50 to 150 / 100.89 / 0.01%/step]

2152 122 C: Area25 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.12 / 0.01%/step]

2152 123 C: Area26 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.44 / 0.01%/step]

2152 124 C: Area27 *BCU [50 to 150 / 101.84 / 0.01%/step]

2152 125 C: Area28 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.32/ 0.01%/step]

2152 126 C: Area29 *BCU [50 to 150 / 102.83 / 0.01%/step]

2152 127 C: Area30 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.30 / 0.01%/step]

2152 128 C: Area31 *BCU [50 to 150 / 103.61 / 0.01%/step]

[Development Bias] Development Bias ([Color], Process Speed)2201

Adjusts the development bias.Development bias is automatically adjusted during process control; therefore,adjusting these settings has no effect while Process Control (SP3-125 Default: ON) isactivated. After deactivating Process Control with SP3-125, the values in these SP modes areused for printing.

2201 1 [K] L *BCU

2201 2 [K] M *BCU

2201 3 [K] H *BCU

2201 4 [Y] L *BCU

2201 5 [Y] M *BCU2201 6 [M] L *BCU

2201 7 [M] M *BCU

2201 8 [C] L *BCU

2201 9 [C] M *BCU

[200 to 800 / 500 / 10 –V/step] DFU

[Forced Toner Supply] Forced Toner Supply ([Color]) 2207

Forces toner to be supplied to the development unit.The toner supply clutch turns on for 0.7 s and off for 1.3 s.

2207 1 [K]

2207 2 [Y]

2207 3 [M]

2207 4 [C]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-26 SM

[Toner Supply Mode] Toner Supply Mode ([Color]) 2208

Selects the toner supply method.

2208 1 [K] *BCU

2208 2 [Y] *BCU

2208 3 [M] *BCU

2208 4 [C] *BCU

[0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Fixed supply (with the supply rates stored

with SP2-208-5 to 8)1: Fuzzy control supply2: Proportional control supply (using the Vref

values stored with SP2-224-5 to 8)

Sets the toner supply rate used when the toner supply method (SP2-208-1 to 4) is setto “0” (fixed supply mode).

2208 5 Fixed Rate [K] *BCU

2208 6 Fixed Rate [Y] *BCU

2208 7 Fixed Rate [M] *BCU

2208 8 Fixed Rate [C] *BCU

[0 to 100 / 5 / 1%/step]

Specifies the maximum possible toner supply, expressed as a percentage of themaximum amount of toner that can possibly be supplied for a sheet of paper.

If too much toner is supplied to the development unit especially for black or in the lowhumidity condition, this may cause dirty background due to insufficient agitation. ThisSP mode limits the maximum possible toner supply for black and only in the lowhumidity condition for color.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2208 9 Upper Limit *BCU#

[0 to 100 / 63 / 1 %/step] DFU

Adjusts the toner supply amount (fixed rate) when making multiple prints of pageswith low image ratio (coverage).When printing with a low image ratio, toner concentration is controlled only with Vtoutputs since pixel count is not done for low image ratios. This may cause theattraction force between toner and carrier to increase, resulting in low image densityon outputs. To prevent this, the machine counts the number of pixels and supplies a

fixed amount of toner if the accumulated number of pixels becomes greater than thespecified level.

2208 10 Low Coverage [K]

2208 11 Low Coverage[Y]

2208 12 LowCoverage[M]

2208 13 LowCoverage[C]

*BCU [0 to 100 / 0 / 1 %/step] DFU

Specifies each constant to adjust the toner supply amount. The optimum value isspecified before shipment.

2208 14 Vt Coeff[Bk] [0 to 2.0 / 0.3 / 0.01%/step] DFU

2208 15 Vt Coeff[Y] [0 to 2.0 / 0.28 / 0.01%/step] DFU

2208 16 Vt Coeff[M]

2208 17 Vt Coeff[C]

*BCU

[0 to 2.0 / 0.25 / 0.01%/step] DFU


2208 18 Img Coeff[Bk]

2208 19 Img Coeff[Y]

2208 20 Img Coeff[M]

2208 21 Img Coeff[C]

*BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.45 / 0.01%/step] DFU


2208 22 ImgCrctCoef[Bk]

2208 23 ImgCrctCoef[Y]

2208 24 ImgCrctCoef[M]

2208 25 ImgCrctCoef[C]

*BCU [0 to 2.0 / 0.1 / 0.01%/step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-27 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Toner Supply Counter] Toner Supply Counter ([Color])2210

Displays the total time that the toner supply clutch has been on.This data is stored in the memory chip on each toner cartridge.

2210 5 [K] *BCU

2210 6 [Y] *BCU

2210 7 [M] *BCU2210 8 [C] *BCU

[0 to 5000 / 0 / 1 second/step]

2212 [Toner Near/End] Toner Near End / End Detection Threshold ([Color])

When the amount of toner amount left in the cartridge becomes less than this value,the machine starts monitoring the Vt values for toner near end detection.

2212 1 Start [K] *BCU

2212 2 Start [YMC] *BCU

[0 to 1000 / 100 / 10 g/step]

Specifies the threshold for toner near-end detection.The machine detects toner near-end when the following happens 10 timesconsecutively.

Vt > Vref + Threshold

2212 5 Near [K] *BCU

2212 6 Near [YMC] *BCU

[0 to 5.0 / 0.4 / 0.1 V/step]

Specifies the threshold for toner end detection.The machine detects toner end when the following happens 10 times consecutively.Then, the machine stops printing, even during a print job.

Vt > Vref + Threshold

2212 7 End [K] *BCU

2212 8 End [YMC] *BCU

[0 to 5.0 / 0.5 / 0.1 V/step]

Specifies the number of sheets with full image coverage that can be printed aftertoner near-end has been detected.When near-end is detected, the pixels in the images are counted. The machinedetects toner end when the following happens, and the machine stops printing even

during a print job.Pixel count = 5 A4/LT sheets with full image coverage

NOTE: The setting of SP2-212-11 has priority for deciding when to stop printing.

2212 9 Pixel [K] *BCU

2212 10 Pixel [YMC] *BCU

[0 to 255 / 50 / 1 sheet/step]

Specifies the minimum number of sheets that can be printed after toner near-end hasbeen detected.However, when the following happens 10 consecutive times, the machine stopsprinting even during a print job or if this guaranteed minimum has not been met.

Vt > Current Vref value + 1.2V or Vt > 4.8V

2212 11 Min. Print *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 sheet/step]

Displays the average signal value of the toner end sensor. Printed images can beweak when the value is larger.

Each toner sensor detects the toner that is falling through the toner path beneath thetoner cartridge. Each sensor outputs “0” when it detects toner in the toner path, oroutputs “1” when it does not detect toner. The signal is “1” if toner is not passingthrough the path even though the toner cartridge contains toner. These signals, “0”and “1”, are periodically checked and used to calculate the signal average. Whenenough toner is in the cartridge, the signal average is a smaller value (“0” or itsvicinity). When toner is insufficient, the average is a larger value (“1” or its vicinity).

2212 12 sensor avg [K]

2212 13 sensor avg [Y]

2212 14 sensor avg [M]

2212 15 sensor avg [C]

*BCU [0 to 1 / 0 / 0.01/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-28 SM

[Toner End ON/OFF] Toner End Detection ON/OFF 2213

Enables or disables toner near-end and end detection (if disabled, the toner supplyclutch on time is still counted).

Use this SP only when tests are necessary under the toner end or toner near endcondition. Specify the default value after the tests.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2213 1 T End ON/OFF *BCU#

[0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Both sensors disabled1: Both sensors enabled2: Toner end sensor disabled and TD sensor

enabled

2223 [TD Vcnt Control] TD Sensor Vcnt Control

Initialization *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Disabled

1: Enabled

2223 1

Enables or disables the Vcnt Auto Adjustment when detecting a new developmentunit.When the machine detects a new development unit, developer initializationautomatically starts. During the developer initialization, Vcnt is automatically adjusted

so that Vt is within 3.0 % 0.1V.

Humidity *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

2223 2

Enables or disables the Humidity Auto Correction. This corrects the Vcnt value for thecurrent humidity. This correction is applied to both the Vcnt values automaticallyadjusted during developer initialization and manually adjusted with SP2-224-1 to 4.If this correction does not work well under certain environmental conditions or due to

a defective humidity sensor, deactivate the Humidity Auto Correction and adjust theVcnt value in SP2-224-1 to 4 (by trial and error).

Toner Fill Up *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric, DFU 0: Deactivate1: Activate

2223 3

Activates or deactivates the Toner Fill Up mode, which fills up the toner supply tubewith toner during developer initialization.This function is required only at machine installation. Although the default is “0”, thefactory setting is “1”. After toner fill-up occurs during machine installation, the settingis changed to “0” automatically.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-29 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

2224 [Vcnt / Vref] Vcnt / Vref ([Color])

Adjusts the Vcnt value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until after the next process control self-check.

To always use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply modewith SP2-208-1 to 4.NOTE: The main switch must be turned off and on to effect the setting change.

2224 1 Vcnt [K]

2224 2 Vcnt [Y]

2224 3 Vcnt [M]

2224 4 Vcnt [C]

*BCU#

[8 to 22.0 / 13.5 / 0.1 V/step] FA

Adjusts the Vref value manually.The value in this SP mode is effective until the next process control self-check. Toalways use this value for some reason, select proportional control supply mode withSP2-208-1 to 4.

2224 5 Vref [K] *BCU

2224 6 Vref [Y] *BCU

2224 7 Vref [M] *BCU2224 8 Vref [C] *BCU

[0 to 5.0 / 2.8 / 0.1 V/step]

2301 [Transfer Current] ([Color Mode, Color], Paper Tray or By-pass, Simplex or Duplex, Process Speed)Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP

Adjusts the transfer current for each color and each print mode.

NOTE: If the transfer current is increased too much, image offset may occurespecially in halftone areas.

2301 1 [K]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 2 [K]P S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 3 [K]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]2301 4 [K]P D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 6 [K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 7 [K]B S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 8 [FC,K]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 9 [FC, K]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 10 [FC,Y]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 11 [FC,Y]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 12 [FC,M]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 13 [FC,M]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 14 [FC,C]P S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 15 [FC,C]P S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 16 [FC,K]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 17 [FC,K]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 18 [FC,Y]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 19 [FC,Y]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 20 [FC,M]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 21 [FC,M]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 22 [FC,C]P D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 23 [FC,C]P D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 24 [FC,K]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 25 [FC,K]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 26 [FC,Y]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 27 [FC,Y]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-30 SM


2301 28 [FC,M]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 29 [FC,M]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 30 [FC,C]B S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]2301 31 [FC,C]B S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 32 [K]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 33 [FC,K]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 34 [FC,Y]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 35 [FC,M]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 36 [FC,C]OHP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 37 [K]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 38 [FC,K]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 39 [FC,Y]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 40 [FC,M]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 41 [FC,C]TH R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 43 [K]SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 44 [K]SP S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 45 [FC,K]SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 46 [FC,Y]SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 47 [FC,M]SP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 48 [FC,C]SP L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 49 [FC,K]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 50 [FC,Y]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 51 [FC,M]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 52 [FC,C]SP M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 57 [K]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 7 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 58 [FC,K]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]2301 59 [FC,Y]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 60 [FC,M]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 61 [FC,C]TH S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 63 [K]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 64 [K]SP D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 65 [FC,K]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 66 [FC,Y]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 67 [FC,M]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 68 [FC,C]SP D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 69 [FC,K]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 70 [FC,Y]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 71 [FC,M]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]2301 72 [FC,C]SP D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 80 [K]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 15, C2b: 20 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 81 [K]MTH H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 20, C2b: 26 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 82 [FC,K]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 83 [FC,Y]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 84 [FC,M]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 85 [FC,C]MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 86 [FC,K]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 87 [FC,Y]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 88 [FC,M]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 89 [FC,C]MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 90 [K]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 16, C2b: 21 / 1 $ A/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-31 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s


2301 91 [K]MTH D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 21, C2b: 27 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 92 [FC,K]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 93 [FC,Y]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]2301 94 [FC,M]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 95 [FC,C]MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 9 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 96 [FC,K]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 14, C2b: 18 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 97 [FC,Y]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 98 [FC,M]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

2301 99 [FC,C]MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 12, C2b: 16 / 1 $ A/step]

[Current Paper Size] Transfer Current - Paper Size CorrectionPaper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP

2309

Corrects the transfer current for paper size.

When small paper is used for printing, the transfer current flows to the drum at thenon-image areas where the transfer belt touches the OPC drum. This may cause anabnormal image due to insufficient current at the image areas.NOTE: Increase only when an abnormal image (insufficient image transfer) occurs on

a small paper size. However, increasing the current too much may causeimage offset.

2309 5 N LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]

2309 6 N A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]

2309 7 TH LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]

2309 8 TH A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]

2309 9 OHP LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.4 / 0.1/step]

2309 10 MTH LT SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.1 / 0.1/step]

2309 11 MTH A5 SEF *BCU [0.7 to 4.0 / 1.2 / 0.1/step]

[Transfer Cur.] Transfer Current - Environment Correction

2310 Applies the transfer current correction if the humidity exceeds the current setvalue.

2301 1 H Humidity *BCU [25 to 90 / 55 / 5%/step]

2402 [Transfer Ctrl] Transfer Control

C Mode Posit *BCU [0 to 500 / 170 / 10/step] DFU 2402 1

Adjusts the transfer belt position for color printing.SP2-402-1 is valid only when auto correct (SP2-402-2) is disabled (- 6.11.5).

Auto Correct *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step] DFU 0: Disabled1: Enabled

2402 2

Enable or disable the auto-adjustment of the transfer belt position.

! When SP2-402-2 is enabled, the transfer belt position for color printing is decided inaccordance with the result of the initialization processing (- 6.11.5).

! SP2-402-2 validates the setting of SP2-402-1, but does not affect the setting ofSP2-402-3.

Bk Mode Posit *BCU [0 to 500 / 130 / 10/step] DFU 2402 3

Adjusts the transfer belt position for monochrome printing.SP2-402-3 is always valid regardless of the setting in SP2-402-2.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-32 SM

2801 [PA Roller Current] Paper Attraction Roller Current([Color], Simplex or Duplex/ Reverse, Process Speed): Current Adjustment(Paper or By-pass): Paper Size Correction

Paper Type -> TH: Thick Paper, MTH: Middle Thick Paper, SP: Special Paper, OHP Adjusts the paper attraction roller current for color printing.If paper misfeeds occur at the transfer unit in color mode, check and/or adjust thepaper attraction roller current.NOTE: The magenta development section is close to the paper attraction roller.

Decreasing the current may not cause paper misfeed.If the current is increased too much, the following image problems may occurdepending on the humidity.High humidity:Insufficient image transfer in magenta due to current flow to the magenta OPC drumLow humidity:Offset image in magenta halftone areas due to paper charged positive too muchWhen adjusting the current with this SP mode, the value should be lower than transfer

current.2801 1 [K] S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 2 [K] S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 3 [K] R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 4 [K] R H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 6 [FC] S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 7 [FC] S M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 8 [FC] D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 9 [FC] D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 14 [K] B TH S *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 15 [FC] B TH S *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 16 [K] B OHP *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 17 [FC] B OHP *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]2801 18 [K] B TH D *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 19 [FC] B TH D *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 20 [K] SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 21 [K] SP S H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 22 [K] SP R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 23 [K] SP R H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 24 [FC] SP S L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 25 [FC] SP S M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 26 [FC] SP R L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 27 [FC] SP R M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 10 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 30 [K] MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 31 [K] MTH H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 32 [K] MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 5, C2b: 8 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 33 [K] MTH D H *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 12 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 34 [FC] MTH L *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 35 [FC] MTH M *BCU [0 to 50 / 1 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 36 [FC] MTH D L *BCU [0 to 50 / 5 / 1 $ A/step]

2801 37 [FC] MTH D M *BCU [0 to 50 / C2a/k: 8, C2b: 10 / 1 $ A/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-33 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[PA Current Paper Size] Paper Attraction Roller Current - Paper Size CorrectionPaper Type -> N: Normal, TH: Thick, MTH: Middle Thick, OHP

2802

Adjusts the correction, depending on the paper size.

When small-width paper is used for printing, the paper attraction roller current flows tothe non-image areas of OPC drum where the transfer belt touches the drum. Thismay cause paper misfeed due to insufficient current.To increase the current by 1.5 times, set the SP mode to “1.5.”NOTE: Adjust only when a paper misfeed occurs with a small paper size. Increasing

the current too much may cause image offset in magenta halftone areas.

2802 1 N LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]

2802 2 N A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]

2802 3 TH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]

2802 4 TH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]

2802 5 OHP LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.4 / 0.1/step]

2802 7 MTH LT SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 1.5 / 0.1/step]

2802 8 MTH A5 SEF *BCU [1.0 to 4.0 / 2.0 / 0.1/step]

[Mirror Motor] Mirror Positioning Motor ([Color]) 2908

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themirror position, which corrects the optically skewed image; however, this will beautomatically corrected at the next line position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be

adjusted manually with this SP mode as a temporary measure. In this case,the line position adjustment needs to be disabled with SP5-993-001.

2908 2 [C] *BCU

2908 3 [M] *BCU

2908 4 [Y] *BCU

[–128 to 127 / 0 / 1 pulse/step] DFU

2909 [Main-scan Reg.] Main-scan Registration ([Color])

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects themain scan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next lineposition adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-010to 012 (this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from thenext line position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be


1 dot = 20$

2909 1 [Y] DOT *BCU

2909 2 [M] DOT *BCU

2909 3 [C] DOT *BCU

2909 4 [K] DOT *BCU

[-500 to 500 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU

2909 9 [Y] 1/16 DOT *BCU

2909 10 [M] 1/16 DOT *BCU

2909 11 [C] 1/16 DOT *BCU

2909 12 [K] 1/16 DOT *BCU

[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot/step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-34 SM

2916 [Sub-scan Reg.] Sub-scan Registration ([Color Mode, Color], Resolution)

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment. Changing this affects the subscan registration; however, this will be automatically corrected at the next line position

adjustment. If a fine adjustment is required, it can be done with SP5-993-016 to 021(this affects the way that the adjustment is done, and will be effective from the nextline position adjustment.NOTE: If the line position adjustment does not work properly, the line position can be


600 dpi: 1 dot = 40$, 1200dpi: 1 dot = 20$

2916 1 [K] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 7510 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 2 [FC, K] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 15038 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 3 [FC,Y] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 10402 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 4 [FC,M] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 1136 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 5 [FC,C] 1200 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 5762 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 6 [K] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 3755 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 7 [FC,K] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 7519 / 1 dot] DFU 2916 8 [FC,Y] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 5201 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 9 [FC,M] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 568 / 1 dot] DFU

2916 10 [FC,C] 600 *BCU [0 to 20000 / 2881 / 1 dot] DFU

[MScan Lgth Det] Main-scan Length Detection 2919

Enables or disables the main-scan length detection.

2919 1 OFF/ON *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -] Alphanumeric0: Disable, 1: Enable

Interrupt time 1 *BCU [0 to 999 / 1 / 1 second/step]2919 2

Non interrupt during a job (default on)

Interrupt time 2 *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 second/step]2919 3 Interrupt during a job (default on)

[LD Pulse]

2920Enables or disables the LD pulse area correction (SP2-150).

When the "0" is selected, the setting values of the SP2-150 become 0.

NOTE: Set the "Disable" after replacing the laser optics-housing unit.

2920 1 OFF/ON *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]

0: Disable, 1: Enable

2994 [Main Scan Reg Cor] Main-scan Registration Correction ([Color])Not used. DFU

2994 1 [Y] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU

2994 2 [M] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step] DFU

2994 3 [C] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 1 / 1 dot/step] DFU

2994 4 [K] *BCU [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-35 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Motor Reset] Mirror Positioning Motor Reset2995

Rotates the mirror position motors (CMY) by 250 pulses clockwise; then by 125pulses counterclockwise. This moves the mirrors back to the initial position. Then, thesettings of SP2-908-002 to 004 are reset to 0.When the line position adjustment fails, it is one of possible causes when the mirrorposition motor locks. Performing this SP mode can move the mirrors back to theoriginal position if it locks. Then, do the forced line position adjustment (SP5-993-002).

2995 1 Motor Reset *BCU

SP3-XXX (Process)

3005 [TD Initial] TD Sensor Initialization ([Color])

3005 1 [K]

3005 2 [Y]

3005 3 [M]

3005 4 [C]3005 5 [All Color]

Initializes the developer. DFU

Result *BCU [1 to 9 / - / -]1: Success2 to 9: Failure

3005 6

Displays the developer initialization result. All colors are displayed. Values are displayed in the order K Y C M.e.g., 1 1 2 1: Initialization of Cyan failed but the others succeeded- 4.1.1.

[TD Initial] TDt Initial Setting Display ([Color]) 3006

3006 1 Vcnt Display [K] *BCU

3006 2 Vcnt Display [Y] *BCU3006 3 Vcnt Display [M] *BCU

3006 4 Vcnt Display [C] *BCU

Displays the initial Vcnt value.

[0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]

3006 5 Target [Bk] *BCU

3006 6 Target [Y] *BCU

3006 7 Target [M] *BCU

3006 8 Target [C] *BCU

Adjusts the target Vcnt for the initial setting.[0 to 5.0 / 3.0 / 0.1 V/step]

[TD Vcnt] TD sensor Current Vcnt Value ([Color]) 3007

Displays the current Vcnt value.

3007 1 Vcnt Current: K *BCU

3007 2 Vcnt Current: Y *BCU3007 3 Vcnt Current: M *BCU

3007 4 Vcnt Current: C *BCU

[0 to 24.0 / - / 0.1 V/step]

Vcnt Mode Select *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]0: Disable, 1: Enable

3007 5

Enables or disables the Vcnt correction.

Vcnt Max *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]3007 6

Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at developer initialization

Vcnt Min *BCU [0 to 4 / 4 / 0.1 V/step]3007 7

Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at developer initialization

3007 8 Vcnt SelfChk Max *BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]

Adjusts the maximum Vcnt at process control self check

3007 9 Vcnt SelfChk Min *BCU [0 to 5.4 / 5.4 / 0.1 V/step]

Adjusts the minimum Vcnt at process control self check



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-36 SM

3008 [Humidity]

Humidity [0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]3008 1

Displays the humidity measured by the humidity/temperature sensor.

3008 2 Temp 1

Shows the temperature measuredby thermistor 2 on the laser opticsunit.

3008 3 Temp 2

Shows the temperature measuredby thermistor 1 on the laser opticsunit

[0 to 100 / - / 1%/step]

3107 [Vsg Display] Vsg Display (Front or Rear)

Vsg Front *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]3107 1

Displays the Vsg value of the front ID sensor.

Vsg is normally 4.0 % 0.5 V.If Vsg is out of the adjustment range and this is detected 3 times consecutively, itleads to SC385.

LED Current Front *BCU [0 to 1023 / - / 1]3107 2

Displays the ID sensor LED current adjusted during Vsg adjustment.

Vsg Center *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]3107 3

Displays the Vsg value of the center ID sensor.


LED Current Center *BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]3107 4


Vsg Rear *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]3107 5

Displays the Vsg value of the rear ID sensor.


LED Current Rear *BCU [0 to 1025 / - / 1]3107 6


Vsg avg bk *BCU [0.00 to 5.00 / - / 0.01V/step]3107 7

Displays the average black Vsg value of the center ID sensor.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-37 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3120 [Dev. Gamma Target] Development Gamma Target ([Color])

Adjusts the development gamma by changing the Vref value used for toner densitycontrol.

Vref is automatically corrected so that the gamma measured during the processcontrol self-check becomes “the value set with this SP mode % 0.15”

3120 1 Set [K] *BCU

3120 2 Set [Y] *BCU

3120 3 Set [M] *BCU

3120 4 Set [C] *BCU

[0.50 to 1.00 / 0.70 / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]

DFU

3120 5 Display [K] *BCU

3120 6 Display [Y] *BCU

3120 7 Display [M] *BCU

3120 8 Display [C] *BCU

[0.50 to 3.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV / step]

3120 9 Mode Select *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]0: Non

1: Humidity

2: Dev. Rotation

3: All

3121 [Dev. Gamma Display] Development Gamma Display ([Color]) Displays the development gamma measured during the process control self-check.

3121 1 [K] *BCU

3121 2 [Y] *BCU

3121 3 [M] *BCU

3121 4 [C] *BCU

[0.00 to 10.00 / - / 0.01 mg/cm2/KV /step]Normal Range: 1.00 to 2.00

[Vk Display] Vk Display ([Color]) 3122 Displays the current Vk value.

3122 1 [K] *BCU

3122 2 [Y] *BCU

3122 3 [M] *BCU

3122 4 [C] *BCU

[-255 to 255 / - / 1 V/step]Normal Range: -50 to 50

[Vref Display] Current Vref Display ([Color]) 3123

Displays the current Vref value.

3123 1 [K] *BCU

3123 2 [Y] *BCU

3123 3 [M] *BCU3123 4 [C] *BCU

[0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.1V/step]

3125 [Process Control]

ON/OFF *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: OFF (Use the fixed values for VD, VL and

VB set with SP2-001, SP2-103, and SP2-201.)

1: ON

3125 1

Enables or disables process control.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-38 SM

3125 [Process Control]

LD Control *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Fixed (at the value in SP2-103)1: Process Control2: LD Power

3125 2

Selects the LD control mode. Auto TD Adj. *BCU [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric

0: Disable1: Initial2: Job end3: Initial & Job end

3125 3

Specifies when to perform the Auto Toner Density Adjustment. When performing the Auto Toner Density Adjustment, the machine supplies or consumes toner so that the

development gamma is within % 0.15 of the gamma target.Change if the customer complains of toner density fluctuations. Before changing thesetting away from 0, check whether the forced TD adjustment (3-126-2) is effective. Ifthe problem is persistent, then change to 1, 2, or 3. However, the machine takesseveral minutes to do this adjustment.

ACC *BCU [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]0: Disable1: Process Control Self-check2: Auto TD Adjustment & Process Control Self-check

3125 4

Enables or disables the process control self-check before printing the ACC pattern.NOTE: If color balance changes during multi-copy runs after ACC is performed, select

1 or 2. Setting 2 can precisely adjust the image density; however, it takesabout 6 minutes. Select 1 or 2 depending on the customer’s requirement.

TD Adj. Cndtn *BCU [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]0: No1: Yes

3125 5

Specifies whether temperature and humidity are taken into account when deciding thetiming of the auto toner density adjustment (described in SP 3-125-3).Timing for the auto toner density adjustment is determined by the setting of SP3-125-003. In addition, if SP 3-125-5 is set to 1, the auto toner density adjustment is donewhen the temperature and humidity meet specified conditions (same conditions asused for transfer current correction).

Specify “1” when both temperature and humidity are both high or bothlow.

TD Adj. Times *BCU [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]3125 6

Limits the number of auto toner density adjustments.The auto toner density adjustment consists of three steps: detecting the developmentgamma, supplying or consuming toner, and detecting the development gamma again.

When these three steps are all complete, it means a single auto toner densityadjustment is complete.

Temperature [0 to 200 / 60 / 1°C /step]3125 7

Fusing temperature threshold for process control execution when the main switch isturned on.

Pic Vb Max [600 to 800 / 680 / 10 V /step]3125 8

Adjusts the development bias upper limit.

Pic Vb Min [200 to 400 / 300 / 10 V /step]3125 9

Adjusts the development bias lower limit.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-39 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3126 [Forced Self Check] Forced Self-check

3126 1 Forced Self Check Performs a forced process control self-check.

3126 2 Forced TD Adj. Performs a forced auto toner density

adjustment.

[Pointer Display] Pointer Table Display ([Color]) 3902

Displays the number in the pointer table that was selected during the latest processcontrol self-check.

3902 1 Printer [K] *BCU

3902 2 Printer [Y] *BCU

3902 3 Printer [M] *BCU

3902 4 Printer [C] *BCU

3902 5 CF [K] *BCU

3902 6 CF [Y] *BCU

3902 7 CF [M] *BCU

3902 8 CF [C] *BCU

[1 to 40 / - / 1/step]

3903 [M/A Target] M/A Target ([Color])

Adjusts the M/A (Mass per Area, mg/cm2) value used during the process control self-

check. Adjusting this changes the development bias. This causes the solid ID to increase ordecrease. If developer capability causes an ID problem, toner density needs to beadjusted with SP3-120-1 to 4, depending on the color.



3903 3 Printer [M] *BCU

3903 4 Printer [C] *BCU3903 5 CF [K] *BCU

3903 6 CF [Y] *BCU

3903 7 CF [M] *BCU

3903 8 CF [C] *BCU

[0 to 1.50 / 0.40 / 0.05 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

[M/A for LD] M/A Target for LD Correction ([Color]) 3904

Adjusts the M/A value used during the LD correction mode. This value is effectivewhen SP3-125-2 “LD Control Selection” is set to “2”. Adjusting this data effects the image reproduction especially in highlight areas.



3904 3 Printer [M] *BCU3904 4 Printer [C] *BCU

[0 to 1.00 / 0.12 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

3904 5 CF [K] *BCU

3904 6 CF [Y] *BCU

3904 7 CF [M] *BCU

3904 8 CF [C] *BCU

[0 to 1.00 / 0.14 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-40 SM

3905 [Intrvl Procon] M/A Target for Paper Interval Process Control

Adjusts the target amount of each toner on paper sheets.These values are optimized before shipment. Do not change the values. Changing

these values does not affect toner density on paper sheets.3905 1 Intrvl [K] *BCU

3905 2 Intrvl [Y] *BCU

3905 3 Intrvl [M] *BCU

3905 4 Intrvl [C] *BCU

[0 to 1.50 / 0.25 / 0.01 mg/cm2 /step] DFU

Displays the amount of each toner on the paper. A problem may have occurred in the copier engine if the value is high or low (i.e., if

the difference between SP3-905-1/2/3/4 and SP3-5/6/7/8 is larger than %0.03mg/cm

2).

Possible problems: Defective TD sensor, defective ID sensor, toner near-end (if thevalue is lower than the target), defective toner supply mechanism

3905 5 Intrvl [K] *BCU

3905 6 Intrvl [Y] *BCU

3905 7 Intrvl [M] *BCU3905 8 Intrvl [C] *BCU

[0 to 1.500 / - / 0.001 mg/cm2 /step]

3905 9 Gamma Correct [K] *BCU

3905 10 Gamma Correct [Y] *BCU

3905 11 Gamma Correct [M] *BCU

3905 12 Gamma Correct [C] *BCU

[–0.50 to 0.50 / 0 / 0.01 mg/cm2/step] DFU

3906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

Job End *BCU [0 to 999 / 200 / 1 print/step]3906 1

Specifies the execution timing of the job end process control self-check.The job end process control self-check is automatically done after a job is completed

when 200 prints have been made since the last self-check.The counter for the job end process control self-check resets when one of thefollowing process control self-checks is done.

! Initial

! Interval: Interrupt

! Non-use Time

! During Toner EndWhen K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient inSP3-906-5.

Interrupt *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print /step]3906 2

Specifies the execution timing of the interrupt process control self-check.The interrupt process control self-check is automatically done if the number of printsin the job exceeds the number set in this SP mode. When the print job is completed,

the counter is reset, even if the interrupt self check did not occur.When K prints are made, the number of prints is calculated with the K coefficient inSP3-906-5.

Non-use Time 1 *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 print/step]0: Disable

3906 3

Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.The non-use time process control self-check is automatically done after the number ofprints set with this SP mode have been made and no prints have been made for thetime set with SP mode 3-906-4 since the last print job.If the conditions are met, the self-check will be done after the print job is completed.The counter is reset when the initial process control self-checks is done or when aprint is made.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-41 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3906 [PC Self Check] Process Control Self-checks

Non-use Time 2 *BCU [0 to 2550 / 480 / 10 minutes/step]0: Disable

3906 4

Specifies the executing timing of the non-use time process control self-check.

K Coefficient *BCU [0 to 1.00 / 1.00 / 0.01 /step] DFU 3906 5

Sets the coefficient to calculate the counter value for black-and-white prints.With the default setting (100), counters used for process control count up by 1 when 1black-and-white print has been made.

3910 [Vmin Display] Vmin Display ([Color])

[K] *BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]3910 1

Displays the current Vmin value for K

[Color] *BCU [0 to 2.00 / 0 / 0.01 /step]3910 2

Displays the lowest current Vmin value for the colors (CMY).

[Vt Current Display] Vt Current Display ([Color]) 3911

Displays the current Vt value.

3911 1 [K] *BCU

3911 2 [Y] *BCU

3911 3 [M] *BCU

3911 4 [C] *BCU

[0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[Vt Average Display] Vt Average Display ([Color]) 3912

Displays the average Vt value.

3912 1 [K] *BCU3912 2 [Y] *BCU

3912 3 [M] *BCU

3912 4 [C] *BCU

[0.0 to 5.0 / - / 0.01 V/step]

[Toner Supply Time] Toner Supply Time Display ([Color]) 3913

Displays the toner supply clutch on time for the most recent page.

3913 1 [K] *BCU

3913 2 [Y] *BCU

3913 3 [M] *BCU

3913 4 [C] *BCU

[0 to 5000 / - / 1 ms/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-42 SM

3920 [OPC Refresh]

Temperature *BCU [10 to 30 / 25 / 1"C /step]3920 1

This SP determines the temperature threshold for determining whether refresh mode

is done just after the machine is switched on.The charge roller generates NOx (nitrogen oxides), and these contaminate the OPCdrum surface and may cause a smeared image.Just after the main switch is turned on, if the temperature measured by both thethermistor located at the right side on the laser optics housing unit and thetemperature/humidity sensor is greater than the temperature specified in this SPmode, refresh mode is done before initial process control.During refresh mode, toner is developed on the OPC with 50V development potentialand cleaned to remove NOx. This cycle is repeated a few times.

Humidity *BCU [10 to 90 / 75 / 1%/step]3920 2

This SP determines the humidity threshold for determining whether refresh mode isdone just after the machine is switched on.Just after the main switch is turned on, if the humidity measured by the

temperature/humidity sensor is greater than the humidity specified in this SP mode,refresh mode is done before the initial process control self-check.

Prints *BCU [10 to 2550 / 200 / 10 prints/step]3920 3

Specifies how often refresh mode is done.When the total number of prints since the last refresh mode exceeds the numberspecified in this SP mode, refresh mode is done before the job end process controlself-check.

Mode Set *BCU [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Mode 1 (Done at power on and toner end

recovery)2: Mode 2 (Done at power on, toner end

recovery, and after the specified number of

prints.)

3920 4

Enables/disables refresh mode.NOTE: Refresh mode is done during the toner end recovery self-check after a new

toner cartridge is installed.

Forced3920 5

Executes a forced refresh mode.Use this mode when the image is smeared. It takes about 1 minute. Also, use after replacing the components of the transfer unit (see section 3).

Auto Toner Refresh(Auto Toner Refresh)

*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / -]0: Disabled1: Enabled

3920 6

Performs a toner refresh during the OPC refresh mode by changing the development

bias from 50V to 400V.Enable this SP mode when dirty background and/or firefly spots appear intermittentlyon prints with a low image area ratio.While making prints with a low image area ratio, developer is agitated with less tonersupplied. This may cause the toner-carrier attraction force to increase or toner tocoagulate.This sometimes causes firefly spots or dirty background when a large amount of toneris supplied.NOTE: When enabling this SP mode, the following SP modes should be changed.SP3-906-001 Job End Process Control Self-check

200 (Default) -> 100SP3-920-003 OPC Refresh Mode / Prints

200 (Default) -> 100



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-43 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

3921 [Forced Toner Refresh] Forced Toner Refresh

Perform forced toner refresh mode.When the developer has deteriorated or when prints are made in a very low humidity

condition, dirty background may appear continuously.When this kind of dirty background appears, check whether the development gammais within the target (SP3-120 and 121). If the development gamma is not within thetarget, do this SP mode.The machine automatically does the toner refresh mode in the following sequence.1. Consumes toner in the development unit without toner supply until toner end is

detected2. Starts toner recovery mode.3. Starts process control self-check.

NOTE: If toner is drastically consumed for a short time, this may cause carrier to flowout. To prevent this, toner is consumed over a long period of time. (It takesabout 20 minutes to complete this toner refresh mode).

3921 1 [K]

3921 2 All Color

[OPC Refresh2]3922

Specifies when the OPC refresh is executed for CMY drums, which forcibly creates atemporary 15mm-wide toner line on the drum surface by applying the developmentbias (200V) and turning on the development clutch at the end of a job.Note that this OPC refresh is a separate process from the one controlled by SP 3-920and 3-921.

3922 1 Mode Set *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]0: Disable (OPC refresh is not executed.)1: Low coverage (OPC refresh is executed

after an output of low coverage ratio.)2: Every time (OPC refresh is executed afterevery job.)

[Trans P Pat] Line Pattern between transferred papers. 3923 Generates line patterns between sheets on the transfer belt during a print job to

prevent the transfer cleaning blade from rolling up.

3923 1 Temperature setting *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: No Line

1: Input HH

2: Input HH, MM

3: Input All

HH (high temperature, high humidity)

MM (middle temperature, middle humidity)

3923 2 Paper width *BCU [1 or 2 / 1 / -]

1: <= LT Lengthwise (LT lengthwise or less)

2: All

Pat Interval *BCU [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]3923 3

If this SP is set to ‘n’, line patterns are generated once per “(n +1)” x 4 intervals.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-44 SM

[Thin out P Pat] Thin out Process Control Pattern3924

Vref compensation is skipped during a print job.

Pat Interval *BCU [0 to 10 / 0 / 1 /step]3924 1

If this SP is set to ‘n’, Vref compensation is skipped “n” times per “(n + 1)” times.

3924 2 Cndtn Interval *BCU [0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: LL condition

1: in LL, MM condition

2: in all condition

LL (low temperature, low humidity)

[Process Control Result] Process Control Self-check Result3975

Displays the result of the latest process control self-check. All colors are displayed. The results are displayed in the order “K Y C M”

e.g., 1 1 9 1: The self-check for Cyan failed but the others were successfulSee the troubleshooting section for details

3975 1 Process Control Result *BCU [0 to 9999 / - / 1/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-45 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

[SubScanMagnification] Sub-scan Magnification Adjustment4008

Adjusts the sub-scan magnification by changing the scanner motor speed.

4008 1 SubScanMagnification *CTL [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0 / 0.1%/step] FA

[Sub Mag Reg.] Leading Edge Registration Adjustment4010

Adjusts the leading edge registration by changing the scanning start timing in the sub-scan direction.

4010 1 Leading Edge Reg. *CTL [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[Main Scan Mag] Side-to-Side registration Adjustment4011

Adjusts the side-to-side registration by changing the scanning start timing in the mainscan direction.

4011 1 Side-to-Side Reg. *CTL [–2.5 to 2.5 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[Blank Margin] Blank Margin Adjustment4012

Sets the blank margin at each side for erasing the original shadow caused by the gapbetween the original and the scale.

4012 1 Leading Edge

4012 2 Trailing Edge

4012 3 Left

4012 4 Right

*CTL [0 to 3.0 / 0 / 0.1 mm/step] FA

[Scanner Free Run]4013

Performs the scanner free run with the exposure lamp on or off in the following mode.Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

4013 1 Lamp: OFF

4013 2 Lamp: ON

[Scan Operation]4017

Makes one scan with generating an F-Gate signal and shading on or off in thefollowing mode.Full color mode / Full Size / A3 or DLT

Uses this SP mode to check if the F-Gate signal is properly generated (F-Gate tellsthe engine to start printing data).

4017 1 Shading ON

4017 2 Shading OFF

4020 [Dust Check]

4020 1 Dust detect: ON/OFF *CTL # Turns the ADF scan glass dust check on/ off.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

4020 2 Detect Level *CTL selects the detect level.

[0 to 8 / 4 / 1 /step]

0: lowest detection level

8: highest detection level



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-46 SM

4020 [Dust Check]

4020 3 Dust Reject: Lvl *CTL Selects the level of the sub scan line correctionwhen using the ARDF.

[0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Off

1: Weakest2: Weak

3: Strong

4: Strongest

[APS Operation Check]4301

Displays a code that represents the original size detected by the original sensors.(See Input Check Table.)

4301 1 APS Operation Check

[APS Min Size (A5/HLT/16K)]4303Specifies the result of the detection when the outputs from the original sensors are allOFF.

4303 1 APS A5size Check(A5/HLT/16K)

*CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / -]0: out of detection1: A5 LEF (EU) / SEF (NA)

2: A5 LEF (EU)/ LEF (NA)

4305 [8K/16K Detection] *BCU

[0 or 1 / 0 / -]0: A/B

1: 8K/16K

4305 1 This program enables the machine to automatically recognize the 8K/16K size.

[IPU Test Pattern]4417

Selects the IPU test pattern.

4417 1 IPU Test Pattern [0 to 24 / 0 / 1/step]0: Scanned image1: Gradation main scan A2: Gradation main scan B3: Gradation main scan C4: Gradation main scan D5: Gradation sub scan (1)6: Grid pattern

7: Slant grid pattern

8: Gradation RGBCMYK

9: UCR pattern

10: Color patch 16 (1)

11: Color patch 16 (2)

12: Color patch 64

13: Grid pattern CMYK

14: Color patch CMYK

15: Gray pattern (1)

16: Gray pattern (2)

17: Gradation Pattern (3)

18: Shading pattern

19: Thin line pattern20: Scanned + Grid pattern

21: Scanned + Gray scale

22: Scanned + Color patch

23: Scanned + Slant Grid C

24: Scanned + Slant Grid D



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-47 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Saturation Adj.] Saturation Adjustment4440

Adjusts the level of saturation for copying.

4440 1 Saturation Adj. 1 *CTL

4440 2 Saturation Adj. 2 *CTL

[0 to 5 / 3 / 1/step]

0: High1: Lowest2: Lower3: Default4: Higher5: Highest

[Digital Black ADS Level] 4460

Specifies the level of deleting the background in the ADS mode. You can adjust itslevel for each scanning method (platen, ADF).

4460 1 Book/ADF *BCU [0 to 128 / 10 / 1 step]

4460 2 ADF *BCU [–127 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step]

4540 [Printer V]

4540 1 R: Option

4540 2 R: R

4540 3 R: G

4540 4 R: B

4540 5 Y: Option

4540 6 Y: R

4540 7 Y: G

4540 8 Y: B

4540 9 G: Option

4540 10 G: R4540 11 G: G

4540 12 G: B

4540 13 C: Option

4540 14 C: R

4540 15 C: G

4540 16 C: B

4540 17 B: Option

4540 18 B: R

4540 19 B: G

4540 20 B: B

4540 21 M: Option

4540 22 M: R

4540 23 M: G4540 24 M: B

*CTL Specifies the printer vector correction value.[0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-48 SM

4550 [SApli: Txt Prt] Scanner Application: Text/Printing DFU

MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]

0: MTF Off

4550 5

Selects the MTF filter level for the B/W Text mode.Select a higher number for a stronger filter

Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]4550 6

Selects the smoothing level for the B/W Text mode.

A larger value could cause moiré to appear in the image.

Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]4550 7

Selects the brightness level for the B/W Text mode.

Level 255 is the brightest.

Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [1 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]4550 8

Selects the contrast level for B/W the Text mode.

4551 [SApli: Txt OCR 1] Scanner Application: Text OCR (except drop out color) DFU

4551 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]

0: MTF Off

4551 6 Smooth: 0–7 *CTL [0 to 7 / 4 / 1 /step]

4551 7 Brightness: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4551 8 Contrast: 1–255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 128 / 1 /step]

4552 [SApli: Txt OCR 2] Scanner Application: Text OCR (drop out color) DFU

4552 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]

0: MTF Off




4553 [SApli: T/P] Scanner Application: Text/Photo DFU

4553 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]

0: MTF Off




4554 [SApli: Photo] Scanner Application: Photo DFU

4554 5 MTF Lv1: 0–15 *CTL [0 to 15 / 8 / 1 /step]

0: MTF Off








COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-50 SM

4623 [R Black Adjustment] Red CCD - Black Offset Level Display

4623 1 R EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even redsignal in the CCD circuit board (color printingspeed).

4623 2 R ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd red

signal in the CCD circuit board (color printingspeed).

4623 5 R BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even redsignal in the CCD circuit board (black and whiteprinting speed).

4623 6 R BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd redsignal in the CCD circuit board (black and whiteprinting speed).

4624 [G Black Adjustment] Green CCD - Black Offset Level Display

4624 1 G EVEN Displays the black offset value for the even

green signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4624 2 G ODD Displays the black offset value for the oddgreen signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4624 5 G BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the evengreen signal in the CCD circuit board (blackand white printing speed).

4624 6 G BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the oddgreen signal in the CCD circuit board (blackand white printing speed).

4625 [B Black Adjustment] Blue CCD - Black Offset Level Display

4625 1 B EVEN Displays the black offset value for the evenblue signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4625 2 B ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd bluesignal in the CCD circuit board (color printingspeed).

4625 5 B BK EVEN Displays the black offset value for the evenblue signal in the CCD circuit board (black andwhite printing speed).

4625 6 B BK ODD Displays the black offset value for the odd bluesignal in the CCD circuit board (black and white

printing speed).

[R Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Red4628

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on the controller for Red.

4628 1 R EVEN

4628 2 R ODD

4629 [G Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Green

4629 1 G EVEN

4629 2 G ODD

4629 3 G BK EVEN4629 4 G BK ODD

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on thecontroller for Green.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-51 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

4630 [B Gain Display] Gain Adjustment Blue

4630 1 B EVEN

4630 2 B ODD

Displays the gain value of the amplifiers on thecontroller for Blue.

4654 [R Black Adjustment: Prev] Red CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display

4623 1 R EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for theeven red signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4623 2 R ODD Displays the previous black offset value for theodd red signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4623 5 R BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for theeven red signal in the CCD circuit board (blackand white printing speed).

4623 6 R BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for the

odd red signal in the CCD circuit board (blackand white printing speed).

4655 [G Black Adjustment: Prev] Green CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display

4655 1 G EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for theeven green signal in the CCD circuit board(color printing speed).

4655 2 G ODD Displays the previous black offset value for theodd green signal in the CCD circuit board(color printing speed).

4655 5 G BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for the

even green signal in the CCD circuit board(black and white printing speed).

4655 6 G BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for theodd green signal in the CCD circuit board(black and white printing speed).

4656 [B Black Adjustment: Prev] Blue CCD - Black Adjustment Previous Value Display

4656 1 B EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for theeven blue signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4656 2 B ODD Displays the previous black offset value for theodd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (colorprinting speed).

4656 5 B BK EVEN Displays the previous black offset value for theeven blue signal in the CCD circuit board(black and white printing speed).

4656 6 B BK ODD Displays the previous black offset value for theodd blue signal in the CCD circuit board (blackand white printing speed).

4661 [R Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Red (Previous Adjustment)

4661 1 R EVEN

4661 2 R ODD

*BCU

This program displays the previous result ofSP4-628.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-52 SM

4662 [G Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Green (Previous Adjustment)

4661 1 G EVEN

4661 2 G ODD

*BCU


4663 [B Gain Display (Prev)] Gain Adjustment Blue (Previous Adjustment)4661 1 B EVEN

4661 2 B ODD

*BCU


[DF: Density Adj.] DF Density Adjustment4688

Adjusts the white shading parameter when scanning an image with the ARDF. Adjusts the density level if the ID of outputs made in the DF and Platen mode isdifferent.

4688 1 DF: Density Adj. *BCU [83 to 100 / 87 / 1 %/ step]

[DF: Density Correction]4800

Sets a coefficient to adjust the image density level when scanning an image with the ARDF.

4800 1 R

4800 2 G

4800 3 B

*CTL [–20 to 20 / 0 / 1/step] DFU

4885 [Level Convert Adj.: R] *BCU

[–128 to 127 / 49 / 1 /step]

4885 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of red.

4886 [Level Convert Adj.: G] *BCU

[–128 to 127 / 17 / 1/step]

4886 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of green.

4887 [Level Convert Adj.: B] *BCU

[–128 to 127 / 29 / 1/step]

4887 1 This SP adjusts the gray valance of blue.

4902 [Display ACC Data]

4902 1 R DATA1 *CTL

4902 2 G DATA1 *CTL

4902 3 B DATA1 *CTL

4902 4 R DATA2 *CTL

4902 5 G DATA2 *CTL

4902 6 B DATA2 *CTL

Displays the ACC data for each color element.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-53 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

4904 [Scanner IPU Test]

Test1: Register Access Bit0: ASIC0 image registerBit1: ASIC0 serial register

Bit2: ASIC1 registerBit3: ASIC1 registerBit4: ASIC1 registerBit5: ASIC3 registerBit6: ASIC2 registerBit7: ASIC4 (MC) registerBit8: ASIC4 (YK) register

0: OK, 1: Error- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram

4904 1

Performs a write and read check of the ASICs on the scanner IPU board and displaysthe result.

Test2: Image Path Bit0: ASIC1 to ASIC3

Bit1: ASIC0 to ASIC1Bit2: ASIC0 to ASIC1Bit3: ASIC1 to ASIC2Bit4: ASIC3 to ASIC1

Bit5: ASIC3 to ASIC1

Bit6: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (MC)Bit7: ASIC2 to ASIC4 (YK)

0: OK, 1: Error

- 6.4.3 for IPU diagram

4904 2

Performs an image path check on the scanner IPU board and displays the result.

[Dither Selection]4905

Changes the parameters for error diffusion.

4905 1 Dither Selection *CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

4907 [VPU Test Pattern]

Test Pattern: R [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Default (Scanning Image)1: Gradation(C) main scan (1)2: Gradation(C) main scan (2)3: Gradation(C) sub scan (1)

4: Gradation(C) sub scan (2)5: Grid pattern (C)

4907 1

Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.

Test Pattern: G [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Default (Scanned Image)1: Gradation (M) main scan (1)2: Gradation (M) main scan (2)3: Gradation (M) sub scan (1)4: Gradation (M) sub scan (2)5: Grid pattern (M)

4907 2

Selects the test pattern generated by the controller board.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-54 SM

4907 [VPU Test Pattern]

Test Pattern: B [0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Default (Scanned Image)1: Gradation (Y) main scan (1)2: Gradation (Y) main scan (2)

3: Gradation (Y) sub scan (1)4: Gradation (Y) sub scan (2)5: Grid pattern (Y)

4907 3

Selects the test pattern generated by the scanner IPU board.

4918 [Manual Gamma Adj.]

4918 9 Adjusts the offset data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.See “Replacement and Adjustment – Gamma Correction – Copy Mode” for how touse.

Offset: Highlight

Offset: Middle

Offset: Shadow

Offset: Imax

*CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1 /step]

Adjusts the option data of the printer gamma for yellow in Photo mode.

Option: Highlight

Option: Middle

Option: Shadow

Option: IDmax

*CTL [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

[Dot Position Cor.] Main Scan Dot Position Correction4932

Corrects the left or right side alignment of the red or blue filter on the CCD.For details on this adjustment, see Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustment- Scanner

4932 1 R: Left4932 2 R: Right

4932 3 B: Left

4932 4 B: Right

*CTL [0 to 9 / 5 / 1 /step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-55 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP5-XXX (Mode)

[IP Address Display]5005 Display the IP address on the display

5005 1 0: No (default) 1: Yes

[mm/inch Display Selection]5024

Display units (mm or inch) for custom paper sizes.

5024 1 mm/inch display *CTL 0: mm (Europe/Asia)1: inch (USA)

[Accounting Counter]5045

Selects the counting method if the meter charge mode is enabled with SP5-930-001.NOTE: The counting method can be changed only once, regardless of whether thecounter value is negative or positive.

5045 1 Counter Method *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]0: Developments1: Prints

[Toner Refill Detection Display] 5051

Enables or disables the toner refill detection display.

5051 1 Toner Refill DetectionDisplay

*CTL [0 or 1 / 0 /-] Alphanumeric0: ON1: OFF

[A3/DLT Double Count]5104

Specifies whether the counter is double clicked for 11 X 17 inch size prints.

5104 1 Double Count *CTL [ 0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Normal count1: Double count2: Normal count for unknown size

5113 [Optional Counter Type]

5113 1 Default Optional CounterType

*CTL This program specifies the counter type.0: None 1: Key card (RK 3, 4)2: Key card (down) 3: Prepaid card4: Coin lock 5: MF key card8: Key counter + Vendor9: Bar-code Printer

5113 2 External Optional CounterType

*CTL This program specifies the external countertype.0: None

1: External optional counter type 1



5118 [Disable Copying] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

5118 1 This program disables copying.

#

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-56 SM

5120 [Mode Clear Opt. CounterRemoval]

*CTL [0: Yes (removed)/ 1: Standby (installed but notused)/ 2: No (not removed)]

5120 1 This program updates the information on the optional counter. When you install orremove an optional counter, check the settings.

5121 [Counter Up Timing] *CTL [0: Feed/ 1: Exit]

5121 1 This program specifies when the counter goes up. The settings refer to “paper feed”and “paper exit” respectively.

5127 [APS Mode] *CTL [0: Not disabled/ 1: Disabled]

5127 1 This program disables the APS.

5128 [Code Mode With Key/Card Option] *CTL

5128 1 DFU

5131 [Paper Size TypeSelection]

*CTL [0: DOM (Japan)/1: USA /2: ERP (Europe)]

5131 1 The program selects a paper size system from the following alternatives: the ABsystem (0), the LT system (1), and the AF system (2).

5150 [By-Pass Length Setting] *CTL [ 0: Off/ 1: On]

5150 1 Determines whether the transfer sheet from the by-pass tray is used or not.

Normally the paper length for sub scanning paper from the by-pass tray is limited

to 600 mm, but this can be extended with this SP to 1260 mm.

5162 [App. Switch Method] *CTL [ 0: Soft Key Set/1: Hard Key Set]

5162 1 This program specifies the switch that selects an application program.

[Fax Printing Mode at Optional]5167 Enables or disables the automatic print out without an accounting device. This SP is

used when the receiving fax is accounted by an external accounting device.

5167 1 Fax Printing Mode atOptional Counter Off

*CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / –]

0: Automatic printing

1: No automatic printing

[CE Login]5169 If you will change the printer bit switches, you must ‘log in’ to service mode with this

SP before you go into the printer SP mode.

5169 1 CE Login *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / - ]

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-57 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5212 [Page Numbering] *CTL

This program adjusts the position of the second side page numbers. A "– value" moves the page number positions to the left edge. A "+ value" moves thepage number positions to the right edge.

5212 3 Duplex Printout Right/Left Position [ –10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

5212 4 Duplex Printout High/Low Position [ –10 to 10 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

[Set Time]5302

Adjusts the RTC (real time clock) time setting for the local time zone.Examples: For Japan (+9 GMT), enter 540 (9 hours x 60 min.)NA :-300 (New York) CH :+480 (Peking)EU :+ 60 (Paris) TW :+480 (Taipei) AS :+480 (Hong Kong)

5302 2 Set Time *CTL#

[ -1440 to 1440 / 60 / 1 min./step ]

5307 [Summer Time]Setting [ 0 to 1 / NA, EU, ASIA / 1 /step]

0: Disabled1: EnabledNA and EUR: 1, ASIA: 0

5307 1

Enables or disables the summer time mode.

NOTE: Make sure that both SP4-307-2 and -3 are correctly set. Otherwise, this SP isnot activated even if this SP is set to "1".

Rule Set (Start)5307 3

Specifies the start setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP. For months 1 to 9, the "0" cannot be input in the firstdigit, so the eight-digit setting for -2 or -3 becomes a seven-digit setting.

1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]3rd digit: The week of the month. [1 to 5]

4th and 5th digits: The day of the week.[0 to 6 = Sunday to Saturday]

6th digit: The hour. [00 to 23]

7th digit: The length of the advanced time.[0 to 9 / 1 hour /step]

8th digit: The length of the advanced time.[0 to 5 / 10 minutes /step]

For example: 3500010 (EU default)

The timer is advanced by 1 hour at am 0:00 on the 5th Sunday in March

! The digits are counted from the left.

! Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1". Rule Set (End)5307 4

Specifies the end setting for the summer time mode.

There are 8 digits in this SP.

1st and 2nd digits: The month. [1 to 12]

3rd digit: The week of the month. [0 to 5]

4th digit: The day of the week.[0 to 7 = Sunday to Saturday]

5th and 6th digits: The hour. [00 to 23]

The 7th and 8 digits must be set to "00".

! The digits are counted from the left.

! Make sure that SP4-307-1 is set to "1".

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-58 SM

[Access Control] 5401

When installing the SDK application, SAS (VAS) adjusts the following settings. DFU

5404 200 SDK1 Unique ID *CTL This ID is overwritten by SAS (VAS) when youinstall or uninstall the SDK application.

5404 201 SDK1 Certification

Method

*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

5404 210 SDK2 Unique ID *CTL

5404 211 SDK2 CertificationMethod

*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

5404 220 SDK3 Unique ID *CTL

5404 221 SDK3 CertificationMethod

*CTL [ 0 ~ 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

5404 [User Code Counter Clear]

5404 1 UCodeCtrClr Clears all counters for users.

5501 [PM Alarm] *CTL

5501 1 PM Alarm Level [ 0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: Alarm off

1 to 9999: Alarm goes off when Value (1 to 9999) x

1000 & PM counter

5501 2 Original Count Alarm [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]

0: No alarm sounds

1: Alarm sounds after the number of originals passing

through the ARDF & 10,000

5504 [Jam Alarm] *CTL5504 1 Sets the alarm to sound for the specified jam level (document misfeeds are not

included).

[ 0 to 3 / 3 / 1 /step]

0: Zero (Off)

1: Low (2.5K jams)

2: Medium (3K jams)

3: High (6K jams)

5505 [Error Alarm] *CTL [0 to 255 / 19 / 100 copies /step] Japan only

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-59 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5507 [Supply Alarm] *CTL

5507 1 Paper Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU

5507 2 Staple Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, Japan only

5507 3 Toner Supply Alarm 0: Off, 1: On, DFU 5507 128 Interval :Others

5507 132 Interval :A3



5507 141 Interval :B4

5507 142 Interval :B5

5507 160 Interval :DLT

5507 164 Interval :LG

5507 166 Interval :LT

5507 172 Interval :HLT

[00250 to 10000 / 1000 / 1 /step] DFU

5508* [CC Call] *CTL

Jam Remains 0: Disable, 1: Enable5508 1*

Enables/disables initiating a call for an unattended paper jam.

Continuous Jams 0: Disable, 1: Enable5508 2*

Enables/disables initiating a call for consecutive paper jams.

Continuous Door Open 0: Disable, 1: Enable5508 3*

Enables/disables initiating a call when the front door remains open.

Low Call Mode 0: Normal mode, 1: Reduced mode5508 4*

Enables/disables the new call specifications designed to reduce the number ofcalls.

Jam Detection: Time Length [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 minute /step]5508 11*

Sets the time a jam must remain before it becomes an “unattended paper jam”. Thissetting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Jam Detection: ContinuousCount

[ 02 to 10 / 5 / 1 /step]5508 12*

Sets the number of consecutive paper jams required to initiate a call. This setting isenabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Door Open: Time Length [ 03 to 30 / 10 / 1 /step]5508 13*

Sets the length of time the door remains open before the machine initiates a call.

This setting is enabled only when SP5508 004 is set to 1.

Jam Operation: Time Length 0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine

5508 21*

Determines what happens when a paper jam is left unattended.

Jam Operation: ContinuousCount

0: Automatic Call

1: Audible Warning at Machine

5508 22*

Determines what happens when consecutive paper jams occur.

Door Operation: Time Length 0: OFF, 1: ON5508 23*

Determines what happens if the door remains open (15 min.).

Displays a warning if set to ON. Pressing the call button will contact the servicecenter. This setting is available for setting only if SP5508 004 is set for 1.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-60 SM

5610 [ACC Factory Setting]

Recall5610 4

Recalls the factory settings.

Overwrite5610 5

Overwrites the current values onto the factory settings.Previous Setting5610 6

Recalls the previous settings.

[Toner Ratio in 2C]5611

Adjusts the color balance of a single color (blue, green, or red) by changing theproportion of color toner (C, M, and/or Y).

5611 1 B-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]

5611 2 B-M [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5611 3 G-C [ 0 to 100 / 90 / 1 %/step ]

5611 4 G-Y [ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5611 5 R-M [ 0 to 100 / 100 / 1 %/step ]5611 6 R-Y

*CTL

[ 0 to 100 / 80 / 1 %/step ]

5801 [Memory Clear]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following "SP8-xxx" table.

5801 1 All Clear

Resets all correction data for process control and all software counters, and returnsall modes and adjustments to their default values.

To execute, hold down$ for over 3 seconds, and then turn the copier off and onagain.

Use this SP only after replacing the NVRAM, or after the copier has malfunctioneddue to a damaged NVRAM.

5801 2 ENG All

Clears the engine settings.

5801 3 SCS

Clears the system settings.

IMH Memory Clr5801 4

Clears IMH data. DFU

MCS5801 5

Clears MCS data. DFU

Copier Application5801 6

Clears the copy application settings.

Fax Application5801 7

Clears the fax application settings.

Printer Application5801 8Clears the printer application settings.

Scanner Application5801 9

Clears the scanner application settings.

Web Service/Network Application

5801 10

Delete the netfile application management files and thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

NCS5801 11

Initializes the system default and interface settings (IP address also),SmartNetMonitor for

Admin, WebStatusMonitor settings, and the TELNET settings.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-61 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5801 [Memory Clear]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following "SP8-xxx" table.

R-FAX5801 12

Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

IPU5801 13Clears the IPU settings

Clear DCS Settings5801 14

Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

Clear UCS Settings5801 15

Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service) settings.

MIRS Setting5801 16

Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information Report Service) settings.

CCS5801 17

Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-control Service) settings.

5802 [EngineFreeRun]

EngineFreeRun5802 1

Performs a free run on the copier engine.NOTE:

! The machine starts free run in the same condition as the sequence of A4/LTprinting from the 1st tray. Therefore, paper should be loaded in the 1st tray, butpaper is not fed.

! The main switch has to be turned off and on after using the free run mode for atest.

5803 [Input Check] See section 5-2-2.

5804 [Output Check] See section 5-2-3.

[Destination Code] Destination Code Display 5808

Displays the destination code.

5808 1 Destination *BCU [ 0 to 3 / 0 / – ]

0: DOM

1: NA

2: EURO

3: ASIA

[SC Detection ON/OFF] SC Detection ON/OFF 5809 Enables or disables the service call detection (SC codes will be ignored if disablingthis SP mode).

5809 1 All *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

[SC Reset]5810

Resets a type A service call condition.NOTE: Turn the main switch off and on after resetting the SC code.

5810 1 SC Reset





COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-63 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5816 [Remote Service] *CTL

5816 8 RCG Connect Timeout Specifies the connect timeout interval when calling theRCG.

[1 to 90 / 10 / 1 second /step]

5816 9 RCG Write Timeout Specifies the write timeout interval when calling the

RCG.[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]

5816 10 RCG Read Timeout Specifies the read timeout interval when calling theRCG.

[1 to 100 / 60 / 1 second /step]

5816 11 Port 80 Enable Enables/disables access via port 80 to the SOAPmethod.

[0 or 1 / 0 / – ]

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

5821 [Remote Service Address]5821 1 CSS-PI Device Code [ 0 to 4 / 0 / 1 /step] DFU

5821 2 RCG IP Address

*CTL

[NV-RAM Data Upload] 5824

Uploads the UP and SP mode data (except for counters and the serial number) fromthe NVRAM to a flash memory card.

5824 1 NV-RAM Data Upload #

[NV-RAM Data Download] 5825

Downloads the UP and SP mode data from a flash memory card to the NVRAM5825 1 NV-RAM Download #

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

5828 50 1284 Compatibility(Centro)

Enables or disables 1284 Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]

0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

5828 52 ECP (Centro) Enables or disables ECP Compatibility.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 / step]


NOTE: This SP is activated only when SP5-828-50 is

set to "1". 5828 65 Job Spooling Enables/disables Job Spooling.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 / step]


5828 66 Job Spooling Clear: StartTime

Treatment of the job when a spooled job exists atpower on.

0: ON (Data is cleared)

1: OFF (Automatically printed)



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-64 SM

5828 [Network Setting] *CTL

5828 69 Job Spooling (Protocol) Validates or invalidates the job spooling function foreach protocol.

0: Validates

1: Invalidates

bit0: LPRbit1: FTP

bit2: IPP

bit3: SMB

bit4: BMLinkS

bit5: DIPRINT

bit6: (Reserved)

bit7: (Reserved)

5828 84 Print Settings List Prints the NCS parameter list

5828 90 TELNET (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Telnet protocol.

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]


5828 91 Web (0: OFF 1: ON) Enables or disables the Web operation.

[ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ]


5832 [HDD] HDD Initialization *CTL

5832 1 HDD Formatting (ALL)

5832 2 HDD Formatting (IMH)

5832 3 HDD Formatting(Thumbnail)

5832 4 HDD Formatting (Job Log)

5832 5 HDD Formatting (Printer

Fonts)5832 6 HDD Formatting (User Info)

5832 7 Mail RX Data

5832 8 Mail TX Data

5832 9 HDD Formatting (Data for aDesign)

5832 10 HDD Formatting (Log)

5832 11 HDD Formatting (Ridoc I/F)

Initializes the hard disk. Use this SP mode only ifthere is a hard disk error.

5833 [e-Cabinet enable]

5833 13 e-Cabinet enable Enables or disables the e-Cabinet.

[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]0: Disable1: EnableThe “e-Cabinet” supplies the interface forregistration, editing, deleting and obtaining theuser’s code name.NOTE: Turn the main switch on and off after

using this SP.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-65 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5836 [Capture Settings] *CTL

Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) 0: Disable, 1: Enable5836 1

With this function disabled, the settings related to the capture feature cannot be

initialized, displayed, or selected.Panel Setting 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed5836 2

Displays or does not display the capture function buttons.

5836 71 to 5836 78, Copier and Printer Document Reduction

The following 6 SP modes set the default reduction for stored documents sent to thedocument management server via the MLB. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed

5836 71 Reduction for Copy Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836 72 Reduction for Copy B&W Text 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836 73 Reduction for Copy B&W Other 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836 74 Reduction for Printer Color 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836 75 Reduction for Printer B&W 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/4

5836 76 Reduction for Printer B&W HQ 0: 1to-1, 1: 1/2, 2: 1/3, 3: 1/45836 77 Reduction for Printer Color 1200 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)

5836 78 Reduction for Printer B&W 1200 1: 1/2, 3: 1/4, 4: 1/6, 5: 1/8 (2: skipped)

5836 81 to 5836 86, Stored document format

The following 6 SP modes set Sets the default format for stored documents sent tothe document management server via the MLB. Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed

5836 081 Format for Copy Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.

5836 082 Format for Copy B&W Text 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5836 083 Format Copy B&W Other 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5836 084 Format for Printer Color 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

NOTE: This SP is not used in this model.

5836 085 Format for Printer B&W 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

5836 086 Format for Printer B&W HQ 0: JFIF/JPEG, 1: TIFF/MMR,2: TIFF/MH, 3: TIFF/MR

Default for JPEG [ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]5836 091

Sets the JPEG format default for documents sent to the document managementserver via the MLB with JPEG selected as the format.

Enabled only when optional MLB (Media Link Board) is installed.

5839 [IEEE1394] *CTL

5839 4 Host Name Displays the 1394 host name.

[Text up to 64 bytes / NULL / – /step]

5839 7 Cycle Master Turns the cycle master function on/off.

[0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]

0: OFF

1: ON

5839 8 BCR mode Selects either ‘Standard’, 'IRM Color Copy', or 'AlwaysEffective'.





COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-67 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5841 [Supply Name Setting]

5841 1 Toner Name Setting:Black

5841 2 Toner Name Setting:Cyan

5841 3 Toner Name Setting:Yellow

5841 4 Toner Name Setting:Magenta

5841 5 Staple Std

5841 6 Staple Bind

5841 7 OrgStamp

5841 11 Staple Std1

5841 12 Staple Std2

5841 13 Staple Std3

5841 14 Staple Std4

*CTL Specifies supply names. These appear on thescreen when the user presses the Inquiry

button in the user tools screen.

5842 [Net File Analysis Mode Setting] DFU

5842 1 Net File Analysis ModeSetting

*CTL Default: 00000000 – do not changeNetfiles: Jobs to be printed from the documentserver using a PC and the DeskTopBindersoftware

5844 [USB]

Transfer Rate *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Auto Change

1: Full speed

5844 1

Adjusts the USB transfer rate.

5844 2 Vendor ID *CTL Displays the vendor ID. DFU

5844 3 Product ID *CTL Displays the product ID. DFU

5844 4 Device Release Number *CTL Displays the development release versionnumber. DFU

[Delivery Server Setting] *CTL5845

Provides items for delivery server settings.

FTP Port No. [ 0 to 65535 / 3670 / 1 /step]5845 1

Sets the FTP port number used when image files to the Scan Router Server.

IP Address (Primary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.2555845 2Use this SP to set the Scan Router Server address. The IP address under thetransfer tab can be referenced by the initial system setting.

Delivery Error Display Time [ 0 to 999 / 300 / 1 second /step]5845 6

Use this setting to determine the length of time the prompt message is displayedwhen a test error occurs during document transfer with the NetFile application andan external device.

IP Address (Secondary) Range: 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.2555845 8

Specifies the IP address assigned to the computer designated to function as thesecondary delivery server of Scan Router. This SP allows only the setting of the IPaddress without reference to the DNS setting.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-68 SM

Delivery Server Model [ 0 to 4/ 0 / 1 /step]5845 9

Allows changing the model of the delivery server registered by the I/O device.

0: Unknown

1: SG1 Provided

2: SG1 Package

3: SG2 Provided

4: SG2 Package

5845 10 Delivery Svr Capability [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Bit7 = 1 Comment information exits

Bit6 = 1 Direct specification of mail address possible

Bit5 = 1 Mail RX confirmation setting possible

Bit4 = 1 Address book automatic update function exists

Bit3 = 1 Fax RX delivery function exists

Bit2 = 1 Sender password function exists

Bit1 = 1 Function to link MK-1 user and Sender exists

Bit0 = 1 Sender specification required (if set to 1, Bit6 is set to “0”)

Changes thecapability ofthe registeredthat the I/Odeviceregistered.

Delivery Svr Capability (Ext) [ 0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]

Changes the capability of the registered that the I/O device registered.

5845 11

Bit7 = 1 Address book usage limitation (Limitation for each authorized user)

Bit6 = 1 RDH authorization link

Bit5 to 0: Not used

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

Machine ID (For Delivery Server) Displays ID5846 1

Displays the unique device ID in use by the delivery server directory. The value isonly displayed and cannot be changed. This ID is created from the NIC MAC or

IEEE 1394 EUI. The ID is displayed as either 6-byle or 8-byte binary.Machine ID Clear (For Delivery Server) Clears ID5846 2

Clears the unique ID of the device used as the name in the file transfer directory.Execute this SP if the connection of the device to the delivery server is unstable. After clearing the ID, the ID will be established again automatically by cycling themachine off and on.

Maximum Entries [ 2000 to 20000/ 2000 /1 /step]5846 3

Changes the maximum number of entries that UCS can handle.

If a value smaller than the present value is set, the UCS managed data is cleared,and the data (excluding user code information) is displayed.

Delivery Server Retry Timer [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]5846 6

Sets the interval for retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire the

delivery server address book.Delivery Server Retry Times [0 to 255 / 0 / 1 /step]5846 7

Sets the number of retry attempts when the delivery server fails to acquire thedelivery server address book.

Delivery Server Maximum Entries [2000 to 50000 / 2000 / 1/step]5846 8

Sets the maximum number account entries of the delivery server user informationmanaged by UCS.

LDAP Search Timeout [1 to 255 / 60 / 1 /step]5846 10

Sets the length of the timeout for the search of the LDAP server.

5846 47 Initialize Local Addr Book Clears the local address book information,including the user code.

5846 48 Initialize Delivery Addr Book Clears the distribution address book information,

except the user code.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-69 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5846 [UCS Settings] *CTL

5846 49 Initialize LDAP Addr Book Clears the LDAP address book information,except the user code.

5846 50 Initialize All Addr Book Clears all directory information managed by UCS,including all user codes.

5846 51 Backup All Addr Book Uploads all directory information to the SD card.

5846 52 Restore All Addr Book Downloads all directory information from the SDcard.

5846 53 Clear Backup Info Deletes the address book data from the SD cardin the service slot.

Deletes only the files that were uploaded from thismachine.

This feature does not work if the card is write-protected.

NOTE: After you do this SP, go out of the SPmode, and then turn the power off.Do not remove the SD card until the

Power LED stops flashing.5846 90 Plain Data Forbidden Allows you to prevent the address from being

written to the HDD or SD card in plain data. Thisis a security function that prevents unauthorizedaccess to address book data.

0: No check. Address book data not protected.

1: Check. Allows operation of UCS without datafrom HDD or SC card and without creatingaddress book information with plain data.

5846 91 FTP Auth Port Setting Specifies the FTP port for getting a distributionserver address book that is used in theidentification mode.

[0 to 65535 / 3671 / 1 /step]

5846 94 Encryption Stat Shows the status of the encryption function for theaddress book data.

5846 98 Bit SW2 DFU

5846 99 Bit SW DFU

[Net File ResolutionReduction]

*CTL 5847

5847 1 through 5847 8 changes the default settings of image data transferredexternally by the Net File page reference function. [ 0 to 5 / 2 / 1 /step]

5847 21 sets the default for JPEG image quality of image files handled by NetFile.

“Net files” are jobs to be printed from the document server using a PC and theDeskTopBinder software.

5847 1 Rate for Copy Color

5847 2 Rate for Copy B&W Text

5847 3 Rate for Copy B&W Other

5847 4 Rate for Printer Color

5847 5 Rate for Printer B&W

5847 6 Rate for Printer B&W HQ

5847 7 Rate for Printer Color 1200dpi

5847 8 Rate for Printer B&W 1200dpi

0: 1x

1: 1/2x

2: 1/3x

3: 1/4x

4: 1/6x

5: 1/8x

Network Quality Default for JPEG5847 21

Sets the default value for the quality of JPEG images sent as NetFile pages. Thisfunction is available only with the MLB (Media Link Board) option installed.

[ 5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-70 SM

[Web Service] *CTL 5848

5848 2 sets the 4-bit switch assignment for the access control setting. Setting of0001 has no effect on access and delivery from Scan Router.

5848 100 sets the maximum size allowed for downloaded images. The default isequal to 1 gigabyte.

5848 1 Access Control: NetfileProtocol (Lower 4 bits only)

Bit switch settings.

0000: No access control

0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder. Access and deliveries from Scan Routerhave no effect on capture.

5848 2 Access Control: Repository(only Lower 4 bits)


0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

0010: No writing control

5848 3 Access Control: Doc. Svr. Print(Lower 4 bits)

5848 4 Access Control: User Directory(only Lower 4 bits)

5848 5 Access Control: Delivery Input(only Lower 4 bits)

5848 7 Access Ctrl: Comm. Log Fax(Lower 4 bits)

5848 9 Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl (Lower 4bits)

5848 11 Access Ctrl: Devicemanagement (Lower 4 bits)

5848 12 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Copy(Lower 4 bits)

5848 13 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Fax(Lower 4 bits)

5848 14 Access Ctrl: Device Ctrl Printer(Lower 4 bits)

5848 15 Access Ctrl: Device CtrlScanner (Lower 4 bits)

5848 21 Access Ctrl: Delivery (Lower 4bits)

5848 22 Access Ctrl: Administration(Lower 4bits)

5848 23 Access Ctrl: Image Edit (Lower4bits)

5848 41 Security Setting (Lower 4bits

only)

Switches access control on and off.


0001: Denies access to DeskTop Binder.

5848 100 Repository: Download ImageMax. Size

Specifies the max size of the image data that themachine can download.

[1 to 1024 / 1024 / 1 MB /step]

5849 [Installation Date] *CTL

5849 1 Display DFU

5849 2 Switch to Print DFU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-71 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5850 [Address Book Function] *CTL Japan Only

Replacement of Circuit Classification5850 3

The machine is sold ready to use with a G3 line. This SP allows you to switch all at

once to convert to G4 after you add a G4 line. Conversely, if for some reason theG4 line becomes unusable, you can easily switch back to G3.

[Stamp Data Download]5853

Use this SP to download the fixed stamp data stored in the firmware of the ROMand copy it to the HDD. This SP can be executed as many times as required. ThisSP must be executed after replacing or formatting the hard disks.

NOTE: This SP can be executed only with the hard disks installed.

[Remote ROM Update]5856

Allows the technician to upgrade the firmware using a parallel cable when updatingthe remote ROM.

5856 2 Local Port *CTL [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Disable1: Enable

5857 [Save Debug Log] *CTL

On/Off (1:ON 0:OFF) 0: ON, 1: OFF5857 1

Switches the debug log feature on and off. The debug log cannot be captured untilthis feature is switched on.

Target (2: HDD 3: SD) 2: HDD, 3: SD Card5857 2

Selects the storage device to save debug logs information when the conditions set

with SP5-858 are satisfied.

[ 2 to 3 / 2 / 1 /step]

[Save to HDD] DFU 5857 5

Saves the debug log in memory to the HDD.

A unique file name is generated to avoid overwriting existing file names on the SDCard. Up to 4MB can be copied to an SD Card. 4 MB segments can be copied oneby one to each SD Card.

5857 6 Save to SD Card

5857 9 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB)

5857 10 Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

5857 11 Erase HDD Debug Data

5857 12 Erase SD Card Debug Data

5857 13 Free Space on SD Card5857 14 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB)

5857 15 Copy SD to SD (Latest 4 MB Any Key)

5857 16 Make HDD Debug

5857 17 Make SD Debug



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-72 SM

[Debug Save When] *CTL5858

These SPs select the content of the debugging information to be saved to thedestination selected by SP5857 002.

SP5858 3 stores one SC specified by number. Refer to Section 4 for a list of SC errorcodes.

5858 1 Engine SC Error Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated bycopier engine errors.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

5858 2 Controller SC Error Turns on/off the debug save for SC codes generated byGW controller errors.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]

0: OFF, 1: ON

5858 3 Any SC Error [ 0 to 65535 / 0 / 1 /step]

5858 4 Jam Turns on/off the debug save for jam errors.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1/ step]0: OFF, 1: ON

5859 [Debug Save Key No.] *CTL

5859 1 Key 1

5859 2 Key 2

5859 3 Key 3

5859 4 Key 4

5859 5 Key 5

5859 6 Key 6

5859 7 Key 7

5859 8 Key 8

5859 9 Key 9

5859 10 Key 10

These SPs allow you to set up to 10 keys for log filesfor functions that use common memory on thecontroller board. (- 5.9.1)

[ –9999999 to 9999999 / 0 / – ]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-73 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5860 [SMTP/POP3/IMAP4] *CTL

5860 20 Partial Mail Receive Timeout [ 1 to 168 / 72 / – ]

Sets the amount of time to wait before saving a mail that breaks up during reception.

The received mail is discarded if the remaining portion of the mail is not receivedduring this prescribed time.

5860 21 MDN Response RFC2298 Compliance [ 0 to 1 / 1 / – ]

Determines whether RFC2298 compliance is switched on for MDN reply mail.

0: No

1: Yes

5860 22 SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement [ 0 to 1 / 0 / – ]

Determines whether the FROM item of the mail header is switched to the validatedaccount after the SMTP server is validated.

0: No. “From” item not switched.

1: Yes. “From item switched.

5860 25 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]

Selects the authentication method for SMPT. Bit switch:

! Bit 0: LOGIN

! Bit 1: PLAIN

! Bit 2: CRAM MD5

! Bit 3: DIGEST MD5

! Bit 4 to 7: Not used

NOTE: This SP is activated only when SMTP authorization is enabled by UP mode.

5866 [E-mail Alert] Not Used

5866 1 Notice function of E-Mail Enables or disables the E-mail alert function.

[ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled5866 5 Add Date Field

5870 [Common Key Info Writing]

5870 1 Writing *CTL Writes to flash ROM the common proof forvalidating the device for NRS specifications.

5870 3 Initialize *CTL Formats the common proof area of the flashROM. FA

5871 [HDD Function Disable] *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ] (0: OFF, 1: ON)

Disables the HDD functions by suppressing all functions that write data to the HDD. After this SP is executed, the machine must be switched off and on to enable thesetting.

When "1" is selected, the effective partition of the HDD is limited for the DataOverwrite Security B735.

NOTE: This SP must be activated when the Data Overwrite Security is installed.





COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-75 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Plug & Play Maker/Model Name] Plug & Play Name Selection5907 Specifies the manufacturer and model name.

5907 1 Plug/Play *BCU [ 0 to 17 / 0 / 1 /step ] FA

5913 [Switchover Permission Time]

Print Application Timer *CTL [ 3 to 30 / 3 / 1 second /step]5913 1

Sets the amount of time to elapse while the machine is in standby mode (and the

operation panel keys have not been used) before another application can gaincontrol of the display.

5913 102 Print Application Set *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 1 / – ] DFU

[Large Capacity ExitMode]

*CTL 0: OFF, 1: ON5961

Selects whether or not all stapled copies are sent to Shift Tray 1 when the Two-Trayfinisher is installed.

5967 [Copy Server Set

Function[

*CTL 0: ON, 1: OFF

Enables and disables the document server. This is a security measure that preventsimage data from being left in the temporary area of the HDD. After changing thissetting, you must switch the main switch off and on to enable the new setting.

5970 [Debug Serial Output] *CTL

Enables and disables the debug serial output.

Bit 7: 0 (disable), 1 (enable)

MF Model Name NetBeui

0 RICOH Aficio 3235C Aficio3235C

1 RICOH Aficio 3245C Aficio3245C2 RICOH Aficio 3228C Aficio3228C

3 SAVIN C3528 C3528

4 SAVIN C4535 C4535

5 SAVIN C2824 C28246 Gestetner DSc435 DSc4357 Gestetner DSc445 DSc445

8 Gestetner DSc428 DSc428

9 NRG DSc435 DSc435

10 NRG DSc445 DSc445

11 NRG DSc428 DSc42812 infotec ISC 2835 ISC2835

13 infotec ISC 3545 ISC3545

14 infotec ISC 2428 ISC2428

15 LANIER LD335c LD335c



Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-76 SM

[Cherry Server]5974

Specifies which version of ScanRouter, “Lite” or “Full”, is installed.

5974 1 Cherry Server Setting *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / – ]0: Lite1: Full

[Loop Back Test]5989

Executes a communication test with peripherals by using a special tool (connector),which is unique for each peripheral.The machine checks if the communication with the peripherals is OK or NG; thendisplays the result.DFU

5989 1 Duplex

5989 3 Finisher

5989 4 Paper Supply Unit

5989 5 ADF

[SP print mode]5990

Prints out the SMC sheets.

5990 1 All (Data List)

5990 2 SP (Mode Data List)

5990 3 User Program

5990 4 Logging Data

5990 5 Diagnostic Report

5990 6 Non-Default

5990 7 NIB Summary

5990 8 Capture Log

5990 21 Copier User Program

5990 22 Scanner SP5990 23 Scanner User Program

[Jam OFF/ON] Jam ON/OFF5991

Enables or disables jam detection.

5991 1 Jam OFF/ON [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Enable1: Disable

[Line Position Adj.] Line Position Adjustment5993

Line Positioning Adjustment ([Color])M: Main-scan, S: Sub-scan, Reg.: Registration, Mag.: MagnificationFor example: M Reg = Main scan registration

Rev. 02/2006



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-77 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s



Mode Selection *BCU [ 0 to 2 / 1 / 1 /step ] Alphanumeric

0: Never done1: Process Control

Done ata) all process control self checks exceptafter toner end recovery and developerinitialisation.b) new PCU detected.

c) the temperature has changed by 5"Csince the last adjustment.

2: Except ProCon As for setting “1”, except it is not doneduring self-checks. However, it is doneat the initial process control self check.

5993 1

Specifies when the automatic line position adjustment is done.The size of the 5"C difference can be changed with SP5-993-3.

Execute5993 2

Uses to make a line position adjustment.

Temperature *BCU [ 3 to 15 / 5 / 1oC /step]5993 3

Specifies the temperature for starting the line positioning adjustment.The line position adjustment automatically starts when the temperature differs by theamount specified in this SP mode from the temperature when the last adjustment wasdone.There are two thermistors on the laser optics-housing unit. The thermistor close to thefusing unit monitors the temperature for this adjustment.

Interrupt *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

5993 4

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during a print job when thetemperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature atthe last adjustment.

Stand-by *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 0 / - ] Alphanumeric0: Disabled1: Enabled

5993 5

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during stand-by mode when thetemperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from the temperature atthe last adjustment.

Job Start *BCU [ 0 or 1 / 1 / - ]0: Disabled

1: Enabled

5993 6

Enables or disables the line position adjustment just before starting a color print jobwhen the temperature differs by the amount specified in SP5-993-003 from thetemperature when the machine woke up from energy saver mode.

Result *BCU5993 7

Displays the result of the latest line position adjustment in 4 digits.

First and second digits: Error detected on the rear ID sensorThird and fourth digits: Error detected on the center ID sensorFifth and sixth digits: Error detected on the front ID sensor

0 1 0 1 0 1

The 6th digit ' ' The 1st digitRefer to the Troubleshooting section for more details about the two-digit codes.

5993 8 Exe. Counter *BCU



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-78 SM



Displays how many times the line position adjustment has been executed.

Counts up by +1 normally. After a forced adjustment and a PCU replacement, it counts up +3 Also includes adjustments done at the factory.

5993 9 Error Counter *BCU Displays how many times errors have beendetected during the line position adjustment.

The way that the auto line position adjustment is done can be adjusted using thefollowing SP modes (SP5-993-010 to 021). These are coefficients used for theadjustment.Normally, do not change except if the automatic adjustment gives poor resultsimmediately after installing a new optics-housing unit. Change the value then do aforced line position adjustment (SP 5-993-2) to check the effects of the changes.Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-11 by 1.

5993 10 M Offset [Y] *BCU

5993 11 M Offset [M] *BCU5993 12 M Offset [C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the main-scan registration.

[ –128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step ] FA1 dot = 20$

5993 13 M Mag. Offset [Y] *BCU

5993 14 M Mag. Offset [M] *BCU

5993 15 M Mag. Offset [C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the main-scanmagnification.[ –1 to 1 / 0 / 0.001% /step] FANOTE: The setting changes in this SP mode

will start after the next line positionadjustment.

5993 16 S Offset 600[Y] *BCU

5993 17 S Offset 600[M] *BCU

5993 18 S Offset 600[C] *BCU

5993 19 S Offset 1200[Y] *BCU5993 20 S Offset 1200[M] *BCU

5993 21 S Offset 1200[C] *BCU

A fine adjustment to the sub-scan registrationfor each color (color registration).[ –128 to 127 / 0 / 1 dot/step] FA

600dpi: 1 dot = 40$ 1200 dpi: 1 dot = 20$

Interrupt *BCU [10 to 250 / 100 / 10 sheets/step]5993 22

Specifies the number of sheets to be printed before a line position adjustment is doneduring a print job.SP 5-993-4 must be set to “enabled”.When the temperature difference meets the conditions specified in SP5-993-3, themachine starts counting the number of prints in the job. The machine interrupts theprint job and does the line position adjustment if the number of prints exceeds thenumber specified in this SP mode.If the counted number of prints does not exceed the number specified, the machineresets the counter, then continues to monitor the temperature and does the lineposition adjustment next time.

Drm Gear Phase *BCU [0 to 345 / 0 / 15 degrees/step] DFU 5993 25

Adjusts the phases of the black drum gear and the color drum gear.

Initialization *BCU [ 0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]0: Disable1: Enable

5993 26

Enables or disables the line position adjustment during initialization.

Toner Refresh *BCU [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step] DFU0: Disable, 1: Line adj.,2: PPS, 3: Line adj. 2

5993 27

Selects the toner refreshing operation timing.

Repetitive line position adjustments can cause abnormal outputs such as white spots.To prevent this, toner is consumed and supplied after line position adjustment.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-79 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s



5993 31 PPS: M This SP measures the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.

PPS Set: M *BCU C2a: [6043 to 6166 / 6105 / 1 /step]C2b: [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 /step]

5993 32

This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the middle speed mode.

5993 33 PPS: L This SP measures the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.

PPS Set: L *BCU [7832 to 7991 / 7912 / 1 step]5993 34

This SP adjusts the transfer PPS in the low speed mode.

Adj. level *BCU [0 to 5 / 1 / 1 /step]5993 35

0: HIGH 1: MID 2: LOW

3: BW-HI 4: BW-MID 5: BW-LOW

This SP specifies the level of color adjustment. This SP sets the following SPs aslisted.

HI MID LOW BW-HI BW-MID BW-LOWSP2-919-0030 0 0 0 0 0 0

SP3-125-003 1 0 0 1 0 0

SP3-906-001 200 200 255 200 200 999

SP3-906-002 200 0 0 200 0 0

SP3-906-003 200 0 0 0 0 0

SP3-906-004 480 480 480 480 480 480

SP3-906-005 1.00 1.00 0.5 0.20 0.20 0.20

SP5-993-001 1 1 1 1 1 1

SP5-993-003 3 5 7 3 5 7

SP5-993-004 1 1 1 1 1 1

SP5-993-005 0 0 0 0 0 0SP5-993-006 1 1 0 1 1 0

SP5-993-022 100 100 250 100 100 250

SP5-993-026 1 0 0 1 0 0

SP5-993-055 1 0 0 100 200 999

The adjustment numbers from 3 to 5 are for users who mainly use this machine forblack and white printing and copying.

36 to 39Finely adjusts the main-scan registration. This SP can adjust the main scanregistration more precisely than the SP5993-10 to -12. Used for fine main scan offset.

5993 36 S: Off Set: [Y] *BCU

5993 37 S: Off Set: [M] *BCU

5993 38 S: Off Set: [C] *BCU

[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA

Execute *BCU5993 39

Use to make a rough line position adjustment. If color registration errors are morethan 1.4 mm, use this SP. After doing this SP, do SP5993-2 (Line positionadjustment).

Color_Adj_level (forwarming up)

*BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] Alphanumeric5993 40

Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is 60°C or lessimmediately after the main power is turned on.

0: High (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registrationadjustment twice)

1: Mid (Skew adjustment once, main and sub scan magnification and registration

adjustment once)



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-80 SM



Color_Adj_level *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –]5993 41

Sets the line position adjustment type when the fusing temperature is more than 60°Cimmediately after the main power is turned on.

0: Mid (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment twice)

1: Low (Main and sub scan magnification adjustment once)

42 to 44 These SPs adjust the main scan registration when it is in 1200 dpi printing mode. Thepolygon motor speed is different between the 1200 dpi printing mode and other dpiprinting modes. Because of this, the registration position of 1200 dpi printing mode isslightly different from other printing modes.Example: If magenta is always shifted one dot to the left, reduce 5-993-43 by 1.

5993 42 M: Offset: 1200 [Y] *BCU

5993 43 M: Offset: 1200 [M] *BCU

5993 44 M: Offset: 1200 [C] *BCU

[–128 to 127 / 0 / 1 /step] FA

45 to 47 These SPs adjust the main scan registration by 1/16 dot when it is in 1200 dpi printingmode.

5993 45 M Offset 2 1200 [Y] *BCU

5993 46 M Offset 2 1200 [M] *BCU

5993 47 M Offset 2 1200 [C] *BCU

[–15 to 15 / 0 / 1/16dot /step] FA

5993 48 Pulse: Y *BCU

5993 49 Pulse: M *BCU

5993 50 Pulse: C *BCU

Displays the correction pulse value of themain-scan magnification for yellow, cyan andmagenta adjusted by the line positionadjustment.

51 to 53 Specifies the correction pulse value at the center of the image. This SP is used whencolor registration errors occur at the center of the main scan but not at the sides, afterthe line position adjustment is done. The values of these SPs are added to the

correction values that are adjusted by the center ID sensor when doing the lineposition adjustment.

! A "–" value shifts the image to the front side of the machine (left side of the image).

! A "+" value shifts the image to the rear side of the machine (right side of theimage).

5993 51 D Mag Offset [Y] *BCU

5993 52 D Mag Offset [M] *BCU

5993 53 D Mag Offset [C] *BCU

[–1023 to 1023 / 0 / 1 pulse /step] FA

D Mag Adj *BCU [0 or 1 / 1 / –] DFU


5993 54

Enables or disables the main-scan magnification adjustment with the center IDsensor. When this SP is at "0", main-scan correction is done only with the rear and

front ID sensor during the line position adjustment.FC Pre-job Music *BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 sheet /step]5993 55

Specifies the threshold for the line position adjustment when changing from black andwhite printing and copying mode to color printing mode. When color printing startsafter the counter has got to the value set by this SP, the line position adjustment isdone before the color printing starts.

If the line position adjustment is done because of other conditions, the counter of thisSP is cleared.

5994 [Unit Detection ON/OFF] Maintenance Unit Detection ON/OFF

5994 1 Dev. Unit/PCU *BCU

#

[0 or 1 / 0 / -] Alphanumeric DFU

0: Enable1: Disable



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-81 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Enables or disables PCU and development unit detection.NOTE: If this mode is disabled, new unit detection also does not function. Use thismode as a temporary measure, only when the micro-switches are defective.

[ColorGapAdj2] Color Gap Adjustment 25995 Transfer belt speed affects image processing. The transfer belt speed needs to beadjusted to uniform speed to ensure good quality image production. This machine hasthe following two methods to adjust the transfer belt speed:

1. Transfer belt feedback

2. Dancing control 5995 20 Trans Drv FB *BCU Enables or disables the transfer belt feedback

feature and dancing control.[0 to 2 / 0 / 1 /step]

[Trans Drv Danc]

Dancing control corrects the belt speed for changes that are caused by deflection ofthe belt regularity.

5995 23 Ampli Param *BCU DFU

5995 24 Phase Param *BCU DFU

5995 25 Error Counter *BCU Clears the dancing control error counter.

5995 27 Target Do this SP to detect the HP mark and measurethe belt regularity as a standard value.

5995 28 Drv Rev Set *BCU DFU

5997 [Test Pattern]

Tray Selection [0 to 4 / 1 / 1/step]0: By-pass Table 1: Tray 12: Tray 2 3: Tray 34: Tray 4

5997 1

Selects the tray for making a test print.NOTE: The machine makes a test pattern on the paper size loaded in the selected

paper tray.

Transfer beltfeedback feature

Dancing control

0 ON ON1 ON OFF

2 OFF OFF





COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-83 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5999 4 PCU: C

5999 5 Dev. U: Bk

5999 6 Dev. U: Y

5999 7 Dev. U: M

5999 8 Dev. U: C

5999 9 Fuser

new unit.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-84 SM

[Original Size Priority] Original Size Detection Priority6016

Specifies the original size for a size detected by the original sensor, since originalsensors cannot recognize all sizes.

6016 1 Original Size Priority *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / -]0: Setting 11: Setting 2

Setting 1 Setting 2Bit 7 A4 (L) LT (L)Bit 6 11" x 15" DLT (L)Bit 5 DLT (L) 11" x 15"Bit 4 LT (S) US Exec (S)Bit 3 LT (L) 8" x 10" (L)Bit 2 LG (L) F4 (L)Bit 1 A4 (L) 16K (L)Bit 0 8K (L) DLT (L)

Bits used for detection differ depending ondestination as shown below.Bit 7 to 6: Only for JapanBit 5 to 2: Only for USBit 1 to 0: Only for EU/AA

[DF Magnification Adj.] DF Magnification Adjustment6017

Adjusts the magnification in the sub-scan direction for the ARDF.

6017 1 DF Magnification Adj. *CTL [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0 / 0.1 %/step]

[Punch Position]6110

Adjusts the punching position.Punch 1US: 2 punch holesEurope: 2 punch holesNorth Europe: 4 punch holes

Punch 2US: 3 punch holesEurope: 4 punch holes

Increment: Holes move toward the paper center.

Decrement: Holes move toward the paper edge.6110 1 MF Fin 1 *BCU

6110 2 MF Fin 2 *BCU

[-7.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

6110 3 Booklet Fin [-2.5 to 7.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-85 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Staple Position]6111

Adjusts the stapling position.Increment: Staple position moves toward the edge of paper.

Decrement: Staple position moves toward the center of paper.NOTE: Although the adjustable range is ±3.5 mm, the stapling position can bechanged only by 1.0 mm when stapling one position at the front or rear side evenwhen the input value is more than 1.0.

6111 1 MF Fin *BCU [-3.5 to 3.5 / 0 / 0.5 mm/step]

6111 2 Booklet Fin [-3.75 to 3.75 / 0 / 0.25 mm/step]

6112 [Fold Position] *BCU [-3.75 to 3.75 / 0. / 0.25 mm/step]

6111 1 A3/DLT

6111 2 B4/LG

6112 3 A4/LT

6112 4 A3/DLT

6112 5 B4/LG6112 6 A4/LT

Adjusts the folding positions of the optionalbooklet finisher.

[Multi Bin Set]6901

Specifies whether or not the optional multi-bin output tray is installed. When installingthe multi-bin output tray, this SP mode should be set to “1”.

6901 1 Multi Bin Set *BCU [0 or 1 / 0 / -]0: Not installed1: Installed



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-86 SM

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

Working Time *BCU Display: 00000000~99999999 min7001

The number of prints and drive time for drum revolutions can be obtained by countingthe main motor revolution time. If the amount of time required for the drum to revolve

to print 1 copy increases, this data combined with the number of copies can be usedto analyze problems and could be useful for future product development.

[Original Counter]7002

Displays the total original count (number of originals fed) for the selected mode.

7002 1 Total

7002 2 Copy

7002 3 Fax

7002 4 Doc. Svr. Application

7002 5 Scanner

7002 6 Others

*CTL

7003 [Print Counter] Meter Charge Counter(Print, Development)

Displays the values of the color counters.

7003 1 Total Count

7003 2 Copy: B&W

7003 4 Copy: Full Color

7003 5 FAX: B&W

7003 7 Print: B&W

7003 8 Print: Full Color

*CTL [-9999 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

7003 10 Development: CMY

7003 11 Development: K

*CTL These SP modes are development counters forthe meter charge mode.

7003 12 Copy: Single Color7003 13 Copy: Twin Color

*CTL Displays the values of the color counters.

7003 20 Total: Full Color

7003 21 Total: B&W Single

7003 22 Total: Single

*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanesemarket only.

7003 23 Total: B&W *CTL This SP mode is print counters for the metercharge mode.

7003 24 Copy: Full Color

7003 25 Print: Full Color

*CTL These SP modes are used for Japanesemarket only.

7003 26 Copy: Color

7003 27 Copy: B/W

7003 28 Print: Color

7003 29 Print: B&W

7003 30 Total: Color Total

*CTL These SP modes are print counters for themeter charge mode.

[Other Counter]7007

Displays counter values.

7007 1 Duplex

7007 2 A3/DLT

7007 3 Staple

*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-87 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter 7101

Displays the counter values for each paper size.

7101 5 A4 LEF

7101 6 A5 LEF7101 14 B5 LEF

7101 38 LT LEF

7101 44 HLT LEF

7101 132 A3 SEF

7101 133 A4 SEF

7101 134 A5 SEF

7101 141 B4 SEF

7101 142 B5 SEF

7101 160 DLT SEF

7101 164 LG SEF

7101 166 LT SEF

7101 172 HLT SEF

7101 255 Other

*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

[Print Count–Paper Size] Paper Size Counter 7105

Displays the counter values for each paper size.

7105 1 Normal

7105 2 Recycled

7105 3 Special

7105 4 Color

7105 5 Letterhead

7105 6 Letterhead

7105 7 Label

7105 8 Thick7105 9 Used

7105 11 Index

7105 12 Others

*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

[Total Scan Counter]7201

Displays the total number of scans.

7201 1 Total Scan Counter *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 scan/step]

[Print Counter–Paper Tray] Paper Feed Section Counter 7204

Displays the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7204 1 Bypass

7204 2 Tray 1

7204 3 Tray 2

7204 4 Tray 3

7204 5 Tray 4

7204 6 Duplex

*CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-88 SM

[Total ADF Counter]7205

Displays the total number of originals fed by the ARDF.

7205 1 ADF Total Counter *CTL

7206 [Staple Counter]

7206 1 Normal Staple

7206 2 Binding Staple

*CTL Displays the number of stapler operations.

[Punch Counter]7209

Displays the number of times hole punching has been done.

7209 1 Punch *CTL [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1/step]

[Total SC Counter]7401 Displays the number of SC codes detected.

7401 1 SC Counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1/step]

[SC History]7403

Logs the SC codes detected.The 10 most recently detected SC Codes are not displayed on the screen, but can beseen on the SMC (logging) outputs.

7403 1 Latest

7403 2 Latest 1

7403 3 Latest 2

7403 4 Latest 37403 5 Latest 4

7403 6 Latest 5

7403 7 Latest 6

7403 8 Latest 7

7403 9 Latest 8

7403 10 Latest 9

*CTL

[Total Paper Jam Counter]7502

Displays the total number of jams detected.

7502 1 Total Jam *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

[Total Original Jam Counter]7503

Displays the total number of original jams.

7503 1 Original Jam counter *CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 original/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-89 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Paper Jam Location]D: Duplex, MB: Mail Box, F; Finisher, E: External, I: InternalON: On check, OFF: Off Check

7504

Displays the number of jams according to the location where jams were detected.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7504 3 Tray 1: ON *CTL

7504 4 Tray 2: ON

7504 5 Tray 3/LCT: ON

7504 6 Tray 4: ON

7504 8 Regist.: ON

7504 9 External Tray: ON

7504 10 Internal Tray: ON

7504 11 Duplex: ON

7504 12 Duplex Exit 1: ON

7504 13 Duplex Exit 2: ON

7504 14 Duplex Exit 3: ON7504 15 Duplex Feed: ON

7504 51 Tray 1: OFF

7504 52 Tray 2: OFF

7504 53 Tray 3/LCT: OFF

7504 54 Tray 4: OFF

7504 61 Registration: OFF

7504 63 External Tray: OFF

7504 64 Internal Tray: OFF

7504 65 Duplex: OFF

7504 66 Duplex Exit 1: OFF

7504 67 Duplex Exit 2: OFF

7504 68 Duplex Exit 3: OFF7504 69 Duplex Feed: OFF

7504 100 Finisher Entrance

7504 101 Finisher Shift Tray 1

7504 102 Finisher Shift Tray 2

7504 103 Finisher Staple

7504 104 Finisher Exit

7504 105 Finisher Drive

7504 106 Finisher Tray Up/Down

7504 107 Finisher Jogger

7504 108 Finisher Staple

7504 109 Finisher Exit

7504 110 Finisher Punch

7504 111 Finisher Jam Clear

7504 120 Finisher Entrance: ON

7504 121 Finisher Entrance: OFF

7504 122 Finisher STACK Exit

7504 123 Finisher Folder: ON

7504 124 Finisher Folder: OFF

7504 125 Finisher Stapler

7504 126 Finisher Punch

7504 127 Finisher Transport Motor

7504 128 Finisher Paddle Motor

7504 129 Finisher Stapler Slide Motor / Stapler Folder Motor

7504 130 Finisher Jogger Motor

7504 131 Finisher Lift Motor

⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒⇒

⇒

Rev. 11/2005



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-90 SM

[Original Jam Detection]7505

Displays the total number of original jams by location.

7505 1 At Power On

7505 3 Skew Correction Sensor (On Check)

7505 4 Interval Sensor (On Check)

7505 5 Registration Sensor (On Check)

7505 6 Relay Sensor (On Check)

7505 7 Inverter Sensor (On Check)

7505 53 Skew Correction Sensor (Off Check)

7505 54 Interval Sensor (Off Check)

7505 55 Registration Sensor (Off Check)

7505 56 Relay Sensor (Off Check)

7505 57 Inverter Sensor (Off Check)

*CTL

[Jam Count by Paper Size]7506

Displays the number of jams according to the paper size.7506 5 A4 LEF

7506 6 A5 LEF

7506 14 B5 LEF

7506 38 LT LEF

7506 44 HLT LEF

7506 132 A3 SEF

7506 133 A4 SEF

7506 134 A5 SEF

7506 141 B4 SEF

7506 412 B5 SEF

7506 160 DLT SEF

7506 164 LG SEF7506 166 LT SEF

7506 172 HLT SEF

7506 255 Others

*CTL [0 to 9999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

[Plotter Jam History]7507

Displays the 10 most recently detected paper jams.

7507 1 Latest

7507 2 Latest 1

7507 3 Latest 2

7507 4 Latest 3

7507 5 Latest 47507 6 Latest 5

7507 7 Latest 6

7507 8 Latest 7

7507 9 Latest 8

7507 10 Latest 9

*CTL



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-91 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Original Jam History]7508

Displays the 10 most recently detected original jams.

7508 1 Latest

7508 2 Latest-17508 3 Latest-2

7508 4 Latest-3

7508 5 Latest-4

7508 6 Latest-5

7508 7 Latest-6

7508 8 Latest-7

7508 9 Latest-8

7508 10 Latest-9

*CTL

[ROM No./Firmware Version] 7801

Displays the version of each firmware

7801255

Firmware Version

7803 [PM Counter]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Oil Supply: Oil Supply Unit, Fusing:Fusing Unit, Transfer: Transfer Unit

Displays the number of sheets printed for each current maintenance unit.PM counters click up based on the number of A4 (LT) LEF size sheets printed.Therefore, the A3 (DLT) Double Count is activated. The Double Count cannot bedeactivated.

When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit isinstalled. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PMCounter - Previous (SP7-906-1 to 10) and is reset to “0”.The total number of sheets printed with the last unit replaced can be checked withSP7-906-1 to 10.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7803 1 Paper

7803 2 S: PCU [K]

7803 3 S: PCU [Y]

7803 4 S: PCU [M]

7803 5 S: PCU [C]

7803 6 S: Dev. [K]

7803 7 S: Dev. [Y]

7803 8 S: Dev. [M]7803 9 S: Dev. [C]

7803 10 S: Oil Supply

7803 11 PF By-pass

7803 12 PF Tray 1

7803 13 PF Tray 2

7803 14 PF Tray 3

7803 15 PF Tray 4

7803 16 S: Fusing

7803 17 S: Transfer

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-92 SM

7803 [PM Counter]


Displays the number of revolutions of motors or clutches for each current

maintenance unit.[0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]When a unit is replaced, the machine automatically detects that the new unit isinstalled. Then, the current PM counter value is automatically moved to the PMCounter - Previous (SP7-906-11 to 20) and is reset to “0”. The total number ofrevolutions made with the last unit replaced can be checked with SP7-906-11 to 20.

7803 18 R: PCU [K] Target Revolution: 300,000

7803 19 R: PCU [Y] Target Revolution: 319,000

7803 20 R: PCU [M] Target Revolution: 319,000

7803 21 R: PCU [C] Target Revolution: 319,000

7803 22 R: Dev. [K] Target Revolution: 1,142,000

7803 23 R: Dev. [Y] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7803 24 R: Dev. [M] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7803 25 R: Dev. [C] Target Revolution: 1,146,000

7803 26 R: Oil Supply Target Revolution: 2,559,000

7803 27 R: Fusing Target Revolution: 8,397,000

7803 28 R: Transfer

*BCU

Displays the number of sheets printed until the waste toner bottle becomes full ortoner runs out.

7803 29 S: Waste Toner

7803 30 S: Toner [K]

7803 31 S: Toner [Y]

7803 32 S: Toner [M]

7803 33 S: Toner [C]

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 sheet/step]

Displays the total operating time for the toner attraction pump.

7803 34 Toner Supply [K]7803 35 Toner Supply [Y]

7803 36 Toner Supply [M]

7803 37 Toner Supply[C]

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / - / 1 s/step]

Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current revolution ÷ Target revolution) × 100. This shows how much of the unit’sexpected lifetime has been used up.The R% counter is based on rotations, not prints. If the number of rotations reachesthe limit, the machine enters the end condition for that unit. If the print count lifetime isreached first, the machine also enters the end condition, even though the R% counteris still less than 100%.Oil supply unit: When the R% counter reaches 100%, it enters the near-end condition,not the end condition. The end condition occurs some number of rotations after this(not adjustable).NOTE: The machine internally adjusts or compensates as necessary, depending on

conditions of machine usage. Due to this, at the oil supply unit near-endcondition, the R% counter of the oil supply unit can be 100%, lower than100%, or higher than 100%.

7803 38 R(%): PCU [K]

7803 39 R(%): PCU [Y]

7803 40 R(%): PCU [M]

7803 41 R(%): PCU [C]

7803 42 R(%): Dev [K]

7803 43 R(%): Dev [Y]

7803 44 R(%): Dev [M]

7803 45 R(%): Dev [C]

*BCU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-93 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

7803 [PM Counter]


7803 46 R(%): Oil Supply

7803 47 R(%): Fusing7803 48 S: Trans Cln

7803 49 R: Trans Cln

7804 [PM Counter Reset] PM Counter Clear

(Unit, [Color])Dev.: Development Unit, PF: Paper Feed Rollers, Transfer: Transfer Unit

Clears the PM counter.Press the Enter key after the machine asks “Execute?”, which will store the PMcounter value in SP7-906-1 to 35 (PM Counter - Previous) and reset the value of thecurrent PM counter to 0.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7804 1 Paper

7804 2 PCU [K]

7804 3 PCU [Y]

7804 4 PCU [M]

7804 5 PCU [C]

7804 6 Dev. [K]

7804 7 Dev. [Y]

7804 8 Dev. [M]

7804 9 Dev. [C]

7804 10 Oil Supply

7804 11 PF By-pass

7804 12 PF Tray 1

7804 13 PF Tray 27804 14 PF Tray 3

7804 15 PF Tray 4

7804 16 Fusing

7804 17 Transfer

7804 18 Trans Cln

7804 50 All

[SC/Jam Counter Reset] 7807

Clears the counters related to SC codes and paper jams.

7807 1 SC/Jam Clear

[Counter Reset]NOTE: For more information, see “NOTE 1” following this table.

7808

Clears all counters.

7808 1 Counter Clear

[Access Code Clear]7810

Use to clear the access code if the customer forgets the code (password).

7810 1 Access Code Clear

7811 [Original Counter Clear]



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-94 SM

7811 1 This program reset the original counter (SP7-002-001 through 006).

[Tray Clear] Paper Tray Counter Clear7816

Clears the counters (SP7-204) for the number of sheets fed from the paper feed

stations.NOTE: The LCT is counted as the 3rd feed station.

7816 1 Bypass Tray

7816 2 Tray 1

7816 3 Tray 2

7816 4 Tray 3/LCT

7816 5 Tray 4

7816 6 Duplex

7826 [MF Error Counter] Japan Only

7826 1 Error Total

7826 2 Error Staple

7827 [MF Error Counter Clear] Japan Only

[Self-Diagnose Result Display] 7832

Displays the result of the diagnostics.

7832 1 Diag. Result *CTL

[Coverage] Pixel Coverage Ratio7833

Displays the image coverage ratio for each color of the last output.

This SP mode displays the “coverage ratio” of the output, i.e. the ratio of the totalpixel area of the image data to the total printable area on the paper. Note that thisvalue is not directly proportional to the amount of toner consumed, although of courseit is one factor that affects this amount. The other major factors involved include: thetype, total image area and image density of the original, toner concentration anddeveloper potential.

7833 1 Last [K]

7833 2 Last [C]

7833 3 Last [M]

7833 4 Last [Y]

*BCU [0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]

Displays accumulated average value of image coverage ratio for each color.SP 7-833-5 to -8 vs SP 8-831-1 to –4The averages for K (SP 7-833-5 and SP 8-831-1) are the same.

For CMY, SP 8-831 does not include black-and-white pages in the middle of a color job. However, SP 7-833 does include these pages in the average. As a result, thereadings of SP 7-833 will be lower, because these averages include pages for whichthere is zero for CMY, but the averages calculated for SP 8-831 do not include thesepages.

7833 5 Average [K]

7833 6 Average [C]

7833 7 Average [M]

7833 8 Average [Y]

*BCU [0 to 100.00 / - / 0.01 %/step]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-95 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Displays the total number of toner cartridges replaced.

7833 11 Toner [K]

7833 12 Toner [C]

7833 13 Toner [M]

7833 14 Toner [Y]

*BCU [0 to 65535 / - / 1 cartridge/step]

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001through 004 are the same.

7834 [Coverage Clr] Coverage/Toner Data Clear

7834 1 Average This menu resets the data in SP7-833-005through 008.

7834 2 Toner This menu resets the data in SP7-833-011through 014 and SP8-781-001 through 004.

7834 3 S: PREV Toner This menu resets the data in SP8-901-001through 004.

7834 4 S: Coverage 0-100 This menu resets the data in SP8-851-001through 004, SP8-861-001 through 004, SP 8-871-001 through 004, and SP8-881-001

through 004.7834 255 All This menu resets all the data listed above.

7835 ACC Counter *CTL [0 ~ 9999999 / 0 / 1 /step]

7835 1 Copy ACC

7835 2 Printer ACC

Displays the number of times ACC has beendone.

Total Memory Size7836

Displays the memory capacity of the controller system.

ADF Scan Glass Dust Check Counter7852

Counts the number of occurrences (0 ~ 65,535) when dust was detected on thescanning glass of the ADF. Counting is done only if SP4020 1 (ADF Scan Glass DustCheck) is switched on. Memory All Clear (SP5801) resets this counter to zero

[Assert Info]7901

Records the location where a problem is detected in the program. The data stored inthis SP is used for problem analysis. DFU

7901 1 File Name

7901 2 Number of Lines

7901 3 Location

7905 [Alert Display]

Wst Oil: Full *BCU [232 to 464 / 232 / 1 kilo-revolutions/step]7905 10

Specifies the number of revolutions the development drive motor-K can make afterthe message, “Waste Oil Bottle is Almost Full”, is displayed.The machine stops after the motor has made the specified number of revolutions.This SP specifies the interval from near end to end for the waste oil bottle. 232krevolutions equals 2.5k prints. If it is set to 464, the end condition is 5.0k prints afternear end.

Oil: Alert: Page *BCU [25.0 to 27.5 / 27.5 / 0.1 kilo-sheets/step]7905 14

Specifies the number of sheets the machine can output after the oil supply reachesthe near-end condition.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-96 SM

7906 [PM Counter: Previous]

(Sheets or Rotations, Unit, [Color]), Dev.: Development Unit

Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance units.

7906 1 S:PCU [K]

7906 2 S:PCU [Y]

7906 3 S:PCU [M]

7906 4 S:PCU [C]

7906 5 S:Dev. [K]

7906 6 S:Dev. [Y]

7906 7 S:Dev. [M]

7906 8 S:Dev. [C]

7906 9 S:Oil Supply

7906 10 S:Fusing

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

Displays the number of revolutions for motors or clutches in the previousmaintenance units.

7906 11 R:PCU [K]

7906 12 R:PCU [Y]7906 13 R:PCU [M]

7906 14 R:PCU [C]

7906 15 R:Dev. [K]

7906 16 R:Dev. [Y]

7906 17 R:Dev. [M]

7906 18 R:Dev. [C]

7906 19 R:Oil Supply

7906 20 R:Fusing

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 revolution/step]

Displays the number of sheets printed with the previous maintenance unit or tonercartridge.

7906 21 S:Waste Toner

7906 22 S:Toner [K]7906 23 S:Toner [Y]

7906 24 S:Toner [M]

7906 25 S:Toner [C]

*BCU [0 to 9999999 / 0 / 1 sheet/step]

Displays the value given by the following formula:

(Current count ÷ Yield count) x 100, where “Current count” is the current values in thecounter for the part, and “Yield count” is the recommended yield.

7906 26 R(%): PCU [K]

7906 27 R(%): PCU [Y]

7906 28 R(%): PCU [M]

7906 29 R(%): PCU [C]

7906 30 R(%): Dev [K]

7906 31 R(%): Dev [Y]

7906 32 R(%): Dev [M]7906 33 R(%): Dev [C]

7906 34 R(%): Oil Supply

7906 35 R(%): Fusing

*BCU [0 to 999 / 0 / 1 %/step]

[Check Sum]7907

Displays the check sum of the firmware.

7907 1 Engine Main

7907 2 Engine MUSIC

*BCU



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-97 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

SP8-xxx: Data Log2

Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available,such as sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codesthat when used in combination with others, can provide useful information.

SP Numbers What They Do

SP8 211~SP8 216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.

SP8 401~SP8 406 The number of pages printed from the document server

SP8 691~SP8 696 The number of pages sent from the document server

Specifically, the following questions can be answered:

• How is the document server actually being used?

• What application is using the document server most frequently?

• What data in the document server is being reused?

Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of

operation (the mode of operation is referred to as an “application”). Before readingthe Group 8 Service Table, make sure that you understand what these prefixesmean.

Prefixes What it means

T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for allapplications (C, F, P, etc.).

C: Copy application.

F: Fax application.

P: Print application.

S: Scan application.

Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for eachapplication when the job was not stored on thedocument server.

L: Local storage(document server) Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the documentserver. The L: counters work differently case bycase. Sometimes, they count jobs/pages storedon the document server; this can be indocument server mode (from the documentserver window), or from another mode, such asfrom a printer driver or by pressing the StoreFile button in the Copy mode window.Sometimes, they include occasions when theuser uses a file that is already on the documentserver. Each counter will be discussed case bycase.

O: Other applications(external networkapplications, forexample)

Refers to network applications such as WebImage Monitor. Utilities developed with the SDK(Software Development Kit) will also be countedwith this group in the future.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-98 SM

The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity ofdisplaying them on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs.Read over the list of abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the nameof an SP that you do not understand.

Key for Abbreviations

Abbreviation What it means

/ “By”, e.g. “T:Jobs/Apl” = Total Jobs “by” Application

> More (2> “2 or more”, 4> “4 or more”

AddBook Address Book

Apl Application

B/W Black & White

Bk Black

C Cyan

ColCr Color Create

ColMode Color Mode

Comb CombineComp Compression

Deliv Delivery

DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan,Print) used to store the job on the document server, forexample.

Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.

Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides

Emul Emulation

FC Full Color

FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)

Full Bleed No Margins

GenCopy Generation Copy ModeGPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter

does not count up. For jobs larger than 10 pages, thiscounter counts up by the number that is in excess of 10(e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)

IFax Internet Fax

ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI,e.g. border removal, adding stamps, page numbers, etc.

K Black (YMCK)

LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.

LSize Large (paper) Size

Mag Magnification

MC One color (monochrome)NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to

monitor machines remotely. “NRS” is used overseas, “CSS”is used in Japan.

Org Original for scanning

OrgJam Original Jam

Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities thatallows print jobs to be distributed evenly among the printerson the network, and allows files to moved around,combined, and converted to different formats.

PC Personal Computer



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-99 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Abbreviation What it means

PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original.Duplex pages count as two pages, and A3 simplex count astwo pages if the 11 X 17 inch counter SP is switched ON.

PJob Print Jobs

Ppr PaperPrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam

PrtPGS Print Pages

R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is under development and currentlynot available.

Rez Resolution

SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)

Scn Scan

Sim, Simplex Simplex, printing on 1 side.

S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail

SMC SMC report printed with SP5990. All of the Group 8counters are recorded in the SMC report.

Svr Server

TonEnd Toner End

TonSave Toner Save

TXJob Send, Transmission

YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan

YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black

NOTE: All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5 801 1 Memory All Clear.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-100 SM

8 001 T:Total Jobs *CTL

8 002 C:Total Jobs *CTL

8 003 F:Total Jobs *CTL

8 004 P:Total Jobs *CTL8 005 S:Total Jobs *CTL

8 006 L:Total Jobs *CTL

8 007 O:Total Jobs *CTL

These SPs count the number of times eachapplication is used to do a job.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: The L: counter is the total number of times theother applications are used to send a job to thedocument server, plus the number of times a filealready on the document server is used.

• These SPs reveal the number of times an application is used, not the number ofpages processed.

• When an application is opened for image input or output, this counts as one job.

• Interrupted jobs (paper jams, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

• Only jobs executed by the customer are counted. Jobs executed by the customer

engineer using the SP modes are not counted.• When using secure printing (when a password is required to start the print job),

the job is counted at the time when either “Delete Data” or “Specify Output” isspecified.

• A job is counted as a fax job when the job is stored for sending.

• When a fax is received to fax memory, the F: counter increments but the L:counter does not (the document server is not used).

• A fax broadcast counts as one job for the F: counter (the fax destinations in thebroadcast are not counted separately).

• A fax broadcast is counted only after all the faxes have been sent to theirdestinations. If one transmission generates an error, then the broadcast will not

be counted until the transmission has been completed.• A printed fax report counts as one job for the F: counter.

• The F: counter does not distinguish between fax sending or receiving.

• When a copy job on the document server is printed, SP8022 also increments,and when a print job stored on the document server is printed, SP8024 alsoincrements.

• When an original is both copied and stored on the document server, the C: andL: counters both increment.

• When a print job is stored on the document server, only the L: counterincrements.

• When the user presses the Document Server button to store the job on thedocument server, only the L: counter increments.

• When the user enters document server mode and prints data stored on thedocument server, only the L: counter increments.

• When an image received from Palm 2 is received and stored, the L: counterincrements.

• When the customer prints a report (user code list, for example), the O: counterincrements. However, for fax reports and reports executed from the faxapplication, the F: counter increments.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-101 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8 011 T:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 012 C:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 013 F:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 014 P:Jobs/LS *CTL8 015 S:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 016 L:Jobs/LS *CTL

8 017 O:Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of jobs stored to thedocument server by each application, to reveal howlocal storage is being used for input.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs stored fromwithin the document server mode screen at theoperation panel.

• When a scan job is sent to the document server, the S: counter increments.When you enter document server mode and then scan an original, the L: counterincrements.

• When a print job is sent to the document server, the P: counter increments.

• When a network application sends data to the document server, the O: counterincrements.

• When an image from Palm 2 is stored on the document server, the O: counterincrements.

• When a fax is sent to the document server, the F: counter increments.

8 021 T:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 022 C:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 023 F:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 024 P:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 025 S:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 026 L:Pjob/LS *CTL

8 027 O:Pjob/LS *CTL

These SPs reveal how files printed from thedocument server were stored on the documentserver originally.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobsstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with anotherapplication, the C: counter increments.

• When an application like DeskTopBinder merges a copy job that was stored onthe document server with a print job that was stored on the document server, theC: and P: counters both increment.

• When a job already on the document server is printed with another application,the L: counter increments.

• When a scanner job stored on the document server is printed with another

application, the S: counter increments. If the original was scanned from withindocument server mode, then the L: counter increments.

• When images stored on the document server by a network application (includingPalm 2), are printed with another application, the O: counter increments.

• When a copy job stored on the document server is printed with a networkapplication (Web Image Monitor, for example), the C: counter increments.

• When a fax on the document server is printed, the F: counter increments.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-102 SM

8 031 T:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 032 C:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 033 F:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 034 P:Pjob/DesApl *CTL8 035 S:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 036 L:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

8 037 O:Pjob/DesApl *CTL

These SPs reveal what applications were usedto output documents from the document server.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobsprinted from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When documents already stored on the document server are printed, the countfor the application that started the print job is incremented.

• When the print job is started from a network application (Desk Top Binder, WebImage Monitor, etc.) the L: counter increments.

8 041 T:TX Jobs/LS *CTL8 042 C:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 043 F:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 044 P:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 045 S:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 046 L:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

8 047 O:TX Jobs/LS *CTL

These SPs count the applications that storedfiles on the document server that were lateraccessed for transmission over the telephoneline or over a network (attached to an e-mail, oras a fax image by I-Fax).

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: Jobs merged for sending are countedseparately.The L: counter counts the number of jobsscanned from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

• When a stored copy job is sent from the document server, the C: counterincrements.

• When images stored on the document server by a network application or Palm2is sent as an e-mail, the O: counter increments.

8 051 T:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 052 C:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 053 F:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 054 P:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 055 S:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

8 056 L:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL8 057 O:TX Jobs/DesApl *CTL

These SPs count the applications used to sendfiles from the document server over thetelephone line or over a network (attached to ane-mail, or as a fax image by I-Fax). Jobsmerged for sending are counted separately.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

The L: counter counts the number of jobs sentfrom within the document server mode screenat the operation panel.

• If the send is started from Desk Top Binder or Web Image Monitor, for example,then the O: counter increments.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-103 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 061

These SPs total the finishing methods. The finishing method is specified bythe application.

C:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 062

These SPs total finishing methods for copy jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

F:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 063

These SPs total finishing methods for fax jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

Note: Finishing features for fax jobs are not available at this time.

P:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 064

These SPs total finishing methods for print jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

S:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 065

These SPs total finishing methods for scan jobs only. The finishing method isspecified by the application.

Note: Finishing features for scan jobs are not available at this time.

L:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 066

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs output from within the documentserver mode screen at the operation panel. The finishing method is specifiedfrom the print window within document server mode.

O:FIN Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 067

These SPs total finishing methods for jobs executed by an external

application, over the network. The finishing method is specified by theapplication.

8 06x 1 Sort Number of jobs started in Sort mode. When a stored copy job is setfor Sort and then stored on the document server, the L: counterincrements. (See SP8 066 1)

8 06x 2 Stack Number of jobs started out of Sort mode.

8 06x 3 Staple Number of jobs started in Staple mode.

8 06x 4 Booklet

Number of jobs started in Booklet mode. If the machine is in staplemode, the Staple counter also increments.

8 06x 5 Z-Fold Number of jobs started In any mode other than the Booklet modeand set for folding (Z-fold).

8 06x 6 Punch Number of jobs started in Punch mode. When Punch is set for aprint job, the P: counter increments. (See SP8 064 6.)

8 06x 7 Other Reserved. Not used.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-104 SM

T:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 071

These SPs count the number of jobs broken down by the number of pagesin the job, regardless of which application was used.

C:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 072

These SPs count and calculate the number of copy jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

F:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 073

These SPs count and calculate the number of fax jobs by size based on thenumber of pages in the job.

P:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 074

These SPs count and calculate the number of print jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

S:Jobs/PGS [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 075

These SPs count and calculate the number of scan jobs by size based onthe number of pages in the job.

L:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 076These SPs count and calculate the number of jobs printed from within thedocument server mode window at the operation panel, by the number ofpages in the job.

O:Jobs/PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 077

These SPs count and calculate the number of “Other” application jobs (WebImage Monitor, Palm 2, etc.) by size based on the number of pages in the job.

8 07x 1 1 Page 8 07x 8 21~50 Pages

8 07x 2 2 Pages 8 07x 9 51~100 Pages

8 07x 3 3 Pages 8 07x 10 101~300 Pages

8 07x 4 4 Pages 8 07x 11 301~500 Pages8 07x 5 5 Pages 8 07x 12 501~700 Pages

8 07x 6 6~10 Pages 8 07x 13 701~1000 Pages

8 07x 7 11~20 Pages 8 07x 14 1001~ Pages

• For example: When a copy job stored on the document server is printed indocument server mode, the appropriate L: counter (SP8076 0xx) increments.

• Printing a fax report counts as a job and increments the F: counter (SP 8073).

• Interrupted jobs (paper jam, etc.) are counted, even though they do not finish.

• If a job is paused and re-started, it counts as one job.

• If the finisher runs out of staples during a print and staple job, then the job iscounted at the time the error occurs.

• For copy jobs (SP 8072) and scan jobs (SP 8075), the total is calculated bymultiplying the number of sets of copies by the number of pages scanned. (Oneduplex page counts as 2.)

• The first test print and subsequent test prints to adjust settings are added to thenumber of pages of the copy job (SP 8072).

• When printing the first page of a job from within the document server screen, thepage is counted.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-105 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 111

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent byfax, either directly or using a file stored on the document server, on atelephone line.

Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.

FAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 113

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent byfax directly on a telephone line.


8 11x 1 B/W

8 11x 2 Color

• These counters count jobs, not pages.

• This SP counts fax jobs sent over a telephone line with a fax application,

including documents stored on the document server. • If the mode is changed during the job, the job will count with the mode set when the job started.

• If the same document is faxed to both a public fax line and an I-Fax at a destinationwhere both are available, then this counter increments, and the I-Fax counter (8 12x)also increments.

• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is sent.

T:IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 121

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent,either directly or using a file stored on the document server, as fax images

using I-Fax.Note: Color fax sending is not available at this time.

IFAX TX Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 123

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) sent (notstored on the document server), as fax images using I-Fax.


8 12x 1 B/W

8 12x 2 Color


• The counters for color are provided for future use; the color fax feature is not

available at this time.• The fax job is counted when the job is scanned for sending, not when the job is

sent.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-106 SM

T:S-to-Email Jobs *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 131

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand attached to an e-mail, regardless of whether the document server wasused or not.

S-to-Email Jobs *CTL8 135

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned andattached to e-mail, without storing the original on the document server.

8 13x 1 B/W

8 13x 2 Color

8 13x 3 ACS


• If the job is stored on the document server, after the job is stored it is determinedto be color or black-and-white then counted.

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while the

document is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending

on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

• If several jobs are combined for sending to the Scan Router, Scan-to-Email, orScan-to-PC, or if one job is sent to more than one destination. Each send iscounted separately. For example, if the same document is sent by Scan-to-Emailas well as Scan-to-PC, then it is counted twice (once for Scan-to-Email and oncefor Scan-to-PC).

T:Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 141

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent to a Scan Router server.

Deliv Jobs/Svr *CTL8 145

These SPs count the number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scanned inscanner mode and sent to a Scan Router server.

8 14x 1 B/W

8 14x 2 Color

8 14x 3 ACS


• The jobs are counted even though the arrival and reception of the jobs at theScan Router server cannot be confirmed.

• If even one color image is mixed with black-and-white images, then the job iscounted as a “Color” job.

• If the job is cancelled during scanning, or if the job is cancelled while thedocument is waiting to be delivered, the job is not counted.

• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, dependingon what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-107 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 151

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent to a folder on a PC (Scan-to-PC).

Note: At the present time, 8 151 and 8 155 perform identical counts.S:Deliv Jobs/PC *CTL8 155

These SPs count the total number of jobs (color or black-and-white) scannedand sent with Scan-to-PC.

8 15x 1 B/W

8 15x 2 Color

8 15x 3 ACS


• If the job is cancelled during scanning, it is not counted.

• If the job is cancelled while it is waiting to be sent, the job is not counted.• If the job is cancelled during sending, it may or may not be counted, depending

on what stage of the process had been reached when the job was cancelled.

• Even if several files are combined for sending, the transmission counts as one job.

8 161 T:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

8 163 F:PCFAX TX Jobs *CTL

These SPs count the number of PC Faxtransmission jobs. A job is counted from when itis registered for sending, not when it is sent.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]Note: At the present time, these countersperform identical counts.

• This counts fax jobs started from a PC using a PC fax application, and sendingthe data out to the destination from the PC through the copier.

8 191 T:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 192 C:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 193 F:Total Scan PGS *CTL8 195 S:Total Scan PGS *CTL

8 196 L:Total Scan PGS *CTL

These SPs count the pages scanned by eachapplication that uses the scanner to scan

images.[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• SP 8 191 to 8 196 count the number of scanned sides of pages, not the numberof physical pages.

• These counters do not count reading user stamp data, or reading color charts toadjust color.

• Previews done with a scanner driver are not counted.

• A count is done only after all images of a job have been scanned.

•Scans made in SP mode are not counted.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-108 SM

Examples

• If 3 B5 pages and 1 A3 page are scanned with the scanner application but notstored, the S: count is 4.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server usingthe Store File button in the Copy mode window, the C: count is 6 and the L:count is 6.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied but not stored, the C: count is 6.

• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.

T:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 201

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner for

scan and copy jobs. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmissionare not counted.

Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the UserTools display.

S:LSize Scan PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 205

These SPs count the total number of large pages input with the scanner forscan jobs only. Large size paper (A3/DLT) scanned for fax transmission arenot counted.

Note: These counters are displayed in the SMC Report, and in the UserTools display.

8 211 T:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 212 C:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 213 F:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 215 S:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

8 216 L:Scan PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages scanned

into the document server.[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy modescreen

• Reading user stamp data is not counted.

• If a job is cancelled, the pages output as far as the cancellation are counted.

• If the scanner application scans and stores 3 B5 sheets and 1 A4 sheet, the S:

count is 4.• If pages are copied but not stored on the document server, these counters do not

change.

• If both sides of 3 A4 sheets are copied and stored to the document server, the C:count is 6 and the L: count is 6.

• If you enter document server mode then scan 6 pages, the L: count is 6.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-109 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

ADF Org Feeds *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 221

These SPs count the number of pages fed through the ADF for front andbackside scanning.

8 221 1 Front Number of front sides fed for scanning:With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Frontside count is the same as the number of pages fed for eithersimplex or duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Frontside count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex frontside scanning. (The front side is determined by which side the userloads face up.)

8 221 2 Back Number of rear sides fed for scanning:

With an ADF that can scan both sides simultaneously, the Backcount is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex scanning.

With an ADF that cannot scan both sides simultaneously, the Back

count is the same as the number of pages fed for duplex rear-sidescanning.

• When 1 sheet is fed for duplex scanning the Front count is 1 and the Back countis 1.

• If a jam occurs during the job, recovery processing is not counted to avoid doublecounting. Also, the pages are not counted if the jam occurs before the first sheetis output.

Scan PGS/Mode *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 231

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by each ADF mode todetermine the workload on the ADF.

8 231 1 Large Volume Selectable. Large copy jobs that cannot be loadedin the ADF at one time.

8 231 2 SADF Selectable. Feeding pages one by one through the ADF.

8 231 3 Mixed Size Selectable. Select “Mixed Sizes” on the operationpanel.

8 231 4 Custom Size Selectable. Originals of non-standard size.

8 231 5 Platen Book mode. Raising the ADF and placing the

original directly on the platen.

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switchesfrom ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.

• The user cannot select mixed sizes or non-standard sizes with the fax applicationso if the original’s page sizes are mixed or non-standard, these are not counted.

• If the user selects “Mixed Sizes” for copying in the platen mode, the Mixed Sizecount is enabled.

• In the SADF mode if the user copies 1 page in platen mode and then copies 2pages with SADF, the Platen count is 1 and the SADF count is 3.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-110 SM

T:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 241

These SPs count the total number of scanned pages by original type for all jobs, regardless of which application was used.

C:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 242

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Copy jobs.

F:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 243

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Fax jobs.

S:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 245

These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type for Scan jobs.

L:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 246

These SPs count the number of pages scanned and stored from within thedocument server mode screen at the operation panel, and with the Store Filebutton from within the Copy mode screen

O:Scan PGS/Org *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 247These SPs count the number of pages scanned by original type by Otherapplications.

8 241 8 242 8 243 8 245 8 246 8 247

8 24x 1: Text Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8 24x 2: Text/Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8 24x 3: Photo Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

8 24x 4: GenCopy, Pale Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

8 24x 5: Map Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes

8 24x 6: Normal/Detail Yes No Yes No No No

8 24x 7: Fine/Super Fine Yes No Yes No No No

8 24x 8: Binary Yes No No Yes No No8 24x 9: Grayscale Yes No No Yes No No

8 24x 10: Color Yes No No Yes No No

8 24x 11: Other Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

• If the scan mode is changed during the job, for example, if the user switchesfrom ADF to Platen mode, the count is done for the last selected mode.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-111 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

8 251 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 252 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 254 P:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

8 256 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL8 257 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt *CTL

These SPs show how many times Image Editfeatures have been selected at the operationpanel for each application. Some examples ofthese editing features are:

• Erase> Border

• Erase> Center

• Image Repeat

• Centering • Positive/Negative [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

Note: The count totals the number of times theedit features have been used. A detailedbreakdown of exactly which features have beenused is not given.

The L: counter counts the number of pages stored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with the Store File button from within the Copy mode screen.

8 261 T:Scan PGS/ColCr *CTL

8 262 C:Scan PGS/ ColCr *CTL

8 266 L:Scn PGS/ColCr *CTL

8 26x 1 Color Conversion

8 26x 2 Color Erase

8 26x 3 Background

8 26x 4 Other

These SPs show how many times color creationfeatures have been selected at the operationpanel.

8 281 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL

8 285 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages scannedusing a TWAIN driver. These counters revealhow the TWAIN driver is used for deliveryfunctions.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1] Note: At the present time, these countersperform identical counts.

8 291 T:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 293 F:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 295 S:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

8 296 L:Scan PGS/Stamp *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages stampedwith the stamp in the ADF unit.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy modescreen



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-112 SM

T:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 301

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by allapplications. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput (printing) page size [SP 8-441].

C:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 302

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Copyapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput (printing) page size [SP 8-442].

F:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 303

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Faxapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) andoutput page size [SP 8-443].

S:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 305

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned by the Scanapplication. Use these totals to compare original page size (scanning) and

output page size [SP 8-445].L:Scan PGS/Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 306

These SPs count by size the total number of pages scanned and stored fromwithin the document server mode screen at the operation panel, and with theStore File button from within the Copy mode screen. Use these totals tocompare original page size (scanning) and output page size [SP 8-446].

8 30x 1 A3

8 30x 2 A4

8 30x 3 A5

8 30x 4 B4

8 30x 5 B5

8 30x 6 DLT

8 30x 7 LG

8 30x 8 LT

8 30x 9 HLT

8 30x 10 Full Bleed

8 30x 254 Other (Standard)

8 30x 255 Other (Custom)



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-113 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 311

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned byapplications that can specify resolution settings.

Scan PGS/Rez *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 315

These SPs count by resolution setting the total number of pages scanned byapplications that can specify resolution settings.

Note: At the present time, 8 311 and 8 315 perform identical counts.

8 31x 1 1200dpi ~

8 31x 2 600dpi~1199dpi

8 31x 3 400dpi~599dpi

8 31x 4 200dpi~399dpi

8 31x 5 ~199dpi

• Copy resolution settings are fixed so they are not counted.

• The Fax application does not allow finely adjusted resolution settings so no countis done for the Fax application.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-114 SM

T:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 321

These SPs count by compression method the total number of pagesscanned.

S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 325These SPs count by compression method the total number of pagesscanned by the Scan application.

Note: At the present time, 8 321 and 8 325 perform identical counts.

8 32x 1 JPEG

8 32x 2 JPEG2000

8 32x 3 TIFF (Comp OFF)

8 32x 4 TIFF (Comp ON)

8 32x 5 PDF

8 32x 6 Other

8 381 T:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 382 C:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 383 F:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 384 P:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 385 S:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 386 L:Total PrtPGS *CTL

8 387 O:Total PrtPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedby the customer. The counter for the applicationused for storing the pages increments.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pagesstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel. Pages storedwith the Store File button from within the Copymode screen go to the C: counter.

• When the A3/DLT double count function is switched on with SP5104, 1 A3/DLTpage is counted as 2.

• When several documents are merged for a print job, the number of pages storedis counted for the application that stored them.

• These counters are used primarily to calculate charges on use of the machine,so the following pages are not counted as printed pages:

• Blank pages in a duplex printing job.

• Blank pages inserted as document covers, chapter title sheets, and slip-sheets.

• Reports printed to confirm counts.

• All reports done in the service mode (service summaries, enginemaintenance reports, etc.)

• Test prints for machine image adjustment.

• Error notification reports.

• Partially printed pages as the result of a copier jam.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-115 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

LSize PrtPGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 391

These SPs count pages printed on paper sizes A3/DLT and larger.

Note: In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, these counters are

also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 401 T:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 402 C:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 403 F:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 404 P:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 405 S:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

8 406 L:PrtPGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedfrom the document server. The counter for theapplication used to print the pages isincremented.The L: counter counts the number of jobsstored from within the document server modescreen at the operation panel.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to theL: count.

• Fax jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder are added to the F:count.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-116 SM

8 411 Prints/Duplex *CTL This SP counts the amount of paper (front/backcounted as 1 page) used for duplex printing.Last pages printed only on one side are not

counted.[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 421

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing. This is the total for all applications.

C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 422

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the copier application.

F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 423

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number of

pages processed for printing by the fax application.P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 424

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the printer application.

S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 425

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by the scanner application.

L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 426

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing from within the document server mode windowat the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 427

These SPs count by binding and combine, and n-Up settings the number ofpages processed for printing by Other applications

8 42x 1 Simplex> Duplex

8 42x 2 Duplex> Duplex

8 42x 3 Book> Duplex

8 42x 4 Simplex Combine

8 42x 5 Duplex Combine

8 42x 6 2> 2 pages on 1 side (2-Up)




8 42x 10 9> 9 pages on 1 side (9-Up)

8 42x 11 16> 16 pages on 1 side (16-Up)

8 42x 12 Booklet

8 42x 13 Magazine

• These counts (SP8 421 to SP8 427) are especially useful for customers whoneed to improve their compliance with ISO standards for the reduction of paperconsumption.

• Pages that are only partially printed with the n-Up functions are counted as 1page.

• Here is a summary of how the counters work for Booklet and Magazine modes:



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-117 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Booklet Magazine

OriginalPages

CountOriginalPages

Count

1 1 1 12 2 2 2

3 2 3 2

4 2 4 2

5 3 5 4

6 4 6 4

7 4 7 4

8 4 8 4

T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 431 These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow, regardless of which application was used.

C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 432

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with the copy application.

P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 434

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with the print application.

L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 436

These SPs count the total number of pages output from within the documentserver mode window at the operation panel with the three features below.

O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 437

These SPs count the total number of pages output with the three featuresbelow with Other applications.

8 43x 1 Cover/Slip Sheet Total number of covers or slip-sheets inserted. Thecount for a cover printed on both side’s counts 2.

8 43x 2 Series/Book The number of pages printed in series (one side) orprinted as a book with booklet right/left pagination.

8 43x 3 User Stamp The number of pages printed where stamps wereapplied, including page numbering and date stamping.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-118 SM

T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 441

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by allapplications.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 442

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by thecopy application.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 443

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by the faxapplication.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 444

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by theprinter application.

S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 445

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by thescanner application.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 446These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed from withinthe document server mode window at the operation panel.

O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 447

These SPs count by print paper size the number of pages printed by Otherapplications.

8 44x 1 A3

8 44x 2 A4

8 44x 3 A5

8 44x 4 B4

8 44x 5 B5

8 44x 6 DLT8 44x 7 LG

8 44x 8 LT

8 44x 9 HLT

8 44x 10 Full Bleed

8 44x254

Other (Standard)

8 44x255

Other (Custom)

•These counters do not distinguish between LEF and SEF.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-119 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

PrtPGS/Ppr Tray *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 451

These SPs count the number of sheets fed from each paper feed station.

8 451 1 Bypass Bypass Tray

8 451 2 Tray 1 Copier8 451 3 Tray 2 Copier

8 451 4 Tray 3 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8 451 5 Tray 4 Paper Tray Unit (Option)

8 451 6 Tray 5 LCT (Option)

8 451 7 Tray 6 Currently not used.




T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 461

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by allapplications.

• These counters are not the same as the PM counter. The PM counter isbased on feed timing to accurately measure the service life of the feedrollers. However, these counts are based on output timing.

• Blank sheets (covers, chapter covers, slip sheets) are also counted.

• During duplex printing, pages printed on both sides count as 1, and apage printed on one side counts as 1.

C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 462

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the copyapplication.

F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 463

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the faxapplication.

P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 464

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed by the printerapplication.

L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 466

These SPs count by paper type the number pages printed from within thedocument server mode window at the operation panel.

8 46x 1 Normal

8 46x 2 Recycled

8 46x 3 Special

8 46x 4 Thick8 46x 5 Normal (Back)

8 46x 6 Thick (Back)

8 46x 7 OHP

8 46x 8 Other



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-120 SM

PrtPGS/Mag *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 471

These SPs count by magnification rate the number of pages printed.

8 471 1 ~49%

8 471 2 50%~99%8 471 3 100%

8 471 4 101%~200%

8 471 5 201% ~

• Counts are done for magnification adjusted for pages, not only on the operationpanel but performed remotely with an external network application capable ofperforming magnification adjustment as well.

• Magnification adjustments done with printer drivers with PC applications such asExcel are also counted.

•Magnification adjustments done for adjustments after they have been stored onthe document server are not counted.

• Magnification adjustments performed automatically during Auto Reduce/Enlargecopying are counted.

• The magnification rates of blank cover sheets, slip-sheets, etc. are automaticallyassigned a rate of 100%.

8 481 T:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

8 484 P:PrtPGS/TonSave *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printed with the Toner Save featureswitched on.

Note: These SPs return the same results, as this SP is limited to the Printapplication.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 491 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 492 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 493 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 496 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedin the Color Mode by each application.

8 49x 1 B/W

8 49x 2 Single Color

8 49x 3 Two Color

8 49x 4 Full Color

8 501 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

8 504 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages printedin the Color Mode by the print application.

8 50x 1 B/W

8 50x 2 Single Color

8 50x 3 Full Color



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-121 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 511

These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pagesprinted.

P:PrtPGS/Emul *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 514These SPs count by printer emulation mode the total number of pagesprinted.

8 514 1 RPCS

8 514 2 RPDL

8 514 3 PS3

8 514 4 R98

8 514 5 R16

8 514 6 GL/GL2

8 514 7 R55

8 514 8 RTIFF

8 514 9 PDF8 514 10 PCL5e/5c

8 514 11 PCL XL

8 514 12 IPDL-C

8 514 13 BM-Links Japan Only

8 514 14 Other

• SP8 511 and SP8 514 return the same results, as they are both limited to thePrint application.

• Print jobs output to the document server are not counted.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-122 SM

T:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 521

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by allapplications.

C:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 522

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by theCopy application.

F:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 523

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by theFax application.

NOTE: Print finishing options for received faxes are currently not available.

P:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 524

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by thePrint application.

S:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 525

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed by the

Scanner application.L:PrtPGS/FIN *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 526

These SPs count by finishing mode the total number of pages printed fromwithin the document server mode window at the operation panel.

8 52x 1 Sort

8 52x 2 Stack

8 52x 3 Staple

8 52x 4 Booklet

8 52x 5 Z-Fold

8 52x 6 Punch

8 52x 7 Other

NOTE: 1) If stapling is selected for finishing and the stack is too large for stapling,the unstapled pages are still counted.

2) The counts for staple finishing are based on output to the staple tray, so jam recoveries are counted.

8 531 Staples *CTL This SP counts the amount of staples usedby the machine.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 581

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless ofthe application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, thesecounters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 581 1 Total

8 581 2 Total: Full Color

8 581 3 B&W/Single Color

8 581 4 Development: CMY

8 581 5 Development: K

8 581 6 Copy: Color

8 581 7 Copy: B/W

8 581 8 Print: Color



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-123 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 581

These SPs count the total output broken down by color output, regardless ofthe application used. In addition to being displayed in the SMC Report, thesecounters are also displayed in the User Tools display on the copy machine.

8 581 9 Print: B/W

8 581 10 Total: Color

8 581 11 Total: B/W

8 581 12 Full Color: A3

8 581 13 Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller

8 581 14 Full Color Print

8 581 15 Mono Color Print

8 581 16 Full Color GPC

8 582 C:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the copy application broken down by

color output.8 582 1 B/W

8 582 2 Single Color

8 582 3 Two Color

8 582 4 Full Color

8 583 F:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the fax application broken down by coloroutput.

8 583 1 B/W


8 584 P:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the print application broken down bycolor output.

8 584 1 B/W


8 584 3 Full Color

8 586 L:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

These SPs count the total output of the local storage broken down by coloroutput.

8 582 1 B/W


8 582 3 Two Color

8 582 4 Full Color



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-124 SM

O:Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 591

These SPs count the totals for A3/DLT paper use, number of duplex pagesprinted, and the number of staples used. These totals are for Other (O:)applications only.

8 591 1 A3/DLT

8 591 2 Duplex

8 591 3 Staple

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 631

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to atelephone number.

FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 633

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to atelephone number.

8 63x 1 B/W

8 63x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages arecounted separately as B/W or Color.

• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only soSP8631 and SP8633 are the same.

• The counts include error pages.

• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,the count is done for each destination.

• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for each

destination.



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-125 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:FAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 641

These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by fax to as faximages using I-Fax.

IFAX TX PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 643These SPs count by color mode the number of pages sent by Fax as faximages using I-Fax.

8 64x 1 B/W

8 64x 2 Color

• If a document has color and black-and-white pages mixed, the pages arecounted separately as B/W or Color.

• At the present time, this feature is provided for the Fax application only soSP8641 and SP8643 are the same.

• The counts include error pages.

• If a document is sent to more than one destination with a Group transmission,the count is done for each destination.

• Polling transmissions are counted but polling RX are not.

• Relay, memory, and confidential mailbox transmissions and are counted for eachdestination.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-126 SM

T:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 651

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for both the Scan and document server applications.

S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 655

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for the Scan application only.

L:S-to-Email PGS *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 656

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages attached to an e-mail for LS applications only.

8 65x 1 B/W

8 65x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The count for B/W and Color pages is done after the document is storedon the HDD. If the job is cancelled before it is stored, the pages are not

counted.2) If Scan-to-Email is used to send a 10-page document to 5 addresses,the count is 10 (the pages are sent to the same SMTP server together).

3) If Scan-to-PC is used to send a 10-page document to 5 folders, thecount is 50 (the document is sent to each destination of the SMB/FTPserver).

4) Due to restrictions on some devices, if Scan-to-Email is used to send a10-page document to a large number of destinations, the count may bedivided and counted separately. For example, if a 10-page document issent to 200 addresses, the count is 10 for the first 100 destinations andthe count is also 10 for the second 100 destinations, for a total of 20.).



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-127 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

T:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 661

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by both Scan and LS applications.

Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 665These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by the Scan application.

L:Deliv PGS/Svr *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 666

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a ScanRouter server by LS applications.

8 66x 1 B/W

8 66x 2 Color

NOTE: 1) The B/W and Color counts are done after the document is stored on theHDD of the Scan Router server.

2) If the job is canceled before storage on the Scan Router server finishes,the counts are not done.

3) The count is executed even if regardless of confirmation of the arrival atthe Scan Router server.

T:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 671

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent to a folderon a PC (Scan-to-PC) with the Scan and LS applications.

Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 675

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-

to-PC with the Scan application.L:Deliv PGS/PC *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 676

These SPs count by color mode the total number of pages sent with Scan-to-PC function with the LS applications.

8 67x 1 B/W

8 67x 2 Color



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-128 SM

8 681 T:PCFAX TXPGS *CTL

8 683 PCFAX TXPGS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent by PCFax. These SPs are provided for the Faxapplication only, so the counts for SP8 681 andSP8 683 are the same.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

• This counts pages sent from a PC using a PC fax application, from the PCthrough the copier to the destination.

• When sending the same message to more than one place using broadcasting,the pages are only counted once. (For example, a 10-page fax is sent to location A and location B. The counter goes up by 10, not 20.)

8 691 T:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8 692 C:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8 693 F:TX PGS/LS *CTL8 694 P:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8 695 S:TX PGS/LS *CTL

8 696 L:TX PGS/LS *CTL

These SPs count the number of pages sent fromthe document server. The counter for theapplication that was used to store the pages isincremented.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]The L: counter counts the number of pages storedfrom within the document server mode screen atthe operation panel. Pages stored with the StoreFile button from within the Copy mode screen goto the C: counter.

NOTE: 1) Print jobs done with Web Image Monitor and Desk Top Binder areadded to the count.

2) If several documents are merged for sending, the number of pages

stored is counted for the application that stored them.3) When several documents are sent by a Fax broadcast, the F: count is

done for the number of pages sent to each destination.

TX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 701

These SPs count the number of pages sent by the physical port used tosend them. For example, if a 3-page original is sent to 4 destinations viaISDN G4, the count for ISDN (G3, G4) is 12.

8 701 1 PSTN-1

8 701 2 PSTN-2

8 701 3 PSTN-38 701 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8 701 5 Network

S:Scan PGS/Comp *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 715

These SPs count the number of pages sent by each compression mode.

8 715 1 JPEG/JPEG2000

8 715 2 TIFF(Multi/Single)

8 715 3 PDF

8 715 4 Other



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-129 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

RX PGS/Port *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 741

These SPs count the number of pages received by the physical portused to receive them.

8 741 1 PSTN-1

8 741 2 PSTN-2

8 741 3 PSTN-3

8 741 4 ISDN (G3,G4)

8 741 5 Network

Dev Counter *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 771

These SPs count the frequency of use (number of rotations of thedevelopment rollers) for black and other color toners.

8 771 1 Total

8 771 2 K

8 771 3 Y8 771 4 M

8 771 5 C

Toner Bottle Info. *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 781

These SPs display the number of already replaced toner bottles.

NOTE: Currently, the data in SP7-833-011 through 014 and the data in SP8-781-001 through 004 are the same.

8 781 1 Toner [BK] The number of black-toner bottles

8 781 2 Toner [Y] The number of yellow-toner bottles

8 781 3 Toner [M] The number of magenta-toner bottles

8 781 4 Toner [C] The number of cyan-toner bottles

8 791 LS Memory Remain *CTL This SP displays the percent of spaceavailable on the document server forstoring documents.

[0~100/ 0 / 1]

Toner Remain *CTL [0~100/ 0 / 1]8 801

These SPs display the percent of toner remaining for each color. This SPallows the user to check the toner supply at any time.

Note: This precise method of measuring remaining toner supply (1% steps)

is better than other machines in the market that can only measure inincrements of 10 (10% steps).

8 801 1 K

8 801 2 Y

8 801 3 M

8 801 4 C



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-130 SM

Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]8 831

These SPs display the average coverage by color. (SP 7-833)

8 831 1 Average [BK]

8 831 2 Average [Y]8 831 3 Average [M]

8 831 4 Average [C]

Coverage *BCU [0~100/ 0 / 1]8 841

These SPs display the coverage of the last print by color. (SP 7-833)

8 841 1 Last [BK]

8 841 2 Last [Y]

8 841 3 Last [M]

8 841 4 Last [C]

Coverage: 0-10% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 851

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage ofeach color is from 0% to 10%.

8 851 1 S: BK

8 851 2 S: Y

8 851 3 S: M

8 851 4 S: C

Coverage: 11-20% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 861


8 851 1 S: BK

8 851 2 S: Y

8 851 3 S: M

8 851 4 S: C

Coverage: 21-30% *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 871


8 871 1 S: BK

8 871 2 S: Y

8 871 3 S: M

8 871 4 S: C

Coverage: 31%- *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 881

These SPs display the number of scanned sheets on which the coverage ofeach color is 31% or higher.

8 881 1 S: BK

8 881 2 S: Y

8 881 3 S: M

8 881 4 S: C



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-131 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

PM Counter *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 891

These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application.

8 891 1 S: Toner [BK]

8 891 2 S: Toner [Y]8 891 3 S: Toner [M]

8 891 4 S: Toner [C]

PM Counter: Previous *BCU [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 901

These SPs display the number of sheets output by the scan application withthe previously replaced units.

8 901 1 S: Toner [BK]

8 901 2 S: Toner [Y]

8 901 3 S: Toner [M]

8 901 4 S: Toner [C]

Machine Status *CTL [0~9999999/ 0 / 1]8 941

These SPs count the amount of time the machine spends in each operationmode. These SPs are useful for customers who need to investigate machineoperation for improvement in their compliance with ISO Standards.

8 941 1 Operation Time Engine operation time. Does not include time whilecontroller is saving data to HDD (while engine is notoperating).

8 941 2 Standby Time Engine not operating. Includes time while controllersaves data to HDD. Does not include time spent inEnergy Save, Low Power, or Off modes.

8 941 3 Energy Save Time Includes time while the machine is performingbackground printing.

8 941 4 Low Power Time Includes time in Energy Save mode with Engine on.Includes time while machine is performingbackground printing.

8 941 5 Off Mode Time Includes time while machine is performingbackground printing. Does not include time machineremains powered off with the power switches.

8 941 6 Down Time/SC Total down time due to SC errors.

8 941 7 Down Time/PrtJam Total down time due to paper jams during printing.

8 941 8 Down Time/OrgJam Total down time due to original jams during scanning.

8 941 9 Down Time/TonEnd Total down time due to toner end.



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-132 SM

AddBook Register *CTL8 951

These SPs count the number of events when the machine manages dataregistration.

8 951 1 User Code User code registrations.

8 951 2 Mail Address Mail address registrations.

8 951 3 Fax Destination Fax destination registrations.

8 951 4 Group Group destination registrations.

8 951 5 Transfer Request Fax relay destination registrationsfor relay TX.

8 951 6 F-Code F-Code box registrations.

[0~9999999/ 0 / 1]

8 951 7 Copy Program Copy application registrations withthe Program (job settings) feature.

8 951 8 Fax Program Fax application registrations withthe Program (job settings) feature.

8 951 9 Printer Program Printer application registrations

with the Program (job settings)feature.

8 951 10 ScannerProgram

Scanner application registrationswith the Program (job settings)feature.

[0~255 / 0 / 255]



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-133 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

NOTE: Memory Clear (SP5-801)The following tables list the items that are cleared. The serial number information,meter charge setting and meter charge counters (SP8-581, 582, 583, 584, and586) are not cleared.

5801 [Memory Clear]5801 1 All Clear Resets all correction data for process control and allsoftware counters, and returns all modes andadjustments to their default values.

5801 2 ENG All Clears the engine settings.

5801 3 SCS Initializes default system settings, SCS (SystemControl Service) settings, operation displaycoordinates, and ROM update information.

5801 4 IMH No SP modes are cleared. But, all files stored in theHDD are cleared.(IMH: Image Memory Handler)

5801 5 MCS No SP modes are cleared.(MCS: Memory Control Service)

5801 6 Copier application Initializes all copier application settings.5801 7 Fax application Initializes the fax reset time, job login ID, all TX/RX

settings, local storage file numbers, and off-hook timer.

5801 8 Printer application The following service settings:

• Bit switches

• Gamma settings (User & Service)

• Toner LimitThe following user settings:

• Tray Priority

• Menu Protect

• System Setting except for setting of Energy Saver

• I/F Setup (I/O Buffer and I/O Timeout)

• PCL Menu5801 9 Scanner application Initializes the scanner defaults for the scanner and all

the scanner SP modes.

5801 10 Netfile application Deletes the network file application management filesand thumbnails, and initializes the job login ID.

5801 11 NCS All setting of Network Setup (User Menu)(NCS: Network Control Service)

5801 12 IPU Clears the IPU settings

5801 13 R-Fax Initializes the job login ID, SmartNetMonitor for Admin, job history, and local storage file numbers.

5801 14 Clear DCS Settings Initializes the DCS (Delivery Control Service) settings.

5801 15 Clear UCS Settings Initializes the UCS (User Information Control Service)settings.

5801 16 MIRS Setting Initializes the MIRS (Machine Information ReportService) settings.

5801 17 CCS Initializes the CCS (Certification and Charge-controlService) settings.

5998 [Memory Clear]

5998 1 ENG Setting All engine related SP modes except for the following:

• Serial number information

• SP modes related to meter charge

• Counters and logging data

5998 2 ENG Counter All counters and logging data related to engine



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-134 SM

5.2.2 INPUT CHECK TABLE

When entering the Input Check mode, 8 digits display the result for a section. Eachdigit corresponds to a different device as shown in the table.

Bit No. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Result 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1 0 or 1

Reading5803Bit Description

0 1

Paper Tray 1

0 Paper End Sensor Paper end Paper detected

1 Paper Lift Sensor

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator notinside sensor)

2 Paper Height Sensor 1

3 Paper Height Sensor 2 See Table 1.

5803 1

4 Tray Set Not set Set

Paper Tray 2


1 Paper Lift Sensor

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator notinside sensor)



See Table 1.

1: Activated(Actuator inside sensor)

4 Paper Size Switch 1

5 Paper Size Switch 26 Paper Size Switch 3

5803 2

7 Paper Size Switch 4

See Table 2.1: Pushed

By-pass Table


1 Paper Size 1

2 Paper Size 2

3 Paper Size 3

5803 3

4 Paper Size 4

See Table 3.

Doors

0 Front Door Switch Opened Closed

1 Left Door Switch Opened Closed

2 Right Door Switch Opened Closed

3 Vertical Transport Switch Opened Closed

4 Duplex Inverter Unit Switch Opened Closed

5803 4

5 Right Door Switch (LCT/PFU) Opened Closed

Paper Feed

0 Relay Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Vertical Transport Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Upper Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected

3 Lower Relay Sensor (PFU) Paper not detected Paper detected

4 Registration Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

5 Duplex Inverter Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

5803 5

6 Duplex Feed Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-135 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Paper Exit

0 Fusing Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Paper Exit Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Duplex Exit Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected



5803 6

5 Exit Upper Limit Sensor Not full Full

Fusing Unit

0 Fusing Unit (Set) Not set Set

1 Fusing Unit (New) 0 to 1 : New unit installed

2 Oil Supply Unit (Set) Set Not set

3 Oil Supply Unit (New) 1 to 0 : New unit installed

4 European Version US Europe

5 Waste Oil Bottle Set Sensor Not Set Set

5803 7

6 Waste Oil Sensor Not full Full

Motor Lock

0 Development Drive Motor - CMY Not locked Locked1 Development Drive Motor - K Not locked Locked

2 Fusing Fan Motor Not locked Locked

3 Air Pump Motor - MY Not locked Locked

5803 8

4 Air Pump Motor - CK Not locked Locked

Dev. Unit/ PCU

0 Development Unit - K Not set Set

1 Development Unit - C Not set Set

2 Development Unit - M Not set Set

3 Development Unit - Y Not set Set

4 PCU - K Not set Set

5 PCU - C Not set Set6 PCU - M Not set Set

5803 9

7 PCU - Y Not set Set

Toner End Sens

0 Black Toner Not end End

1 Cyan Toner Not end End

2 Magenta Toner Not end End

5803 10

3 Yellow Toner Not end End

Others

0 LD H.P. Sensor Not H.P. H.P.

1 Transfer Belt Sensor Not contact Contact

2 - - -

3 Used Toner Sensor Not full Full4 Used Toner Bottle Set Sensor Not set Set

5 Drum Gear Position Sensor - K

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator insidesensor)

5803 13

6 Drum Gear Position Sensor - CMY

Deactivated

Activated

(Actuator insidesensor)



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-136 SM


0 1

Mail Box 1 (Not used)

0 Tray 1 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full1 Tray 1 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Tray 2 Paper Overflow Sensor Not full Full

3 Tray 2 Paper Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected




5803 15


Mail Box 2 (Not used)

0 Vertical Transport Sensor 1 Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Vertical Transport Sensor 2 Paper not detected Paper detected

5803 16

2 Door Safety Switch Opened Closed

ARDF Input Check: SP6-007


0 1

7 Original width sensor 4 Paper not detected Paper detected




3 Skew correction sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Original set sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Original length sensor 1* Paper not detected Paper detected

6007 1


7 Original stopper HP sensor Original stopper up Original stopper down

6 Pick-up HP sensor Cover closed Cover opened

5 Top cover Sensor Cover closed Cover opened

4 Lift sensor Pick-up roller up Pick-up roller down

3 Inverter sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

2 Exit sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

1 Registration sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

6007 2

0 Interval Sensor Paper not detected Paper detected

7 (Not used) — —







6007 3


NOTE: The original length sensors detect the following paper sizes: B5 (sensor 1),LG (sensor 2), and A4 (sensor 3).



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-137 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Table 1: Paper Height Sensor

Low: Deactivated, High: Activated (actuator inside sensor)

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 1 Paper height sensor 2

Full Low Low

Nearly full Low HighNear end High High

Almost empty High Low

Table 2: Paper Size Switch (Tray 2)

0: Not pushed, 1: pushed

Models Switch Location

North America Europe/Asia 1 2 3 4

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0

A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

81/2" x 14" SEF *1 B4 SEF *1 1 1 0 181/2" x 11" SEF

*2 A4 SEF

*2 0 1 1 0

11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1

B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0

A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTES:*1

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3

: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

Table 3: Paper Size (By-pass Table)

Models Bit No.

North America Europe/Asia 4 3 2 1

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 0 1 1

A3 SEF A3 SEF 0 0 0 1

- B4 SEF 0 0 1 0

81/2" x 11" SEF A4 SEF 0 1 1 0

8" x 13" SEF F SEF 0 1 0 0

- A5 SEF 1 1 0 051/2" x 181/2" SEF B6 SEF 1 0 0 0

Post Card Post Card 0 0 0 0



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-138 SM

Table 4: Original Size Detection

Original Size Length SensorWidth

Sensor

A4/A3 version LT/DLT version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1

SP4-301display

A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132

B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141

F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165

A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133

B5-L X X O X X 142

A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5

B5-S X X X X O 14

A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-139 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK TABLE

CH: ChargePF: Paper FeedTS: Toner Supply

CW: ClockwiseCCW: CounterclockwiseMB: 4-bin MailboxDI: Duplex Inverter

5804 Description

5804 1 Lift M UP (1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / UP

5804 2 Lift M DOWN(1) Tray 1 Lift Motor / DOWN

5804 3 Lift M UP(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / UP

5804 4 Lift M DOWN(2) Tray 2 Lift Motor / DOWN

5804 5 By-pass CL By-pass Feed Clutch

5804 6 Pick-up SOL Pick-up Solenoid

5804 7 PF CL (1) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 1

5804 8 PF CL (2) Paper Feed Clutch - Tray 2

5804 9 PF GRP SOL Grip Roller Release Solenoid

5804 10 Regist CL Registration Clutch

5804 11 Junction SOL Exit Junction Gate Solenoid

5804 12 Oil Supply SOL Oil Supply Unit Solenoid

5804 13 Fusing CL Fusing Clutch

5804 14 Wst Tn Vib M Waste Toner Vibration Motor

5804 19 K Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - K

5804 20 C Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - C

5804 21 M Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - M

5804 22 Y Dev CL Development Unit Clutch - Y

5804 23 K Dev M H Development Motor - K / High Speed

5804 24 K Dev M M Development Motor - K / Middle Speed

5804 25 K Dev M L Development Motor - K / Low Speed

5804 26 K Dev M Card Black Development Motor - Thick paper

5804 27 FC Dev M H Color Development Motor - 185mm/s

5804 28 FC Dev M M Color Development Motor - 125mm/s

5804 29 FC Dev M L Color Development Motor - 62.5mm/s

5804 30 TS CL [Y] Toner Supply Clutch for Yellow

5804 31 TS CL [M] Toner Supply Clutch for Magenta

5804 32 TS CL [C] Toner Supply Clutch for Cyan

5804 33 TS CL [K] Toner Supply Clutch for Black

5804 34 Valve SOL [K] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Black

5804 35 Valve SOL [C] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Cyan

5804 36 Valve SOL [M] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Magenta

5804 37 Valve SOL [Y] Air Flow Valve solenoid for Yellow

5804 38 Toner Sply Mt1 Toner Supply Motor 1 - yellow and magenta

5804 39 Toner Sply Mt2 Toner Supply Motor 2 - cyan and black

5804 40 Air Supply [Y] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Yellow

5804 41 Air Supply [M] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Magenta

5804 42 Air Supply [C] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Cyan

5804 43 Air Supply [K] Air Pump Motor and Valve for Black

5804 44 T End Sens [Y] Toner End Sensor - Y



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-140 SM

5804 Description

5804 45 T End Sens [M] Toner End Sensor - M

5804 46 T End Sens [C] Toner End Sensor - C

5804 47 T End Sens [K] Toner End Sensor - K

5804 50 PSU Fan PSU Cooling Fan Motor5804 51 Fusing Fan H Fusing Fan Motor / High Speed

5804 52 Fusing Fan L Fusing Fan Motor / Low Speed

5804 53 M Fan Laser Optics Housing Unit Cooling Fan

5804 54 Belt M CW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Clockwise

5804 55 Belt M CCW Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Counterclockwise

5804 56 Belt M Break Transfer Belt Contact Motor / Break

5804 57 Fusing Relay Fusing Relay

5804 58 Heat Lamp Heating Roller Fusing Lamp

5804 59 Pressure Lamp Pressure Roller Fusing Lamp

5804 65 Drum M L CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Low Speed / Clockwise

5804 66 Drum M M CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / Middle Speed /Clockwise

5804 67 Drum M H CW Drum Drive Motors (K & CMY) / High Speed / Clockwise

5804 76 PF M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise

5804 77 PF M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise

5804 78 PF M H CW Paper Feed Motor / High Speed / Clockwise

5804 79 PF M Feed Paper Feed Motor / Feed Speed / Clockwise

5804 80 By-Pass M L CW Paper Feed Motor / Low Speed / Clockwise

5804 81 By-Pass M C CW Paper Feed Motor / Thick paper or OHP mode /Clockwise

5804 82 By-Pass M M CW Paper Feed Motor / Middle Speed / Clockwise

5804 89 CH DC [Y] Charge DC Bias for Yellow / 125 mm/s5804 90 CH DC [M] Charge DC Bias for Magenta / 125 mm/s

5804 91 CH DC [C] Charge DC Bias for Cyan / 125 mm/s

5804 92 CH DC [K] Charge DC Bias for Black / 125 mm/s

5804 93 CH AC [FC] 62.5 Charger AC / Full Color / 62.5 mm/s

5804 94 CH AC [K] 62.5 Charger AC / Black / 62.5 mm/s

5804 95 CH AC [FC] 125 Charger AC / Full Color / 125 mm/s

5804 96 CH AC [K] 125 Charger AC / Black / 125 mm/s

5804 97 CH AC [FC] 185 Charger AC / Full Color / 185 mm/s

5804 98 CH AC [K] 185 Charger AC / Black / 185 mm/s

5804 99 Dev DC [Y] Development DC Bias for Yellow

5804 100 Dev DC [M] Development DC Bias for Magenta5804 101 Dev DC [C] Development DC Bias for Cyan

5804 102 Dev DC [K] Development DC Bias for Black

5804 103 Dev AC [FC] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Color - 62.5 mm/s

5804 104 Dev AC [K] 62.5 Development AC Bias for Black - 62.5 mm/s

5804 105 Dev AC [FC] 125 Development AC Bias for Color - 125 mm/s

5804 106 Dev AC [K] 125 Development AC Bias for Black - 125 mm/s

5804 107 Dev AC [FC] 185 Development AC Bias for Color - 185 mm/s

5804 108 Dev AC [K] 185 Development AC Bias for Black - 185 mm/s

5804 109 Transfer [Y] Transfer Current for Yellow

5804 110 Transfer [M] Transfer Current for Magenta

5804 111 Transfer [C] Transfer Current for Cyan



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-141 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5804 Description

5804 112 Transfer [K] Transfer Current for Black

5804 113 Cleaning Bias Transfer Belt Cleaning Roller Bias

5804 114 PA Roller Bias+ Paper Attraction Roller Bias

5804 115 PA Roller Bias- Paper Attraction Roller Bias5804 116 DevAC TRG [FC] Development AC Trigger for Color

5804 117 DevAC TRG [K] Development AC Trigger for Black

5804 118 DevPWM TRG [K] Development PWM Trigger for Black

5804 119 DevPWM TRG [C] Development PWM Trigger for Cyan

5804 120 DevPWM TRG [M] Development PWM Trigger for Magenta

5804 121 DevPWM TRG [Y] Development PWM Trigger for Yellow

5804 122 CHdcPWM TRG [K] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Black

5804 123 CHdcPWM TRG [C] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Cyan

5804 124 CHdcPWM TRG [M] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Magenta

5804 125 CHdcPWM TRG [Y] Charge DC PWM Trigger for Yellow

5804 126 CHac1 TRG [FC] Charge AC1 Trigger for Color5804 127 Chac2 TRG [FC] Charge AC2 Trigger for Color

5804 128 Chac3 TRG [FC] Charge AC3 Trigger for Color

5804 129 CHac1 TRG [K] Charge AC1 Trigger for Black

5804 130 Chac2 TRG [K] Charge AC2 Trigger for Black

5804 131 Chac3 TRG [K] Charge AC3 Trigger for Black

5804 132 ID Sensor LED ID Sensor LED

5804 133 TD Vcnt TD Sensor / Vcnt

5804 134 Memory Chip Memory Chip / Power (5V) Supply

5804 136 PCU Cln Bias K PCU Cleaning Bias Black

5804 137 PCU Cln Bias YMC PCU Cleaning Bias YMC

5804 141 Polygon M 29 Polygon Motor / 29.5285804 142 Polygon M 21 Polygon Motor / 21.850

5804 143 LD FC[K]62.5 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 62.5

5804 144 LD FC[K]125 LD Power for Black in Color Mode / 125

5804 145 LD FC[Y]62.5 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 62.5

5804 146 LD FC[Y]125 LD Power for Yellow in Color Mode / 125

5804 147 LD FC[M]62.5 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 62.5

5804 148 LD FC[M]125 LD Power for Magenta in Color Mode / 125

5804 149 LD FC[C]62.5 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 62.5

5804 150 LD FC[C]125 LD Power for Cyan in Color Mode / 125

5804 151 LD1 [K] 62.5 LD1 Power for Black / 62.5

5804 152 LD1 [K] 125 LD1 Power for Black / 1255804 153 LD1 [K] 185 LD1 Power for Black / 185

5804 154 LD2 [K] 62.5 LD2 Power for Black / 62.5

5804 155 LD2 [K] 125 LD2 Power for Black / 125

5804 156 LD2 [K] 185 LD2 Power for Black / 185

5804 157 LD [K]62.5 LD Power for Black / 62.5

5804 158 LD [K]125 LD Power for Black / 125

5804 159 LD [K]185 LD Power for Black / 185

5804 165 PSU M Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU: Paper Supply Unit) /Motor

5804 166 PF CL PFU (1) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 1

5804 167 PF CL PFU (2) Paper Feed Clutch / Optional Paper Feed Unit / Tray 2



COPY SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-142 SM

5804 Description

5804 168 Pick-up SOL PSU Pick-up Solenoid / Optional Paper Feed Unit (PSU:Paper Supply Unit)

5804 170 MB M 4-bin Mailbox Main Motor

5804 171 MB SOL1 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 15804 172 MB SOL2 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 2

5804 173 MB SOL3 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid 3

5804 174 MB Gate SOL 4-bin Mailbox Junction Gate Solenoid

5804 176 Duplex SOL Duplex Junction Gate Solenoid

5804 177 DI M1 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 81 / Counterclockwise






5804 187 DI M1 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 370 / Clockwise5804 188 DI M1 450CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 450 / Clockwise

5804 189 DI M1 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 / 560 / Clockwise









5804 202 DI M2 560CW Duplex Inverter Motor 2 / 560 / Clockwise5804 203 DI M12 81CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 81 / Counterclockwise

5804 204 DI M12 125CCW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 125 / Counterclockwise





5804 213 DI M12 370CW Duplex Inverter Motor 1 and 2 / 370 / Clockwise



5804 216 PF M 81 Paper Feed Motor 81

5804 217 PF M 125 Paper Feed Motor 1255804 218 PF M 162 Paper Feed Motor 162






5804 224 DI M2 OFF Duplex Inverter Motor 2 Off

5804 225 ALL OFF All Off



COPY SERVICE MODE

SM 5-143 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.2.4 TEST PATTERN (SP5-997)

Test Pattern Printting

Selects the tray in which

desired paper size is

loaded.

SP5-997-001

Selects a pattern.SP5-997-002

Selects the Single Color

or Full Color mode.

Selects a color if printingthe test pattern in the

Single Color mode.

SP5-997-003

SP5-997-004

SP5-997-005 Selects the resolution.

Prints the test pattern.

Tray or by-passSelects the desired

paper size.

SP5-997-007

SP5-997-006

Tray

By-pass

B178S913.WMF

Test Pattern Selection (SP5-997-002)0: None1: 1-dot sub-scan line2: 2-dot sub-scan line3: 1-dot main-scan line4: 2-dot main-scan line5: 1-dot grid pattern (Fine)6: 2-dot grid pattern (Fine)7. 1-dot grid pattern (Rough)8. 2-dot grid pattern (Rough)9. 1-dot slant grid pattern10. 2-dot slant grid pattern11. 1-dot pattern

12. 2-dot pattern13. 4-dot pattern14. 1-dot trimming pattern15. 2-dot trimming pattern16. Cross stitch: sub-scan17. Cross stitch: main-scan18. Belt pattern (Horizontal)19. Belt pattern (Vertical)20. Checkered Flag21. Grey scale (Vertical)22. Grey scale (Horizontal)23. Solid



PRINTER SERVICE MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-144 SM

5.3 PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SP1-XXX (Service Mode)

1001 [Bit Switch]

1001 1 Bit Switch 1 Settings1001 2 Bit Switch 2 Settings

1001 3 Bit Switch 3 Settings






*CTL Adjusts the bit switch settings. DFU

1003 [Clear Setting]

Initialize Printer System1003 1

Initializes settings in the “System” menu of the user mode.1003 3 Delete Program

1004 [Print Summary]

Print Summary1004 1

Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the controller settings).

1005 [Display Version]

Disp. Version1005 1

Displays the version of the controller firmware.

1006 [Sample/Locked Print] *CTL 0: Linked, 1: On

1006 1 Enables and disables the document server. When you select “0,” the documentserver is enabled or disabled in accordance with Copy Service Mode SP5-967. Whenyou select “1,” the document server is enabled regardless of Copy Service ModeSP5-967.

[Data Recall]1101

Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) theprevious setting, or c) the current setting.

1101 1 Factory

1101 2 Previous1101 3 Current

1101 4 ACC

*CTL

[Resolution Setting]1102

Selects the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment.

1102 1 1200x1200 Photo, 1800x600 Photo, 600 x 600 Photo, 1200x1200 Text, 1800x600,Text, 600x600 Text



PRINTER SERVICE MODE

SM 5-145 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

[Test Page]1103

Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after the gammaadjustment.

1103 1 Color Gray Scale1103 2 Color Pattern

[Gamma Adjustment]1104

Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the “Mode Selection” menu.

1104 1 Black: Highlight

1104 2 Black: Shadow

1104 3 Black: Middle

1104 4 Black: IDmax

1104 21 Cyan: Highlight

1104 22 Cyan: Shadow

1104 23 Cyan: Middle

1104 24 Cyan: IDmax1104 41 Magenta: Highlight

1104 42 Magenta: Shadow

1104 43 Magenta: Middle

1104 44 Magenta: IDmax

1104 61 Yellow: Highlight

1104 62 Yellow: Shadow

1104 63 Yellow: Middle

1104 64 Yellow: IDmax

*CTL

[0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]

[Save Tone Control Value]1105

Stores the print gamma adjusted with the “Gamma Adj.” menu item as the currentsetting. Before the machine stores the new “current setting", it moves the datacurrently stored as the “current setting” to the “previous setting” memory storagelocation.

1105 1 Save Tone Control Value

[Toner Limit]1106

Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.

1106 1 Toner Limit: Photo [100 to 400 / 260 / 1 %/step]

1106 2 Toner Limit: Text

*CTL

[100 to 400 / 190 / 1 %/step]



SCANNER SP MODE

B202/B178/B180 5-146 SM

5.4 SCANNER SP MODE

SP1-xxx (System and Others)

[Compression Type]1004

Selects the compression type for binary picture processing.1004 1 Compression Type *CTL

[1 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]

1: MH, 2: MR, 3: MMR

[Erase margin]1005

Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.

If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin.

1005 1 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]

1009 [Remote scan disable] *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]

0: enable, 1: disable

1009 1 Enable or disable remote scan.

SP2-XXX (Scanning-image quality)

[Compression ratio of gray-scale]2021

Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the threesettings that can be selected at the operation panel.

2021 1 Compression ratio (Normal image) [5 to 95 / 50 / 1 /step]

2021 2 Compression ratio (High comp image) [5 to 95 / 60 / 1 /step]2021 3 Compression ratio (Low-comp image) [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step]

2021 4 High Lv 2-comp image [5 to 95 / 70 / 1 /step]

2021 5 Low Lv 2-comp image

*CTL

[5 to 95 / 30 / 1 /step]





REBOOT/SYSTEM SETTING RESET

B202/B178/B180 5-148 SM

Copier Setting Reset

Use the following procedure to reset the copy settings in the UP mode to theirdefaults.

1. Press User Tools/Counter.

2. Hold down and then press Copier/Document Server Settings.

NOTE: You must press first.

3. Press “Yes” when the message prompts you to confirm that you want to resetthe Copier Document Server settings.

4. Press exit when the message tells you that the settings have been reset.

B178S914.JPG



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-149 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE

To update the firmware for this machine, you must have the new version of thefirmware downloaded onto an SD (Secure Digital) Card. The SD Card is inserted

into SD Card Slot 3 on the right side of the controller box.

5.6.1 TYPE OF FIRMWARE

There are 16 types of firmware as shown below.

Type of firmware FunctionLocation of

firmwareMessage shown

Engine - Main Printer engine control BCU Flash ROM Engine

Engine - Music Line position adjustment BCU MUSIC CPU Music

System

Operating system Flash ROM on the

controller board

Onboard System

Netfile ApplicationFeature application Printer/scanner

SD cardNetwork DocBox

Printer ApplicationFeature application Printer/scanner

SD cardOnboard Printer

Scanner ApplicationFeature application Printer/scanner

SD cardOnboard Scn

Fax ApplicationFeature application Flash ROM on the

controller boardOpt DIMM Fax

NIBNetwork Interface Printer/scanner

SD cardNetwork Support

Scanner IPU Scanner control IPU Flash ROM Scanner IPU

Operation Panel Panel control Operation Panel Op Panel. XX

Fax FCU Fax control FCU Jupi FCU (XXX)-1

Language(16 languages)

Language firmware

Two languages can beselected from 16languages.

Operation Panel LANG.1

LANG.2

WebDocBoxDocument serverapplication

Printer/scannerSD card

Web Document Box

WebSysWeb Service application Printer/scanner

SD cardWeb Support

PS3Page description language(PostScript3)

PS3 SD card Option PS3

SG3-PRE1 Optional G3 fax control FCU SG3DREI-1



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-150 SM

5.6.1 BEFORE YOU BEGIN

An SD card is a precision device. Always observe the following precautions whenyou handle SD cards:

• Always switch the machine off before you insert an SD card. Never insert the SDcard into the slot with the power on.

• Do not remove the SD card from the service slot after the power has beenswitched on.

• Never switch the machine off while the firmware is downloading from the SDcard.

• Keep SD cards in a safe location where they are not exposed to hightemperature, high humidity, or exposure to direct sunlight.

• Always handle SD cards with care. Do not bend or scratch them. Do not let theSD card get exposed to shock or vibration.

Keep the following points in mind when you use the firmware update software:• “Upload” means to send data from the machine to the SD card. “Download”

means to send data from the SD card to the machine.

• To select an item on the LCD, touch the appropriate button on the soft touch-screen of the LCD, or, press the appropriate number key on the 10-key pad ofthe operation panel. For example, when “Exit (0)” shows on the screen you can

touch the Exit button on the screen, or, press the button on the operationpanel of the copier.

• Make sure that the machine is disconnected from the network to prevent a print job for arriving while the firmware update is in progress before you start thefirmware update procedure.



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-151 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6.2 UPDATING FIRMWARE

Preparation

1. If the SD card is blank, copy the entire “romdata” folder onto the SD card.

2. If the card already contains the “romdata” folder, copy the “B178” folder onto thecard.

If the card already contains folders up to “B178”, copy the necessary firmware files(e.g. B178xxxx.fwu) into this folder.

NOTE: Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card.Copy the only model firmware you want.

1. Turn the main power switch off.

2. Remove the slot cover [A] ( x 1).3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3

[C]. Make sure the label on the SD card[B] faces the rear side of the machine.

4. Slowly push the SD card into the slot so itlocks in place. You will here it click. Makesure the SD card locks in place.NOTE: To remove the SD, push it in to

unlock the spring lock. Thenrelease it so it pops out of the

slot.5. Disconnect the network cable from the

copier if the machine is connected to anetwork.

6. Switch the main power switch on. After about 45 seconds, the initial versionupdate screen appears on the LCD in English.

7. On the screen, touch the button or press the corresponding number key on theoperation panel to select the item in the menu that you want to update.

ROM/NEW WHAT IT MEANS

ROM:Tells you the number of the module and name of the version currently installed.The first line is the module number, the second line the version name.

NEW:Tells you the number of the module and name version on the SD card. The firstline is the module number, the second line the version name.

B178S501.WMF

[C]

[A]

[B]



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-152 SM

8. Touch “UpDate (#)” (or) to start the update.

NOTE: The progress bar does not show for the operation panel firmware after you

touch “OpPanel”. The power on key flashes on and off at 0.5 s intervalswhen the LCDC firmware is updating. The power key flashes on and off at3 s intervals when the update is finished.

9. The "Update Done" message appears on the operation panel after completingthe updating. The message differs depending on the firmware that has beenupdated.

10. Switch the copier main power switch off when you see the “Update Done”message or follow the procedure that is displayed on the operation panel.

11. Press in the SD card to release it. Then remove it from the slot.

12. Switch the copier on for normal operation.Error Messages

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during the download.

The error code consists of the letter “E” and a number. The example aboveshows error “E24” displayed. For details, refer to the Error Message Table.(5.6.7)



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-153 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Firmware Update Error

If a firmware update error occurs, this means the update was cancelled duringthe update because the module selected for update was not on the SD card.

Recovery After Power Loss

If the ROM update is interrupted as a result of accidental loss of power while thefirmware is updating, then the correct operation of the machine cannot beguaranteed after the machine is switched on again. If the ROM update does notcomplete successfully for any reason, then in order to ensure the correct operationof the machine, the ROM update error will continue to show until the ROM isupdated successfully.

In this case, insert the card again and switch on the machine to continue thefirmware download automatically from the card without the menu display.

PCcard -> ROM

Reboot after card insert. E82

BLC2 eplot Card No.:1/1

B178S922.WMF



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-154 SM

5.6.3 UPDATING THE LCDC FOR THE OPERATION PANEL

Do the following procedure to update the LCDC (LCD Control Board).

1. Turn the copier main switch off.

2. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main switch on.

4. The initial screen opens in English after about 45 seconds.

5. Touch “Op Panel.xx”.NOTE: "xx" differs depending on the destination.

6. Touch “UpDate(#) or () to start the update.

Downloading starts after about 9 seconds.

The operation panel goes off and the main power on key flashes in red at 0.5 sintervals when the data is downloading. The same key starts flashing in greenat 1 s intervals when the update is finished.

7. Switch the copier main power switch off and remove the SD card. Then switchthe copier on.



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-155 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.6.4 DOWNLOADING STAMP DATA

The stamp data should be downloaded from the controller firmware to the harddisks at the following times:

• When the machine is installed.• After the hard disks have been replaced.

The print data contains the controller software. Execute SP 5853 to download thefixed stamp data required by the hard disks.

1. Enter the SP mode.

2. Select SP5853 and then press “EXECUTE”. The following screen opens whilethe stamp data is downloading.

The download is finished when the message prompts you to close.

3. Press the “Exit” button. Then turn the copier off and on again.

B178S502.JPG

B178S503.JPG



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-156 SM

5.6.5 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD

Uploading Content of NVRAM to an SD card

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.

NOTE: This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM isreplaced.

1. Do SP5990 001 (SMC Print) before you switch the machine off. You will need arecord of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.

2. Switch the copier main power switch off.

3. Insert the SD card into SD Card Slot 3. Then switch the copier on.

4. Execute SP5824 001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press the “Execute” key

The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the

upload procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the followingfilename:

NVRAM\<serial number>.NV

Here is an example with Serial Number “K5000017114”:

NVRAM\K5000017114.NV

5. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD cardthat holds the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which thedata was uploaded.NOTE: You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same

SD card.

Downloading an SD Card to NVRAM

Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM inthe machine.

• The NVRAM data down load may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data isdamaged, or if the connection between the controller and BCU is defective.

• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.

• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:

• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before

uploading the NVRAM data (

5.6.5)1. Switch the copier main power switch off.

2. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main power switch on.

4. Do SP5825 001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press the “Execute” key.NOTE: The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial

number of the machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully.The download fails if the serial numbers do not match.



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-157 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:

• Total Count

• C/O, P/O Count

5.6.6 INSTALLING ANOTHER LANGUAGE

Many languages are available. But you can only switch between two languages ata time. Do the following procedure to select the two languages you want. You canselect both of the languages you want from the user interface on the operationpanel.

1. Switch the copier main power switch off.

2. Insert the SD card with the language data into SD Card Slot 3.

3. Switch the copier main power switch on. The initial screen opens after about 45seconds.

4. Touch “Language Data (2)” on the screen (or press).

5. Touch “LANG. 1(1)” or “LANG. 2(2)"

Key What it does

LANG. 1(1) Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the nextscreen so you can select the 1st language.

LANG. 1(2)Touch this button on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to open the nextscreen so you can select the 2nd language.

Exit(0)Touch this key on the screen (or press on the 10-key pad) to quit the updateprocedure and return to normal screen.

Download Language LCDC ROM B0705370 Lang. Card ------

Now Lang.

Japanese 2.87

------

English - UK 2.87

------

Select Lang.

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

Exit(0)

LANG. 2(2)

LANG. 1(1)

B178S930.WMF



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-158 SM

6. Touch “LANG 1(1)” to select the 1st Language. Touch “LANG (2)” to select the2nd Language.

7. Touch the appropriate button on the screen (or press the number on the 10-keypad) to select a language as the 1st (or 2nd) language.

If a language is already selected, it will show in reverse.

Touching “Exit (0)” returns you to the previous screen.

8. If you do not see the language that you want to select, touch “↑(7)” or “↓(9)” on

the screen (or press or) to show more choices.

Exit(0)

PCcard -> ROM Page02

Italian (1)

Spanish (2)

Dutch (3)

Norwegian (4)

Danish (6)

(9)

(7)

B178S931.WMF



FIRMWARE UPDATE

SM 5-159 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

The Download Screen opens after you select a language.

The 1st or 2nd language selected for updating shows.

The following show to right of the selection:

1) The first column shows the language currently selected2) The 2nd column shows the language selected to replace that language.

The example below shows that the download will replace “Japanese” with“Italian” as the 1st language.

9. Touch “Update(#)” on the screen (or press) to start the download.

Another screen with a progress bar does not show when the language is

downloading.

The following occur at the time the language is downloading:

• The operation panel switches off.

• The LED on the power on key flashes rapidly.

10. After the Start LED begins to flash slowly, switch the copier main power switchoff. Then remove the SD card from the slot.

11. Switch the copier main power switch on to resume normal operation.

Download Language LCDC ROM B0705370 Lang. Card ------

Now Lang.

Japanese 2.87

------

English - UK 2.87

------

Select Lang.

-> Italian 2.88

---------------

-> ------------ ---------------

---------------

Exit(0)

LANG. 2(2)

LANG. 1(1)

UpDate(#)

B178S932.WMF



FIRMWARE UPDATE

B202/B178/B180 5-160 SM

5.6.7 HANDLING FIRMWARE UPDATE ERRORS

An error message shows in the first line if an error occurs during a download. Theerror code consists of the letter “E” and a number (“E20”, for example).

Error Message Table

Code Meaning Solution

20 Cannot map logical address Make sure the SD card is inserted correctly.

21 Cannot access memory HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

22Cannot decompresscompressed data

Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data iscorrupted.

23Error occurred when ROMupdate program started

Controller program abnormal. If the second attemptfails, replace controller board.

24SD card access error Make sure SD card inserted correctly, or use

another SD card.

30No HDD available for stamp

data download

HDD connection incorrect or replace hard disks.

31Data incorrect for continuousdownload

Insert the SD card with the remaining data requiredfor the download, the re-start the procedure.

32Data incorrect after downloadinterrupted

Execute the recovery procedure for the intendedmodule download, then repeat the installationprocedure.

33Incorrect SD card version Incorrect ROM data on the SD card, or data is

corrupted.

34Module mismatch - Correctmodule is not on the SD card)

SD update data is incorrect. Acquire the correctdata (Japan, Overseas, OEM, etc.) then installagain.

35Module mismatch – Module onSD card is not for this machine

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SDcard is for another machine. Acquire correct update

data then install again.

36Cannot write module – Causeother than E34, E35

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SDcard is for another machine. Acquire correct updatedata then install again.

40Engine module downloadfailed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the BCU board.

42Operation panel moduledownload failed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the LCDC.

43Stamp data module downloadfailed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and try again, or replace the hard disks.

44 Controller module downloadfailed

Replace the update data for the module on the SDcard and tray again, or replace controller board.

Write Protect switch on SD Card is set ON.

50Electronic confirmation checkfailed

SD update data is incorrect. The data on the SDcard is for another machine. Acquire correct updatedata then install again.

⇒

Rev. 12/2005



SD CARD APPLI MOVE

SM 5-161 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.7 SD CARD APPLI MOVE

5.7.1 OVERVIEW

The service program “SD Card Appli Move” (SP5-873) lets you to copy applicationprograms from one SD card to another SD card.

Slot 1 and Slot 2 are used to store application programs. Slot 3 is for maintenancework only. You cannot run application programs from Slot 3. However you canmove application programs from Slot 3 to either Slot 1 or Slot 2. Do the followingprocedure it you want to move an application procedure from Slot 3:

1) Choose a SD card with enough space.2) Enter SP5873 “SD Card Appli Move”. Then move the application from the

SD Card in Slot 3 to the Slot you want.NOTE: Do steps 1-2 again if you want to move another application program.

3) Exit the SP mode

Use high caution when you do the AD Card Appli Move procedure:

1. The data necessary for authentication is transferred with the applicationprogram from an SD card to another SD card. Authentication fails if you try touse the SD card after you copy the application program from one card toanother card.

2. Do not use the SD card if it has been used by the user on the computer.Normal operation is not guaranteed when such an SD card is used.

3. Keep the SD card in a safe place after you copy the application program fromone card to another card. This is done for the following reasons:1) The SD card can be the only proof that the user is licensed to use the

application program.2) You may need to check the SD card and its data to solve a problem in the

future.

4. You cannot copy PostScript data to another SD card. You have to copy otherdata to the same SD card that stores PostScript data.



SD CARD APPLI MOVE

B202/B178/B180 5-162 SM

5.7.2 MOVE EXEC

The menu “Move Exec” (SP5-873-001) lets you copy application programs from theoriginal SD card to another SD card.


2. Make sure that an SD card is in SD Card Slot 1. The application program iscopied into this SD card.

3. Insert the SD card (having stored the application program) to SD Card Slot 3.The application program is copied from this SD card.


5. Start the SP mode.

6. Select SP5-873-001 “Move Exec.”

7. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.


9. Remove the SD card from SD Card Slot 3.


11. Check that the application programs run normally.



SD CARD APPLI MOVE

SM 5-163 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.7.3 UNDO EXEC

Do this procedure if you moved an option from the original SD card to another cardby mistake, and you want to restore it to the original SD card.

1. Turn the main switch OFF.

2. Put the original source SD card into Slot 3.

3. Put the SD card that contains the application(s) into Slot 1.

4. Turn the main switch ON.

5. Execute SP5873-002 (Undo Exec).

6. Follow the instructions on the LCD.

7. Turn the main switch OFF.

8. Remove the original source SD card from Slot 3.9. Turn the main switch ON.

10. Make sure that the application(s) in the SD card work correctly.

Rev. 11/2005

⇒



CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

B202/B178/B180 5-164 SM

5.8 CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

5.8.1 OVERVIEW

There are three types of self-diagnostics for the controller.1) Power-on self-diagnostics: The machine automatically starts the self-

diagnostics just after the power has been turned on.2) Detailed self-diagnostics: The machine does the detailed self-diagnostics by

using a loop-back connector (P/N G0219350)3) SC detection: The machine automatically detects SC conditions at power-on

or during operation.

The following shows the workflow of the power-on and detailed self-diagnostics.

Power ON

Diagnostic RAM Check

CPU Check

ASIC Check

Standard RAM

Conection Check

Optional RAM

Connection Check

Clock Generator Check

Standard NVRAM

Check

Font Header Check

Optional NVRAM Check

Real Time Clock Check

Network Check

Engine I/F Check

Interrupt Check

Memory Chip Check

Power-on or

Detailed

ROM Sum Check

Standard RAM Detailed

Check

Optional RAM Detailed

Check

Standard NVRAM

Detailed Check

Optional NVRAM

Detailed Check

Optinoal HDD Check

IEEE1284 Loop-back

Check

Real Time Clock

Detailed Check

Font ROM Sum Check

END

Power-on

Detailed

NG SC821

NG SC820

NG SC838

NG SC826

NG SC828

NG SC829

NG SC826

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

NG

Error Logged

A

NG Not initialized

NG SC829

NG SC827

NG SC824

NG

Not use optional RAM

Error Logged

B178S933.WMF



CONTROLLER SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

SM 5-165 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.8.2 DETAILED SELF-DIAGNOSTICS

In addition to the self-diagnostic test initiated every time the main machine ispowered on, you can set the machine in a more detailed diagnostic mode manually.

This lets you test other components or conditions that are not tested during self-diagnosis after power on. The following device is required in order to put themachine in the detailed self-diagnosis mode:

No. Name

G0219350 Parallel Loopback Connector

Executing Detailed Self-Diagnosis

Do the following procedure to execute detailed self-diagnosis.

1. Switch off the machine, and connect the parallel loopback device to the

Centronics I/F port.2. Hold down, press and hold down. Then switch on the machine while

pressing both keys at the same time.

You will see “Now Loading” on the touch-panel. Then you will see the results ofthe test.The machine automatically starts the self-diagnostics and prints the diagnosticreport after completing the test.

• Refer to the diagnostics report for the detected errors. You can check theerrors detected during self-diagnostics with SP7-832-001 (Diag. Result).

•Refer to section 4.3 for details about the error codes.



USING THE DEBUG LOG

B202/B178/B180 5-166 SM

5.9 USING THE DEBUG LOG

This machine provides a Save Debug Log feature that allows the CustomerEngineer to save and retrieve error information for analysis.

Every time an error occurs, debug information is recorded in volatile memory. Butthis information is lost when the machine is switched off and on.

To capture this debug information, the Save Debug Log feature provides two mainfeatures:

• Switching on the debug feature so error information is saved directly to the HDDfor later retrieval.

• Copying the error information from the HDD to an SD card.

Do the following procedure below to set up the machine so the error information issaved automatically to the HDD when a user has problems with the machine. Thenask the user to reproduce the problem.

5.9.1 SWITCHING ON AND SETTING UP SAVE DEBUG LOG

The debug information cannot be saved until the “Save Debug Log” function hasbeen switched on and a target has been selected.

1. Enter the SP mode and switch the Save Debug Log feature on.

• Press then use the 10-key pad to enter.

• Press and hold down for more than 3 seconds.

• Touch “Copy SP”.

• On the LCD panel, open SP5857.

2. Under “5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “1 On/Off”.

3. On the control panel keypad, press “1”. Then press. This switches the SaveDebug Log feature on.NOTE: The default setting is “0” (OFF). This feature must be switched on in

order for the debug information to be saved.

B178S001.JPG



USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-167 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

4. Select the target destination where the debug information will be saved. Under“5857 Save Debug Log”, touch “2 Target”, enter “2” with the operation panel

key to select the hard disk as the target destination. Then press.

NOTE: Select “3 SD Card” to save the debug information directly to the SDcard if it is inserted in the service slot.

5. Now touch “5858” and specify the events that you want to record in the debug

log. SP5858 (Debug Save When) provides the following items for selection.

1 Engine SC ErrorSaves data when an engine-relatedSC code is generated.

2 Controller SC ErrorSaves debug data when a controller-related SC Code is generated.

3 Any SC ErrorSaves data only for the SC code thatyou specify by entering code number.

4 Jam Saves data for jams.

NOTE: More than one event can be selected.

Example 1: To Select Items 1, 2, 4

Touch the appropriate items(s). Press “ON” for each selection. This exampleshows “Engine SC Error” selected.

Example 2: To Specify an SC Code

Touch “3 Any SC Error”, enter the 3-digit SC code number with the controlpanel number keys. Then press. This example shows an entry for SC670.

NOTE: For details about SC code numbers, please refer to the SC tables inSection 4. “Troubleshooting”.

B178S002.JPG

B178S003.JPG

B178S004.JPG



USING THE DEBUG LOG

B202/B178/B180 5-168 SM

6. Select one or more memory modules for reading and recording debuginformation. Touch “5859”.

Under “5859” press the necessary key item for the module that you want torecord.

Enter the appropriate 4-digit number. Then press.

NOTE: Refer to the two tables below for the 4-digit numbers to enter for eachkey.

The example below shows “Key 1” with “2222” entered.

The following keys can be set with the corresponding numbers. (The initials inparentheses indicate the names of the modules.)

4-Digit Entries for Keys 1 to 10

KEY NO. COPY PRINTER SCANNER WEB

1 2222 (SCS)

2 2223 (SRM)

3 256 (IMH)4 1000 (ECS)

5 1025 (MCS)

6 4848 (COPY) 4400 (GPS) 5375 (Scan) 5682 (NFA)

7 2224 (BCU) 4500 (PDL) 5682 (NFA) 6600 (WebDB)

8 4600 (GPS-PM) 3000 (NCS) 3300 (PTS)

9 2000 (NCS) 2000 (NCS) 6666 (WebSys)

10 2224 (BCU) 2000 (NCS)

NOTE: The default settings for Keys 1 to 10 are all zero (“0”).

Key to Acronyms

Acronym Meaning Acronym Meaning

ECS Engine Control Service NFA Net File Application

GPS GW Print Service PDL Printer Design Language

GSP-PM GW Print Service – Print Module PTS Print Server

IMH Image Memory Handler SCS System Control Service

MCS Memory Control Service SRM System ResourceManagement

NCS Network Control Service WebDB Web Document Box(Document Server)

The machine is now set to record the debugging information automatically onthe HDD (the target selected with SP5857-002) for the events that you selected

with SP5858 and the memory modules selected with SP5859.

B178S005.JPG



USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-169 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

Please keep the following important points in mind when you do this setting:

• Note that the number entries for Keys 1 to 5 are the same for the Copy, Printer,

Scanner, and Web memory modules.• The initial settings are all zero.

• These settings remain in effect until you change them. Be sure to check all thesettings, especially the settings for Keys 6 to 10. To switch off a key setting,enter a zero for that key.

• You can select any number of keys from 1 to 10 (or all) by entering thecorresponding 4-digit numbers from the table.

• You cannot mix settings for the groups (COPY, PRINTER, etc.) for 006~010. Forexample, if you want to create a PRINTER debug log you must select thesettings from the 9 available selections for the “PRINTER” column only.

• One area of the disk is reserved to store the debug log. The size of this area is

limited to 4 MB.

5.9.2 RETRIEVING THE DEBUG LOG FROM THE HDD

Retrieve the debug log by copying it from the hard disk to an SD card.

1. Insert the SD card into the service slot of the copier.

2. Enter the SP mode and execute SP5857-009 (Copy HDD to SD Card (Latest 4MB)) to write the debugging data to the SD card.

3. Use a card reader to copy the file and send it for analysis to your local Ricohrepresentative by email. You can also send the SD card by regular mail if youwant.



USING THE DEBUG LOG

B202/B178/B180 5-170 SM

5.9.3 RECORDING ERRORS MANUALLY

SC errors and jams only are recorded to the debug log automatically. Please

instruct the user to do the following immediately after occurrence to save the debugdata for any other errors that occur while the customer engineer is not on site.Such problems also include a controller or panel freeze.

NOTE: You must previously switch on the Save Debug Feature (SP5857-001) andselect the hard disk as the save destination (SP5857-002) if you want touse this feature.

1. Press (Clear Modes). on the operation panel when the error occurs.

2. On the control panel, enter “01”. Then hold down for at least 3 seconds

until the machine beeps and then release it. This saves the debug log to thehard disk for later retrieval with an SD card by the service representatives.

3. Switch the machine off and on to resume operation.

The debug information for the error is saved on the hard disk. This lets theservice representative retrieve it on their next visit by copying it from the HDDto an SD card.



USING THE DEBUG LOG

SM 5-171 B202/B178/B180

S e r v i c e

T a b l e s

5.9.4 NEW DEBUG LOG CODES

SP5857-015 Copy SD Card-to-SD Card: Any Desired Key

This SP copies the log on an SD card (the file that contains the information writtendirectly from shared memory) to a log specified by key number. The copy operationis executed in the log directory of the SD card inserted in the same slot. (Thisfunction does not copy from one slot to another.) Each SD card can hold up to 4MB of file data. Unique file names are created for the data during the copyoperation to prevent overwriting files of the same name. This means that log datafrom more than one machine can be copied onto the same SC card. Thiscommand does not execute if there is no log on the HDD for the name of thespecified key.

SP5857-016 Create a File on HDD to Store a Log

This SP creates a 32 MB file to store a log on the HDD. However, this is not acompletely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS keynumber and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file iscreated on the HDD when the first log is stored on the HDD (it takes some time tocomplete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may beswitched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you execute thisSP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of timerequired to acquire the log information and save onto the HDD. With the file alreadycreated on the HDD for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded. A new logfile does not need to be created. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-011 todelete the debug log data from the HDD. Then do SP5857-016.

SP5857-017 Create a File on SD Card to Store a Log

This SP creates a 4 MB file to store a log on an SD card. However, this is not acompletely empty file. The created file will hold the number “2225” as the SCS keynumber and other non-volatile information. Even if this SP is not executed, a file iscreated on the SD card when the first log is stored on the SD card (it takes sometime to complete this operation). This creates the possibility that the machine may

be switched off and on before the log can be created completely. If you executethis SP to create the log file beforehand, this will greatly reduce the amount of timerequired to acquire the log information and save onto the SD card. With the filealready created on the SD card for the log file, the data only needs to be recorded;a new log file does not require creation. To create a new log file, execute SP5857-012 to delete the debug log data from the SD card. Then do SP5857-017.



DIP SWITCHES

B202/B178/B180 5-172 SM

5.10 DIP SWITCHES

Controller Board

DIP SW No. OFF ON

1 Boot-up from Flash ROM Boot-up from SD card

2 to 4 Factory Use Only: Keep these switches OFF.

BCU Board

Set the DIP switch on the BCU and connect the connector as listed in the table.

DIP SwitchModel

1 2 3 4Connector

North America

B178

ON OFF OFF OFF Not connected

North AmericaB180

ON OFF OFF ON Not connected

North AmericaB202

ON OFF OFF OFF Connected

Europe B178 OFF ON OFF OFF Not connected

Europe B180 OFF ON OFF ON Not connected

Europe B202 OFF ON OFF OFF Connected

Asia B178 ON ON OFF OFF Not connected

Asia B180 ON ON OFF ON Not connected

Asia B202 ON ON OFF OFF Connected

Korea B178 OFF ON ON OFF Not connected

Korea B180 OFF ON ON ON Not connected

Korea B202 OFF ON ON OFF Connected

Taiwan B178 ON OFF ON OFF Not connected

Taiwan B180 ON OFF ON ON Not connected

Taiwan B202 ON OFF ON OFF Connected

One of the following errors occur when the DIP switch is incorrectly set:

• SC195

• SC902

• SC995• Fusing Unit Setting Error

• Toner Cartridge Setting Error

⇒

Rev. 10/2005

⇒

⇒








OVERVIEW

SM 6-1 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d

D e s c r i p t i o n s

6. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

6.1 OVERVIEW

6.1.1 COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Scanner HP sensor

2. ADF exposure glass3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)4. Scanner lamp5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)6. Original width sensor7. Original length sensor8. Scanner motor9. Exposure glass10. Sensor board unit (SBU)

11. Toner cartridge

12. Laser optics housing unit 13. Polygon mirror motor 14. By-pass feed table

15. Transfer unit

16. Rotation encoder17. Tray 2

18. Tray 1

19. Waste toner bottle 20. Waste toner vibrator

21. Duplex feed unit 22. Transfer belt cleaning unit 23. ID sensor 24. Development unit (each color) 25. PCU (each color) 26. Fusing unit

K

Y

C

M

B178D501.WMF

1

17

2 3 4 5 8 9

10

6

12

11

13

14

18

19

20

16

21

22

23

24

25

26

15

7



OVERVIEW

B202/B178/B180 6-2 SM

6.1.2 PAPER PATH

1. Original tray2. Original exit tray3. By-pass tray

4. Tray 15. Tray 26. Optional paper feed unit/LCT

7. Duplex inverter unit8. Duplex feed unit9. To optional finisher

10. To optional finisher11. External Tray12. Standard tray

The two-tray finisher requires an optional paper feed unit or the LCT. The duplexinverter unit has two exits for the two-tray finisher. When the one-tray paper feedunit is installed, paper feeds out to the two-tray finisher from the upper exit. Whenthe two-tray paper feed unit or LCT is installed, paper feeds out to the two-trayfinisher from the lower exit.

K

Y

C

M

B178D502.WMF

12

12

3

6

8

7

9

10

11

4

5



OVERVIEW

SM 6-3 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Scanner motor: Drives the scanner unit.

2. Development drivemotor-K:

Drives the development unit for black, the fusing unit, and the paperexit section.

3. Development drivemotor-CMY:

Drives the color development units (magenta/cyan/yellow), theregistration roller, and the waste toner collection coils from the PCUs.

4. Drum drive motor-CMY: Drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.

5. Transfer belt contactmotor:

Moves the transfer belt into contact and away from the color PCUs.

6. Paper feed motor: Drives the paper feed mechanisms (tray 1/tray 2/by-pass tray).

7. Drum drive motor-K: Drives the black PCU and the collection coil in the waste toner bottle.

8. Transfer unit drivemotor:

Drives the transfer unit.

9. Waste toner vibrationmotor:

Makes vibrations to not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.

B178D503.WMF

1

3

4

5

6

2

7

98



OVERVIEW

B202/B178/B180 6-4 SM

6.1.4 BOARD STRUCTURE

Overview

Controller IPU Board Fax Unit

PCB：SBU

ADF

CNScanner Unit

PCIPCI

Motherboard

Main Power

Supply Unit

Sub Power Supply Unit

Operation

Panel

Xenon Lamp

Scanner Motor

HPS

APS

PolygonMotor

LDB

LDB

LDB

LDB

I2C

LD LD

LD

LD

LD

Laser Optics Unit

PCB：

DRB

Drive

Motors

Transfer Roller

Voltage

Transfer Voltage

Paper Attractio

Voltage

Motors

ID sensor

Sensors

HDD

Main SW

Breaker SW

Fusing

Unit C N

Fusing Relay

Safety

SW

Finisher

DuplexFeed Unit

Duplex

Inverter Unit C N

Paper

Feed Unit

CCD

LCDC

CN

CN

C N

Base

Engine

Control

Unit

PCI PCI

Main

SW

PCB:

SIO

Voltage

transpare

5V(Energy

Saver Mode)

5V

5V generated

from 24V

24V

Charge Voltage

Development Voltage

Original Size

Detection

24V

24V

24V

B178D504A.WMF



OVERVIEW

SM 6-5 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Descriptions

BCU (Base Engine Control Unit):The BCU controls all the mechanical components. The BCU has three CPUs (Main,MUSIC, and DSP). The CPUs control the following functions:

Main CPU

• Engine sequence

• Engine operation

• Timing for peripherals

• High voltage supply, laser, and fusing

• Sensors, drive board, and solenoids

• Motors

MUSIC (Mirror Unit for Skew and Interval Correction) CPU

• TD sensor

• Line position adjustment• Memory chip on the toner cartridge

DSP (Digital Signal Processor)

• Line position adjustment

Controller:The controller connects to the BCU through a PCI bus. The controller handles thefollowing functions:

• Machine-to-host interface

• Operation panel interface

• Network interface• Interfacing and control of the optional IEEE1284, Bluetooth, IEEE1394,

IEEE802.11b (wireless LAN), HDD, and DRAM DIMM

LD Drive Board:This is the laser diode drive circuit board.

DRB:The DRB (driver board) controls the paper feed motor, development motors(color/black), drum drive motors (color/black), and transfer unit drive motor.

IPU:The Image Processing Unit is a large-scale integrated circuit. This unit processesdigital signals.

SBU:The Sensor Board Unit has a CCD (charge-coupled device) and an analog-to-digital conversion circuit.

Operation Panel Board:Controls the display panel, the LED and the keypad.

Motherboard:The motherboard is the main circuit board connecting with the BCU, FCU,controller and IPU.



OVERVIEW

B202/B178/B180 6-6 SM

FCU:The FCU (fax controller unit) controls the fax programs and communicates with thecontroller to share copier resources.

Scanner I/O Board:

The scanner I/O board is a circuit board that transmits control signals, image data,and electricity.

6.1.5 PRINTING PROCESS

This machine uses four PCUs, four development units, and four laser beams forcolor printing. Each PCU has a drum, charge roller, cleaning brush, and blade.From the left, the PCU stations are black, yellow, cyan, and magenta.

A transfer belt feeds paper past the PCUs. Then the toner image on each drum istransferred to the paper.

The paper path is inclined at about 38 degrees. This helps to keep the machine ascompact as possible.

B178D505.WMF

2, 6

3

10

5

8

9

7

4

1

K

Y

C

M



OVERVIEW

SM 6-7 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


1. Drum charge: The charge roller gives the drum a negative charge

2. Laser exposure:

The laser beam from the laser diode (LD) goes through the lens and mirrorsand reaches the drum. The machine turns the laser beam on and off to make alatent image on the drum.

3. Development: The development roller carries negatively charged toner to the latent image onthe drum surface. This machine uses four independent development units (onefor each color).

4. Image transfer: The charge given to the transfer roller attracts the toner from the drum to thepaper. Four toner images are super-imposed onto the paper.

5. Cleaning for OPC drum: The cleaning brush and blade remove remaining toner on the drum surfaceafter image transfer to the paper.

6. Quenching for OPC drum: Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser atthe end of every job.

7. Paper attraction: Paper is attracted to the transfer belt by the charge given to the paper attractionroller.

8. Separation: Paper separates from the transfer belt when the belt curves away from it.

9. Cleaning and quenching for transfer belt: The cleaning brush and blade clean the belt surface. The grounding rollerinside the transfer belt unit removes the remaining charge on the belt.

10. ID sensor: The ID sensor board contains three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). The IDsensor detects the density of the ID sensor pattern on the transfer belt. The IDsensor output is used for the following:

• Process control and for automatic line position

• Skew• Color registration adjustments for the latent image.





PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-9 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Process Control Self Check

This machine uses the process control self check method to do the potentialcontrol. The machine uses seven types of process control self check. These arecategorized according to their execution timing:

1. Forced

This is done when SP3-126-1 is used.

2. Initial

This starts automatically when the power is turned on, or, when the machinerecovers from energy saver mode. This occurs only if the fusing unit pressure

roller temperature is 60°C or less.

3. Interval: Job End

This starts automatically at the end of a print job when the total print counter for

this feature exceeds 200 (you can change this with SP3-906-1). The countersare reset to ‘0’ after all process control is done (except for forced processcontrol).

4. Interval: Interrupt (default: not done)

This interrupts printing and then starts automatically at the following times:

1) When the machine makes a certain number (A) of continuous color prints inthe same job

2) The main scan length detection is executed.

After the above are completed, the machine continues to make prints.

You can adjust value A with SP3-906-2 (default: off). At this time, only VREF iscorrected. Potential control (VD, VB, VL correction) is not done.

5. Non-use Time (default: not done)

This starts before the next print job if the machine has no job for a certain time(M) after it makes more than a certain number (N) of prints.

You can adjust M with SP3-906-4. You can adjust N with SP3-906-3.

6. After Toner End Recovery

This starts after recovery from a toner end condition.

7. After Developer Initialization

The machine executes the Auto Toner Density Adjustment (SP3-125-003). Thisstarts after a developer initialization is done. Developer initialization occursautomatically after a new development unit has been installed.



PROCESS CONTROL

B202/B178/B180 6-10 SM

6.2.3 PROCESS CONTROL SELF CHECK PROCEDURE

Step 1: V SG Adjustment

This machine uses three ID sensors (direct reflection type). They are located at the

front, center, and rear of the transfer unit. Only the center ID sensor is used forprocess control. The ID sensor checks the bare transfer belt’s reflectivity. Then themachine calibrates the ID sensor until its output (known as VSG) is as follows.

• VSG = 4.0 ± 0.5 Volts

This calibration compensates for the transfer belt’s condition and the ID sensorcondition. For example, if dirt gets on the surface of the belt or ID sensor.

Sensor pattern density detection

VSG adjustment

ID sensor solid pattern generation

Sensor pattern density detection

Toner amount calculation

VD, VB, VL selection and VREF adjustment

ID sensor highlight pattern generation

Step 1

VL (LD power) selection

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4

Step 5

Step 6

Step 7

Step 8

Default: off

Start

End

B178D608.WMF



PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-11 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Step 2: ID Sensor Solid Pattern Generation

First, the machine agitates the developer for between 15 and 30 seconds until thefluctuation in TD sensor output becomes less than 0.3V.

Second, the machine makes the first series of grade patterns (see the diagram).This 5-grade pattern is made in black, yellow, cyan, and magenta (20 squares intotal). They are made by changing the development bias and charge roller voltage.The difference between development bias and charge roller voltage is always thesame.

Finally, the machine makes the second series of grade patterns in the same orderas the first series. The development bias and charge roller voltage are not thesame as those of the first series.

Step 3: Sensor Pattern Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 solid-color squares for each color (5squares in the first series and another 5 squares in the second series). This datagoes to memory.

Step 4: Toner Amount Calculation

The amount of toner on the transfer belt (M/A, mass per unit area, mg/cm2) is

calculated for each of the 10 grades of the sensor pattern from the ID sensoroutput value from each grade of the pattern.

Left

Transfer belt

12 mm

15 mm

B178D506.WMF



PROCESS CONTROL

B202/B178/B180 6-12 SM

Step 5: V D, V B, VL Selection and V REF Adjustment

The machine determines the relationship between the amount of toner on thetransfer belt and the development bias for each of the 10 grades. Then themachine selects the development bias and charge roller voltages for the target M/Afor each color by referring to a table in memory.

Laser power (VL) selected depends on the setting of SP3-125-2.

• If it is set to "Fixed", the LD power is fixed at the value of SP2-103-1, to -27.

• If it is set to "Process Control", LD power is selected using the same memorytable as mentioned above.

• If it is set to "LD power", LD power is determined by ID sensor highlight patterngeneration (steps 6 to 8 later in this procedure).

The machine also adjusts VREF (toner density target) at the same time so that thedevelopment gamma detected by process control will be the value stored in SP3-120-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

NOTE: The patterns on the transfer belt are cleaned by the transfer belt-cleaningunit.

Allowable changes to VD, VB, and VL (as a result of process control):

This depends on the process control type as follows.

• Forced: No limit

• Initial: After Developer Initialization: ± 80 volts• Interval: (Job End/ Non-use Time/ During Toner End Recovery): ± 40 volts

• Interval: (Interrupt): Constant (The memory table is not used.)

Steps 6 to 8 are done only if SP3-125-2 is set to "LD Power". (Default: Steps 6to 8 are not used)

Target

M/A

M/A

B Development Bias

Development Bias Charge Bias LD Power

B0 C0 L0

B1 C1 L1

— — —

B C L

— — —

Bn-1 Cn-1 Ln-1

Bn Cn Ln

B178D507.WMF



PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-13 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Step 6: ID Sensor Highlight Pattern Generation

The machine makes a 10-grade pattern on the transfer belt for each toner color.The pattern has 10 squares. Each of the squares is 12 mm x 15 mm, and is a dot-pattern squares (not solid-color squares like in the process of step 2). They aremade using constant bias and charge roller voltages selected from one of the types

mentioned above. The various grades are made by changing the LD power.

Step 7: Sensor Pattern Density Detection

The ID sensor detects the densities of the 10 grade-pattern squares for each color.This data goes to memory.

Step 8: V L (LD Power) Selection

The machine determines the relationship

between the amount of toner on the transferbelt and the laser power for each of the 10grades. Then the machine selects the laserpower to get the target M/A.

Left

Transfer belt

12 mm

15 mm

B178D508.WMF

Target

M/A

M/A

L LD Power B178D509.WMF



PROCESS CONTROL

B202/B178/B180 6-14 SM

6.2.4 VREF COMPENSATION DURING A PRINT JOB

Highlight Pattern

The M/A target (mass-per-area target) is the target toner amount in a given area.To adjust the toner amount, a highlight pattern [B] is created on the transfer belt atthe following times during each print job.

Job Interval Color of highlight pattern

Black-and-white printing After every four pages Black

Color printing After every one page One of four colors

For color jobs, the order of pattern generation is K → Y → M → C → K → Y → M

→ C. The highlight pattern is made about 2 cm after the trailing edge of the paper[A].

Adjustment Process

The machine generates a highlight pattern (one grade) of a specified density. Thecenter ID sensor checks the density. Then the machine adjusts VREF by comparingthe reading with the target of each color (SP3-905-1 to 4). The machine adjustsVCNT when this adjustment is not sufficient.

Left

Transfer belt

B178D510.WMF

[A]

[B]



PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-15 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.2.5 TONER SUPPLY CONTROL

Overview

Toner supply control uses the following to determine the amount of toner to be

supplied. This is done before every development for each color.

• Density of the toner in the developer (detected by the TD sensor) - VREF, VT

• Pixel count

The image density is kept constant by adjusting the density of toner in thedevelopment unit. At the same time, it accommodates changes in the developmentconditions through the potential control mechanism. Environmental changes andthe number of prints made are also used in the calculation.

The amount of toner supplied is determined by the ‘on’ time of the toner supply

clutch. The total ‘on’ time for each toner supply clutch is stored in the memory chipfor the relevant toner cartridge. The amount of toner supplied also depends on theprocess line speed for the current job. The machine supplies the calculated amountof toner for each color.

Toner Supply Control Modes

This machine has three toner supply control modes. You can select them with SP2-208-1 to -4.

1. Fuzzy control mode

This is the default toner supply control mode. The TD sensor, ID sensor, andpixel count are used in this mode.

2. Proportional control modeThis mode is used when the ID sensor at the center becomes faulty. Only theTD sensor is used to control toner supply. The machine uses the VREF that isstored in SP2-224-5 to -8.

3. Fixed supply modeThis mode is used when the TD sensor becomes faulty. You can adjust theamount of toner supply with SP2-208-5 to -8 if the image density is incorrect(the default setting is 5%).



PROCESS CONTROL

B202/B178/B180 6-16 SM

6.2.6 TONER NEAR END/TONER END DETECTION

Introduction

Toner Near End

The controller considers the following information to determine the toner near end

status:

• TD sensor [A] in the development unit

• Operation time counter of the toner attraction pump [B]

• Memory chip [C] on the toner cartridge

• Toner end sensor [D]

There are two different toner near-end detection procedures (referred to as “TonerNear End Detection 1” and “Toner Near End Detection 2”). The machine enters thenear-end condition if either of these is detected.

Toner EndTo determine the toner end status, the controller considers the followinginformation:

• TD sensor [A] in the development unit

• Pixel counter

B178D511.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]



PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-17 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Toner Near End Detection 1

The controller considers the following information from the TD sensor:

1) The controller checks that the following condition is satisfied ten times

consecutively:VREF + 0.4 V < VT

NOTE: You can adjust the condition with SP2-212.

2) If the above condition is satisfied, toner is supplied to the development unit.The messages, “Loading Toner” and “Please wait,” show.

3) The controller checks the above condition again.

a) If the condition is satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is inthe toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almost empty,”“Replace Toner Cartridge(s),” and “Xxxxx,” shows. “Xxxxx” indicates the

color, such as cyan.b) If the condition is not satisfied, the controller decides that the machine is

not in the toner near end status. The machine resumes its normaloperation.

Toner Near End Detection 2

The controller considers the information from the operation time counter of thefollowing:

• Toner attraction pump

• Memory chip on the toner bottle• Toner end sensor.1) To calculate the toner amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the controller

considers the operation time counter of the toner attraction pump and theinitial amount of the toner (recorded in the memory chip).

2) If the amount reaches the predefined weight (default: 100 g), the controllerchecks the signals from the toner end sensor.

NOTE: You can adjust the weight with SP2-212-1 and -2.

a) If the signals indicate the toner amount has fallen to a certain level

(determined by SP 2-212-12 to -15), the controller decides that themachine is in the toner near end status. The messages, “Toner is almostempty,” “Replace Toner Cartridge(s)”, and “Xxxxx,” show. “Xxxxx”indicates the color, such as cyan.

b) If the signals indicate the toner amount is not less than a certain level,the controller decides that the machine is not in the toner near end status.The machine resumes its normal operation.



PROCESS CONTROL

B202/B178/B180 6-18 SM

Toner End Detection

The machine flags the toner end status when one of the conditions below isdetected for a toner color. The messages, “No Toner,” “Replace Toner Cartridge,”and “Xxxxx,” show. “Xxxxx” indicates the color, such as cyan.

• VREF + 0.5 V < VT (ten times consecutively)

• The pixel counter counts up to the equivalent of 50 A4 sheets of pixels (100%coverage) since near-end was detected.

However, printing continues if fewer pages have been made since near-end thanthe number set with SP 2-212-11 (default: 10 pages).

NOTE: If one of the following conditions is detected 10 consecutive times, themachine flags a “toner end condition”. This condition does not depend onthe number of pages printed since near-end.

• VREF + 1.2 V < VT

• VT > 4.8 V

The machine cannot print until the toner cartridge is replaced after it detects tonerend for black. The machine can print in black and white only if cyan, magenta, oryellow are in a toner end condition during standby mode. At this time the machinecannot do color print jobs.

NOTE: If the yellow, cyan, or magenta toner ends during a color-printing job, the job is suspended until toner is supplied. If new color toner is not installed,the user can print black-and-white jobs only.

Toner End Recovery

The machine assumes that the toner cartridge has been replaced if either of thefollowing occurs when the near-end or end status exists:

• The upper right cover is opened and closed.

• The main switch is turned off and on.

Then the machine starts to supply toner to the development unit. After supplyingtoner, the machine clears the toner near-end or end status if the followingconditions are detected:

• Vt [0] – Vt [3] > 0.5V

• Vt – Vref > 0.3V



PROCESS CONTROL

SM 6-19 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.2.7 DEVELOPER INITIALIZATION

You must set “Enable” in SP5-999-005 (black), 006 (yellow), 007 (magenta), or 008(cyan) for the machine to detect the new unit after you install a new development

unit. These settings depend on the development unit you install. The machineinitializes the developer when it detects a new unit.

First, the machine agitates the developer for about 60 seconds. Second, it adjusts

VCNT (control voltage for TD sensor) so that VT (TD sensor output) becomes 3.0 ± 0.2 volts. Finally, the machine keeps this VT as VREF.

VCNT is corrected for the current humidity every print job. VCNT is also corrected forthe total number of prints. This does not let the developer Q/M vary.

If the humidity correction is giving poor

results (for example, if the humidity sensor[A] is broken), it can be disabled with SP2-223-2. Then a value for VCNT must be inputmanually using SP2-224-1 to -4 (adjust bytrial and error).

During developer initialization, the machineforcibly supplies toner because there is notoner inside the toner transport tube atinstallation. Then the machine does theprocess control self check.

B178D512.WMF

[A]



SCANNING

B202/B178/B180 6-20 SM

6.3 SCANNING

6.3.1 OVERVIEW

1. Scanner HP sensor

2. ADF exposure glass

3. 2nd scanner (2nd carriage)

4. Scanner lamp

5. 1st scanner (1st carriage)

6. Scanner motor

7. Exposure glass

8. Sensor board unit (SBU)

9. Original length sensor

10. Original width sensor

The original on the exposure glass or ARDF exposure glass reflects the lightemitted from the scanner lamp. The reflected light goes to the CCD on the sensorboard by way of the 1st and 2nd scanners. The sensor board converts the CCDanalog signals into digital signals.

When the original is manually placed on the exposure glass, the scanner motorpulls the 1st and 2nd scanners via mechanical linkage. The original is scannedfrom left to right as shown above.

When the original is fed from the optional ARDF, it is automatically transported

onto the ARDF exposure glass, and to the original exit. The original does not stayon the glass; but goes to the exit. The 1st and 2nd scanners stay at their homepositions.

B178D513.WMF

1

8

9

2 73 4 5 6

10



SCANNING

SM 6-21 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.3.2 SCANNER DRIVE

The scanner motor [B] drives the 1st scanner [A] and the 2nd scanner [E] throughthe scanner drive pulley, scanner drive shaft [C], and two scanner wires [D].

Book mode -

The SBU board controls the scanner drive motor. The 2nd scanner speed is half

that of the 1st scanner.

In reduction or enlargement mode, the scanning speed depends on themagnification ratio. The returning speed is always the same, whether in full size ormagnification mode. The image length change in the sub scan direction is done bychanging the scanner motor speed. In the main scan direction it is done by imageprocessing on the IPU board.

You can adjust the magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the scannermotor speed with SP4-008.

ARDF mode -

The scanners always stay in their home position (the scanner HP sensor detectsthe 1st scanner) to scan the original. The ARDF motor feeds the original throughthe ARDF. In reduction/enlargement mode, the image length change in the sub-scan direction is done by changing the ARDF motor speed. Magnification in themain scan direction is done in the IPU board. This is the same as for book mode.

You can adjust magnification in the sub-scan direction by changing the ARDFmotor speed with SP6-017.

B178D514.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E]





SCANNING

SM 6-23 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Original Size Length SensorWidth

Sensor

Metric

versionInch version L3 L2 L1 W2 W1

SP4-301display

A3 11" x 17" O O O O O 132

B4 10" x 14" O O O X O 141

F4 8.5" x 14" (8" x 13") O O O X X 165

A4-L 8.5" x 11" X O O X X 133

B5-L X X O X X 142

A4-S 11" x 8.5" X X X O O 5

B5-S X X X X O 14

A5-L, A5-S 5.5" x 8.5", 8.5" x 5.5" X X X X X 128

NOTE: L: Lengthwise, S: Sideways, O: Paper present, X: Paper not present

For other combinations, “Cannot detect original size.” shows on the operationpanel.

The above table shows the outputs of the sensors for each original size. Thisoriginal size detection method eliminates the necessity for a pre-scan andincreases the machine’s productivity.

However, if the by-pass tray is used, the machine assumes that the copy paper islengthwise (L). For example, if A4 sideways paper is placed on the by-pass tray,

the machine assumes it is A3 paper and scans a full A3 area. Information from theoriginal size sensors is disregarded.

Refer to the ARDF manual for more information on original size detection with the ARDF.

6.3.4 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER

The anti-condensation heater is available as an optional unit. The anti-condensation heater prevents condensation on the mirrors. Condensation canoccur when the scanner unit is moved from a cold room to a warm room, forexample. Condensation can cause abnormal images.



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-24 SM

6.4 IMAGE PROCESSING

6.4.1 OVERVIEW

• The CCD (Charged Coupled Device) generates three analog video signals.

• The SBU (Sensor Board Unit) converts the three analog signals to 10-bit digitalsignals. It sends these signals to the IPU (Image Processing Unit).

• The IPU processes the image. Then the image data goes to the controller.

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU

Option

Controller BCU

Memory

HDD

LD Board

M

C

Y

K

Mother Board

B178D517.WMF

MemoryK



IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-25 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.4.2 SBU BLOCK DIAGRAM

Signal Processing

1. Signal Amplification

• Operational amplifiers amplify odd-pixel and even-pixel RGB analog signalsfrom the CCD.

2. Signal Composition

• The amplified signals (even-pixel and odd-pixel for each RGB color) arecombined by the MPX circuit after A/D conversion.

A/D Conversion

• The analog signals (CCD output) are converted to 10-bit (1024 gradations) digitalsignals.

White Level Correction

A white plate is on the back of the left scale. The scanner scans this plate to seethe actual white level when you turn the switch on. To compensate the differencebetween the actual white level and the ideal white level (target white level), the

CCD-gain control is conducted.

Others

The SBU controller exchanges the R and B signals if the original is scanned withthe ARDF.

Analog Amplifier A/D Converter

CCD

SBU

Analog Amplifier

A/D Converter

Analog Amplifier

A/D Converter

SBU

Controller

R(B)O

E

O

E

O

E

G

B(R)

10 bit

10 bit

10 bit

FieldMemory

Field

Memory ASIC

IPU

10 bit

10 bit

10 bit

R

G

B

8 bit

8 bit

8 bit

B178D518.WMF



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-26 SM

Black Level Correction

• Improves image reproduction for high-density areas.

• Reads the black video level at black elements on the CCD. These pixels aremasked off, and should produce a pure black signal.

• This is subtracted from the value of each pixel.

• Calculated for each scan line.

• Corrects the image data for any changes in black level with time, as the machinescans down the page.

Adjustments

The properties of the scanner unit, (necessary for controlling the scanner VPU(video processing unit)), are stored in the NVRAM on the controller.

Adjust the following after you replace the SBU:

SP4–008 Scanner sub-scan magnification

SP4–010 Scanner leading edge registration

SP4–011 Scanner side-to-side registration

VPU Test Mode

Output the VPU test pattern with SP4-907 to make sure the scanner VPU controlfunctions correctly. ( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)



IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-27 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.4.3 IPU BLOCK DIAGRAM

Shading Correction

Auto shading compensates for the possible differences in the amount of light at theedge and center of a scanned image caused by the scanner lens, or, variationsamong pixels of the CCD.

• Shading Correction

• Picture Elemnet Correction

• Scanner γ Correction

• Filter

• ADS

• ACS

• Image Separation

SBU

IPU

• Color Correction

• Main Scan Magnification

BCU

Controller

ASIC2

ASIC1

ASIC3

• Gradation Processing

ASIC4

FCUController

Option

P C I B U S

I/F

•Printer γ Correction

• SBU I/F ASIC0

B178D519.WMF



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-28 SM

Picture Element (Dot Position) Correction

Picture element correction does the following two things:

1. Completion of the scan line correction process.

2. Correction if the CCD is not perpendicular to the light.

• The green CCD line is taken as a standard.

• Both ends of the red and blue lines are adjusted to match.

• Use SP 4-932-1 to 4-932-4 to change the vertical line correction level( “3. Replacement and Adjustment – Image Adjustments”).

Scan Line Correction

R, G, and B CCD lines are spaced 4 lines apart (8 lines total) when full sizemagnification is used.

• Scan line correction synchronizes these signals by storing each line in memory.

• The difference between the R, G and B signals depends on the magnificationratio.

• If this calculation does not result in an integer, the corrected data is set to theclosest integer. At this time, further correction is needed ( “Picture ElementCorrection”).

Image Separation

The machine separates the original image into text and photo (dot screen) areas.

Edge Separation

• Used to locate text and line diagrams

• Locates areas of strong contrast.

• Looks for continuity of black or colored pixels.

• Looks for continuity of white pixels around black or colored pixels.

• Only uses data from the green CCD.

Dot Screen Separation

• If white pixels are not detected around non-white pixels, it is a dot screen area.

Colored Text Separation

• Identifies whether the text area’s pixels are black or color.

• This is based on the following:1) Differences among the RGB maximum signal levels.2) Output levels of the RGB video signals.



IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-29 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


ACS (Auto Color Select)

The Auto Color Select determines if an original is black/white or color. Black copymode or full color mode is automatically selected.

Selection is made based on the difference between the RGB signal levels. RGBvideo signals are compared. If the maximum difference among RGB signals iswithin a certain range, the original is considered black and white.

0 102 128 255

255

(40% UCR rate) (50% UCR rate)

RGB common data

153 (50% UCR rate)

204 (50% UCR rate)

Color first

Black and white first

B178D520.WMF

RGB signal after scanner γ correction

B

S i g n a l L e v e l

R G

B178D609.WMF



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-30 SM

Scanner Gamma Correction (RGB Gamma Correction)

The RGB video signals from the CCD go to the IPU section. This signal isproportional to the intensity of light reflected from the original image (Fig. 1).Scanner gamma correction inverts the video signals. The shading circuit convertsthe signal from 10-bit to 8-bit.

• The IPU section converts the signal levels as shown in Fig. 2.

• This improves the accuracy of RGB to CMY color conversion (conversion is donelater in the image process).

• The same table is used for R, G, and B signals.

255

0

255LightDark

B178D521.WMF

255

Dark Light

01023

B178D610.WMF

Fig. 2Fig. 1



IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-31 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Filtering

Necessary software filters are applied to the RGB video signals.

• Varies depending on the results of auto text/photo separation (or on the selected

original mode).• RGB smoothing is applied to photo areas

• Edge emphasis applied to text areas.

Background Density Control

• Removes low ID image signals (background) that are less than a certainthreshold.

• The threshold depends on the color mode (single color or full color).

Users can select a different threshold for each mode.

ADS (Auto Image Density Selection)

• Full color mode1) Refers to the RGB data taken from the entire original.2) Calculates a threshold for removing the background based on this data.

• Black and white mode1) Determines the peak white level.2) Peak level data is taken for each scan line.3) Removes the peak white level from the image. This produces a white

background.4) Also uses the peak white level to determine the white reference value for

A/D conversion.5) Background density is adjusted before data is input to the A/D converter.



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-32 SM

Color Conversion

Transparency for each color toner is not ideal. Color conversion compensates forthe differences between the ideal and actual characteristics. A matrix converts theRGB video signals into CMYK video signals while the original is scanned once.

Conversion Matrix

The following color conversion table is an example of the results from the matrixoperation.

• Simple color copying.

• No special modes applied.

• To represent green, the yellow and cyan toners are used in a 1:1 ratio.

Color Conversion Table Original Color

Toner K R Y G C B M W

Y 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

M 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0

C 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0

K 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

User Program Mode

When the user selects one of the following special modes, the values in this tablemay fall between 0 and 1.

Photo mode

• Glossy Photo

• Printed Photo

• Copied Photo

Others

• Generation Mode

• Pale Mode

• Map Mode

Two-color mode

• Separates black areas and colored areas.

• Converts black areas to a color selected by the user.

• All other areas are converted to a second color selected by the user.( Operator’s manual for details)





IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-34 SM

Printer Gamma Correction

The gamma curves for yellow, magenta, cyan, and black should be identical, asshown in figure 1. However, slight variations in the electrical components can resultin varying gamma curves, as shown in figure 2.

• Printer characteristics are much more variable than scanner ones. Printergamma needs recalibration and adjustment from time to time.

• The Auto Color Calibration (ACC) procedure compensates for any discrepanciesin color reproduction.

• ACC makes new gamma curves for each color in each mode (text, photo, andblack text).

• After ACC, you can adjust the gamma curve for each color with service program

(SP4-918).• 4 different modes:1) ID max.2) Shadow (High ID)3) Middle (Middle ID)4) Highlight (Low ID)

• You can get back the previous gamma curve if it was better.

• You can load factory settings with SP 5-610-4.NOTE: If the factory settings have been overwritten, this will return the new

values, not the actual settings made in the factory. This is deliberate,since some drift is expected. After a time, the original factory settings

may no longer be suitable.• Factory settings can be overwritten by the current gamma settings with SP5-610-

5.

K

B178D522.WMF

High

Low

Output ID

Low Input Signal High

Example: Y

B178D611.WMF

Fig. 2Fig. 1



IMAGE PROCESSING

SM 6-35 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


ID Max. This mode adjusts the total image densityas shown in figure 3.

Shadow (High ID)

The High ID mode adjusts the imagedensity between Level 6 and Level 9 of thecolor gradation scale on the C-4 test chart(figure 4).

Middle (Middle ID) The Middle ID mode adjusts the imagedensity between Level 3 and Level 7 of thecolor gradation scale on the C-4 test chart(figure 5).

Highlight (Low ID) The Low ID mode adjusts the image densitybetween Level 2 and Level 5 of the colorgradation scale on the C-4 test chart (figure6).

ID MAXOFFSET

High

Output ID

Low


0

B178D523.WMF

Low

High

Output ID


ShadowOFFSET

0

B178D524.WMF

High

Output ID

Low


0

MiddleOFFSET

B178D525.WMF

High

High

Output ID

Low

Low Input Signal

0

HighlightOFFSET

B178D526.WMF

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

Fig. 5

Fig. 6



IMAGE PROCESSING

B202/B178/B180 6-36 SM

Auto Color Calibration Test Pattern

The test pattern has eight, 17-stepgradation scales for each color (CMYK).This includes background white for Textand Photo modes.

ACC automatically calibrates the printergamma curve. The user starts the ACCprocess.

1. The user prints an ACC TestPattern.

2. The user places the test pattern onthe exposure glass.

3. The copier makes 8 scans to readeach color scale.

4. The copier corrects the printergamma by comparing the idealsettings with the current imagedensity.

5. The copier combines the correctedgamma curve with the shadow,middle, and highlight values in thecurrent memory.

6. Then the copier calculates the IDmax (amplitude of the gamma curve) based on data from the ACC scan.

7. You can adjust the corrected printer gamma further with SP mode (SP4-918).

Error Diffusion

Error diffusion reduces the difference in contrast between light and dark areas of ahalftone image. Each pixel is corrected using the difference between it and thesurrounding pixels. The corrected pixels are then compared with an error diffusion

matrix.

IPU Board Test

You can check the IPU board with SP4-904-1 or 2.( “4. Troubleshooting” for details)

K

C

M

Y

K

C

M

Y

Dark Light

B178D527.WMF



IMAGE DATA PATH

SM 6-37 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.5 IMAGE DATA PATH

Copier Application

SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory) → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU

Printer Application

Controller → IPU (through) → Controller → BCU

Scanner Application (1 bit/8 bits)

SBU → IPU → Controller (HDD/Memory)

Fax Application (Transmission/Reception)

Transmission: SBU → IPU → FCU

Reception: FCU → IPU → Controller (straight through) → BCU

CCD SBU

IPU

FCU

Option

Controller BCU

Memory

HDD

LD Board

M

C

Y

K

Mother Board

B178D517.WMF



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-38 SM

6.6 LASER EXPOSURE

6.6.1 OVERVIEW

1. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-E2. LD unit-Y

3. LD unit-K

4. LD Mirror-M

5. LD unit-M

6. LD unit-C

7. F-theta lens-M, C

8. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-S

9. Synchronizing detector board-M, C-E

10. OPC drum-M11. WTL

12. OPC drum-C

13. OPC drum-Y

14. OPC drum-K

15. Synchronizing detector board-Y, K-S

16. F-theta lens-Y, K

17. Polygon mirror motor

18. LD Mirror-K

This machine uses four LD units and one polygon mirror motor to produce latentimages on four OPC drums (one drum for each color toner).

There are two hexagonal mirrors. Each mirror reflects beams from two LD units.The LD unit for black has two laser diodes to do dual beam writing (this is onlydone for black-and-white printing; for full color printing, only one of the beams isused).

Laser exposure for magenta and cyan starts from the rear side of the drum.However, for yellow and black it starts from the front side of the drum. This isbecause the units for magenta and cyan are on the other side of the polygon mirrorfrom the units for yellow and black.

B178D529.WMF

12

3

5

6

8

9

7

12

16

13

14

15

17

11

18

4

10



LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-39 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.6.2 OPTICAL PATH

The laser beams for cyan [C] and yellow [A] are directed to the upper part of thepolygon mirror [B]. Laser beams for magenta [E] and black [D] are directed to thelower part of the polygon mirror. The LD mirrors (see the previous page) deflect the

laser beams for magenta and black towards the lower polygon mirror.The WTL [F] corrects the main scan line. Without this component, the line bendsout towards the middle of the main scan. The central bend of the WTL is adjustedin the factory.

The speed of the polygon mirror depends on the selected mode and model (seebelow).

ModeResolution

(dpi)Polygon motor

speed (rpm)Process linespeed (mm/s)

Print speed(ppm)

Remarks

600 x 600

1,800 x 600

C2a: 38,268C2b: 26,221

C2k: 38,268

C2a: 162C2b: 222

C2k: 162

C2a: 35C2b: 45

C2k: 28B/W

(exceptOHP/Thick

paper) 1,200 x 1,200C2a: 29,528C2b: 38,268C2k: 29,528

C2a: 125C2b: 162

C2k: 125

C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

Dual beamwriting

600 x 6001,800 x 600

C2a: 29,528C2b: 38,268C2k: 29,528

C2a: 125C2b: 162

C2k: 125

C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

Color(except

OHP/Thickpaper) 1,200 x 1,200 38,268 81 17

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

38,268 81 17

B178D530.WMF

[C]

[A]

[E]

[D]

[B]

[F]



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-40 SM

6.6.3 LASER SYNCHRONIZING DETECTOR

OverviewThe machine has four laser synchronizing detector boards (LSD). There is one ateach corner of the laser optics-housing unit.

Each pair of boards detects two colors. The machine recognizes each color fromthe time that they are detected. The two LSDs at the right [A] are used for magentaand cyan. The two LSDs at the left [B] are used for yellow and black.

Main Scan Start Detection

For magenta and cyan, the LSD at the rear detects the start of the main scan. Foryellow and black, the LSD at the front detects the start of the main scan.

Clock Frequency Adjustment

Each pair ensures that the number of laser clock pulses in the main scan isconstant. If the count for one particular beam varies from normal, the LD clockfrequency for that beam is adjusted.

If the board at the end position is defective, this cannot be detected. At this time,you must disable the detection feature with SP2-919-1.

B178D531.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]



LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-41 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.6.4 DUAL BEAM WRITING

Dual Beam Mechanism

The LD unit for black has two laser diodes. Each face of the polygon mirror writes

two main scan lines. This only happens for black and white printing.

Laser Beam Pitch Change Mechanism

There is a spring [A] at the front end of the black LD unit [E]. There is a positioningmotor [D] at the right end. The spring pushes the unit clockwise, while the motorpushes it counterclockwise. These two components drive the unit to one of thefollowing three positions:

• 600-dpi position []

• 1,200-dpi position []

• Home position []

Before it is driven to the 600-dpi position or the 1,200-dpi position, the black LD unitis set to its home position. When driven from one position to another, the unit goesas follows:

• 600-dpi position → Home position → 1,200-dpi position

• 1,200-dpi position→ Home position → 600-dpi position

The home position is detected by the home position sensor [B]. When the unit is inits home position, the actuator [C] is out of the sensor. The 600-dpi and 1,200-dpipositions are determined by the distance from the home position. The distance iscalculated from the operation time of the LD positioning motor.

B178D532.WMF

1

2

3 B178D612.WMF

[E]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-42 SM

Printing Mode and Black LD Unit Position

The machine changes the main scan resolution between 600 and 1,200 dpi forblack and white printing by rotating the LD unit. However, this does not occur forOHP sheets and thick paper (remains at the 600 dpi position).

The table shows the printing modes and the positions of the black LD unit.

Mode Position

600 dpi 600-dpi positionMonochrome

1,200 dpi 1,200-dpi position

600 dpi 600-dpi positionColor

1,200 dpi 600-dpi position

You must adjust the beam pitch for 600 dpi and 1,200 dpi with SP2-109-2 -3 afteryou replace the laser optics-housing unit.



LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-43 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.6.5 LD SAFETY SWITCH

Two safety switches are used to turn the relay off. One switch is used for the frontcover and upper left cover. This safety switch is off when either of the two covers isopened. The other safety switch is used for the right door.

• PMAC: Precise Pulse Modulation ASIC onC-MOS technology

• LDB: LD Drive Board (included in the LD Unit)

Front and Upper Left Cover Switch

The micro switch [A] on the PSU is activated ordeactivated by the actuator [B] when the frontcover or the upper left cover is opened and closed.

P M A C A

PD

LD

5V

LDOF

F

3.3V

1.8V

3.3V

1.8V

3.3V

1.8V

3.3V

1.8V

LDB M )

LD5V

D5

V

3.3V

C PU

H8)

3.3V

5V

REG

1.8V

B C U

LD 5

V

5V

Polygon

M otor

G N

D

G ND

24V

RELA

Y

5

V

5V

24V

24

V

Front C over

and Upper

Left C over

SW

ight Cover

SW

24V

L

D

P

D

P M A C A

PD

LD

5V

LDB C)

L

D

P

D

P M A C A

PD

LD

5V

LDB Y)

L

D

P

D

LDB K)

GAVD

LDOF

F

LDOF

F

LD 5

V

LD 5

V

LD 5

V

LDOF

F

AV D

G A V D

G A V D

REG

3.3V

1.8V

GAPCI

3.3

V

SU

24VS

P M A C A

PD

LD

5V

L

D

P

D

B178D533.WMF

B178D500.WMF

A relay on the PSU ensurestechnician and user safety. Italso prevents the laserbeam from turning on during

servicing. This relay turns offwhen the front cover, upperleft cover, or right door isopened. At this time it cutsthe power (+5V) supplied tothe LD board for each colorthrough the BCU.

[A]

[B]



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-44 SM

Error Messages

Along with other switches, the LD safety switches help show error messagesrelated to external covers. When one or more covers are open, the messages,“Cover is open as shown” and “Close it,” show with a diagram. The diagram showswhich cover is open. The table lists the diagram indications and the switchconditions. Note that some diagram indications take precedence over others.

ConditionDiagram indication [A] Upper left

cover switch[B] Duplex unit

switch[C] Front door

switch[E] Right door

switch

Upper left cover Open (any) (any) (any)

Duplex unit (any) Open (any) (any)

Front cover Closed (any) Open (any)

Right door Closed (any) Closed Open

NOTE: 1) In the table, “any” indicates that the condition does not affect thediagram indication.

2) The left door switch [D] stays closed when the upper left cover switch[A] is closed.

B178D534.WMF

[C]

[A]

[D]

[E]

[B]



LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-45 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.6.6 AUTOMATIC LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

Overview

YY, KK, CC, MM: Spaces between two lines of the same color

KY, KC, KM: Spaces between a black line and a color line

During automatic line position adjustment, the line patterns above are created eighttimes on the transfer belt. The spaces between the lines (YY, KK, CC, MM, KY, KC,KM) are measured by the front, center, and rear ID sensors. The controller takesthe average of the spaces. Then it adjusts the following positions andmagnification:

• Sub scan line position for YCM

• Main scan line position for YCM

• Magnification ratio for KYCM

• Skew for YCM

The transfer belt-cleaning unit cleans the transfer belt after the patterns aremeasured. SC285 shows if an error is detected four times consecutively.

Center Front Rear

Y

K

C

M

Y

K

C

M

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

MM

KY

KC

KM

YY

KK

CC

B178D535.WMF



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-46 SM

Summary of Each Adjustment

Sub scan line position for YCM

The adjustment of the sub-scan line position for YCM is based on the line positionfor K (color registration). The machine measures the gaps between the lines ofeach color in the pattern on the transfer belt. If the gaps for a color are not correct,the machine moves the image of the color up or down the sub scan axis. To do this,it changes the laser write timing for that color.

Main scan line position for YCM

If the machine detects that the image is out of position in the main scan direction, itchanges the laser write start timing for each scan line.

Magnification adjustment for KYCM

If the machine detects that magnification adjustment is necessary, it changes theLD clock frequency for the required color.

Skew for YCM

The adjustment of the skew for YCM is based on the line position for K.



LASER EXPOSURE

SM 6-47 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Adjustment Conditions

Line position adjustment timing depends on several SP mode settings. However,the mode selection, SP5-993-001, takes precedence over the others. The tablebelow shows the conditions and the processes you need to do. Note that theadjustments of the sub-scan line position, main scan line position, andmagnification are done under the same conditions.

The numbers in the mode selection column show the setting of SP 5-993-001. Fordetails, refer to the description for SP 5-993-001 in the SP table.

Modeselectio

nCondition Setting

S-pos./M-pos./Magni.

Skew

Job End SP3-906-001

Interrupt SP3-906-002

Non-use Time 1, 2 SP3-906-003, 004

1

Process

control Recovery (fusing

temperature 60°C orlower)

None

Standby SP5-993-003, 005

Job start SP5-993-003, 006 Temperaturedifference

Interrupt SP5-993-003, 04, 022

Main scan length detection SP2-919-001 *

Initialization (fusing temperature over

60°C)SP5-993-026

1 or 2

Replacement of development unit orPCU

None

0, 1, or 2 Forced self check SP5-993-002

S-pos. : Sub-scan line position : ExecutedM-pos. : Main scan line positionMagni. : Magnification

* : Executed one time when theconditions are met twice

NOTE: 1) “Recovery” includes turning on the main switch.2) Fusing temperature is measured by the thermistor in the fusing unit.

Other temperatures are measured by the sensors on the laser optics-housing unit.

3) You can use SP5-993-035 to select one of the six frequency levels of

the line position adjustment.



LASER EXPOSURE

B202/B178/B180 6-48 SM

Main Scan Skew Adjustment

The 3rd mirror positioning motors for magenta [A], cyan [B], and yellow [C] adjustthe angle of the 3rd mirrors [D] respectively, based on the 3rd mirror position forblack. This mechanism corrects main scan skew.

6.6.7 DIFFERENCES IN THE COPY AND PRINTER MODES

To improve reproduction in the copy mode, the machine generates the print imagewith 2 bits per pixel. Different parameters are used for the copy and print modes asshown in the table below.

Function Copy Mode Printer Mode

Gradation for printing 2 bits / pixel 1 bit / pixel

LD control SP2-103-101 to -110 SP2-103-1 to -66

Pointer table display SP3-902-5 to -8 SP3-902-1 to -4

B178D536.WMF

[A]

[D]

[B]

[C]



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-49 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.7 PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

6.7.1 OVERVIEW

1. Cleaning brush roller

2. Charge roller (non-contact)

3. OPC drum

4. Cleaning brush

5. Waste toner collection auger

6. Lubricant bar

7. Cleaning blade

This machine has four independent PCUs, one for each color. Each PCU has thefollowing:

1) OPC drum2) Non-contact charge roller

3) Cleaning brush4) Cleaning blade.

The diameter of the drum is 30 mm (circumference: about 94.25 mm).

The photoconductor gap between a PCU and the corresponding development rolleris determined by the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjustthis in the field.

B178D537.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-50 SM

6.7.2 DRIVE

The drum drive motor-K [A] drives the PCU for black.

The drum drive motor-CMY [B] drives the PCUs for magenta, cyan, and yellow.Using one motor to drive these three drums reduces CMY color misalignment.

Both motors are brush-less DC motors. This helps to reduce the drive noise. Thebrush-less DC motors make sound that is not the same as other machines, but thissound does not mean machine defective.

M

C

Y

K

B178D538.WMF

[A]

[B]





PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-52 SM

Initialization Process and SC Codes

SC code 440-1 or 440-2 show when a drum gear position sensor detects an error.The table shows the following:

• Steps of the initialization process• Possible errors

• Corresponding SC codes.

Initialization process Possible error SC code

The black drum gearinterrupter is not detected.

440-1

The yellow drum gearinterrupter is not detected.

440-2Step 1

The four drums simultaneouslyoperated\ for seven seconds. Thetwo drum position sensors detect thetwo drum gear interrupters severaltimes. Both black and yellow drum

gear interrupters are notdetected.

440-1

Step 2

The time lags between detection ofthe black drum gear interrupter anddetection of the yellow drum gearinterrupter are checked. The averagetime lag is calculated.

Step 3The black drum is operated. Theposition of the gear is adjustedaccording to the average time lag.

The black drum gearinterrupter is not detected(NOTE).

440-1

NOTE: No error occurs in step 1 and step 2 if the connector of the black drumposition sensor has been connected to the yellow drum position sensor(and the connector of the yellow drum position sensor, to the black drum

position sensor).



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-53 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.7.4 DRUM CHARGE AND QUENCHING

This machine uses a non-contact charge roller [A] to reduce ozone. The non-contact charge roller gives the drum surface a negative charge. The high voltagesupply board – C.B, which is located at the rear of the machine, applies a dc andac voltage (at a constant current) to the roller. The ac voltage helps to ensure thatthe charge given to the drum is as uniform as possible.

The machine automatically controls the charge roller voltage if automatic process

control is enabled (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "ON"). However, if process control isswitched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-1 is set to "OFF"), the dc voltage is the value storedin SP2-001-1 to -4 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

The diameter of the roller is 11.14 mm (circumference about 35 mm). The gap

between a drum and the corresponding charge roller is about 50 µm.

The cleaning brush roller [B], which always contacts the charge roller, cleans thecharge roller.

The charge roller can generate small amounts of nitrogen oxide gases (known asNOx). These gases can stay on the surface of the drum. This can cause unfocusedcopies. To avoid this, the film of NOx is removed at the following times:

• Power on

• At the end of a job (if more than 200 prints)

• When a toner cartridge has been replaced

SP3-920-1 to -4 determines when this procedure (known as “refresh mode”) isdone. You can do this at any time with SP3-920-5 if the prints are smeared.

Quenching is done by illuminating the whole area of the drum with the laser at theend of every job.

B178D540.WMF

[A]

[B]



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-54 SM

6.7.5 DRUM CLEANING

The cleaning brush [A] spreads out the waste toner that stays on the drum. Thenthe cleaning blade [B] scrapes it off. The toner collection auger [C] transports thetoner towards the waste toner collection duct.

The lubricant bar [D] is on the cleaning brush. The cleaning brush rubs against thelubricant bar and lubricates the drum surface. Excess lubricant is removed by the cleaning blade. Then it goes to the waste toner collection duct.

B178D541.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-55 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.7.6 WASTE TONER COLLECTION

Waste Toner Path

The waste toner from the collection augers in the four PCUs drops into the wastetoner collection duct from the four openings [F][G][H][I] at the rear of the PCUs. Thetoner collection coils [J][K][L] in the duct transport this waste toner towards thewaste toner bottle [A]. The coils [J][K][L] are driven by development drive motor-

CMY. The openings and PCUs correspond as follows: black → [F], yellow → [G],

cyan → [H], magenta → [I].

The waste toner from the transfer belt-cleaning unit drops into the waste tonercollection duct from another opening [E].

The end of the waste toner collection duct is in the waste toner bottle [A]. There arethree openings [B][C] and one collection coil [D] in this part. The waste toner dropsinto the bottle through the openings. The collection coil [D] is driven by drum drivemotor-K.

B178D542.WMF

[E]

[A] [D]

[F][G]

[H]

[B]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[L]

[M]

[C]



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-56 SM

Waste Toner Vibrator

The waste toner vibrator has one motor [M]. The motor operates for about onesecond at a time. Its vibration does not let waste toner clog the waste toner path.

The table shows the conditions under which the motor operates.

Machine status Motor operation

During machine start (machineinitialization)

Two times

At the beginning of the processcontrol

One time

Printing jobs that output five or lesspapers

At the job end if 3 or more papers have been outputsince the previous operation (of the motor) ()

Printing jobs that output 6 or morepapers

Every five papers and at the job end ()

Case 1: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second job outputs two papers. In this case, the motor operates one time at the end of thesecond job (see ).

Case 2: The copier does one job, and the job outputs 12 papers. In this case, themotor operates at the following times:

• One time during the fifth printing

• One time during the tenth printing

• One time at the job end (see ).

Case 3: The copier does two jobs. The first job outputs one paper, and the second job outputs 12 papers. In this case, the motor operates at the following times:

• One time during the fifth printing of the second job

• One time during the tenth printing of the second job

• One time at the end of the second job (see ; This case does not satisfycondition).



PHOTOCONDUCTOR UNIT

SM 6-57 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.7.7 WASTE TONER BOTTLE FULL DETECTION

The waste toner bottle set switch [A] detects the bottle when it is placed in the

machine.The waste toner sensor [B] detects the weight of the bottle and informs themachine when it is almost full.

When the bottle contains a certain amount of waste toner, the sensor isdeactivated. The machine detects that the waste toner bottle is almost full andshows “Waste Toner is Almost Full”.

At this time, the machine can print about 2,500 more sheets. After printing 2,500sheets, it shows “Replace Waste Toner,” at the end of the job. After this, youcannot use the machine again until the bottle is replaced or emptied.

NOTE: The number of sheets is calculated on the assumption that the paper sizeis A4 and that the coverage ratio of each color is 5%.

B178D543.WMF

[A]

[B]



DEVELOPMENT

B202/B178/B180 6-58 SM

6.8 DEVELOPMENT

6.8.1 OVERVIEW

1. Doctor blade2. Developer hopper

3. Mixing auger (right)

4. TD sensor5. Mixing auger (left)

6. Development roller

This machine has four independent development units, one for each color. Eachcontains 300 g of developer when new. The developer in each unit is supplied tothe development roller by the two mixing augers and attracted onto the surface ofthe roller.

The photoconductor gap between PCU and development roller is determined by

the drum positioning plate and the rear shaft. You cannot adjust this in the field.The TD sensor and center ID sensor control toner density. Each development unithas a TD sensor.

The diameter of the development roller is 18.2 mm (circumference about 57.2 mm).

B178D544.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6



DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-59 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.8.2 DRIVE

The development drive motor-K [A] drives the development roller for black throughgears and a clutch. This motor also drives the fusing unit and paper exit rollers.The gear trains are shown in the diagram by dotted lines.

The development drive motor-CMY [B] drives the development unit for magenta,cyan, and yellow through gears and clutches. This motor also drives theregistration roller.

The drive gears [C] of the development units are flexible. This creates a smoothconnection between the development motor gear and the drive gear of thedevelopment unit.

B178D545.WMF

B178D546.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[C]



DEVELOPMENT

B202/B178/B180 6-60 SM

6.8.3 DEVELOPER AGITATION

Two mixing augers [A and B] circulate the developer forward and backward toagitate the developer.

This happens at the following times:

• During process control self check

• During toner supply

• During development.

Ducts on the top of the developer hopper [C] make sure that the internal pressuredoes not become too high. These ducts are sealed to not let the toner solidify.

This development unit does not operate very well at high temperatures (over 50°

C). The toner inside the development unit can become solid at temperatures higherthat this value. A developer initialization error shows if the toner does become solid. At this time, you must do the following procedure:

NOTE: You should also do this procedure when you install a new developmentunit.

1. Remove the (old) development unit.

2. Keep the (new) development unit level and shake it several times from side toside.

3. Install it to the machine.

B178D547.WMF[A][B]

[C]



DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-61 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.8.4 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

The sub PSU [A] supplies development bias to the development roller via thereceptacle [B] at the rear of each development unit.

There is a dc bias voltage.

The machine automatically controls the dc bias, if automatic process control isenabled (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "ON"). However, if process control isswitched off, (i.e., if SP3-125-001 is set to "OFF"), the dc bias is the value stored inSP2-201-001 to 009 (do not adjust in the field unless advised to do so).

B178D548.WMF

[A]

[B]



DEVELOPMENT

B202/B178/B180 6-62 SM

6.8.5 TONER SUPPLY MECHANISM

Overview

The air transport system agitates the toner [H] in the toner cartridges [G]. Toner istransported to the development unit [A] by the toner attraction pump [B] (eachcartridge has a separate pump). This provides a more stable way to transport finepowder than previous methods.

Toner Agitation and Attraction

The rear air pump [D] supplies air to the yellow and magenta toner cartridges. Thefront air pump [E] supplies air to the black and cyan toner cartridges. Air agitates allthe toner in each cartridge. The pumps and four valves [C] control the airflow.Mixed with air, the toner passes part of the way along the transport tube [I] towardsthe toner attraction pump. This pump draws the toner the rest of the way ( TonerTransport).

The air pump turns on to supply air to the toner cartridges for one second under thefollowing conditions:

• During normal operation (when the “on” time for a toner supply clutchreaches a certain value).

• When forced toner supply (SP2-207) is done

• When forced toner density adjustment (SP3-126-002) is done

• At toner end recovery

• Developer initialization

The filter [F] on the inner package of the toner cartridge ensures that the internalpressure does not become too high.

B178D549.WMF

[G][A]

[B]

[D]

[C][F]

[H]

[I]

[E]



DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-63 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Air Flow and Toner Flow

The air tube [F] and the toner tube [E] are connected to the joint [C] at the bottomof the toner cartridge holder. This joint contains an inner pipe [A] and an outer pipe[B]. These two pipes are L-shaped. The inner pipe goes through the outer pipe.The inner pipe is longer than the outer pipe.

The toner goes through the inner pipe [A], and reaches the toner tube [E] at thebottom end of the pipe. The toner passes the sensor windows [G] on its way to thetoner tube. The windows are transparent and are at the front side and the rear sideof the pipe. The light emitted from the toner end sensor [D] goes through this areaif there is no toner in the pipe.

The airflow generated by the air pump goes through the outer pipe [B], and comesout of the four openings at the top end.

Toner Near End Detection

Toner end sensors [D] detect toner near end conditions ( 6.2.6).

B178D550.WMF

[D]

[G]

[F]

[E]

[C]

[B]

[A]



DEVELOPMENT

B202/B178/B180 6-64 SM

Toner Transport

Each toner attraction pump has the same mechanism. The pump (toner attractionpump) [A], has the following components:

• Toner supply clutch [B]

• Rubber tube [C]

• Rotor [D]

The above components attract the toner in the toner transport tube [E] toward thedevelopment unit.

The toner supply clutch drives the rotor, which draws the toner in from the cartridgeand passes it to the development unit. When supplying toner, the clutch turns onand off as many times as necessary to supply the necessary amount of toner. The

amount of toner depends on the results of toner supply control.Motor drive comes from the development drive motors.

B178D551.WMF

[A]

[B][C] [D]

[E]



DEVELOPMENT

SM 6-65 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Shutter Mechanism

The development unit and toner attraction pump each have a shutter mechanism.The protrusion [A] on the development unit opens the shutter [B] in the pump whenthe development unit is placed in the machine. At the same time, the protrusion [C]on the pump opens the shutter [D] in the development unit. When both shutters areopen, toner can enter the development unit from the toner attraction pump.

The shutter spring [E and F] pulls and closes the shutter when the development

unit is removed.

6.8.6 TONER CARTRIDGE DETECTION

The memory chip [A] on each toner cartridgestores the total “on” time of the toner supplyclutch. This is used to calculate the amount oftoner remaining in the toner cartridge. The chipis also used to detect whether the cartridge isinstalled (if the cartridge is not installed, the

machine does not detect a signal from thememory chip).

B178D552.WMF

B178D553.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E][F]

[A]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 6-66 SM

6.9 PAPER FEED

6.9.1 OVERVIEW

1. Pick-up roller - tray 12. Feed roller - tray 1

3. Separation roller - tray 1

4. Relay roller

5. Registration roller

6. Feed roller - By-pass feed

7. Pick-up roller - By-pass feed

8. By-pass feed table

9. Separation roller - By-pass feed10. Transport roller

11. Vertical transport roller

12. Feed roller - tray 2

13. Separation roller - tray 2

14. Pick-up roller - tray 2

15. Paper tray 2

16. Paper tray 1

There are two paper trays (500 sheets each), and a by-pass feed table (100sheets).

The paper feed mechanism uses an FRR system.

Tray 1 can hold A4 or letter paper only. Tray 2 can hold a range of sizes.

B178D554.WMF

54

9

31 2

7

6

8

10

12

13141516

11



PAPER FEED

SM 6-67 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.9.2 DRIVE – TRAY 1, TRAY 2, AND BY-PASS TRAY

The paper feed motor [A] drives the pick-up and feed mechanisms in tray 1 [E], tray2 [F], and the by-pass tray [G]. It uses clutches and complex trains of gears (thelocations of the gear trains are indicated by dotted lines in the above diagram) todo this.

When tray 1 and tray 2 are inside the machine, their pick-up rollers [H][K] arealways in contact with each top sheet of the paper stack. However, the pick-uproller [P] of the by-pass tray stays away until the by-pass pick-up solenoid [Q] turnson. When the paper feed clutch [B][C][D] turns on, the pick-up, feed [I][L][N], andseparation [J][M][O] rollers start rotating to feed the paper. The paper feed clutchstays on until shortly after the registration sensor activates.

B178D555.WMFB178D613.WMF

[A]

[K]

[C]

[L]

[M]

[H]

[B]

[I]

[J]

[D]

[P]

[N]

[O]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[Q]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 6-68 SM

6.9.3 PAPER LIFT – TRAYS 1 & 2

The tray 1 set switch [A] and tray 2-paper size switches [B] detect when the papertrays [C] are placed in the machine. When the machine detects that a tray hasbeen placed in the machine, the tray lift motor [D] rotates and the coupling gear [E]on the tray lift motor engages the pin [F] on the lift arm shaft [G]. Then the tray liftarm [I] lifts the tray bottom plate [H] until the paper lift sensor for the tray detectsthat the top of the stack is at the paper feed position.

B178D556.WMF

[A]

[E][F][G]

[H]

[I][B]

[C][D]



PAPER FEED

SM 6-69 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.9.4 PAPER SIZE DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

There is no size switch for tray 1. The paper size is fixed at either A4 or LT. Youcan change this with SP1-902-1.

For tray 2, four paper size switches, working in combination, detect the paper sizeas shown in the table below. The actuators are on the side plate [A]. The side plate

is moved by the end plate [B] through a cam [C].

1: Pushed

Models Switch Location

North America Europe/Asia 1 [D] 2 [E] 3 [F] 4 [G]

11" x 17" SEF 11" x 17" SEF 0 1 0 0

A3 SEF A3 SEF 1 0 1 0

81/2" x 14" SEF*1

B4 SEF*1

1 1 0 1

81/2" x 11" SEF*2

A4 SEF*2

0 1 1 0

11" x 81/2" LEF *3 11" x 81/2" LEF *3 1 0 1 1

A4 LEF A4 LEF 0 1 0 1

B5 LEF B5 LEF 0 0 1 0

A5 LEF A5 LEF 0 0 0 1

NOTE: *1

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 14" SEF or B4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-2*2

: The machine detects either 81/2" x 11" SEF or A4 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-3*3

: The machine detects either 11" x 81/2" LEF or B5 SEF, depending on the setting of SP 1-902-4

The machine disables paper feed from a tray if the paper size cannot be detected(if the paper size actuator is broken or no tray is installed).

B178D557.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 6-70 SM

6.9.5 PAPER HEIGHT DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

Two paper height sensors, working in combination, detect the amount of paper inthe tray.

When the amount of paper decreases, the bottom plate pressure lever moves upand the actuator [A] (on the pressure lever drive shaft) rotates.

Remaining paper Paper height sensor 2 [B] Paper height sensor 1 [C]

Full OFF OFF

Nearly full ON OFF

Near end ON ON

Almost empty OFF ON

OFF: No actuator

6.9.6 PAPER END DETECTION – TRAYS 1 & 2

The paper stack raises the paper end feeler and the paper end sensor deactivatesif there is some paper in the paper tray.

When the paper tray runs out of paper, the paper end feeler drops into the cutout inthe tray bottom plate. At this time the paper end sensor activates.

B178D558.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



PAPER FEED

SM 6-71 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.9.7 REGISTRATION

The development drive motor - CMY [A] drives the registration roller [B] with aclutch and a complex train of gears (the location of the gear train is indicated bydotted lines in the above diagram).

The machine makes a paper buckle at the registration roller to correct paper skew.You can adjust the paper buckle with SP1-003-1 to -8.

B178D559.WMF

[A]

[B]



PAPER FEED

B202/B178/B180 6-72 SM

6.9.8 PAPER FEED LINE SPEED

This machine has three process line speeds (for feed from registration roller tofusing unit). The line speeds depend on the mode, selected resolution, and model.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Line speed

(mm/s)Print speed

(ppm)

600 x 6001,800 x 600

C2a/k: 162C2b: 222

C2a: 35C2b: 45C2k: 28

B/W

1,200 x 1,200C2a/k:125C2b:162

C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

600 x 6001,800 x 600

C2a/k: 125C2b: 162

C2a: 28C2b: 35C2k: 24

Color

1,200 x 1,200 81 17

OHP/Thick600 x 600

1,800 x 6001,200 x 1,200

81 17

The machine changes the line speed if there is a page with color in the middle ofthe job during a monochrome print job. However, it will not change the line speed ifthere is a monochrome page in the middle of a color print job.

Line speed (mm/s)

Paper feed from tray to registration roller 230

Fusing, paper exit to standard tray, and mailbox A bit slower than “Process line speed”

Duplex invert and feed 370

Finisher 450



PAPER FEED

SM 6-73 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.9.9 GRIP ROLLER RELEASE MECHANISM

The grip roller release mechanism reduces the pressure of the grip roller [E].

The grip roller transports a sheet of paper to the transfer unit. When the transfer

unit starts to feed the leading edge of the paper [G], the trailing edge has still notreached the grip roller. Paper is handled by the transfer unit and the grip roller atthe same time. If the handling speeds are not the same, this may skew the paper.Longer paper sizes are more affected by the speed difference than shorter sizes.From the viewpoint of image crispness, multi-color images are more easily affectedthan mono-color images.

To solve this possible problem, the grip roller release mechanism is activatedunder the following conditions:

1) B4 paper or longer is being fed.2) The machine is operating in the full-color mode.

3) The leading edge of the paper has been fed in the transfer unit.

The spring [A] always presses the grip roller against the transport roller [B]. Whenthe above conditions are met, the solenoid [F] turns on. Then the lever [C] pushesthe grip roller shaft [D], and the grip roller moves away from the paper.

B178D560.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C] [D] [E]

[F]

[G]



DUPLEX UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-74 SM

6.10 DUPLEX UNIT

6.10.1 OVERVIEW

1. Exit sensor 1

2. Junction gate

3. Duplex feed sensor

4. Duplex inverter sensor

5. Junction mylar 3

6. Junction mylar 2

7. Exit sensor 3

8. Junction mylar 1

9. Exit sensor 2

• The second page (rear side) is printed first for duplex print jobs.

• To print on the second side, the duplex inverter unit (on the side of the machine)inverts the paper from the fusing unit and feeds it to the duplex feed unit (inside

the machine).• The duplex feed unit feeds the inverted paper back to the paper feed section.

• When both sides have been printed, the duplex inverter unit feeds the paper outto the finisher.

• If the mailbox or standard exit tray (on top of the machine) was selected toreceive the duplex copies, the print will not enter the duplex unit after the secondside has been printed. The junction gate inside the machine directs it upwards tothe selected tray.

• Duplex copies are not fed out to the external tray (on the left of the machine).

B178D561.WMF

1 2

8

3

4

5

7

9

6



DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-75 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.10.2 DUPLEX OPERATION

Up to A4/LT (8 1/2 " x 11") LEF

There are three sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. The

interleave method is used.

Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. Thecallout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shadedindicates the second side).

Larger than A4/LT (8 1/2 " x 11") LEF

There are two sheets of paper in the paper feed path at the same time. Theinterleave method is used.

Example: 8 pages. The callout [A] in the illustration shows the order of pages. Thecallout [B] in the illustration shows the order of sheets of paper (shadedindicates the second side).

3142 ⇒ ⇒ 6 ⇒ ⇒ 8 ⇒ ⇒ 5 ⇒ 7 1 2 43 1 4 2 3

B178D562.WMF

2 1

42

11

6 3

32

8 4

5 3

7 4

⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒ ⇒

B178D563.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]



DUPLEX UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-76 SM

6.10.3 DUPLEX INVERTER UNIT

The duplex inverter motor 1 [A] drives the following:

• Paper exit roller 1 [B]

• Paper transport roller [C]

• Paper exit roller 2 [D]

• Upper inverter roller [E].

The duplex inverter motor 2 [F] drives the following:

• Exit roller 3 [G]

• Paper exit roller 4 [H]

• Lower inverter roller [I].

B178D564.WMF

[A]

[F]

[B][C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

[H]

[I]



DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-77 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.10.4 FEED TO EXTERNAL EXIT TRAY (NON-DUPLEX MODE)

This shows how the machine feeds paper through the duplex unit to the externaltray [A], when duplex mode is not selected.

NOTE: The paper cannot be fed out to the external tray if duplex printing isselected.

The junction gate [B] directs the paper from the fusing unit out to the external trayat one of the following times:

• If thick paper or OHP mode is selected

• If the external tray is selected as the output tray with the operation panel or theprinter driver

B178D565.WMF

[A]

[B]



DUPLEX UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-78 SM

6.10.5 FEED TO DUPLEX FEED UNIT

This shows how the machine feeds paper back into the machine after side 1 isprinted.

The junction gate [A] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [B] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 3 [C]. Then the paper is switchedback and junction mylar 3 directs the paper back into the machine for the secondside.

The next page shows how the paper is fed out to the finisher after both sides areprinted.

B178D566.WMF

B178D567.WMF

[A]

[C][B]



DUPLEX UNIT

SM 6-79 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.10.6 FEED TO TWO-TRAY FINISHER AND BOOKLET FINISHER

With Optional One-Tray Paper Feed Unit

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the upper exit [A].

The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 1 [D]. Then the paper is switchedback and junction mylar 1 directs the paper out to the finisher.

With Optional LCT or Two-Tray Paper Feed Unit

n

The paper is fed out to the finisher from the lower exit [A].

The junction gate [B] diverts the paper from the fusing unit to the lower part of theinverter unit. After the duplex inverter sensor [C] is activated, the machine waitsuntil the trailing edge has passed junction mylar 2 [D], but before it passes junctionmylar 3 [E]. Then the paper is switched back and junction mylar 2 directs the paperout to the finisher.



[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[D]

[B]

[D]

[B]



DUPLEX UNIT

B202/B178/B180 6-80 SM

6.10.7 DUPLEX FEED UNIT

Drive

The duplex feed motor [A] drives all paper transport rollers.

Feed-in and feed-out

The duplex feed unit feeds the paper from the duplex inverter unit to the relay roller[A].

B178D572.WMF

B178D573.WMF

[A]

[A]



IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

SM 6-81 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.11 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION

6.11.1 OVERVIEW

1. Transfer unit drive motor2. Transfer belt3. Transfer belt mark sensor4. Rotation encoder5. Paper attraction roller6. Transfer roller

7. Back-up roller8. Cleaning blade9. Toner collection auger10. Cleaning brush11. Cleaning unit12. ID sensor

Paper is fed to the transfer belt before image transfer begins. The paper attractionroller charges the paper to ensure that the paper is attracted to the belt.

The magenta, cyan, yellow, and black color images transfer to the paper while thetransfer belt feeds the paper past the drums towards the fusing unit. A positive

charge is applied to the paper under the transfer belt, opposite each drum, totransfer the toner from the drums onto the paper. The back-up roller makes surethat the contact area between the drum and belt is sufficient.

The cleaning unit in the transfer unit cleans the belt surface with the cleaning bladeand brush. The waste toner collected from the belt is transported to the waste tonerbottle.

There are three ID sensors (front, center, and rear). Only the center ID sensordetects the image density of the patterns generated on the transfer belt for processcontrol. The other function of the ID sensors is for automatic line position

adjustment. All ID sensors are used for this.

B178D574.WMF

1

5

6

7

89

10

11

12

2

4

3




B202/B178/B180 6-82 SM

6.11.2 TRANSFER BELT DRIVE

Drive Motor

The transfer unit drive motor [A] drives the transfer belt [B] and the cleaning unit viathe timing belt and gears. The speed of transfer belt drive depends on the processline speed.

B178D575.WMF

[A]

[B]




SM 6-83 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Transfer belt speed control

This machine uses two devices (Rotation encoder and transfer belt mark sensor) tocontrol the transfer belt speed.

Rotation Encoder

An encoder [C] is on one of the rollers. This encoder checks the rotation speed ofthe transfer belt. The controller analyzes the signals from the encoder. Then itadjusts the rotation speed of the transfer belt.

The encoder contains a disk that has 300 notches on its surface [B]. Thesenotches are read by the sensor [A]. The controller counts the number of notchesthat the sensor has read in the unit of time. If the sensor has read an unusuallylarge number of notches or an unusually small number of notches, the controllerignores such unusual signals. Therefore, incorrect reading does not affect therotation speed.

Filter H: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt isat its highest possible value.

Filter L: The number of notches read by the sensor when the rotation speed of the transfer belt isat its lowest possible value.

B178D576.WMF

B178D577.WMF

[C]

Number of notches (read by the sensor)

Time

Filter H

Filter L

Ignored

Ignored

[A]

[B]




B202/B178/B180 6-84 SM

Transfer belt mark sensor

There is the transfer belt mark sensor [A].

Transfer belt mark sensor monitors the belt speed. The machine uses thisinformation to adjust the speed of the belt to account for the belt regularity.

This control method is called "Dancing Control" in the SP5-995. You must execute

SP5-995-025 and -027 after replacing the transfer belt unit or transfer belt.

B178D575A.WMF

[A]




SM 6-85 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.11.3 TRANSFER CURRENT

The transfer roller [D] applies a current to transfer the toner to the paper on thetransfer belt [A]. The high voltage supply board supplies current to the transferroller and the paper attraction roller [C].

These currents are automatically corrected for paper size, temperature (measuredby the thermistor on the right side of the laser optics housing unit), and humidity(measured by the humidity sensor).

The following adjustments are shown below:

• You can adjust the transfer roller current for each printing mode (color or B/W,resolution, paper type) with SP2-301-1 to -99. The by-pass tray settings are usedwhen the duplex unit has not been installed and the user is making duplex printsmanually from the by-pass tray. There is a correction for narrow-width paper withSP2-309-5 to -11.

• You can adjust the current for paper attraction with SP2-801-1 to -37.

The back-up roller [E] makes a wider contact area between the drum [B] and thebelt. The transfer exit roller [F] is charged to 2 kV. The roller prevents the tonerfrom being scattered while the paper is leaving the transfer unit.

The other rollers are grounded to neutralize the belt surface.

B178D578.WMF

[A]

[E]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]




B202/B178/B180 6-86 SM

6.11.4 TRANSFER BELT CLEANING

The transfer belt-cleaning unit removes toner (during printing) and the ID sensorpatterns (during process control or automatic line position adjustment) on the belt.Belt cleaning is completed while the transfer belt makes one rotation. The transferunit drive motor [A] drives the unit.

The cleaning brush [B] always contacts the transfer belt [C], and removes wastetoner from the belt. The cleaning blade [D] in the cleaning unit scrapes the toner offthe transfer belt. Then the toner collection auger [E] transports the toner towardsthe waste toner collection duct.

The scraper [F] does not let the waste toner stick to the cleaning brush.

B178D579.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]




SM 6-87 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.11.5 TRANSFER BELT CONTACT

Mechanism

The transfer belt contact and release mechanism increases the lifetime of thetransfer belt and drums.

The drum for black always contacts the belt. However, the transfer belt movesaway from the other drums during monochrome printing.

In the standby mode, the transfer belt contacts only the black drum. The transferbelt moves away from the black drum when you turn the release levercounterclockwise.

When the machine prints a color page, the machine waits until the previous pagehas gone through the transfer unit. Then the transfer belt contact motor [C] turns on

and a cam [D] moves the lower end [E] of the transfer belt upward, so that itcontacts the other three drums.

The machine does not release the transfer belt from the color drums during the job,even if a monochrome page comes again. This is because the total printing speedreduces if the transfer belt changes position.

The belt moves away from the color drums if the job is interrupted by any errorexcept a power failure.

NOTE: If a power failure occurs when the transfer belt is in contact with the drum,the belt stays in this position. To release the belt, swing out the controller

box. Then turn the drive gear [B] manually.

B178D580.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]




B202/B178/B180 6-88 SM

Transfer Belt Sensor

The transfer belt sensor [A] operates as a detection sensor during machineinitialization, and also as a position sensor during machine operations.

Before machine initialization, the lower end of the transfer belt is in the homeposition. When initialization starts, the transfer belt contact motor lifts the lower enduntil the actuator has passed the sensor. Then it lowers it to its home position. Thisaction actuates the sensor in a certain pattern.

The table lists the sensor actuation patterns.

Machine status Sensor pattern

Initialization On → Off → On→ Off → On

Standby (Default) On

B/W printing OnOperation

Color Printing Off

On: The actuator is out of the sensor.Off: The actuator is interrupting the sensor.

Copier ACS

The Auto Color Select manages the transfer belt and PCUs. To print color pages,the ACS lifts the transfer belt and operates the four PCUs. To print black and whitepages, the ACS manages the transfer belt and the PCUs as follows:

1. The ACS keeps the transfer belt in the lower position and operates the blackPCU (does not operate the other PCUs) if the first print of a job is a black and

white page.

2. The ACS lifts the transfer belt to the upper position and operates the four PCUsif a color page occurs in the job.

3. The ACS keeps the transfer belt inthe upper position and keepsoperating the four PCUs after the firstcolor page. Note that all PCUs are inoperation even when black and whitepages are processed.

The ACS works when the user pushesthe Auto Color Select key from the operation panel. The table lists which PCUs arein operation.

OriginalKey

B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color

Auto Color Select Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or fourPCUs

Full Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs

Black and White Black PCU Black PCU Black PCU

Four PCUsK PCU

K K Color Color K K Color

B178D614.WMF




SM 6-89 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Printer ACS

The user can validate or invalidate the ACS from the following menu: > PrinterFeatures > System > B&W Page Detect. The ACS works when B&W Detect is on.The ACS does not work when B&W detect is off. The tables list which PCUs are in

operation.

B&W Page Detect: On

PrintPrinter Driver

B/W Only Color Only B/W and Color


Color Black PCU Four PCUs Black PCU or fourPCUs

B&W Page Detect: Off

PrintPrinter DriverB/W Only Color Only B/W and Color


Color Four PCUs Four PCUs Four PCUs



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 6-90 SM

6.12 FUSING

6.12.1 OVERVIEW

1. Heating roller thermistor

2. Heating roller thermostat

3. Heating roller

4. Heating roller fusing lamp

5. Fusing belt

6. Pressure roller thermo fuse

7. Pressure roller thermistor

8. Pressure roller fusing lamp

9. Oil supply roller

10. Cleaning roller

11. Pressure roller

12. Hot roller

13. Tension roller

• A belt fusing system is used. This has a faster warm-up time than a conventionalhot and pressure roller system.

• The heating roller is made of aluminum to increase the temperature of the fusingbelt quickly.

• The hot roller is made of sponge, which flattens slightly, also increasing thefusing nip. This roller does not contain a fusing lamp.

• Each of the heating and pressure rollers has a fusing lamp. – NA: 770W for the heating roller. 350W for the pressure roller – EU: 700W for the heating roller. 325W for the pressure roller

• The heating roller thermistor and pressure roller thermistor control thetemperature of these lamps.

• Temperature is normally controlled by turning the fusing lamps on and off. SP1-104-1 is used to change between on/off control and phase control

• The oil supply roller supplies a small amount of oil to the pressure roller throughthe cleaning roller. Oil does not need to be supplied to the oil supply rollerbecause it contains oil and the amount of oil supplied to the pressure roller is

small.

B178D003.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

12

13



FUSING

SM 6-91 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.12.2 FUSING UNIT DRIVE

Belt and Rollers

Development drive motor-K drives the pressure roller [E] and the hot roller [D]through the gear train. The heating roller [C] is driven by the pressure with thefusing belt [B]. The cleaning roller [G] and oil supply roller [F] are driven by thefriction with the pressure roller.

Fusing Clutch

The fusing clutch [A] turns off and cuts the drive power when the fusing unit doesnot operate. This mechanism prevents wear on the belt and rollers.

NOTE: The fusing clutch turns off when images and patterns are created on thetransfer belt during process control and line position adjustment.

B178D002.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 6-92 SM

6.12.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Fusing Temperatures

When the main switch turns on, the CPU turns on the fusing lamp. The lamp stays

on until the thermistor detects the standby temperature. Then the CPU raises thetemperature to the printing temperature.

The fusing temperature for each mode is as follows.

ModeResolution

(dpi)Temperature of Heating Roller

Temperature ofPressure Roller

Note

Energy saverlevel 1

100°C 130°C

Standby mode

C2a/k: 165°C

C2b: 170°C 120°C

If SP1-104-025 is set to

"B/W:H Normal".

1,200 x 1,200 135°C 130°CColor(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600

600 x 600

C2a/k: 140°C

C2b: 160°C

C2a/k: 130°C

C2b: 145°C

1,200 x 1,200C2a/k: 140°C

C2b: 160°C

C2a/k: 130°C

C2b: 145°CBlack and white(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600

600 x 600

C2a/k: 160°C

C2b: 175°C

C2a/k: 145°C

C2b: 150°C

1,200 x 1,200 140°C 135°CMiddle thick color

(simplex/duplex)1,800 x 600600 x 600

C2a/k: 155°C

C2b: 175°C

C2a/k: 130°C

C2b: 150°C

1,200 x 1,200C2a/k: 155°C

C2b: 175°C

C2a/k: 140°C

C2b: 150°CMiddle thick blackand white(simplex/duplex) 1,800 x 600

600 x 600

C2a/k: 175°C

C2b: 180°C150°C

OHP All 145°C 130°C

Thick All 155°C 135°C

The heating and pressure roller temperatures for fusing are stored in SP1-105-4 to-70.

When the machine is switched on, the fusing lamp temperatures increase to thosespecified by SP1-104-25.

The print ready temperature is slightly less than the fusing temperature. Thedifference is specified by SP1-105-1 and -2.



FUSING

SM 6-93 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Temperature Corrections

The following SP modes are available to prevent excessive glossiness caused byfusing temperature overshoot:

• 1-913: Fusing temperature is reduced after this number of pages during the job.

• 1-914: This shows how much the temperature is reduced

If a job using OHP or thick paper starts while the fusing unit is still warm, the fusingtemperature could be higher than the target for this type of paper. This can causemarks to show on the output. The following SP modes prevents this problem:

• 1-996-4, 5: These SPs specify a limit, above which printing will not start.

Overheat Protection

The CPU cuts power to the fusing lamp at the following times:• The heating roller temperature becomes higher than 250°C for two seconds

or more

• The pressure roller temperature becomes higher than 210°C for five secondsor more.

SC543 for the heating roller or SC553 for the pressure roller are displayed forthese conditions.

The following components are used if the thermistor overheat protection systemfails.

• Two thermostats for the heating roller and two thermofuses for the pressure rollerin series with the common ground line of the fusing lamp.

• If one of the thermostat temperatures becomes higher than 234°C, it opensand cuts power from the fusing lamp.

If the other thermostat temperature becomes higher than 235°C, it alsoopens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.

• If either of the two thermofuses temperature becomes higher than 154°C, thethermofuse opens and cuts power from the fusing lamp.NOTE: These thermofuses make a series circuit.

In either case, the machine stops operation.



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 6-94 SM

6.12.4 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Overview

When the machine is not being used, the energy saver function reduces powerconsumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.

This machine has the following two types of energy saver modes:

1) Panel-off mode2) Auto Off mode

These modes are controlled by the following UP and SP modes:

• Panel off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Panel OffTimer

• Auto off timer: User Tools – System Settings – Timer Setting – Auto OffTimer

Stand-by Mode

Auto Off Mode

Key Operation

Energy Saver Key ON -or-Panel Off Timer (10 s to 999 s / Default: 10 s)

Panel-Off Mode (1&2)

Low Power Mode

Energy Saver Timer (1min. to 240 min. / Default: 15 min.)

Return Time Less Than 3s Panel-Off Level 1

Return Time Less Than 10s Panel-Off Level 2

Key Operation

Return Time Less Than 30 s

Off Mode

Off Stand-by Mode

FAX: RX, etc.

Printer Data inAfter Printing

Operation Sw. Off -or-Auto Off Timer (1 mni. to 240 min. / Default: 60 min.)



Return Time Less Than 101 s

Operation Sw. On

Platen Cover Open / Close

Original Set ADF

B178D583.WMF



FUSING

SM 6-95 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Panel Off Mode

Entering the panel off mode

The machine enters the panel off mode when one of the following is done:

• The panel off timer runs out.• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Key is held down for one second.

If the value specified in the panel off timer is larger than the value specified in theenergy saver timer, the machine goes into the low power mode. At this time, it doesnot go into the panel off mode. A similar thing happens when the value in the paneloff timer is larger than that in the auto off timer. To make the panel off modeeffective, specify a value smaller than the values in the energy saver timer andauto off timer.

What happens in panel off mode

When the machine is in the panel off mode, each of the fusing lamps are kept atthe temperatures indicated in the table at the bottom of the page. The operationpanel indicators are turned off except for the Energy Saver LED and the PowerLED.

If the controller receives an image print out command from an application program(e.g. to print incoming fax data or to print data from a PC), the temperature of eachfusing lamp rises to print the data.

Return to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode if one of the following is done:

• The Clear Mode/Energy Saver Mode key is pressed

• Any key on the operation panel or touch panel screen is pressed

• An original is placed in the ADF

• The ADF is lifted

• A sheet of paper is placed in the by-pass feed table

The return time from the panel off mode is less than 30 seconds.

ModeOperation

SwitchEnergy

Saver LEDFusing Temperature +24V System +5V

Panel off On OnHeating roller: 100

oC

Pressure roller: 130oC

On On



FUSING

B202/B178/B180 6-96 SM

Auto Off Mode

There are two Auto Off modes: Off Stand-by mode and Off mode. The differencebetween Off Stand-by mode and Off mode is the machine’s condition when itenters the Auto Off mode.

Entering off stand-by and off modes

The machine enters the Off Stand-by mode or Off Mode when one of the followingis done.

• The auto off timer runs out.

• The operation switch is pressed to turn the power off.

If one or more of the following conditions exists, the machine enters Off Stand-bymode. If none of these conditions exist, the machine enters the Off Mode.

• Error or SC condition

• Image data is stored in the memory• During memory TX or polling RX

• The handset is off hook

• An original is in the ARDF

• The ARDF is open

Off Stand-by mode

The system +5V is still supplied to all components. When the machine detects aringing signal or receives a stream of data for a print job, the +24V supply isactivated. At this time, the machine automatically prints the incoming message or

executes the print job.

Off Mode

The system +5V supply also turns off. However, +5VE (+5V for energy savermode) is still activated. When the machine detects a ringing signal, off-hook signal,or receives a print job, the machine returns to the Off Stand-by mode and thesystem +5V and +24V supplies are activated.

Returning to stand-by mode

The machine returns to stand-by mode when the operation switch is pressed. The

return time is less than 99 seconds.Mode

OperationSwitch

EnergySaver LED

Fusing Lamp +24V System +5V Note

OffStand-by

Off OffOff

(On when printing)On On

Off Off Off Off Off Off+5VE issupplied



PAPER EXIT

SM 6-97 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.13 PAPER EXIT

6.13.1 OVERVIEW

[A]: To standard paper tray[B]: To external paper tray[C]: Junction gate[D]: Junction gate solenoid

After fusing, the junction gate feeds paper to the standard paper tray or theexternal paper tray. The junction gate solenoid [D] controls the junction gate as

follows:

• To the standard paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is off (default)• To the external paper tray: The junction gate solenoid is on.

Development drive motor-K drives the exit rollers.


[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]



PAPER EXIT

B202/B178/B180 6-98 SM

6.13.2 PAPER OVERFLOW DETECTION

When the paper overflow sensor [A] is activated, the machine detects that thepaper stack height has exceeded a certain limit. At this time, printing stops.

B178D586.WMF

[A]



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-99 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.14 PRINTER FUNCTIONS

6.14.1 OVERVIEW

The controller is based on the GW (Grand Work) architecture.

CPU: RM7065C-600 MHz

ASIC:This is one of the GW-architecture ASICs. It uses a 133 MHz bus to interface with

the CPU and memory. ASIC controls the interface, memory, local bus, interruptionprocessing, PCI bus, video data, HDD, network, operation panel, IEEE1284, andimage processing.

Flash ROM: The 16-MB flash ROM is for the system program.

SDRAM DIMM (2 slots):The controller has 1024-MB resident SDRAM. (512 MB x 2).

NVRAM:The 128-KB NVRAM stores the engine/controller settings and logs.

Option: Optional component for all models

SD Slot 1 SD Slot 2

System

Flash ROM

(16 MB)ASIC CPU

NVRAM

(128 kB)

PCI

CONTROLLER

BCU

Option

PCI BUS

Local BUS

SD Slot 3

Option

SD Card

PS3/Data

Overwrite

Security Unit

Printer/

Scanner

RAM

(512 MB)

RAM

(512 MB)

SDRAM

DIMMSDRAM

DIMM

2.5" HDD

IDE IDE

2.5" HDD

PCI

FCU G3

Option OptionOption

USB\NIB

PCI PCI

File Format

Converter

IEEE1394/

Wireless LAN/

Bluetooth/

IEEE1284

PCI

B178D999.WMF



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B202/B178/B180 6-100 SM

Interface Option:You can install one of the four network components (IEEE1284, IEEE1394,Wireless LAN, Bluetooth).

HDD:

Two 40-GB HDDs are standard components. Each hard disk is partitioned asshown below. You cannot change the partition sizes.



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-101 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.14.2 HARD DISK

Overview

The capacity of the hard disk is 80 GB. The controller partitions it into several

drives and allocates them for different functions. You can initialize these partitionsas necessary ( SP5-832). The table lists the contents of the hard disk.

Contents Capacity (MB)Volatile/

NonvolatileInitialization

(SP5-832)

37,500 NonvolatileImages

25,000 Volatile002

Thumbnails 2,400 Nonvolatile 003

Job Logs 10 Nonvolatile 004

Printer fonts 500 Nonvolatile 005

User information 300 Nonvolatile 006

Mail RX data 200 Nonvolatile 007Mail TX data 1,000 Nonvolatile 008

1,256 NonvolatileDesigner data

1,000 Volatile009

Logs 150 Nonvolatile 010

Ricoh interfaces 500 Nonvolatile 011

Volatile: The data is lost when you turn the main switch off.Nonvolatile: The data is not lost when you turn the main switch off.

Data Transfer

The machine executes the direct memory access(DMA) two times faster than the conventional DMA.

The controller has two identical hard disk drives.One HDD interface connects these drives with thememory. There is a 32-bit data bus between thememory and the HDD interface. There is also a16-bit data bus between the HDD interface andeach hard disk drive (two 16-bit data busses intotal).

When receiving 32-bit data from the memory, theHDD interface divides them into two 16-bit dataand transfers them to each hard disk drive. Harddisk drive 1 and 2 store data in an address. Thesetwo addresses correspond with each other. Whenreceiving two 16-bit data from two correspondingaddresses of the hard disk drives, the HDDinterface combines them and transfers 32-bit data to the memory.

If an incorrect sector is found in an address of one hard disk drive, the sector in thecorresponding address of the other hard disk drive is also treated as an incorrectsector.

B178D588.WMF

Memory

HDD Interface

HDD 1 HDD 2



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B202/B178/B180 6-102 SM

6.14.3 PRINT DATA PROCESSING

RPCS Driver

PCL5e/PCL6c Driver

RCM profile

GrayCorrection

Correction

CorrectedRGB

Toner Limitation

Dithering & ROP

Matching

RPCS Driver

Controller Host

ICM profile

Printer

Engine

CMYK

8 bits

CMYK

RGB

CMYK

RGB

1 bit or 2 bits

ICM Engine/

ICM Profile

UCR/BG

OR

CMYK

B178D589.WMF

PCL Driver

Decode

&

Scale

8 bitsColor

Matching

RGB

RGB RGB

8 bits

RGB 8 bits

CMY

8 bits

CMYK

1 bit

CMY

1 bit

Controller Host Printer Engine

(Matching by Host)

CMY

8 bits

ICM Engine/

ICM profile

BG/UCR,

Dithering

&

ROP

Toner Limitation

Correction

Negative Correction

B178D590.WMF



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-103 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


PS3 Driver

CMS (Color Management System)

CMS optimizes the color print quality using a color profile that is based on the

characteristics of the printer. With RPCS, the color profile is applied by the driver.With PS3 and PCL5e, the color profile is applied in the matching/CRD module onthe controller except when using CMM/ICC/ICM profiles.

CMS is not used when the color profile setting in the printer driver is set to “Off.”

Gray Correction

Gray correction processes gray with the K or CMYK toner depending on the driversettings.

BG/UCR (Black Generation/Under Color Removal)

The RGB data is converted to CMYK data with BG/UCR. During CMYK conversion,some CMY data is replaced with K data by the BG/UCR algorithm.

Gamma Correction

The printer gamma can be adjusted with controller SP mode (Gamma Adj.). ForCMYK, there are15 points between 0 and 100%. The corrected gamma data isstored in NVRAM.

ColorSync profile

Corrected RGB

Toner Limitation

Dithering & ROP

ColorSvn

RPCS Driver

Controller Host

ICM profile

Printer

Engine

CMYK

8 bits

CMYK

RGB

CMYK

RGB

1 bit or 2 bits

ICM Engine/

ICM ProfileCMYK

UCR/BG

CIE XYZ

Correction

PS3 Matching

B178D591.WMF



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B202/B178/B180 6-104 SM

Toner Limitation

Toner limitation prevents toner from being scattered around text or printed lines.

Maximum values have been prepared independently for text and photo. They can

be adjusted with controller SP mode (Toner Limit).• Default: 190% for text, 260% for photo

• Adjustable range: 100% to 400%

Dither Processing and ROP/RIP

Dither patterns have been prepared for photo and text independently. Ditheringconverts 8-bit data to 1-bit or 2-bit data. However, these dither patterns create theillusion of 256 gradations for high quality prints. The optimum dither pattern isselected depending on the selected resolution.

RIP: Raster Image ProcessingROP: Raster Operation



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-105 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.14.4 CONTROLLER FUNCTIONS

Sample Print

This feature was formerly known as “Proof Print.” This function gives users a

chance to check the print results before starting a multiple-set print run.

• The size of the hard disk partition for the sample print feature is 6.3 GB. Thispartition is also used by the collation and locked print features.

• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using locked print.

• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding jobs storedusing locked print.

• The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using locked printand collation.

Locked PrintUsing this feature, the print job is stored in the machine but will not be printed untilthe user inputs an ID at the machine’s operation panel. This ID must match the IDthat has been input with the printer driver.

• Stored data is automatically deleted after it is printed.

• Stored data can be manually deleted at the operation panel.

• The partition can hold up to 30 files, including files stored using sample print.

• The partition can hold a log containing up to 20 errors, excluding logs storedusing locked print.

• The maximum number of pages is 1,100, including jobs using sample print

and collation.• Locked print uses the same hard disk partition (6.3 GB) as sample print and

collation.



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B202/B178/B180 6-106 SM

6.14.5 JOB SPOOLING

Print data can be spooled (stored) in the machine’s HDD, and the machine starts toprint when data transfer is complete. Since the machine stores all data first before

printing, the host computer is freed up more quickly.NOTE: 1) The supported print protocols are IPP and LPR.

2) The default setting for this feature is “off”. The user must switch it onusing UP mode to enable this feature.

• The size of the HDD partition for job spooling is 1 GB.

• The partition can hold up to 150 jobs.

Related SP Modes

Job spooling can be turned on and off using the SP mode (SP5-828-069) for each

protocol.

The machine does not spool jobs when job spooling is switched off with the SPmode, even when the customer switches it on with the user mode.



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-107 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Paper Source Selection

Tray Priority (Auto Tray Select)

The “Tray Priority” setting

determines the start of the traysearch when the user selects “AutoTray Select” with the driver. Themachine searches paper trays forthe specified paper size and type.

When no tray contains paper thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the controllerstops printing until the user loads thecorrect paper.

The “Tray Priority” setting can bespecified in the following menu: > System Settings > Tray PaperSettings > Paper Tray Priority:Printer.

NOTE: The by-pass feed table is not part of the tray search.

Tray Locking

If “Tray Locking” is enabled for a tray, the controller skips the “locked” tray in the

tray search process.The “Tray Locking” setting can be specified in the following menu: > SystemSettings > Tray Paper Settings > Paper Type: Tray # > Apply Auto Paper Select(where the “#” indicates the tray number).

NOTE: The by-pass feed table cannot be unlocked (Tray Locking is alwaysenabled).

Manual Tray Select

If the selected tray does not have the paper size and type specified by the driver,

the controller stops printing until the user loads the correct paper.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Start of

Tray Search

Tray 3 (Optional)

Tray 4 (Optional)

B178D592.WMF



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

B202/B178/B180 6-108 SM

Auto Continue

Overview

When this function is enabled, the machine waits for a specified period (0, 1, 5, 10,

15 minutes) for the correct paper size and type to be set in the tray. If the timerruns out, the machine starts printing, even if there is no paper tray which matchesthe paper size and paper type specified by the driver.

The machine searches for a paper tray in the following way:

• The interval can be set with the following menu: > Printer Features > System> Auto Continue.

NOTE: The default setting for this feature is “Off.”

Auto Tray Select

When there is no paper tray thatmatches the paper size and typespecified by the driver, the machinesearches for any tray that has paper,and prints from the first tray it finds.The start of the tray search is thetray selected as the priority tray.

Manual Tray Select

The machine prints from the selected tray even if the paper size and type do notmatch the setting specified from the driver.

If “Auto Continue” is disabled, the machine waits until the user loads the correctpaper in the tray.

Priority Tray

Tray 1

Tray 2

LCT (Optional)

Start of

Tray Search

Tray 3 (Optional)

Tray 4 (Optional)

B178D593.WMF



PRINTER FUNCTIONS

SM 6-109 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


Paper Output Tray

You can select output trays as follows: User Tools > System Settings > Tray PaperSettings. If a print job does not specify an output tray or if the driver specifies thedefault tray, the output tray selected with this user tool will be used.

Output Tray Selected

• If the machine cannot print to the selected output tray, it prints to the defaultpaper output tray.

• If paper overflow is detected at the selected output tray, the controller suspendsprinting.

Stapling

The optional two-tray finisher and booklet finisher can staple papers. Both finishers

support the following stapling positions:[A]: One staple (vertical) is at the rear right

corner.[B]: Two staples (vertical) are at the right

middle edge.[C]: One staple (vertical) is at the front right

corner.

The two-tray finisher supports the followingstapling position (the booklet finisher doesnot):

[D]: One staple (slant) is at the front rightcorner.

The booklet finisher supports the followingstapling position (the two-tray finisher doesnot):

[E]: Two staples (vertical) are at the center.

The table lists the number of papers that the finishers can staple.

Position Paper size

A4, B5, LT A3, Ledger, LegalTwo-tray finisher [A][B][C][D] 50 sheets 30 sheets

[A][B][C] 50 sheets 25 sheetsBooklet finisher

[E] — 10 sheets

NOTE: For more paper sizes, see the specifications.

B178D594.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

Paper exit





FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

SM 6-111 B202/B178/B180

D e t a i l e d


6.15 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER (MLB)

In previous models (such as A-C2, R-C2), DeskTopBinder V2 could retrieve copyand print jobs from the document server and convert them to TIFF. However, this

software-based conversion was slow for many users.In this machine, this conversion is hardware-based, using the optional File FormatConverter. Without the File Format Converter, copy and print jobs cannot bedownloaded to a PC (or e-Cabinet) from the document server.

Two common target formats are provided for conversion to files that can beselected by the SP modes: These are JPEG and TIFF.

In scanner mode, users can select file format from TIFF, JPEG, or PDF. The timeto create TIFF and JPEG files is shortened with the File Format Converter,especially for high scanning resolution and large image size. When the customerselects PDF, the machine creates a TIFF or JPEG file from the scanned imagefirst. Then it converts it to PDF. Therefore, the total time to create a PDF is alsoshortened with the File Format Converter.



DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

B202/B178/B180 6-112 SM

6.16 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT (B735)

6.16.1 AUTO ERASE MEMORY

A document scanned in the copier or scanner mode, or data sent from a printerdriver for printing, is stored temporarily on the hard disk of the machine. Thedocument stays in the hard disk as temporary data even after the copy or print jobis completed. Auto Erase Memory erases the temporary data on the hard disk bywriting over it.

Types of Data Overwritten and Not Overwritten

The following table shows the types of data that can or cannot be overwritten by Auto Erase Memory.

Copier Copy jobs

Printer 1) Print jobs

2) Sample Print/Locked Print jobs(*1)3) Spool Printing jobs

Scanner(*2) 1) Scanned files sent by e-mail

2) Files sent by Scan to Folder

3) Documents sent or retrieved by using WebImage Monitor, Desk Top Binder, or ScanRouter

Fax PC fax print jobs, Internet fax transmission jobs

Data overwritten by Auto Erase Memory

DocumentServer

Temporary data that still remains in the DocumentServer even after user erases the data in theDocument Server.

Data not overwritten by Auto Erase Memory 1) Documents stored by the user in the Document Server using theCopier, Printer or Scanner functions

2) Information registered in the Address Book (*3)

3) Counters stored under each user code

4) Network setting

NOTE: *1: A Sample Print or Locked Print job can only be overwritten after it hasbeen executed.

*2: Temporary data via TWAIN scanner function are not originally stored inHDD. You can use TWAIN scanner functions together with the DOSunit.

*3: Data stored in the Address Book can be encrypted for security.

Overwrite timing

Overwriting starts automatically once a copy, print or scanner job is completed.Copier, printer and scanner functions take priority over the Data Overwrite function.If a copier, printer or scanner job comes while a previous job is being overwritten,the overwrite process is automatically interrupted until the next job is completed.



SPECIFICATIONS







SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-2 SM

Weight: By-pass tray: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb.)

Output PaperCapacity:

Standard exit tray: 500 sheets (face down)External exit tray: 100 sheets (face up)

Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets

Zoom: Arbitrary: From 25 to 400% (1% step)

Fixed:

North America Europe

25% 25%

50% 50%

65% 65%

73% 71%

78% 75%

85% 82%

93% 93%

100% 100%121% 115%

129% 122%

155% 141%

200% 200%

400% 400%

Memory: Standard: 1024MB

Power Source: 120 V, 60 Hz: More than 12A (for North America)220 V – 240 V, 50/60 Hz: More than 8A (for Europe)

Power Consumption:

120V 230V

Maximum 1440 W or less 1680 W or less

Energy Saver 18 W or less 20 W or less



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-3 B202/B178/B180

S p e c i f i c a t i o n s

Noise Emission:(Sound Power Level)

Model State MainframeCompletesystem(*1)

Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or LessJ-C2kOperating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less

Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or LessJ-C2a

Operating 65db(A) or Less 71db(A) or Less

Standby 40db(A) or Less 40db(A) or LessJ-C2b

Operating 67db(A) or Less 73db(A) or Less

(*1) The complete system consists of mainframe, ARDF, finisher, and LCT.

NOTE: The above measurements were made in accordance with Ricohstandard methodology.

Dimensions (W x D x H):

Copier: 670 x 698 x 859 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 33.8")Copier + 1-Tray PFU: 670x 698 x 1,020 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 40.2")Copier + 2-Tray PFU or LCT: 670 x 698 x 1,118 mm (26.4" x 27.5" x 44.0")

Weight: Less than 120 kg (265 lb.) [excluding toner]



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-4 SM

1.2 PRINTER

Printer Languages: PCL5e/ PCL6c Adobe PostScript 3 (optional)

RPCS (Refined Printing Command Stream)Resolution andGradation:

PCL5e/ PCL6c:600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 300 x 300 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

Adobe PostScript 3:1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

RPCS:1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit/pixel), 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel),600 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel)

NOTE: 1,800 x 600 dpi (1 bit/pixel) = 600 x 600 dpi (2 bits/pixel)

Printing speed:

Resolution Plain paper Thick/OHP

600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppmMonochrome

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm

C2a

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 45 ppm 17 ppm


1,200 x 1,200 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm600 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 35 ppm 17 ppm

C2b

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 28 ppm 17 ppm


1,200 x 1,200 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm

600 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm

1,800 x 600 dpi 24 ppm 17 ppm

C2k

Color

1,200 x 1,200 dpi 17 ppm 17 ppm

Resident Fonts: PCL5e/ PCL6c:35 Intelli fonts10 TrueType fonts

Adobe PostScript 3:136 fonts (24 Type 2 fonts, 112 Type 14 fonts)

Host Interfaces: USB 2.0 ............................................................... StandardEthernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)...................... StandardIEEE1284 parallel x 1 .......................................... OptionalIEEE1394............................................................. OptionalIEEE802.11b (Wireless LAN)............................... OptionalBluetooth (Wireless)............................................. Optional



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-5 B202/B178/B180


Network Protocols: TCP/IP, IPX/SPX, AppleTalk (Auto Switching),SMB (NetBEUI, NetBIOS over TCP/IP)

First Print Speed: Color: 9 seconds or less (from tray 1)Monochrome: 7 seconds or less (from tray 1)

1.3 SCANNER

Standard ScannerResolution:

Main scan/Sub scan600 dpi

Available scanningResolution Range:

Twain Mode:

100 ~ 1200 dpi

Delivery Mode:

100/200/300/400/600 dpiGrayscales: 1 bit or 8 bits/pixel each for RGB

ScanningThroughput(ARDF mode):

Scan to E-mail / Folder:BW: 50 ppm (A4LEF / BW Text (Print) / 200dpi /Compression: On (MH))FC: 35 ppm (A4LEF / FC Text / Photo / 200dpi /Compression: Standard)

Network TWAIN Scan:BW: 36 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / Binary / 200dpi /Compression: Data compression (MMR))

FC: 20 ppm (A4LEF / Quality: Colors / 16770K colors/ 200dpi / Compression: Standard quality)

Interface: Ethernet (100 Base-TX/10 Base-T for TCP/IP), IEEE 1394,Wireless LAN

CompressionMethod:

B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR)Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-6 SM

2. SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES

2.1 PAPER FEED

North America Europe/Asia

Paper Size (W x L)Tray 1

Tray2/3/4

LCTBy-

passTray

Tray 1Tray2/3/4

LCTBy-

passTray

A3 W 12" x 18" N N N Y# N N N Y

#

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y N Y

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm N Y N Y# Y* Y Y Y

#

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

#

A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

#

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y N Y

#

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm N Y#/Y* N Y

# N Y

#/Y* N Y

#

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm N Y N Y# N Y N Y

#

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N Y# N N N Y

#

Ledger 11" x 17" N Y N Y N Y N Y#

Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" N Y N Y N Y#/Y* N Y

#

Letter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y* Y Y Y# N Y N Y

#

Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" N Y N Y# N Y

#/Y* N Y

#

Half LetterSEF

5.5" x 8.5" N N N Y N N N Y#

ExecutiveSEF

7.25" x 10.5" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

ExecutiveLEF

10.5" x 7.25" N N N Y# N N N Y

#

F SEF 8" x 13" N Y# N Y# N Y# N YFoolscapSEF

8.5" x 13" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

8K 267 x 390 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm N Y# N Y

# N Y

# N Y

#

Custom Minimum:

90 x 148 mm

Maximum:

305 x 458 mm

N N N Y# N N N Y

#

Com10

Env.

4.125" x 9.5" N N N Y# N N N N

MonarchEnv.

3.875" x 7.5" N N N Y# N N N N

C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N N N N N N N Y#

C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N N N N N N N Y#

DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N N N N N N N Y#

Remarks:

Y Supported: the sensor detects the paper size.

Y# Supported: the user specifies the paper size.

Y* Supported: depends on a technician adjustment

N Not supported



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-7 B202/B178/B180


2.2 PAPER EXIT

Paper Size (W x L)Internal Tray

(Face Down)

External Tray

(Face Up)

2-trayFinisher

BookletFinisher

Duplex

A3 W 12" x 18" N Y N N N

A3 SEF 297 x 420 mm Y Y Y Y Y A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm Y Y Y Y Y

A4 LEF 297 x 210 mm Y Y Y Y* Y

A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm Y Y N N N

A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm Y Y Y N Y

A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm N N N N N

B4 SEF 257 x 364 mm Y Y Y Y Y

B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm Y Y Y Y* Y

B5 LEF 257 x 182 mm Y Y Y Y* Y

B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm N N N N N

Ledger 11" x 17" Y Y Y Y Y

Letter SEF 8.5" x 11" Y Y Y Y YLetter LEF 11" x 8.5" Y Y Y Y* Y

Legal SEF 8.5" x 14" Y Y Y Y Y

Half Letter SEF 5.5" x 8.5" Y Y N N N

Executive SEF 7.25" x 10.5" Y Y Y N Y

Executive LEF 10.5" x 7.25" Y Y N N N

F SEF 8" x 13" Y Y Y N Y

Foolscap SEF 8.5" x 13" Y Y Y N Y

Folio SEF 8.25" x 13" Y Y Y N Y

8K 267 x 390 mm Y Y Y N Y

16K SEF 195 x 267 mm Y Y Y N Y

16K LEF 267 x 195 mm Y Y Y N Y

Custom Minimum:

90 x 148 mm

Maximum:

305 x 458 mm

Y Y N N N

Com10 Env. 4.125" x 9.5" N Y N N N

Monarch Env. 3.875" x 7.5" N Y N N N

C6 Env. 114 x 162 mm N Y N N N

C5 Env. 162 x 229 mm N Y N N N

DL Env. 110 x 220 mm N Y N N N

Remarks:

Y Supported

N Not supported

Y* Stack only (Booklet not supported)



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-8 SM

PLATEN/ARDF ORIGINAL SIZE DETECTION

Platen ARDFSize (width x length)[mm] Inches Metric Inches Metric

A3 (297 x 420) L No Yes Yes Yes

B4 (257 x 364) L No Yes No Yes

A4 (210 x 297) L No Yes No Yes**

A4 (297 x 210) S No Yes Yes Yes

B5 (182 x 257) L No Yes No Yes

B5 (257 x 182) S No Yes No Yes

A5 (148 x 210) L No No* No Yes

A5 (210 x 148) S No No No Yes

B6 (128 x 182) L No No No Yes

B6 (182 x 128) S No No No Yes

11" x 17" (DLT) Yes No Yes** Yes**

11" x 15" No No Yes** No

10" x 14" No No Yes No

8.5" x 14" (LG) Yes No Yes** No

8.5" x 13" (F4) No No Yes** Yes

8.25" x 13" No No No No

8" x 13"(F) No Yes No No

8.5" x 11" (LT) Yes No Yes** No

11" x 8.5" (LT) Yes No Yes** No

8" x 10.5" No No No No

8" x 10" No No Yes** No

5.5" x 8.5" (HLT) No* No Yes No

8.5" x 5.5" (HLT) No No Yes No

8K (267 x 390) No No No Yes**16K L (195 x 267) No No No Yes**

16K S (267 x 195) No No No Yes

7.25" x 10.5"(Executive)

No No Yes No

10.5" x 7.25"(Executive)

No No Yes** No

*: Use SP4-303 to detect original sizes as A5 lengthwise/HLT when the message“Cannot detect original size” shows.

**: The machine can detect the paper size depending on the setting of SP6-016-1.



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-9 B202/B178/B180


3. SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES

The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-runinstaller lets you to select the components you want to install.

3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

PrinterLanguage

Windows95/98/ME

WindowsNT4.0

Windows2000

WindowsXP

Windows2003

Macintosh

PCL 5e/ PCL6c

Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

PS3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes

RPCS Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No

NOTE: 1) The printer drivers for Windows NT 4.0 are only for the Intel x86platform. There is no Windows NT 4.0 printer driver for the PowerPC, Alpha, or MIPS platforms.

2) The PS3 drivers are all genuine AdobePS drivers, except for Windows2000/XP/2003. Windows 2000 uses Microsoft PS. A PPD file for eachoperating system is provided with the driver.

3) The PS3 driver for Macintosh supports Mac OS 8.6 or later versions.



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-10 SM

3.2 UTILITY SOFTWARE

Software Description

Agfa Font Manager 2000

(Win95/98/ME,2000/XP/2003, NT4)

A font management utility with screen fonts for the printer.

SmartNetMonitor for Admin

(Win95/98/ME,2000/XP/2003, NT4)

A printer management utility for network administrators. NIBsetup utilities are also available.

SmartNetMonitor for Client

(Win95/98/ME,2000/XP/2003, NT4)

• A printer management utility for client users.

• A utility for peer-to-peer printing over a NetBEUI or TCP/IPnetwork.

• A peer-to-peer print utility over a TCP/IP network. Thisprovides the parallel printing and recovery printing features.

Printer Utility for Mac

(Mac)

This software provides several convenient functions for printingfrom Macintosh clients.

IEEE1394 Utility(Win2000/XP)

This utility deletes a print port for IEEE1394 in Win2000.

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite

(Win95/98/ME,2000/XP/2003, NT4)

DeskTopBinder V2 Lite itself can be used as personal documentmanagement software and can manage both image dataconverted from paper documents and application files saved ineach client’s PC.

LAN-Fax Driver This software lets you fax documents directly form your PC. Address Book Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installedas well. (These require the optional fax unit.)

USB Print Support This utility deletes a print port for USB in Win98SE/ME.

Graphic Update Module This provides bitmap images used to represent the variousstatuses of devices graphically within Smart Device Monitor orWeb Smart Device Monitor.

SCANNER

The scanner driver and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM.

Scanner Drivers

• Network Twain Driver for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003

Scanner Utilities

• Scan Router V2 Lite (Cherry-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP• Desk Top Binder V2 Lite (Plumeria-Lite) for Win95/98/ME/NT4.0/2000/XP/2003



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-11 B202/B178/B180


4. MACHINE CONFIGURATION

ItemMachine

CodeRemarks

Copier B178 C

Platen cover G329 B

ARDF B714 AOne from the two

Booklet finisher B602 IOne from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires onefrom [D], [E], and [F]

Punch unit (for B602) B647 Requires [I]

Two-tray finisher B599 GOne from [G], [H], and [I]; Requires onefrom [D], [E], and [F]

Punch unit (for B599) B377 Requires [G]

Multi-Bin output tray G306 H One from [G], [H], and [I]

One-tray paper feed unit B601 D

Two-tray paper feed unit B598 F

LCT B600 E

One from the three

Scanner accessibilityoption

G570 J

B178V501.WMF

[C]

[B]

[I]

[G]

[A]

[H]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[J]



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-12 SM

ItemMachine

CodeRemarks

USB 2.0: [F] — Standard

Ethernet: [F] — Standard

Wireless LAN: [A] G813

Bluetooth: [B] B736

IEEE 1394: [C] B581

IEEE 1284: [D] B679

You can only install one of these ata time.

File Format Converter: [E] B609

Hard Disk Drive — Standard

PostScript 3: [G] B763

Data overwrite security unit: [G] B735

I/F Card Slot

A Ethernet&USB(ver2.0)

B File Format Converter

C Option

SD Card Slot

1 Option

2 Option

3 Serv ice

B178V563.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-13 B202/B178/B180


5. OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT

5.1 ARDF

Paper Size/Weight:Size A3 to B6, DLT to HLT

SimplexWeight 40 to 128 g/m2 (11 to 34 lb.)

Size A3 to B5, DLT to HLTDuplex

Weight 50 to 105 g/m2 (14 to 28 lb.)

Table Capacity: 80 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb)

Original StandardPosition:

Rear left corner

Separation: Feed belt and separation roller

Original Transport: Roller transport

Original Feed Order: From the top original

Supported MagnificationRatios:

Copy 50 to 200 %

Color 32.6 to 200 %Fax

Black & white 48.9 to 200 %

Power Source: DC 24V, 5V from the scanner unit

Power Consumption: 60 W or less

Dimensions (W × D × H): 570 mm x 518 mm x 150 mm (22.4" x 20.4" x 5.9")

Weight: 12 kg



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-14 SM

5.2 ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2

(16 to 28 lb.)Tray Capacity: 500 sheets (80 g/m

2, 20 lb.)

Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)

Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the main unit)

Power Consumption: 50 W

Dimensions (W x D x H): 540 x 600 x 172 mm (21.3" x 23.7" x 6.8")

Weight 18 kg (39.7 lb.)

5.3 TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

Paper Size: Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 500 sheets x 2 (80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 3 steps (100%, 50%, Near End)





5.4 2000-SHEET LARGE CAPACITY TRAY

Paper Size: A4/81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Paper Weight: 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 2000 sheets (80 g/m

2

, 20 lb.)Paper Feed System: FRR system

Paper Height Detection: 5 steps (100%, 75%, 50%, 25%, Near End)







SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-15 B202/B178/B180


5.5 TWO-TRAY FINISHER & PUNCH UNIT

Print Paper Size: No punch mode: A3/11" x 17" to A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Punch mode:2 holes: A3/11" x 17" to A4/81/2" x 11" (SEF) A4/81/2" x 11" to A5 (LEF)

3 holes: A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

4 holes (Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

4 holes (North Europe): A3, B4, 11" x 17" (SEF) A4, B5, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)

Staple mode: A3/11" x 17" to B5/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight: No punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Punch mode:60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Staple mode:64 to 90 g/m

2 (17 to 23 lb.)

Label/Thick paper/OHP cannot be stapled

Tray Capacity: Upper tray:500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B5, A5 (LEF)250 sheets: 11" x 17", A3, 81/2" x 14", B4

Lower tray (default mode – stapled output only goes totray 2):

2000 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",

81/2" x 11" (SEF)500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Lower tray (multi-tray staple mode – stapled output cango to either tray):

1500 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" (LEF)750 sheets: A3, B4, A4, B5, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17",

81/2" x 11" (SEF)

500 sheets: A5 (LEF)

Staple capacity: Single size:50 sheets: A4, 81/2" x 11" , B530 sheets: A3, B4, 81/2" x 14", 11" x 17"

Mixed size:30 sheets: A4 (LEF) & A3, B5 (LEF) & B4,

81/2" x 11" (LEF) & 11" x 17"

Staple position: 7 positions1-staple: 4 positions (Top Left, Top Right,

Top Left-Oblique, Top Right-Oblique)

2-staples: 3 positions (Left, Top, Right)



SPECIFICATIONS

B202/B178/B180 7-16 SM

Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

Power consumption: 48 W


Without punch unit: 53 kg (116.9 lb.)Weight

With punch unit: 55 Kg (121.3 lb.)

5.6 BOOKLET FINISHER

Paper Size: A3, A4, B4, B5, DLT, LG, LT

Booklet Paper Size: A3, B4, A4 SEF, DLT, LG, LT SEF

Paper Weight: Stack/Sort mode:60 to 128 g/m

2 (16 to 34 lb.)

Staple mode:64 to 90 g/m

2 (17 to 24 lb.)

Booklet mode:64 to 80 g/m2 (17 to 21 lb.)

Tray Capacity: 1,000 sheets: A4, LT, B5500 sheets: A3, B4, DLT, LG

Booklet Tray Capacity: 2 to 5 sheets/booklet: 206 to 10 sheets/booklet: 10

Staple capacity: 30 sheets

Booklet capacity: 10 sheets

Staple position: 3 positions (excluding booklet mode)1-staple: 2 positions (Top right, Top left)2-staples: 1 positions (Left)

Staple replenishment: Cartridge (5000 staples)

5.7 MULTI-BIN OUTPUT TRAY

Number of Bins 2

Paper Size Maximum: A3/11" x 17" (SEF)

Minimum: A5 (LEF)/81/2" x 11"

Paper Weight 60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb.)

Stack Capacity(80 g/m2, 20 lb.)

Tray 1: 100 sheets

Tray 2: 100 sheets (A4/smaller than 81/2" x 11")250 sheets (B4/81/2" x 14")



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 7-17 B202/B178/B180


5.8 SCANNER ACCESSIBILITY OPTION

Place Right side of the mainframe

Length of connector

cable:

1 m

Power consumption: Power is supplied from the mainframe.

Dimensions (W x D x H): 570 x 757 x 100 mm

Weight: Less than 20 kg

NOTE: 1) This scanner option also has an operation panel. You cannot operatethe operation panel of the mainframe and the operation panel for thescanner option at the same time.

2) You need to cover the contact glass of the mainframe with the platencover option.





B377

PUNCH UNIT





SM i B377

PUNCH UNIT B377

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................1

1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT.............................................................. 1

2. DETAILS .........................................................................................2

2.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM......................................................................22.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ...................................................................4





PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

SM 1 B377

P u n c h

U n i t

B 3 7 7


1.1 PUNCH POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use SP6113(Punch Hole Adjustment).

The punch position can be adjusted by up to 4 mm using combinations of the 3spacers provided with the finisher. To adjust the horizontal position of the holes,use the spacers provided with the punch unit.

1. Rear cover ( x 4)

2. Punch unit [A] ( x 3, x 5)

3. Spacers [B]

B377R119.WMF[A][B]





PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

SM 3 B377

P u n c h

U n i t

B 3 7 7

When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punchholes for the job, the punch hole motor [A] turns on until the actuator disk changesthe status of the punch hole switch [B] (until it switches on or off). This indicatesthat the cover [C] and the punch cam [D] have moved to one side or the other todetermine which punchers are used.

B377D504.WMF[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

B377 4 SM

2.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unitinside the finisher.

When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates thehopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after thecurrent job is completed.

This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When thewaste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensorand display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for the

hopper full condition.

B377D506.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]



TWO-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B598









COVER REPLACEMENT

SM 1 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT

1. Rear cover [A] (! x 2)

B598R102.WMF

[A]



ROLLER REPLACEMENT

B598 2 SM

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

1. Paper tray

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)3. Paper Feed Roller [B] (" x 1)

4. Separation Roller [C] (" x 1)

B598R101.WMF

[B]

[C][A]



PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

SM 3 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1)

2. Paper feed motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 3)3. Main board [B] (! x 2)

B598R103.WMF

[B]

[A]



TRAY LIFT MOTORS

B598 4 SM

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTORS


2. Tray lift motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 2)

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCHES


2. Paper feed clutches [A] (! x 1, 1bracket, 1 bushing)

B598R104.WMF

B598R105.WMF

[A]

[A]



PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

SM 5 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Vertical transport cover [A] (1 hook)

2. Paper feed unit [B] (! x 2,# x 1)

B598R108.WMF

B598R107.WMF

[A]

[B]



OVERVIEW

B598 6 SM

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 OVERVIEW

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Upper Pick-up Roller

2. Upper Paper Feed Roller

3. Upper Relay Roller

4. Upper Separation Roller

5. Lower Relay Roller

6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Separation Roller

8. Lower Pick-up Roller

9. Lower Tray

10. Upper Tray

B598D001.WMF

10

9

8

5

6

7

4

3

21



OVERVIEW

SM 7 B598

T w o - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t B 5 9 8

2.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. Paper Size Switch 1




5. Main Board

6. Upper Paper Height 1 Sensor

7. Paper Feed Motor8. Upper Paper Height 2 Sensor

9. Upper Lift Sensor

10. Upper Paper Feed Clutch

11. Upper Paper End Sensor

12. Upper Tray Lift Motor

13. Lower Paper Feed Clutch

14. Vertical Guide Switch

15. Lower Lift Sensor

16. Lower Tray Lift Motor

17. Lower Paper End Sensor

18. Lower Relay Sensor

19. Lower Paper Height 2 Sensor

20. Lower Paper Height 1 Sensor21. Upper Relay Sensor





B598D101.WMF

12

3 45

67

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

1819

20

21

22

24

23

25



OVERVIEW

B598 8 SM

2.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Tray Motor

2. Upper Paper Feed Clutch

3. Lower Paper Feed Clutch

4. Lower Relay Roller

5. Lower Separation Roller

6. Lower Paper Feed Roller

7. Lower Pick-up Roller

8. Upper Separation Roller

9. Upper Relay Roller

10. Upper Paper Feed Roller

11. Upper Pick-up Roller

B598D102.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11



TWO-TRAY FINISHERB599





SM i B599

TWO-TRAY FINISHER B599TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 11.1 COVERS ......................................................................................................1

1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS..........................................................................11.1.2 INNER COVER....................................................................................1

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER............................................................................... 21.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR................................................................................21.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR .................31.5 STAPLER TRAY........................................................................................... 31.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH ....... 41.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR....................................................................... 5

1.8 LIFT MOTORS .............................................................................................51.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR ...............................................................................71.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS.........................................................81.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR........................................................81.12 STAPLER UNIT..........................................................................................81.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR..........................................................91.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR.....................................................................................9

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS..............................................................................91.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR............. 101.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR ..................................................................101.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH........................................................10

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD .........................................................................111.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT............................................... 11

2. TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................................. 122.1 JAM DETECTION.......................................................................................12

3. SERVICE TABLES........................................................................ 133.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS............................................................................ 133.2 TEST POINTS............................................................................................133.3 FUSES........................................................................................................13

. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS........................................................... 144.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...................................................................................144.2 DRIVE LAYOUT .........................................................................................154.3 JUNCTION GATES ....................................................................................164.4 TRAY SHIFTING ........................................................................................17

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS............................................................. 17Tray 1 (Upper Tray) ...............................................................................17Tray 2 (Lower Tray) ...............................................................................18

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS ..............................................................194.5.1 TRAY 1 ..............................................................................................19

Introduction ............................................................................................19



B599 ii SM

Normal and sort/stack modes ................................................................19Staple Mode...........................................................................................20Tray 1 release mechanism.....................................................................21

4.5.2 TRAY 2 ..............................................................................................22

4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM ...............................................................234.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM............................... 24Vertical Paper Alignment .......................................................................24Horizontal Paper Alignment ...................................................................24

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM ............................................................................254.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT..................................................................... 25

Stapler Rotation .....................................................................................25Side-to-Side Movement .........................................................................25

4.7.2 STAPLER ..........................................................................................264.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT......................................................... 27

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................................28

4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM ...........................................................284.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION ........................................................29



COVERS

SM 1 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9


1.1 COVERS

1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS

1. Top cover [A] (! x 4)NOTE: If the shift tray below is

blocking the screw hole,remove the shift tray.

2. Bracket [B] (! x 1)

3. Front door [C]

4. Rear cover [D] (! x 4)

5. Right cover [E] (! x 2)

1.1.2 INNER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNALCOVERS)

2. Inner cover [A] (! x 3, tabs [B] x 3)

B599R151.WMF

B599R102.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[E]



POSITIONING ROLLER

B599 2 SM

1.2 POSITIONING ROLLER

1. Open the front door.

2. Positioning roller [A] ("

x 1)3. Belt [B]

1.3 TRAY 1 EXIT SENSOR

1. Top cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS)

2. Open transport door [A]

3. Bracket [B] (! x 1, (# x 1)

4. Tray 1 exit sensor [C]

B599R103.WMF

B599R104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B][C]



ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCE SENSOR

SM 3 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.4 ENTRANCE SENSOR/STAPLER TRAY ENTRANCESENSOR

1. Entrance sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 1)

2. Entrance sensor [B] (! x 1)

3. Stapler tray entrance sensor bracket [C] (! x

1,# x 1)

4. Stapler tray entrance sensor [D]

1.5 STAPLER TRAY

1. External covers, front door, inner cover (! 1.1.1 EXTERNAL COVERS, 1.1.2INNER COVER)

2. Two clamps [A]

3. Harnesses [B] (# x 8)

4. Stapler tray [C] (! x 2 [D], ! x 2 [E])NOTE: At the front of the finisher, pull the stapler tray toward you and lift it out.

B599R105.WMF

B599R106.WMF B599R107.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[C]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[D]



UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPER LIMIT SWITCH

B599 4 SM

1.6 UPPER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS/TRAY 1 UPPERLIMIT SWITCH

1. External covers (! 1.1.1)

2. Place one hand under tray 2 (the lower tray), press in on the gear [A] to releasethe tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.

3. Place one hand under tray 1 (the upper tray), press in on the gear [B] to releasethe tray, and then support it with your hand as it descends.

4. Tray 1 back fence [C] (! x 4)

5. Sensor stay [D] (! x 2, (# x 4)

6. Plastic bracket [E] (! x 1)

7. Stack height sensors [F]

8. Metal bracket [G] (! x 1)

9. Upper limit switch [H]

B599R201.WMF

B599R109.WMF

B599R110.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]



EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

SM 5 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.7 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR

1. Tray 1 back fence (! 1.6)

2. Exit guide plate motor [A] (!

x2,#

x1)NOTE: Disengage the shaft of the exit

guide plate motor from thering.

1.8 LIFT MOTORS

1. Top cover and rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Tray 1 back fence [A] (! 1.6)

3. Sensor stay [B] (! x 4)

B599R111.WMF

B599R203.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]



LIFT MOTORS

B599 6 SM

4. Motor bracket [C] (! x 3,# x 2)

5. Tray 1 lift motor [D] (! x 2, drive belt)

6. Tray 2 lift motor [E] (! x 2, drive belt)

B599R204.WMF

B599R205.WMF

[C]

[D]

[E]



LOWER EXIT SENSOR

SM 7 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.9 LOWER EXIT SENSOR

1. Front door, external and internalcovers. (! 1.1)

2. Exit guide plate motor (! 1.7)

3. Guide plate [A] (" x 1)NOTE: Pull the shaft toward you

through the round hole.

4. Guide plate exit assembly [B] (# x 1," x 1)

5. Anti-static brush [C] (! x 2)

6. Bracket guide exit [D] (! x 2)

7. Lower exit sensor [E] (! x 1,# x 1)

B599R112.WMF

B599R113.WMF

B599R114.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]



LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

B599 8 SM

1.10 LOWER STACK HEIGHT SENSORS

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)

2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 2)


4. Feeler [C]

5. Lower stack height sensors [D]

1.11 TRAY 2 SHUNT POSITION SENSOR

1. Stapler tray (! 1.5)

2. Sensor bracket [A] (! x 1,# x 1)

3. Tray 2 shunt position sensor [B] (! x1)

1.12 STAPLER UNIT

1. Open the front door

2. Stapler unit [A] (! x 1,# x 2)NOTE: Hold the stapler holder [B] with

one hand as you remove thestapler. Do not twist or rotatethe stapler bracket as youremove it.

B599R116.WMF

B599R202.WMF

B599R117.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B] [C]

[D]



STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

SM 9 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.13 STAPLER ROTATION HP SENSOR

1. Stapler unit (! 1.12)

2. Carefully rotate the stapler holder [A].

3. Stapler cover [B] (! x 1)

4. Sensor bracket [C] (! x 1,# x 1)

5. Stapler rotation HP sensor [D]

1.14 TRAY 1 INTERIOR

1.14.1 TRAY 1 COVERS

1. Tray 1 [A] (! x 1)

2. Rear tray cover [B] (! x 1)

3. Front tray cover [C] (! x 1)

4. Bottom tray cover [D] (! x 2)

5. Bottom bracket [E] (! x 3)

B599R118.WMF

B599R207.WMF

B599R208.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]

[D]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]



TRAY 1 INTERIOR

B599 10 SM

1.14.2 TRAY SHIFT SENSORS AND TRAY RELEASE SENSOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Gear disk [A] (" x 1)

3. Tray shift sensors [B] (# x 1 each).

4. Tray release sensor [C] (# x 1)

1.14.3 TRAY 1 SHIFT MOTOR

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Motor bracket [A] (! x 3,# x 1)

3. Tray 1 shift motor [B] (! x 3, belt x 1)

1.14.4 BACK FENCE LOCK CLUTCH

1. Tray 1 covers (! 1.14.1)

2. Back fence lock clutch [A] (" x 1,# x1)

B599R210.WMF

B599R209.WMF

B599R211.WMF

[A][C]

[A]

[B]

[B]

[B]

[A]



FINISHER MAIN BOARD

SM 11 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

1.15 FINISHER MAIN BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Main PCB [A] (!

x 6, All#

)

1.16 PUNCH HOLE POSITION ADJUSTMENT

To adjust the position of the punch holes in the paper feed direction, use theappropriate SP mode.

To adjust the horizontal position of the holes, use the spacers provided with thepunch unit.

1. Rear cover (! 1.1.1)

2. Punch unit [A] (! x 3,# x 5)

3. Spacers [B]

The punch position can be adjustedby up to 4 mm using combinationsof the 3 spacers provided with thefinisher.

B599R206.WMF

B599R119.WMF

[A][B]

[A]



JAM DETECTION

B599 12 SM

2. TROUBLESHOOTING

2.1 JAM DETECTION

ModeShift 1 Shift 2 Staple

Jam Content

! ! ! Entrance sensor:no detection

After the exit sensor in the main machinewent off, the entrance sensor did not switchon for at least 2 s.

! ! ! Entrance sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, it didnot remain on for at least 150 ms.*

1

! Upper exit sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, theupper exit sensor did not remain on for atleast 59 pulses. *

2

! Upper exit sensor: jam

After the upper exit sensor switched on, itdid not switch off within 150 ms. *1

! Lower exit sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched on, thelower exit sensor did not switch on within 59pulses. *2

! Lower exit sensor: jam

After the lower exit sensor switched on, it didnot switch off within 150 ms. *

1

! Stapler trayentrance sensor:no detection

After the entrance sensor switched off, thestapler tray entrance sensor did not switchon within 102 pulses.*

2

! Stapler trayentrance sensor: jam

After the stapler tray entrance sensorswitched on, it did not switch off within 59pulses.*1

! Lower tray exitsensor: nodetection

After the transport motor switched on, thelower tray exit sensor did not switch onwithin 1260 ms.

*1: Timing for A4 L (differs according to paper size).

*2: Counted by entrance motor pulses because timing differs for feed out.



DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

SM 13 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

3. SERVICE TABLES

3.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those describedin the table below.

DPS101

1 2 3 4Mode Description

0 0 0 0 Default.

1 1 1 0 Free run. No paper.

0 0 0 1 Transportation See the note below.

NOTE: The following procedure repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.1) Make sure that the main switch is turned off.

2) Turn on DIP SW101-4 on the main board.3) Turn on the main switch.4) After the fisher completes the initialization, turn off DIP SW101-4.

Finisher automatically repositions the shift trays to the shipping position.

3.2 TEST POINTS

No. Label Monitored Signal

TP101 GND Ground

TP102 5 V 5 VTP103 RXD Received command data

TP104 TXD Transmitted command data

3.3 FUSES

No. Function

FU101 Protects 24 V.



GENERAL LAYOUT

B599 14 SM


4.1 GENERAL LAYOUT

1. Upper junction gate

2. Punch unit (option)

3. Stapler junction gate

4. Pre-stack tray

5. Stapler

6. Stapler tray

7. Tray 2

8. Tray 1

Tray junction gate: Directs paper either to the upper or lower exit. In staple mode,the stack always goes out to the lower exit.

Stapler junction gate: Directs paper either to the lower exit or to the stapler tray.

Pre-stack tray: When stapling multiple prints (A4 LEF, LT LEF, B5 LEF only) in thestaple mode, the first sheet of the second print waits here for the next sheet to feedwhile the previous stack is stapled. After the second print is fed, the first andsecond sheets are fed together to the pre-stack tray. This delay allows enough timefor the previous stack to be stapled without interrupting paper feed.

Shift trays: Tray 1 (upper) and tray 2 (lower) shift side to side in the sort mode,and raise and lower to receive ejected prints.

Stapler tray jogger: Employs positioning rollers and jogger fences to align stacksfor stapling.

Punch unit: Punches holes in stacked prints.

B599D118.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8



DRIVE LAYOUT

SM 15 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.2 DRIVE LAYOUT

1. Tray 1 lift motor

2. Entrance roller

3. Tray 2 lift motor

4. Upper exit roller5. Tray 1 shift motor

6. Exit guide plate motor

7. Lower exit roller

8. Tray 2 shift motor

9. Exit motor

10. Lower transport motor

11. Pre-stack motor

12. Upper transport motor

13. Punch motor14. Entrance motor

15. Stack feed-out motor

16. Jogger motor

17. Stapler motor

18. Stapler rotation motor

B599D104.WMF

B599D103.WMF

1

2 3

4

5

6

7

89

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18



JUNCTION GATES

B599 16 SM

4.3 JUNCTION GATES

The two junction gates can direct paper to three destinations.

In sort/stack mode for tray 1, the tray junctionsolenoid [A] is on, and the prints go to the upper exit(tray 1 is at the upper exit for sort/stack mode).

In sort/stack mode for tray 2, both the tray junction gatesolenoid [A] and stapler junction gate solenoid [B] areoff, and prints go to the lower exit.

In staple mode, the tray junction solenoid [A] is off andthe stapler junction gate solenoid [B] is on, and prints goto the stapler tray.

B599D205.WMF

B599D206.WMF

B599D207.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[A]

[B]



TRAY SHIFTING

SM 17 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.4 TRAY SHIFTING

4.4.1 TRAY SHIFT MECHANISMS

Tray 1 (Upper Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 1 [A] moves from side to side to separate the printed sets.The tray 1 shift motor [B], inside the shift tray, controls the horizontal position oftray 1 through the timing belt [C] and gear disk [D].

After one print set is delivered to tray 1, the shift motor turns on, driving the geardisk and the arm [E], and the tray drive unit moves to one side.

Two shift sensors [F] detect when to stop this side-to-side movement. There is acut-out in the gear disk. The shift tray moves in one direction until one of the shiftsensors detects the cut-out. Then the shift tray stops.

The next set of prints is then delivered, and the gear disk is turned in the opposite

direction until the other shift sensor is activated.

B599D106.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]

[D] [E]

[F]



TRAY SHIFTING

B599 18 SM

Tray 2 (Lower Tray)

In sort/stack mode, tray 2 [A] moves from side to side to separate the sets of prints.

The shift mechanism for tray 2 is similar to that used for tray 1. However, when thetray 2 shift motor [B] turns on, the arm [D] moves the entire end fence [C] from sideto side (not just the tray).

After the gear disk has turned 180 degrees, the cut-out in the gear disk enters thetray half-turn sensor [E], and the motor stops. When the next set of prints isdelivered, the motor turns on again, and moves the tray back to its previousposition.

B599D105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[E]



TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

SM 19 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.5 TRAY UP/DOWN MECHANISMS

4.5.1 TRAY 1

Introduction

The tray 1 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 1 [B] through gears andtiming belts [C].

Normal and sort/stack modes

When the main switch is turned on, the tray is initialized at the upper position. Todo this, the tray is moved up until upper stack height sensor 1 [D] is de-actuated.

During printing, if upper stack height sensor 2 [E] is actuated, the tray 1 lift motorlowers the tray for a specified time.

When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator [F] will pass through the tray 1overflow 1 sensor [G]. When the actuator drops below the sensor (to deactivate thesensor), the machine detects that the paper stack height has exceeded theoverflow limit.

The upper limit switch for tray 1 [H] prevents the drive gear from being damaged ifthe upper stack height sensor 1 should fail. If the tray is raised to the traypositioning roller [I], the switch will automatically cut the power to the tray 1 liftmotor.

B599D204.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]

[G]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[C]




B599 20 SM

Staple Mode

In staple mode, stapled stacks can be delivered to either tray, but they can only goto the lower exit. So, if tray 1 is selected, tray 1 [A] moves down to the lower paperexit.

Tray 1 lowers until the actuator [B] enters the tray 1 lower limit sensor [C]. Tray 1then lifts up until lower stack height sensor 1 [D] is activated.

When tray 1 is moved down to the lower exit, tray 2 must be moved down out ofthe way. So, tray 2 [E] is also lowered until the tray 2 shunt position sensor [F]detects tray 2 (or the top of the paper stack in tray 2).

The method of paper height detection is the same as for the upper exit area.

When the tray lowers during printing, the actuator will enter the tray 1 overflow 2sensor [G]. When this happens, the machine detects that the paper stack heighthas exceeded the overflow limit.

B599D204.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[G]

[F]




SM 21 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

Tray 1 release mechanism

When tray 1 is selected for staple mode, tray1 must be moved down to the lower paperexit. However, to move past the sensors atthe lower exit, the tray must be moved awayfrom the finisher.

To do this, the tray 1 shift motor turns untilthe cut-out in the gear disk enters the trayrelease sensor [A]. At this time, the arm [B]has reached position [C], and is pushingagainst the plate [D], in towards the finisher.However, the plate is fixed, so the traymoves out away from the finisher.

Then, the tray 1 shift motor stops, then thetray 1 lift motor lowers tray 1.

When the tray 1 lower limit sensor isactivated (as described on the previouspage), the tray has moved past the sensorsat the lower exit. The tray 1 shift motor turnson again until the gear disk activates thetray shift sensor [E]. This moves the trayback against the finisher.

Next, tray 1 lifts until the finisher detects thatthe tray is at the correct height.

When tray 1 is at the lower exit, the tray locksolenoid [F] is on, and the lever [G] locks thetray. This prevents the user from moving thetray out of position (the first tray has some

play when it is at the lower position).

Before tray 1 goes back to the upper exitarea, the tray lock solenoid [F] turns off tounlock the tray. In addition, the back fencelock clutch [H] turns on to hold the backfence [I]. This prevents the springs insidethe back fence from suddenly contracting(these springs normally keep the tray steadyduring side-to-side shift).

Then, tray 1 is released and it moves up to

the upper exit area.

B599D201.WMF

B599D202.WMF

B599D203.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[D]

[G]

[E]




B599 22 SM

4.5.2 TRAY 2

The tray 2 lift motor [A] controls the vertical position of tray 2 [B] through gears andtiming belts [C].

The paper height detection is the same as for tray 1.

When the tray lowers during printing, the tray is judged to be overflowing when thetray 2 overflow sensor 1 [D] is off and the tray 2 overflow sensor-2 [F] is on (see‘Normal Mode’ in the above diagram).

In the multi-tray staple mode (selected by the service technician), the machinedetects that the paper stack height has exceeded the overflow limit when theactuator [E] enters the tray 2 overflow 1 sensor [D].

The lower limit sensor [G] for tray 2 detects when tray 2 is at its lowest limit andstops the tray 2 lift motor.

The function of the tray 2 upper limit switch [H] is the same as for tray 1.

B599D109.WMF

Normal ModeMulti Tray Staple Mode

Overflow condition

B599D500.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[G]

[D]

[E]

[F] [C]

[H]

[D]

[E]

[F]




SM 23 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.5.3 PRE-STACK MECHANISM

NOTE: This feature is available only when using A4 L, LT L, and B5 L.

During stapling, the main machine must wait. This mechanism reduces the wait byholding the first two sheets of a job while the previous job is still being stapled. Itonly works during the second and subsequent sets of a multi-set print job.

The pre-stack junction gate solenoid [A] switches on after the first sheet activatesthe entrance sensor. This directs the sheet to the pre-stack tray [B].

The pre-stack feed roller [C] stops for a specified time after the trailing edge of thepaper has passed through the entrance sensor and stops the paper from leavingthe pre-stack tray.

At the same time, the pre-stack junction gate solenoid switches off, and the secondsheet is sent to the paper guide [D]. The pre-stack feed roller (controlled by thepre-stack motor) starts to rotate again for a specified time after the trailing edge ofthe second page has been passed through the entrance sensor, and then bothsheets are sent to the stapler tray together.

B599D200.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

B599 24 SM

4.6 JOGGER UNIT PAPER POSITIONING MECHANISM

In staple mode, each sheet of print paper is vertically and horizontally aligned when

it arrives in the stapler tray.

Vertical Paper Alignment

After the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor [A], thepositioning roller solenoid [B] is energized for a specified time to push thepositioning roller [C] into contact with the paper.

The positioning roller rotates to push the paper back and align the trailing edge ofthe paper against the stack stopper [D].

Horizontal Paper Alignment

When the start key is pressed, the jogger motor [E] turns on and the jogger fences[F] move to the waiting position, which is 8 mm wider on both sides than theselected paper.

When the trailing edge of the paper passes the stapler tray entrance sensor, the jogger motor turns on to move the jogger fences 5 mm towards the paper. After ashort time, the jogger motor turns on again for the horizontal paper alignment thenreturns to the waiting position.

B599D110.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]



STAPLER MECHANISM

SM 25 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.7 STAPLER MECHANISM

4.7.1 STAPLER MOVEMENT

The stapler can be moved from side to side or rotated according to the

requirements of the selected stapling mode.

Stapler Rotation

After the start key is pressed, the stapler rotation motor [A] rotates the staple unit[B] until the stapler rotation HP sensor [C] is activated. Then, the stapler movesfrom front to rear of the finisher.

When oblique stapling at one position has been selected, after the stapler moves tothe stapling position, the stapler rotation motor rotates the stapler 45 degrees(clockwise) at the stapling position before the stapler fires.

Side-to-Side Movement

The stapler motor [D] moves the stapler from side to side. After the start key ispressed, the stapler moves from its home position to the stapling position.

The amount of movement required to reach the stapling position is determined bythe size of the selected paper. If the two-staple mode is selected, the staplermoves to the front stapling position first, and then moves to the rear staplingposition. However, for the next print set, it staples in the reverse order.

After the stapling job is finished, the stapler returns to its home position,

determined by the stapler HP sensor [E].

B599D112.WMF

B599D113.WMF

[D]

[B][E]

[A]

[B]

[C]



STAPLER MECHANISM

B599 26 SM

4.7.2 STAPLER

The staple hammer is driven by the stapler hammer motor [A] inside the stapler.

As soon as the paper stack is aligned, the staple hammer motor starts. Whenstapling is finished, the staple hammer HP sensor [B] is turned on, and the staplehammer motor then stops.

The staple end sensor [C] detects the staple end condition and whether the staple

cartridge is installed or not. If a stapler cassette is not installed, or after the staplercassette runs out of staples, a message is displayed in the operation panel. If thiscondition is detected during a print job, the indicator will appear, but the print jobwill not stop.

The staple position sensor [D] detects if there is a staple sheet at the staplingposition. After a new staple cartridge is installed, the staple hammer motor turns onto transfer the staple sheet until the staple position sensor is activated by the staplesheet.

If a staple jam occurs and overloads the motor, this causes a staple jam messageto appear on the operation panel.

B599D208.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



STAPLER MECHANISM

SM 27 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.7.3 FEED OUT AND TRANSPORT

When stapling starts, the exit guide plate motor [A] switches on and opens the exitguide plate [B], so that the stapled stack can exit to the tray. The exit guide platesensor [C] detects when to switch off the exit guide plate motor.

After the prints have been stapled, the stack feed-out motor [D] starts. The pawl [E]on the stack feed out belt [F] lifts the stapled set and feeds it to the tray [G].

The exit guide plate closes at a specified interval after the stapled prints havestarted to feed out. Then the exit roller takes over the stack feed-out. The stackfeed-out motor turns off when the pawl actuates the stack feed-out belt homeposition sensor [H].

When tray 1 is passing this area on its way back up to the upper exit, the exit guidesafety switch [I] cuts power to the tray lift motor if the guide is opened too far. Thisprevents damage to the user’s fingers if they are inside the lower exit when the trayis moving up.

B599D115.WMF

B599D114.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[C][I]

[H]



PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

B599 28 SM

4.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

The punch unit punches holes in printed sheets, one by one. The punch unit isprovided with a new punch mechanism to improve the accuracy of punching.

4.8.1 PUNCH DRIVE MECHANISM

The punch drive mechanism is driven by the punch motor [A]. Each sheet ispositioned and punched by pressure from above. A certain time after the trailingedge of the paper passes through the finisher entrance sensor [B], the punch motorturns on and the paper stops. Then the punch clutch [C] turns on to make thepunch holes.

The home position is detected by the punch HP sensor [D]. When the cut-out in thepunch shaft disk [E] enters the punch HP sensor, the punch clutch turns off.

When the finisher has received the command that changes the number of punchholes, the punch hole motor [F] turns on until the disk changes the status of thepunch hole switch [G] (until it switches on or off). This indicates that the cover [H]and the punch cam [I] have moved to one side or the other to change the numberof holes.

B599D102.WMF

B599D101.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F] [G]

[H]

[I]




SM 29 B599

T w o - T r a y

F i n i s h e r

B 5 9 9

4.8.2 PUNCH WASTE COLLECTION

Waste punchouts are collected in the punch waste hopper [A] below the punch unitinside the finisher.

When the top of the punchout waste in the hopper reaches and actuates thehopper sensor [B], a message will be displayed on the operation panel after thecurrent job is completed.

This sensor also detects whether the punch waste hopper is installed. When thewaste hopper is taken out, the arm [C] moves down and this will actuate the sensorand display a message in the operation panel. This message is the same as for thehopper full condition.

B599D153.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]





LARGE CAPACITY TRAYB600





SM i B600

LARGE CAPACITY TRAY B600TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................... 11.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME....................................11.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR ........................................................................11.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE.......................................................... 21.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR ............................................................31.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................................41.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH..................................51.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ...............................................................................61.8 PAPER FEED UNIT...................................................................................... 71.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS.........8

1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER ...................................... 9

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 102.1 OVERVIEW ................................................................................................10

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................ 102.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................. 11

2.2 PAPER FEED.............................................................................................122.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE .................... 132.4 TRAY LIFT.................................................................................................. 142.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION...................................................................152.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM............................................. 162.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION................................................... 17





DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

SM 1 B600

L a r g e

C a p a c i t y T r a y

B 6

0 0


1.1 DETACHING THE TRAY FROM THE MAINFRAME

1. To draw the tray out, press thestopper [A] on the guide rail.

2. To install the tray, set the tray on theguide rails, keep the tray level, andpush the tray in.

1.2 REAR FENCE HP SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray rear side fence [A] (! x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] (! x 1)4. Connector of the rear fence HP

sensor [C]

5. Rear fence HP sensor [D] (! x 1)

B600R101.WMF

B600R102.WMF

[A]

[C][B]

[A][D]



CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

B600 2 SM

1.3 CHANGING THE TRAY PAPER SIZE

1. Screws [A] [B]

2. Change the position of the side fences.

3. Change the position of the rear fence HP sensor (! 1.2).

4. Before securing the right tray side fence, load the paper in the right tray, andadjust the fence.

B600R103.WMF

[A]

[B]

A4

Lt

A4

Lt



LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

SM 3 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.4 LEFT TRAY PAPER END SENSOR

1. Pull out the large capacity tray.

2. Left tray side fence [A] (! x 2)

3. Rear fence bracket [B] (! x1)

4. Left tray paper end sensor [C] (" x 1)

B600R104.WMF

[C]

[B]

[A]



TRAY LIFT MOTOR

B600 4 SM

1.5 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Tray lift motor [B] (! x 3," x 1)

B600R105.WMF

B600R106.WMF

[A]

[B]



TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH

SM 5 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.6 TRAY MOTOR AND STACK TRANSPORT CLUTCH


2. Tray motor [A] (! x 6," x 1)


4. Stack transport clutch [C] (! x 2, 2 bushings, 1 gear)

B600R107.WMF

[B]

[A]

[C]



PAPER FEED CLUTCH

B600 6 SM

1.7 PAPER FEED CLUTCH


2. Bracket [A] (! x 1)

3. Bushing

4. Paper feed clutch [B]

B600R108.WMF

[A]

[B]



PAPER FEED UNIT

SM 7 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.8 PAPER FEED UNIT

1. Stack transport clutch (! 1.6)

2. Paper feed clutch (! 1.7)

3. Paper feed unit cable [A]

4. Open the vertical transport guide plate [B].

5. Paper feed unit [C] (! x 2)

B600R109.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, AND RELAY SENSORS

B600 8 SM

1.9 UPPER LIMIT, RIGHT TRAY PAPER END, ANDRELAY SENSORS

1. Paper feed unit (! 1.8)2. Sensors

• Upper limit [A]

• Relay [B] (! x 1, 1 bracket)

• Right tray paper end [C]

NOTE: To remove the upper limit [A] or paper end sensor[C], press the lever [D]and hold it down.

B600R111.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]



PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

SM 9 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

1.10 PICK-UP/PAPER FEED/SEPARATION ROLLER

1. Paper tray unit

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)3. Separation roller [B] (# x 1)

4. Feed roller [C] (# x 1)

NOTE: If the rollers are incorrectly installed, the one-way clutch does not work.

B600R110.WMF

[A] [B]

[C]



OVERVIEW

B600 10 SM


2.1 OVERVIEW


1. Paper Height Sensors 5



4. Pick-up Roller

5. Upper Limit Sensor

6. Paper Feed Roller

7. Relay Sensor

8. Relay Roller

9. Separation Roller



12. Lower Limit Sensor

13. Left Paper End Sensor

B600D001.WMF

1 2 4 5 6 7 8

9

3

10

11

1213



OVERVIEW

SM 11 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0


1. End Fence Home Position Sensor

2. Left Tray Paper End Sensor

3. Paper Height Sensor 4


5. Paper Size Sensor

6. Main Board

7. Side Fence Open/Closed Sensor

8. Tray Sensor

9. Tray Motor


11. Upper Limit Sensor

12. Paper Feed Clutch


14. Right Tray Paper End Sensor



17. Lower Limit Sensor

18. Tray Lift Motor

19. Relay Sensor

20. Stack Transport Clutch

B600D101.WMF

4

1

23

9

10

11

12

13

17

1920

15

16

14

5 6 78

18



PAPER FEED

B600 12 SM

2.2 PAPER FEED

• This product uses an FRR type paper feed mechanism.

• The paper feed unit consists of the pick-up roller [A], paper feed roller [B],separation roller [C], and relay roller.

• There is a torque limiter (ferrite powder type) in the back of the separation roller.

B600D102.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE

SM 13 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.3 SEPARATION ROLLER AND PICK-UP ROLLERRELEASE

To prevent the paper from being torn when pulling out the paper feed tray, theseparation and pickup rollers are set so that they release automatically.

When the paper tray [A] is not inside the machine, the separation roller [B] is awayfrom the paper feed roller [C] and the pick-up roller [D] stays in the upper position.

When the paper tray is set into the machine, it pushes the release lever [E]. Thiscauses the pick-up roller to go down into contact with the top sheet of paper andthe separation roller to move up and contact the paper feed roller.

B600D108.WMF

B600D107.WMF

[E]

[D]

[A]

[A]

[C]

[B]

[E]



TRAY LIFT

B600 14 SM

2.4 TRAY LIFT

When the paper feed tray is put in the machine, the tray sensor on the back faceturns on and the tray lift motor [A] starts. The base plate lift shaft [B] is coupled tothe lift motor at shaft [C], so the base plate of the tray is lifted. After a short while,the top of the paper stack contacts the pick-up roller and lifts it up.

When this occurs, the actuator enters the upper limit sensor, the sensor turns offand the lift motor stops. When paper in the tray is used up, the pick-up roller isgradually lowered, and the actuator leaves the upper limit sensor (turning thesensor on). When this happens, the lift motor begins turning again. The tray willthen be lifted until the actuator enters the upper limit sensor (turning the sensor offagain).

When the tray is removed from the printer, the coupling between the lift motor andbase plate lift shaft is broken and the base plate goes into a controlled free fall(using a damper [D] to slow the fall and prevent damage).

B600D103.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E][G]

[F]



NEAR END/END DETECTION

SM 15 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.5 NEAR END/END DETECTION

This tray holds two stacks of paper, so the machine needs to monitor the status ofboth these stacks. There are seven sensors to do this.

In the right tray (paper feed side), three height sensors ([E] in the diagram on theprevious page) measure the height of the stack, and an end sensor detects whenall the paper is used up. As the amount of paper remaining in the tray decreases,the base plate rises and the actuator activates the paper height sensors. Whenpaper runs out in the right tray, the stack in the left tray is moved across to the righttray.

There are also two height sensors ([F] in the diagram on the previous page) and anend sensor in the left tray (paper storage side) ([G] in the diagram on the previouspage). When there is no paper in both trays, paper end is detected.

The machine determines the amount of remaining paper based on the sensoroutputs, as shown in the following table.

Amount of paper

100% 75% 50%

Paper Height Sensor 1 " " " " " " $ " "

Paper Height Sensor 2 " " " " " $ – " $

Paper Height Sensor 3 " " $ " " – – $ –

Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Paper Height Sensor 4 " " " $ $ " " " "

Paper Height Sensor 5 " $ " $ $ " " $ $

Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " " $ " " " "

Amount of paper25% Near-end End

Paper Height Sensor 1 $ " " " " $ $ –

Paper Height Sensor 2 – " $ " $ – – –

Paper Height Sensor 3 – $ – $ – – – –

Right Tray Paper End Sensor $ $ $ $ $ $ $ "

Paper Height Sensor 4 " $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Paper Height Sensor 5 $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $

Left Tray Paper End Sensor " " " $ $ " $ $

Right tray paper end sensor: " = Low (no paper), $ = High (paper present)Other sensors: " = Low (paper present), $ = High (no paper)

The following diagram is the sensor layout, as viewed from the front.

Paper Storage Side Paper Feed Side

Paper Height

Sensor 5

Paper Height

Sensor 4

Paper End

Sensor 2

Paper Height

Sensor 3

Paper Height

Sensor2

Paper Height

Sensor 1

Paper End

Sensor 1

B600D112.WMF



PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

B600 16 SM

2.6 PAPER STACK TRANSPORT MECHANISM

When the paper in the right tray is used up, the tray motor [A] and stack transportclutch [B] turn on. Then the rear fence [C] moves the stack of paper from the left

tray to the right tray.While the stack is being moved, it pushes the side fence aside, and the side fenceopen/closed sensor [D] detects that the fence is open.

After the stack has been moved across, a spring in the side fence moves the sidefence back, and the sensor detects that the fence is closed. Then, the tray motorreverses until end fence home position sensor [E] is deactivated.

B600D104.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D][E]



RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

SM 17 B600

L a r g e


B 6

0 0

2.7 RIGHT TRAY PAPER END DETECTION

The paper end sensor [A] detects when copy paper in the right tray runs out.

When there is paper in the tray, the paper pushes up the paper end feeler [B] andcauses the actuator to enter the sensor. When paper runs out, the feeler drops andthe actuator leaves the sensor, and the machine detects that there is no paper inthe tray.

When the tray is being pulled out, the lever [E] lifts the pick-up roller and this alsolifts up the feeler.

B600D106.WMF

B600D111.WMF

[D][E]

[A]

[B]

[C]





ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT

B601





SM i B601

ONE-TRAY PAPER FEED UNIT B601

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................11.1 COVER REPLACEMENT.............................................................................11.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...........................................................................2

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS .................. 21.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD ................................................31.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR .....................................................................................41.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH ...............................................................................41.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................................................... 5

2. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS............................................................62.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................6

2.1.1 MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT.............................................. 62.1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT............................................... 72.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT ..................................................................................8





COVER REPLACEMENT

SM 1 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1


1.1 COVER REPLACEMENT


B601R102.WMF

[A]



ROLLER REPLACEMENT

B601 2 SM

1.2 ROLLER REPLACEMENT

1.2.1 PAPER FEED, SEPARATION, AND PICK-UP ROLLERS

1. Paper tray

2. Pick-up roller [A] (1 hook)

3. Paper Feed Roller [B] (" x 1)

4. Separation Roller [C] (" x 1)

B601R101.WMF

[B]

[C][A]



PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD

SM 3 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1

1.3 PAPER FEED MOTOR AND MAIN BOARD


2. Paper feed motor [A] (# x 1, ! x 3)

3. Main board [B] (!

x 2)

B601R103.WMF

[A]

[B]



TRAY LIFT MOTOR

B601 4 SM

1.4 TRAY LIFT MOTOR


2. Tray lift motor [A] (#

x 1,!

x 2)

1.5 PAPER FEED CLUTCH



3. Bushing

4. Paper feed clutch [C]

B601R104.WMF

B601R105.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

SM 5 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1

1.6 PAPER FEED UNIT REPLACEMENT

1. Right cover [A]

2. Paper feed unit [B] (! x 2,# x 1)

B601R106.WMF

[A]

[B]



OVERVIEW

B601 6 SM


2.1 OVERVIEW


1. Pick-up Roller

2. Paper Feed Roller

3. Relay Roller

4. Separation Roller5. Tray

B601D001.WMF

5

1 2

3

4



OVERVIEW

SM 7 B601

O n e - T r a y

P a p e r F e e d

U n i t

B 6 0 1






5. Main Board

6. Paper Feed Motor

7. Paper End Sensor

8. Lift Sensor

9. Paper Feed Clutch


11. Tray Lift Motor

12. Relay Sensor

13. Paper Height 2 Sensor

14. Paper Height 1 Sensor

B601D101.WMF

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

14

13

1 2 3 4





BOOKLET FINISHER

B602





SM i B602


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT............................................ 1

1.1 REGULAR TRAY..........................................................................................11.2 COVERS ......................................................................................................1

1.2.1 FRONT COVER...................................................................................11.2.2 REAR COVER.....................................................................................31.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER .................................31.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER ......................................................................5

1.3 SIDE GUIDE.................................................................................................6

Removal...................................................................................................6Reassembly .............................................................................................61.4 STAPLER UNIT............................................................................................7

Removal...................................................................................................7 Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase..........................................................10

1.5 FOLDING UNIT ..........................................................................................13Removal................................................................................................. 13

Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase..................................................151.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE .......................................................16

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT...........................................................................161.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT.....................................................................18

1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT ...........................................................................201.8 TRANSPORT .............................................................................................221.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR ......................................................................221.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER.....................................................................22

1.9 STACK TRAY.............................................................................................241.9.1 STACK TRAY UPPER ROLLER .......................................................241.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE.....................................................................251.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER.......................................................27

Removal................................................................................................. 27Reassembly ...........................................................................................29

1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD .....................................................................................30

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD .................................................................. 301.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD.............................301.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER.......................................32

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR.....................................321.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR ...............................................................341.11.3 CONTROLLER................................................................................351.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD..............................................................351.11.5 LED BOARD....................................................................................361.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD ................371.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION.............................................38

Sensor Voltage ......................................................................................38



B602 ii SM

Punch Type............................................................................................39EEPROM...............................................................................................39

2. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................ 402.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS ........................................................................... 40

Punch Controller Board..........................................................................40

3. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS..........................................................41

3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT ...................................................................................413.2 DRIVE ........................................................................................................ 423.3 CONTROLLER...........................................................................................433.4 STACK TRAY.............................................................................................44

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT..............................................................................44Mechanism ............................................................................................44Stack-Tray Belt ......................................................................................44

3.4.2 SORT.................................................................................................453.4.3 STACK...............................................................................................46

Paddle....................................................................................................46Stack-Tray Stopper................................................................................ 46Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................47Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism................................................................48Home Position .......................................................................................48Stapler Switch........................................................................................48Safety Feature .......................................................................................48

3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE .............................................................................. 49

Action.....................................................................................................49Drive ......................................................................................................49Home Position .......................................................................................49Paper Position .......................................................................................50

3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 51Mechanism ............................................................................................51Stack-Tray Belt Home Position ..............................................................51

3.5 STAPLING.................................................................................................. 523.5.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................523.5.2 STAPLER ..........................................................................................53

Mechanism ............................................................................................53

Stapler Switch........................................................................................53Sensors..................................................................................................53

3.5.3 POSITIONING...................................................................................54 Action and Drive .................................................................................... 54Home Position and Ready Position........................................................54Staple Position.......................................................................................55

3.6 REGULAR TRAY........................................................................................ 57 Action and Drive ....................................................................................57Ready Position.......................................................................................57Paper Sensor.........................................................................................58



SM iii B602

Paper Full ..............................................................................................58Fail Safe Feature ................................................................................... 58

3.7 SADDLE STITCH .......................................................................................593.7.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................593.7.2 STACK TRAY....................................................................................603.7.3 STAPLER ..........................................................................................603.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT .......................................................................613.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT............................................................................... 62

Folding Plate Mechanism.......................................................................62Folding Plate Home Position..................................................................62Folder Rollers Mechanism .....................................................................63Folder Rollers Home Position ................................................................63Shape of Folder Rollers .........................................................................64

3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)........................................................................65

3.8.1 REGISTRATION................................................................................65Slide Unit ...............................................................................................65Home Position .......................................................................................65Registration............................................................................................65

3.8.2 PUNCH..............................................................................................67Types of Punch Unit...............................................................................67Drive ......................................................................................................67Home Position .......................................................................................67Two Holes and Four Holes ....................................................................68Two or Three Holes ...............................................................................69





REGULAR TRAY

SM 1 B602

B o o k l e t F i n -

i s h e r

B 6 0 2


1.1 REGULAR TRAY

Regular tray [A] (! x 4)

1.2 COVERS

1.2.1 FRONT COVER

1. Joint guard [A] (! x 2)

2. Front lower cover [B] (! x 2)

B602R901.WMF

B602R987.WMF B602R988.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]



COVERS

B602 2 SM

3. Open the front door [A].

4. Release the stopper and remove the knob

[B].

5. ! [C] x 2

6. Front cover [D]

B602R902.WMF

B602R903.WMF

[A]

[C]

[D]

[B]



COVERS

SM 3 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.2.2 REAR COVER

Rear cover [A] (! [B] x 2, ! [C] x 1)

NOTE: One of the screws is under the mylar [D].

1.2.3 LEFT/RIGHT TOP AND TRAY UPPER COVER

1. Front cover (! 1.2.1)

2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Screw (on the right top cover holder) [A]

NOTE: Remove the regular tray [B] if it isin its upper position.

B602R904.WMF

B602R905.WMF

B602R907.WMF

[A]

[C]

[A]

[D]

[B]

[B]



COVERS

B602 4 SM

4. Open the left top cover [A].

5. Fastener [B]

6. Strap [C]

7. Tray upper cover [D] (" x 1, ! x 1)

8. Right top cover (with the right top cover holder)

B602R906.WMF

B602R908.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



COVERS

SM 5 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.2.4 UPPER RIGHT COVER


2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Left top cover (! 1.2.3)

4. ! [A] x 1

5. Upper right cover [B]

(! [C] x 1, 4 hooks)

B602R910.WMF

B602R911.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



SIDE GUIDE

B602 6 SM

1.3 SIDE GUIDE

Removal

1. Regular tray (!

1.1)2. Front cover (! 1.2.1)

3. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

4. Regular tray holders [A][B]

(! x 1 for each)

5. ! [C] x 4

6. Side-guide fastener [D]

7. Open the side guide [E] and releasethe feeler link [F]. (The diagram showsthe view seen from the top.)

8. Side guide

Reassembly

Place the feeler link [A] between the feeler [B] andthe side guide. After installing the side guide, checkthat the feeler link moves with the feeler.

B602R912.WMF

B602R913.WMF

B602R914.WMF

[E]

[A]

[F]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[C]

[B]

[A]



STAPLER UNIT

SM 7 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.4 STAPLER UNIT

Removal

CAUTION: Do not remove the stapler [A]

from the stapler unit. The stapler and thestaple holder [B] must be in their originalpositions.

1. Open the front door [C].

2. Release the lever [D] and pull out thestapler unit.

3. Stapler knob [E]

4. Jam-release knob [F] (# x 1)

5. Front cover [G] (! x 3)

B602R915.WMF

B602R989.WMF

B602R990.WMF

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[A]

[B]

[C]



STAPLER UNIT

B602 8 SM

6. Gear cover [A] (2 hooks)

7. Side cover [B] (# x 1)

8. Gear [C] (# x 1), gear [D] (# x 1), andtiming belt [E]

9. Spacer (behind gear [C])

10. Gear (behind the spacer)

11. Belt guide [F]

(# x 1, Spring [G] x 1, ! [H] x 1)

12. Tension bracket [I]

B602R918.WMF

B602R919.WMF

[D]

[E]

[C]

[F]

[G][H]

[I]

[B]

[A]



STAPLER UNIT

SM 9 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

13. Timing belt [A]

14. Gear [B] (# x 1)

B602R920.WMF

[A]

[B]



STAPLER UNIT

B602 10 SM

Adjusting the Stapler Gear Phase

If you remove the gears [A][C] and timing belt [B],you must adjust the phase of the gears when youreassemble the machine. These gears and the beltdecide when the staple holder sends a staple andwhen the stapler bends the staple. The diagramshows the view seen from the rear.

1. By rotating the timing-belt gear [A],align the hole in the staple-holder gear[B] with the hole in the frame [C].

B602R917.WMF

B602R921.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[B]

[C]

[A]



STAPLER UNIT

SM 11 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

2. To fix the gear in position, place a thintool [A] such as an Allen key or

screwdriver through the holes.

3. By rotating gear [B], align the hole in cam

[C] with the hole in the frame [D].

4. To fix the gear in position, place a thintool [E] such as an Allen key orscrewdriver through the holes.

B602R922.WMF

B602R923.WMF

B602R924.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]

[D]

[E]



STAPLER UNIT

B602 12 SM

5. Install the timing belt [A].

6. Align the blue mark [B] on the gear withthe hole [C] in the frame, and install thegear.

NOTE: The stapler is in the homeposition when the blue mark andthe hole are aligned.

7. Remove the two thin tools that youplaced earlier to secure the gears inposition.

8. Install the spring [D], spacer [E], gears[F][G], and timing belt [H].

9. Reassemble the whole stapler unit.

10. Check the operation.

B602R925.WMF

B602R926.WMF

B602R927.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F] [G]

[H]



FOLDING UNIT

SM 13 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.5 FOLDING UNIT

Removal

1. Front cover (!

1.2.1)2. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

3. Open the right cover [A].

4. Magnet bracket [B] (! x 2)

5. Inner cover [C] (! x 2)

6. Tension plate [D]

7. Rotate the shaft [F] clockwise and lowerthe folder plate [E].

NOTE: You may have to rotate the

shaft about 20 times (7,200°).

B602R991.WMF

B602R929.WMF

[F]

[E]

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]



FOLDING UNIT

B602 14 SM

8. Timing belt [A] ($ x 1, 1 spacer)

9. Two connectors [B][C]

10. Stapler unit [D] (! 1.4).

11. Folding unit [E] (! [F] x 3)

B602R930.WMF

B602R931.WMF

[E]

[D] [F]

[A]

[B][C]



FOLDING UNIT

SM 15 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Adjusting the Folding Unit Gear Phase

If you remove gears from the folding unit, you must adjust the phase of the gearswhen you reassemble the folding unit.

1. Arrange the folding rollers [A] and cam [B] as shown in the diagram.

2. Install the gears as follows:• Align either of the two “"” marks [C] on the cam gear with one of the “"”

marks [D] on the relay gear. The “"” marks on the relay gear must be at oneo'clock [D] and five o'clock [E] respectively.

• Align the other “"” mark on the relay gear [E] with the protruding plastic tab(“#”) on the roller gear [F].

NOTE: When you have correctly installed the gears, the shorter teeth on the relaygear [D] are at the upper right, and the longer teeth are at the lower left.

B602R994.WMF

B602R932.WMF

[D]

[F]

[B]

[E]

[C]

[A]



STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

B602 16 SM

1.6 STACK TRAY AND JOGGER FENCE

1.6.1 STACK TRAY UNIT

1. Left top cover, tray upper cover (! 1.2.3)

2. Side guide (! 1.3)

3. ! [A] x 2

4. " [B] x 5, 2 standoffs

5. Release the front lock [D] and the rearlock [C] on the mechanical link of thestack-tray stopper.

B602R934.WMF

B602R935.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[B]




SM 17 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

6. " [A] x 3

7. Open the cable fasteners [B].

8. Release the cables [C].

9. Timing belt [D] ($ x 1, 1 spacer)

10. 2 standoffs [E]

B602R936.WMF

B602R937.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]




B602 18 SM

11. ! [A] x 2

12. Slide the stack tray [B] to the rear and

lift it.

1.6.2 JOGGER FENCE UNIT

CAUTION: Do not damage the jogger fences.

1. Stack tray (!1.6.1)

2. Place the stack tray unit on a levelsurface. Check that the fences [A] are insafe positions.

B602R938.WMF

B602R939.WMF

[B]

[A]

[A]




SM 19 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3. Timing belt [A]

4. ! [B] x 2

5. Jogger fence unit [C]

B602R940.WMF

B602R941.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]



STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

B602 20 SM

1.7 STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Stapler unit (! 1.4).

3. Connector holder [A] (! x 1)

4. Release all the cables (on the staplermotor unit) [B] from the clamps.

5. Release the cables [D] (" x 2 [fromthe stapler motor unit or from thecontroller])

6. Cable fastener [E] (! x 2)

7. Release the cables (" x 2)

B602R942.WMF

B602R944.WMF

B602R945.WMF

[A]

[B]

[D]

[E]

[F]



STAPLER MOTOR UNIT

SM 21 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

8. ! [A] x 3

9. Stapler motor unit [B] (! [C] x 1)

B602R946.WMF

B602R947.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



TRANSPORT

B602 22 SM

1.8 TRANSPORT

1.8.1 TRANSPORT MOTOR

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Cable guide [A] (! x 1)

3. Transport motor (with the timing belt

behind) [B] (" x 1, ! x 3)

1.8.2 TRANSPORT ROLLER


2. Upper cover (! 1.2.3)

3. Upper right cover (! 1.2.4)

4. Transport motor (!1.8.1)

5. ! [A] x 1

6. Bushing [B] ($ x 1)

B602R948.WMF

B602R949.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A] [B]



TRANSPORT

SM 23 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

7. ! [A] x 2

8. Gear [B]

9. Gear (with the pin behind) [C]

10. Bushing [D] ($ x 1)

11. ! [E] x 1

12. Paper guide [F]

13. Transport roller [G]

B602R950.WMF

B602R951.WMF

B602R952.WMF

[A]

[F]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[G]





STACK TRAY

SM 25 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

4. Lift up the stack tray upper roller [A],and push it down.

5. In the same manner, remove theother roller [B].

1.9.2 STACK TRAY PADDLE

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Rotate the gear [A] counterclockwiseand lift the stack tray upper roller unit[B].

B602R955.WMF

B602R953.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]



STACK TRAY

B602 26 SM

3. Push the bottom of the guide [A] andrelease the rear side of it.

4. Push the bottom of the guide [B] andrelease the front side of it.

5. Paddle [C]

B602R956.WMF

B602R957.WMF

B602R958.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



STACK TRAY

SM 27 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.9.3 STACK TRAY LOWER ROLLER

Removal

1. Jogger fence unit (! 1.6.2)

2. Slide the jogger fences (the frontfence [A] to the front, the rear fence[B] to the rear) and remove them.

3. Tray stopper [C] (2 clips)

4. Paper guide [F] (! [D] x 1)

B602R959.WMF

B602R960.WMF

B602R961.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]



STACK TRAY

B602 28 SM

5. Paper guide [A] (! [B] x 1)

6. Slide the bushing [C] ($ x 2).

7. Stack tray lower roller unit [E] (! [F] x4)

B602R962.WMF

B602R963.WMF

B602R964.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[E]

[F]



STACK TRAY

SM 29 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

8. Stack tray lower roller [A]

9. Belt [B]

Reassembly

When reassembling, align the positions ofthe belt pawls [A][B].

B602R965.WMF

B602R966.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]

[B]



CIRCUIT BOARD

B602 30 SM

1.10 CIRCUIT BOARD

1.10.1 CONTROLLER BOARD

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)2. Controller board [A]

(all"'s, ! x 1, 3 hooks)

NOTE: After replacing the controllerboard, remove the NVRAM onthe old board and install it on thenew board.

1.10.2 STAPLER HOME POSITION SENSOR BOARD

1. Stapler unit (! 1.4)

2. Guide [A] (! x 2)

B602R967.WMF

B602R969.WMF

[A]

[A]



CIRCUIT BOARD

SM 31 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3. Turn the knob [B] until you see thescrew [C] (on the home position sensorboard) through the opening. The homeposition board moves to the front when

you turn the knob clockwise.4. ! [C] x 1

5. Home position board [D]

(" x 1, 1 flat cable)

B602R970.WMF

B602R971.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]



PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

B602 32 SM

1.11 PUNCH UNIT, MOTORS, AND CONTROLLER

1.11.1 PUNCH UNIT AND PUNCH UNIT MOTOR

1. Right top cover (! 1.2.3)2. Chad box [A]

3. Release the cables [B] (" x 1).

B602R993.WMF

B602R973.WMF

[B]

[A]




SM 33 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

4. Sensor bracket [A] (" x 1, ! x 1)

5. Remove the whole punch unit from the saddlefinisher.

6. Washer [B] (! x 1)

7. Base cover [C] (" x 2, ! [D] x 2) (Thediagram shows the view seen from thebottom.)

B602R974.WMF

B602R975.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]




B602 34 SM

8. Sensor unit [A] (" x 2, ! x 3)

9. Punch unit motor [B] (! x 2)

1.11.2 REGISTRATION MOTOR

1. Remove the whole punch unit fromthe saddle finisher.

2. Registration motor [A]

(" x 1, ! x 2!

B602R976.WMF

B602R978.WMF

B602R979.WMF

[A]

[B]

[A]




SM 35 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.11.3 CONTROLLER

1. Rear cover (! 1.2.2)

2. Punch unit controller [A] (all"'s, ! x 2)

NOTE: After replacing the punch unit controller,adjust the sensor voltage and specify thepunch type (! 1.11.7). After replacingthe EEPROM, make the controllerinitialize the new EEPROM (! 1.11.7).

1.11.4 PHOTO SENSOR BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)

2. Release the cables [A]3. Board cover [B] (! x 1)

B602R980.WMF

B602R981.WMF

[A]

[A]

[B]




B602 36 SM

4. Photo sensor board [A] (" x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the photo sensor

board, adjust the sensor voltage(! 1.11.7).

1.11.5 LED BOARD

1. Base cover (! 1.11.1)

2. LED board [A] (" x 1, ! x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

B602R982.WMF

B602R983.WMF

[A]

[A]




SM 37 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

1.11.6 CHAD BOX FULL SENSOR BOARD AND LED BOARD

1. Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)

2. Remove the whole punch unit from thesaddle finisher.

3. Protector [A] (! x 2)

4. Sensor board [B] (" x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the sensor board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

5. LED board [C] (! x 1," x 1)

NOTE: After replacing the LED board,adjust the sensor voltage (! 1.11.7).

B602R984.WMF

B602R985.WMF

B602R986.WMF

[A]

[C]

[B]




B602 38 SM

1.11.7 ADJUSTMENT AND INITIALIZATION

Sensor Voltage

You make the controller adjust the LEDvoltage of the sensors after you havereplaced any of the following units andcomponents:

• Punch unit controller (! 1.11.3)

• Photo sensor board (! 1.11.4)• LED board (! 1.11.5)

• Chad box full sensor board (! 1.11.6)

• Chad box LED board (! 1.11.6)

Perform as follows:

1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board asfollows: 1 = ON, 2 = OFF, 3 = ON, 4 = OFF [H].

2. Push SW1002 [C] or SW1003 [D]. The controller starts to adjustthe LED voltage of the sensors.

3. Wait until LED1001 [E], LED1002 [F], and LED1003 [G] light.This indicates the controller ends the adjustment.

4. Set the DIP switch as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4 =OFF.

B602R995.WMF

B602R996.WMF

B602R997.WMF

[G]

[F]

[E]

[D]

[C]

[B]

[A]

[I]

[H]




SM 39 B602


i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Punch Type

After you replace the punch-unit controller, specify the punch typeas follows:

1. Set the DIP switch [B] on the punch-unit controller board asfollows: 1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = ON [J].

2. Push SW1002 [C] to select a punch type. As you push SW1002,the three LEDs [E][F][G] change as shown in the table. TheseLEDs indicate which punch type you have selected.

Punch Type LED1001 LED1002 LED1003

2 holes Lights — —

2 or 3 holes Lights Lights —

4 holes* — Lights —

4 holes** — — Lights

** For the North Europe model* Four the other models

3. Push SW1003 [D]. The LEDs blink.

4. Push SW1003 again. The controller stores the punch type in theEEPROM.

5. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4= OFF [K].

EEPROM

After you replace the EEPROM [A], make the controller initialize thenew EEPROM as follows:

1. Set the DIP switch on the punch-unit controller board as follows:1 = ON, 2 = ON, 3 = OFF, 4 = OFF [L].

2. Push SW1002 and SW1003 at the same time. The controllerstarts initializing the EEPROM.

3. Wait until LED1001, LED1002, and LED1003 light. Thisindicates that the initialization ends.

4. Adjust the sensor voltage (! Sensor Voltage).

5. Specify the punch type (! Punch Type)

6. Set the DIP switches as follows: 1 = OFF, 2 = OFF, 3 = OFF, 4= OFF [M].

B602R998.WMF

B602R997.WMF

B602R999.WMF

B602R997.WMF

[J]

[K]

[M]

[L]



DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

B602 40 SM

2. SERVICE TABLES

2.1 DIP SWITCH SETTINGS

Punch Controller Board

The DIP switches should not be set to any combination other than those describedin the table below.

SW1001

1 2 3 4Mode Description

OFF OFF OFF OFF Default

ON OFF ON OFF Sensor voltage adjustment See 1.11.7.

ON ON OFF ON Punch type setting See 1.11.7.

ON ON OFF OFF EEPROM initialization See 1.11.7.



GENERAL LAYOUT

SM 41 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2


3.1 GENERAL LAYOUT

1. Regular tray

2. Jogger fence

3. Exit roller

4. Paddle

5. Stack tray stopper

6. Transport roller

7. Cam*

8. Punch*

9. Punch base*

10. Chad box*

11. Stack-tray transport roller

12. Folding plate

13. Folder rollers

14. Booklet exit roller

15. Booklet tray

16. Booklet stopper

17. Stapler

18. Stack-tray lower roller

19. Stack-tray belt

20. Stack-tray upper roller

* Installed with the optional punch unit.

B602D901.WMF

10

11

12

14

15

16

17

18

19

7

8

9

20

4 5

13

321 6



DRIVE

B602 42 SM

3.2 DRIVE

1. Paddle motor

2. Transport motor

3. Stapler slide motor

4. Stack-tray exit motor

5. Stapler/folder motor

6. Rear fence motor

7. Front fence motor

8. Lift motor

9. Finisher controller

B602D902.WMF

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9



CONTROLLER

SM 43 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.3 CONTROLLER

The finisher controller board communicates with the controllers of the optional

punch unit and the copier or printer. Listed below are the functions of importantICs:

• CPU (IC13): Controls the sequence or the processing.

• EEP-ROM (CS12): Stores adjustment settings.

• Communication IC (IC11): Contains the program.

• EP-ROM (IC6): Communicates with other controllers.

• Regulator IC (IC1): Generates 5-volt power source.

Main unit

Controller board

Sensors

Switches

Motors

Clutches

Regulator IC (IC1)

CPU (IC13)

EEP-ROM (IC12)

Communication IC(IC11)

EP-ROM (IC6)

Punch (optional)

Controller

boardSensor

Motor

Finisher

Controller board

B602D903.WMF



STACK TRAY

B602 44 SM

3.4 STACK TRAY

3.4.1 SIMPLE OUTPUT

MechanismThe exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray. The rollers and belts on thestack tray transport the paper to the regular tray. The finisher operates like thiseven when it handles one sheet of paper.

Phase 1: The transport motor drives theexit roller [A] to transport the paper to thestack tray.

Phase 2: The paddle motor operates inreverse to lower the stack-tray upperroller [B] onto the paper.

Phase 3: The stack-tray exit motordrives the stack-tray upper roller [B], thestack-tray lower roller [E], and the stack-tray belts [C] to transport the paper to theregular tray.

Stack-Tray Belt

The stack tray has two stack-tray belts. Each stack-tray belt has a paper support[D] on its surface. As stack-tray exit motor rotates the stack-tray belts

counterclockwise (viewed from the machine front), the paper supports movescounterclockwise. While moving, these paper supports transport the paper from thestack tray to the regular tray.

For the home position of the stack-tray belt, see “Stack-Tray Belt Home Position” insection 3.4.5.

B602D904.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D] [E]







STACK TRAY

SM 47 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] drives the stack-tray guide. The stack-tray guide stays awayfrom the paper (the upper position [B]) under either of the following conditions:

• When the exit roller transports the paper to the stack tray

• When the jogger fences adjust the direction of the paper

The paddle motor drives the stack-tray guide onto the paper (the lower position [C])under either of the following conditions:

• When the stapler operates

• When the stack-tray upper roller, stack-tray lower roller, and stack-tray belttransport the paper

B602D906.WMF B602D909.WMF

B602D910.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]



STACK TRAY

B602 48 SM

Stack-Tray Guide Mechanism

The paddle motor [A] moves the timingbelts [B][G], which drive the cam [D]. Thecam pushes up the first lever [C], whichpushes down the second lever [H]. Thesecond lever lowers the stack-tray guide[I].

Home Position

The actuator [F] moves with the cam [D].The actuator interrupts the home positionsensor [E] while the cam does not pushthe first lever [C] (in other words, while the

stack-tray guide is in its upper position).

Stapler Switch

The second lever [H] moves with thestapler-switch actuator [J]. When the firstlever pushes the second lever (in otherwords, when the stack tray guide is in itslower position), the actuator pushes thestapler switch [K], turning it on. The staplercan operate only when this switch is on.

Safety Feature

The stapler switch, along with the stack-tray guide mechanism, works as a safetyfeature. The stapler operates only when the stack-tray guide is in the lower position.When the stack-tray guide is in this position, the user cannot access the staplerthrough the opening between the stack-tray guide and the stack tray. Therefore,staples do not injure the user.

B602D949.WMF

[C]

[A]

[K]

[J]

[I]

[B]

[D] [E]

[F]

[H]

[G]



STACK TRAY

SM 49 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.4.4 JOGGER FENCE

Action

There are two jogger fences: the front fence [A] and the rear fence [B]. These two jogger fences adjust the position of the paper [C] on the stack tray.

Drive

The front-jogger-fence motor [D] and the rear-jogger-fence motor [E] drive the jogger fences.

Home Position

There are two home position sensors: the front-fence home-position sensor [F] andthe rear-fence home-position sensor [G]. Each jogger fence is linked to an actuator[H][I]. When the main switch is turned on, the front and rear fence motors drive the

jogger fences until each home position sensor detected its actuator.

B602D911.WMF

[A]

[B]

[E]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[C]



STACK TRAY

B602 50 SM

Paper Position

To align the paper to the front of thestack tray, the jogger fences operate asfollows:

• The rear fence [A] pushes thepaper [B] to the front each time theexit roller transports the paper tothe stack tray.

• The front fence [C] stays at thefront side.

To align the paper to the rear side of thestack tray, the jogger fences operate asfollows:

• The rear fence [D] stays at therear side.

• The front fence [E] pushes the

paper [F] to the rear each time theexit roller transports the paper tothe stack tray.

B602D912.WMF

B602D913.WMF

Regular tray

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

Rear

Front

Regular tray

Rear

Front



STACK TRAY

SM 51 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.4.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Mechanism

The paper in the stack tray is transported to the regular tray as follows:

1. The paddle motor [A] moves the stack-tray guide to its lower position [G].

2. The stack-tray exit motor [B] drives the stack-tray upper roller [F], the stack-traylower roller [H], and the stack-tray belt [I]. The stack-tray belt has a pair of

paper supports [K] that push the paper [C] (!

3.4.1).3. When the paper supports have left the home position, the controller starts to

count the pulses of the stack-tray exit motor.

4. When the pulse count reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), thepaddle motor moves the stack-tray guide to its upper position [J].

5. The paper supports keep pushing the paper to the regular tray [D].

Stack-Tray Belt Home Position

When the stack-tray belt is at its home position, one of the paper supports [K]

pushes the actuator of the home position sensor [E].

B602D914.WMF

B602D916.WMF

B602D915.WMF

B602D906.WMF

[J]

[D]

[C]

[A]

[G]

[B]

[F]

[H]

[I]

[E]

[K]



STAPLING

B602 52 SM

3.5 STAPLING

3.5.1 OVERVIEW

The finisher staples the paper asfollows:

Phase 1: The exit roller transports thepaper to the stack tray [A] until thenumber of papers reaches a specifiednumber.

Phase 2: The jogger fences [B] adjust

the position of the paper. For the joggerfence mechanism, see section 3.4.4.

Phase 3: The stapler [C] staples thepaper.

Phase 4: The stapled paper [D] istransported to the regular tray.

When the finisher has conductedphases 1 through 4, it starts the sameprocessing from phase 1.

B602D917.WMF

[A][B]

[C][D]



STAPLING

SM 53 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.5.2 STAPLER

Mechanism

The stapler/folder motor [A] drives the stapler (! “Action and Drive” in section3.5.3).

Stapler Switch

See “Stapler Switch” in section 3.4.3.

Sensors

There are three sensors inside the stapler:

• Staple Home Position Sensor: The staple home position sensor detects thecam position.

• Staple Sensor: The staple sensor detects the staples in the cartridge.

• Staple Ready Sensor: The staple ready sensor detects the upper end ofthe staple.

The staple home position sensor above is different from the home position sensoron the bottom of the stapler (! 3.5.3).

B602D920.WMF

B602D918.WMF B602D919.WMF

[A]



STAPLING

B602 54 SM

3.5.3 POSITIONING

Action and Drive

There is one stapler [A] in the finisher. The stapler is on six rails [C][D][E][I]. The

rail [C], rail [D], rail [I], and rail [J] transmit the drive power:

• The rail [C] and rail [I] transmit the drive power of the stapler/folder motor.The stapler uses this power to staple the paper (! 3.5.2).

• The rails [D] and [J] transmit the drive power of the staple slide motor [H].This drive power moves the stapler to the front or rear.

In the diagram above, [B] is the paper stack on the stack tray.

Home Position and Ready Position

The home position sensor [G] is at the bottom of the stapler; the sensor blade [F] ison the frame of the unit. The controller references the home position sensor to setthe stapler in its ready position. Note that the stapler is not in the home positionwhen it is ready. The controller sets the stapler in the ready position as follows:

1. You turn the main switch on (or you close the front door of the finisher).

2. The slide motor drives the stapler from the rear side to the front side.

3. The home position sensor detects the sensor blade. The slide motor stops.

4. The slide motor starts in reverse to drive the stapler to the rear side. Thecontroller starts to count the pulses of the motor.

5. When the pulse count reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), the

controller stops the slide motor. The stapler is in its ready position.

B602D921.WMF

[F]

[G]Rear

Front

[C]

[D]

[E]

[H]

[I]

[J]

[K]

[A]

[B]



STAPLING

SM 55 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Staple Position

The controller counts the pulses of the stapler slide motor to calculates thedistance between the ready position (! Home Position and Ready Position) andthe staple position

Front-End One Staple

1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,the stapler is in the ready position [C].

2. The stapler slide motor starts to slidethe stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of the stapler slidemotor.

3. While moving to the front, the staplerlowers the stack-tray stopper [B] (! “Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.3).

4. When the pulse count reaches thepredefined number (not adjustable),the controller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the staplingposition [D].

5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler [A].

Rear-End One Staple

1. The stapler is in the ready position [F].

2. The stapler/folder motor drives thestapler. The stapler staples the paper.

The stapler does not move to the front.The stack-tray stopper [E] keepsstanding

B602D922.WMF

B602D923.WMF

[C]

[D]

[B]

[A]

[F]

[E]



STAPLING

B602 56 SM

Two Staples

1. Before the stapler slide motor starts,

the stapler is in the ready position [G].

2. The stapler slide motor starts to slidethe stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of the stapler slidemotor.

3. While moving to the front, the staplerlowers the stack-tray stopper [J].

4. When the pulse count reaches thepredefined number (not adjustable), the controller stops the stapler slide motor.The stapler is in the first stapling position [H].

5. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paler.

6. The stapler slide motor starts to slide the stapler to the front. The controllercounts the pulses of he stapler slide motor.

7. When the pulse cont reaches the predefined number (not adjustable), thecontroller stops the stapler slide motor. The stapler is in the second staplingposition [I].

8. The stapler/folder motor drives the stapler. The stapler staples the paper.

Saddle Stitch

1. The stack-tray upper and lower rollerstransport the paper to the stapler unituntil the center of the paper [K]reaches the stapling positions (! 3.7.4).

2. The stapler operates as described inthe previous paragraph (! Two

Staples).

B602D924.WMF

B602D925.WMF

[G]

[J]

[H]

[I]

[K]



REGULAR TRAY

SM 57 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.6 REGULAR TRAY

Action and Drive

The lift motor [I] drives the regular tray to adjust its height.

Ready Position

Before the stack-tray rollers and belts transport the paper to the regular tray, the liftmotor sets the regular tray in the ready position:

1. The lift motor lowers the regular tray. The controller references the lift motorencoder sensor [D] to count how many turns the motor makes.

2. When the number of turns reaches a predefined number (not adjustable), thecontroller stops the lift motor.

3. The lift motor operates in reverse, lifting the regular tray.

4. The paper height sensor [F] detects the edge [G] of the tray or the top of thepaper stack (!Paper Sensor). The lift motor stops.

B602D926.WMF

[E][B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[I]

[A]



REGULAR TRAY

B602 58 SM

Paper Sensor

As illustrated in the previous paragraph (! Ready Position), the paper heightsensor [F] can detect either the tray edge or the paper stack. Therefore, the signalsfrom the paper height sensor are not enough to let the controller know if any paperis on the tray.

To find the paper on the regular tray, the controller references the paper sensor [E].This sensor detects the paper but does not detect the tray.

Paper Full

While the stack-tray rollers and belts continue to transport the paper to the regulartray, the ready position becomes lower (! Ready Position). When the number ofpaper reaches about 500 sheets, the paper full sensor [B] is interrupted by itsactuator. When the number of paper reaches about 1,000 sheets, the lower limitsensor [C] is interrupted by its actuator. To decide the paper-full status, thecontroller considers these sensor signals and the paper sizes. The table lists thepaper sizes and the numbers of paper in the paper-full status.

Paper Size Number of Paper

A3, B4, DLT, LG About 500 sheets

Smaller sizes About 1,000 sheets

Fail Safe Feature

When the regular tray reaches its uppermost position, the upper limit sensor [A]detects it. The finisher stops its operation.

The regular tray does not reach this position in normal operations. The upper limitsensor works as a failsafe feature. If the regular tray fails to actuate the paperheight sensor [F] because of some hardware error, this failsafe feature works.



SADDLE STITCH

SM 59 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.7 SADDLE STITCH

3.7.1 OVERVIEW

The saddle stitch process consists of the following four phases:

1. The stack tray aligns the paper (!3.7.2).

2. The stapler staples the paper (! 3.7.3).

3. The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper in the folding

position (! 3.7.4).

4. The folding plate and folder rollers cooperate to fold the paper and to transportit to the booklet tray (! 3.7.5).

B602D927.WMF

12

3

4



SADDLE STITCH

B602 60 SM

3.7.2 STACK TRAY

The stack tray operates as follows:

1. The stack-tray stopper aligns the rightedges of the paper in the stack tray (! “Stack-Tray Stopper” in 3.4.1).

2. The jogger fences adjust the position ofthe paper (! 3.4.4).

3. When a specified number of paper [A] isstacked, the paddle motor operates inreverse to lower the stack-tray guide andthe stack-tray upper roller [B] onto thepaper.

4. The stack-tray exit motor drives thestack-tray upper roller and lower roller totransport the paper to the stapler unit.

5. The booklet clutch [D] turns on. Thisclutch transmits the driver power of the

transport motor to the stack-traytransport roller [C].

3.7.3 STAPLER

The stapler waits for the paper in the ready position, and operates when the paperis set to the stapler positions (! 3.5.3). When the finisher is processing one sheetof paper, the stapler does not staple the paper.

B602D928.WMF

B602D950.WMF

[B][A]

[D]

[C]



SADDLE STITCH

SM 61 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.7.4 PAPER TRANSPORT

The rollers and the sensor cooperate to transport the paper as follows:

1. When the leading edge of the paper stack reaches the folder home positionsensor [A], the controller starts to count the pulses of the transport motor.

2. When the pulse count reaches the number equivalent to the distance [B]between the stapler and the folding plate, the transport motor stops. The centerof the paper is in the folding position.

B602D930.WMF

B602D931.WMF

[B]

[A]



SADDLE STITCH

B602 62 SM

3.7.5 PAPER OUTPUT

Folding Plate Mechanism

The folding plate is driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folding plate operates asfollows:

1. The folding plate waits for the stack-tray transport roller to transport the paper.

2. When the center of the paper is set in the folding position, the stapler/foldermotor drives the folding plate [C] and the folder rollers [D]. The folding platepresses the paper between the folder rollers.

3. The folder rollers feed the paper about 10 mm, the folding plate returns to itshome position. The folder rollers keep feeding the paper.

Folding Plate Home PositionThe home position of the folding plate is detected by the folder home positionsensor [E]. The actuator [F] is linked to the folding plate by way of cam [A] andlever [B] (though they are separated in the diagram).

The sensor also detects the home position of the folder rollers (! Folder RollersHome Position).

B602D932.WMF

B602D933.WMF

[D]

[C]

[F]

[E]

[A]

[B]



SADDLE STITCH

SM 63 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Folder Rollers Mechanism

The folder rollers are driven by the stapler/folder motor. The folder rollers operateas follows:

1. The folder rollers [B] feed the paper pressed by the folding plate.

2. The folder rollers and the booklet exit rollers [C] feed the paper [D] andtransport it to the booklet tray [E].

Folder Rollers Home Position

The home position of the folder rollers is detected by the folder home positionsensor [F]. The folder home position sensor blade [A] is linked to the folder rollersby way of the gears [G][H] (though they are separated in the diagram).

The sensor also detects the home position of the folding plate (!

Folding PlateHome Position).

B602D934.WMF

B602D935.WMF

[G]

[F]

[A]

[H]

[D]

[E]

[B]

[C]



SADDLE STITCH

B602 64 SM

Shape of Folder Rollers

Viewed from the front or rear, each folder rollers is a half-circle [A] except bothends and middle. This structure prevents the rollers from crumpling the paper stack.

B602D936.WMF

Folding Plate

[A]




SM 65 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.8 PUNCH UNIT (OPTIONAL)

3.8.1 REGISTRATION

Slide UnitThe slide unit includes the punch motor[C], the punch [A], and paper edge andsize sensors [B]. This unit is driven by theregistration motor [E].

Home Position

The home position of the slide unit (inother words, the home position of the

paper edge sensors) is detected by theregistration home position sensor [F].

Registration

Registration is executed as follows:

1. When the paper [D] comes from the main

unit, the leading edge [I] of the paper isdetected by the paper edge sensor [H].

2. The registration motor starts to operate.The slide unit [G] moves to the front.

B602D937.WMF

B602D938.WMF

[H]

[I]

[F] [E]

[G]

[B]

[D]

[C]

[A]




B602 66 SM

3. One of the paper size sensors [A] thatcorresponds to the paper size detects therear end [B] of the paper.

4. When the slide unit is set in place, theregistration motor stops its operations.

5. When the paper edge sensor [C] detects thetrailing edge of the paper, the transportmotor [D] (of the finisher) stops.

B602D939.WMF

B602D940.WMF

B602D941.WMF

[A] [B]

[D]

[C]




SM 67 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

3.8.2 PUNCH

Types of Punch Unit

There are four types:

• 2 holes

• 2 or 3 holes (The user can select 2-hole punching or 3-hole punching fromthe operation panel or the printer driver.)

• 4 holes

• 4 holes

There are two 4-hole types: for the North Europe models and for the other models.

Drive

The diagram shows the 2 or 3 holes type, which has five punch cams [B]: two ofthem are for 2-hole punching and the other three are for 3-hole punching. Thepunch motor [A] drives the punch cams.

Home Position

The controller uses two sensors, the home position sensor [D] and the encodersensor [C], to set the punch cams in the home position. The controller fine-adjuststhe home position by referencing the encoder sensor signals.

B602D942.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]




B602 68 SM

Two Holes and Four Holes

When the finisher punches holes, the punch motor drives all punches at the sametime.

Phase 1

1) The punch is in the home position.The punch home position sensor [A]is on. When the first sheet of paper isset, the punch cam starts a forwardturn.

2) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, a hole is punched.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punch comes

back to the home position. Note thatthe punch cam [B] is not in theprevious position.

Phase 2

4) The punch is in the home position.The punch home position sensor ison. When the second sheet of paperis set, the punch cam starts abackward turn.

5) When the punch cam has made a 90-

degree turn, a hole is punched.6) When the punch cam has made 180-

degree turn, the punch comes backto its home position. Note that thepunch cam is not in the previousposition but in the same position asthe start fo phase 1.

Phase 3

• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602D943.WMF

B602D944.WMF

1) 2) 3)

4) 5) 6)

[A]

[B]




SM 69 B602

B o o k l e t

F i n i s h e r

B 6 0 2

Two or Three Holes

There are five punches. When the finisher punches holes, the punch drives allpunches at the same time. But three of them do not reach the paper (when thefinisher is punching two holes), or two of them do not reach the paper (when thefinisher is punching three holes).

Phase 1

Standby

Working

Working punches operate asfollows:

1) The punch is in the home

position. The punch homeposition sensor [A] is on. Whenthe first sheet of paper is set, thepunch cam starts a forward turn.

2) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, a hole ispunched.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punchcomes back to the home position.

Note that the punch cam [B] is notin the previous position.

Standby punches operate asfollows:

1) When the first sheet of paper is

set, the punch cam starts aforward turn.

2) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, the punch is awayfrom the paper.

3) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punch isback to the home position.

B602D945.WMF

B602D946.WMF

1) 2) 3) 1) 2) 3)

[A]

[B]




B602 70 SM

Phase 2

Standby

Working

Working punches operate asfollows:

4) The punch is in the homeposition. The punch homeposition sensor [A] is on. Whenthe next sheet of paper is set, thepunch cam starts a backwardturn.

5) When the punch cam has made a

90-degree turn, a hole ispunched.

6) When the punch cam has made a180-degree turn, the punchcomes back to the home position.Note that the punch cam [B] is notin the previous position but in thesame position as the start ofphase 1.

Standby punches operate asfollows:

4) When the next sheet of paper isset, the punch cam starts abackward turn.

5) When the punch cam has made a90-degree turn, the punch is awayfrom the paper.

6) When the punch cam has made a

180-degree turn. the punchcomes back to the home position.

Phase 3

• Phase 1 and phase 2 are alternately executed.

B602D948.WMF

B602D947.WMF

4) 5) 6)4) 5) 6)

[A]

[B]



B712

FAX OPTION TYPE 3245





SM i B712

B712

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. INSTALLATION................................................................................1

1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 11.2 FAX UNIT .....................................................................................................3

Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 3Installation Procedure ..............................................................................4When you use the hand set or an external telephone:.............................5

1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT ..................................................................................6 Accessory Check ..................................................................................... 6

Installation Procedure ..............................................................................7Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports................81.4 EXPANSION MEMORY ............................................................................. 111.5 HANDSET .................................................................................................. 12

Accessory Check ................................................................................... 12Installation Procedure ............................................................................13

2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................14

2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT............................................. 14

3. TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................15

3.1 ERROR CODES.........................................................................................153.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES......................................... 273.3 FAX SC CODES.........................................................................................30

3.3.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................303.3.2 SC1201..............................................................................................303.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE...................................................................... 31

4. SERVICE TABLES.........................................................................32

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE..................................................................... 324.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION...................................... 32

Entering and Exiting SP Mode...............................................................32

SP Mode Button Summary .................................................................... 33Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............ 34Selecting the Program Number.............................................................. 34

4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES............................................. 354.2 BIT SWITCHES..........................................................................................41

4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES........................................................................414.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES.............................................................................. 514.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES.......................................................................574.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES........................................................ 634.2.5 G3 SWITCHES..................................................................................714.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES............................................................................784.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES ...............................................................84



B712 ii SM

4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES...........................................................844.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES ........................................................................... 84

4.3 NCU PARAMETERS ..................................................................................904.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS......................................... 99

4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE.......................................................994.4.2 PARAMETERS................................................................................1004.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES.................................................................. 103

5. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS.......................................112

5.1 OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................1125.2 BOARDS .................................................................................................. 113

5.2.1 FCU .................................................................................................1135.2.2 MBU................................................................................................. 1145.2.3 SG3 BOARD....................................................................................115

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH ................................................................................. 116

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION .............................................................................116Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission.................. 117Immediate Transmission...................................................................... 117JBIG Transmission............................................................................... 117 Adjustments ......................................................................................... 117

5.3.2 RECEPTION....................................................................................1185.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES ...................................................... 119

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT...................................................................................1195.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER .................................................................... 1205.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION ............................................. 121

Mail Transmission................................................................................ 121

Mail Reception .....................................................................................122Handling Mail Reception Errors ........................................................... 124Secure Internet Reception ...................................................................124Transfer Request .................................................................................125E-Mail Options (Sub TX Mode)............................................................126Subject and Level of Importance ......................................................... 126How the Subject Differs According to Mail Type .................................. 126Subjects Displayed on the PC ............................................................. 126E-mail Messages ................................................................................. 127Message Disposition Notification (MDN).............................................. 128Handling Reports .................................................................................129

5.5 IP-FAX......................................................................................................130What is IP-FAX? ..................................................................................130T.38 Packet Format .............................................................................130

SPECIFICATIONS.............................................................................131

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS.................................................................... 1312. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS.......................................... 1323. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS............................................................................. 1334. IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS .........................................................................1345. MACHINE CONFIGURATION.................................................................... 135



PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

SM 1 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

1. INSTALLATION

1.1 PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

WARNING

1. Never install telephone during a lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack isspecifically designed for wet locations.

3. Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless thetelephone line has been disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when you install or modify telephone lines.

5. Do not use the telephone (other than a cordless type) during an

electrical storm. There may be remote risk of electric shock fromlightning.

6. Do not use a telephone or cellular phone to report a gas leak in thevicinity of the leak.

CAUTION

1. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord before youinstall the fax unit.

2. The fax unit contains a lithium battery. The danger of explosion exists ifa battery of this type is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the sameor an equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Discardbatteries in accordance with the manufacture’s instructions and localregulations.

NOTE FOR AUSTRALIA

Unit must be connected to Telecommunication Network through a linecord, which meets the requirements of ACA Technical Standard TS008.



PROCEDURE OVERVIEW

B712 2 SM

The flowchart shows the installation procedure.

Install the optional G3

unit in the fax unit.

Check the operations.

Specify necessary

settings.

Install the handset

in the copier.

Install the fax unit

in the copier.Install the expansion

memory in the fax unit.

Start

End

Do you install

the optional G3 unit?

Do you install the

expansion memory?

Do you install

the handset?

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

B712I910.WMF



FAX UNIT

SM 3 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

1.2 FAX UNIT

Accessory Check

Check the quantity and condition of the following accessories:

Description Q’ty

1. Fax key................................................................................2

2. Fax panel.............................................................................1

3. Stamp ..................................................................................1

4. G3 decal ..............................................................................1

5. Serial number decal.............................................................1

6. FCC decal (for North America model only) ..........................1

7. Cable holder ........................................................................1

8. Base bracket (for North America model only) ......................1

9. Core.....................................................................................1

10.Telephone line (for North America model only) ..................1

NOTE: You need the cable holder when you install the optional handset (North America model only).

B712I906.WMF

1 2 3

4

5

6

7

89

10



FAX UNIT

B712 4 SM


CAUTION

Do the following before you install this option:

1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in themachine.

2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the powerLED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the powercord and the network cable.

1. Remove the option cover [A]

( x 2).

2. Change the position of the joggerswitch [B] from "OFF" to "ON".

3. Carefully press down the MBU.NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is

seated correctly. If not, SC819occurs.

4. Install the fax unit [C] ( x 2).

5. Attach the serial number decal [D] onthe rear cover.

6. Attach the FCC decal on the rearcover (only for USA/Canada).

7. Remove the key cover [E]. Theninstall one of the fax keys [F].

8. Remove the panel cover [G]. Theninstall the fax panel [H].

B712I001.WMF

B603I902.WMF

[A]

[C]

[F]

[G]

[H]

[D]

[B]

[E]



FAX UNIT

SM 5 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

9. Attach the G3 decal [A].

10. Install the stamp [B] to the ADF [C] (if installed).

11. Connect the telephone line to “LINE 1” jack at theleft of the machine.


13. Make sure that the date and time are correctly set.

14. Enter the service mode. Then program the serial number into the fax unit (SP3-102-000). You can find the serial number on the serial number decal (attachedto the machine in step 5).

When you use the hand set or an external telephone:

Put the core [A] to the telephone line for the handset or an

external telephone as shown.

B603I903.WMF

G307I105.WMF

B178I564.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[A]



G3 INTERFACE UNIT

B712 6 SM

1.3 G3 INTERFACE UNIT

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. G3 board..............................................................................1

2. Interface board ....................................................................1

3. CCU drive board..................................................................1

4. Cable ...................................................................................1

5. Flat cable.............................................................................1

6. Clamp ..................................................................................1

7. Screw M3 x 6.......................................................................10

8. Telephone line (for North America model only) ...................1

B713I101.WMF

1 2 3 4

5678



G3 INTERFACE UNIT

SM 7 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


CAUTION


1. Print out all data in the printer buffer if there is a printer option in themachine.

2. Press the operation switch to the standby mode. Make sure the powerLED is not lit. Then turn off the main switch and disconnect the powercord and the network cable.

1. Remove the fax controller board [A] from the fax controller base [B] ( x 3, x 6).

B713I001.WMF

[A]

[B]



G3 INTERFACE UNIT

B712 8 SM

Do the procedures below for either single port or double ports.

For Single Port Installation

1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).

2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.

3. Connect the G3 board [C] to the interface board [D].

4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E].

5. Attach the interface board and G3 board to the spacers ( x 6).

6. Connect the cable [F] to the interface board and CCU drive board.

7. Attach the clamp [G] and bind the cable [F] with this clamp.

B713I002.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C][D]

[E]

[F]

[G]



G3 INTERFACE UNIT

SM 9 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

For Dual Port Installation

1. Install the CCU drive board [A] on the spacers ( x 4).

2. Install the flat cable [B] to the CCU drive board.NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.

3. Connect the two G3 boards [C] to the interface board [D].

4. Remove the "LINE 2" cover [E] and the "LINE 3" cover [F].

5. Attach the interface board and two G3 boards to the spacers ( x 8).

6. Connect the cable [G] to the interface board and CCU drive board.

7. Attach the clamp [H] and bind the cable [G] with this clamp.

B713I003.WMF

[A]

[B]

[C]

[D]

[E]

[F]

[G]

[H]



G3 INTERFACE UNIT

B712 10 SM

For Single and Dual Ports Installation

1. Install the fax-controller board to the fax-controller base ( x 6, x 3).

2. Carefully press down the MBU.

NOTE: Make sure that the MBU is seated correctly. If not, SC819 occurs. Alsomake sure that the jumper switch on the MBU is set to "ON".

3. Connect the flat cable to the fax controller board.NOTE: Make sure that the blue side of the flat cable faces up.

4. Install the fax unit to the copier.


6. Enter the service mode. Set bit 1 of communication switch 16 to “1.”

7. Set bit 3 of communication switch 16 to "1" (SP1-104-023) if you installed twoG3 boards.

8. Turn the main switch off and on.

9. Print out the system parameter list. Then check that “G3” shows as an option.

10. Set up and program the items required for PSTN-2 communications.



EXPANSION MEMORY

SM 11 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

1.4 EXPANSION MEMORY

CAUTION


1. Print out all data in the printer buffer.

2. Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord and thenetwork cable.

1. Install the expansion memory [A] into the memory slot.

2. Assemble the copier.

3. Print out the system parameter list, and check that the correct memory size is

shown (Fax SP6-101).

B712I002.WMF

[A]



HANDSET

B712 12 SM

1.5 HANDSET

The optional handset is available for the U.S. version only.

Accessory Check


Description Q’ty

1. Handset cradle ....................................................................1

2. Handset ...............................................................................1

3. Screw M3 x 8.......................................................................2

4. Screw M3 x 14.....................................................................2

B433I909.WMF

1 234



HANDSET

SM 13 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


1. Make two holes [A] in the scanner left cover.

2. Attach the bracket [B] enclosed with the fax unit ( x 2) as shown.

3. Remove the label [C] from the handset cradle [D].

4. Attach the cradle to the bracket [B] ( x 2). Then replace the label [C].

5. Install the handset [E] on the cradle.

6. Connect the cable [F] to the “TEL” jack at the rear of the machine.

7. Attach the cable holder [G].

NOTE: The cable holder is distributed with the fax unit (not with the handset).

8. Fix the cable to the holder.

B603I907.WMF

[B]

[C]

[D]

[F]

[A]

[E]

[G]



NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT

B712 14 SM


2.1 NOTES FOR FCU BOARD REPLACEMENT

1. When replacing the FCU board, remove the MBU board from the old FCUboard and install it on the new FCU board.

2. Adjust the date and time (UP — System Settings — Timer Setting — SetDate/Set Time).

NOTE: 1) Do not turn off the battery switch (SW1).2) Print out the system parameter list (SP6-101) to confirm the settings.



ERROR CODES

SM 15 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1 ERROR CODES

If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try tofix the problem as suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in theerror code display and on the service report.

Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action

0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within40 s of Start being pressed

• Check the line connection.

• Check the NCU - FCU connectors.

• The machine at the other end may beincompatible.

• Replace the NCU or FCU.

• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.

• If the rx signal is weak, there may be a bad line.0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed

printer.

• The other party pressed Stop duringcommunication.

0-03 Incompatible modem at theother end

• The other terminal is incompatible.

0-04 CFR or FTT not receivedafter modem training



• Try changing the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• Replace the FCU or NCU.• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to

another machine.

• If the rx signal is weak or defective, there may bea bad line.

Cross reference

• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4

0-05 Unsuccessful after modemtraining at 2400 bps



• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer.• Replace the FCU or NCU.

• Check for line problems.

Cross reference

• See error code 0-04.



ERROR CODES

B712 16 SM


0-06 The other terminal did notreply to DCS


• Check the FCU - NCU connectors.

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizer

settings.• Replace the NCU or FCU.

• The other end may be defective or incompatible;try sending to another machine.


Cross reference


0-07 No post-message responsefrom the other end after apage was sent




• The other end may have jammed or run out of

paper.• The other end user may have disconnected the

call.

• Check for a bad line.

• The other end may be defective; try sending toanother machine.

0-08 The other end sent RTN orPIN after receiving a page,because there were toomany errors




• The other end may have jammed, or run out ofpaper or memory space.

• Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• The other end may have a defectivemodem/NCU/FCU; try sending to anothermachine.

• Check for line problems and noise.

Cross reference

• Tx level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)

• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Dedicated Tx parameters - Section 4

0-14 Non-standard post messageresponse code received


• Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try

sending to another machine.

• Noisy line: resend.



Cross reference




ERROR CODES

SM 17 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


0-15 The other terminal is notcapable of specificfunctions.

The other terminal is not capable of accepting thefollowing functions, or the other terminal’s memoryis full.

• Confidential rx

• Transfer function

• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID

0-16 CFR or FTT not detectedafter modem training inconfidential or transfer mode





• The other end may have disconnected, or it maybe defective; try calling another machine.

• If the rx signal level is too low, there may be a lineproblem.

Cross reference


0-20 Facsimile data not receivedwithin 6 s of retraining





• Try calling another fax machine.

• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the firstline and/or rx cable equalizer setting.

Cross reference

• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6

• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line)from the other end notreceived within 5 s of theprevious EOL signal

• Check the connections between the FCU, NCU, &line.

• Check for line noise or other line problems.


• The remote machine may be defective or mayhave disconnected.

Cross reference

• Maximum interval between EOLs and betweenECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4

0-22 The signal from the other

end was interrupted formore than the acceptablemodem carrier drop time(default: 200 ms)




• Defective remote terminal.


• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier droptime.

Cross reference

• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3 Switch0A, bits 0 and 1



ERROR CODES

B712 18 SM


0-23 Too many errors duringreception




•

Defective remote terminal.• Check for line noise or other line problems.

• Try asking the other end to adjust their tx level.

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting and/orrx error criteria.

Cross reference

• Rx cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)

• Rx error criteria - Communication Switch 02, bits 0and 1

0-30 The other terminal did notreply to NSS(A) in AI shortprotocol mode



•

Try adjusting the tx level and/or cable equalizersettings.

• The other terminal may not be compatible.

Cross reference

• Dedicated tx parameters - Section 4

0-32 The other terminal sent aDCS, which containedfunctions that the receivingmachine cannot handle.

• Check the protocol dump list.

• Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-52 Polarity changed duringcommunication

• Check the line connection.Retry communication.

0-55 FCE does not detect the

SG3-V34.

• FCU firmware or board defective.

• SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.

0-56 The stored message dataexceeds the capacity of themailbox in the SG3-V34.

• SG3-V34 firmware or board defective.

0-70 The communication modespecified in CM/JM was notavailable

(V.8 calling and calledterminal)

• The other terminal did not have a compatiblecommunication mode (e.g., the other terminal wasa V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)

• A polling tx file was not ready at the other terminalwhen polling rx was initiated from the callingterminal.

0-74 The calling terminal fell back

to T.30 mode, because itcould not detect ANSamafter sending CI.

• The calling terminal could not detect ANSam due

to noise, etc.• ANSam was too short to detect.

• Check the line connection and condition.

• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-75 The called terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a CM inresponse to ANSam(ANSam timeout).

• The terminal could not detect ANSam.


• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.



ERROR CODES

SM 19 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


0-76 The calling terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a JM inresponse to a CM

(CM timeout).

• The called terminal could not detect a CM due tonoise, etc.


•

Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-77 The called terminal fell backto T.30 mode, because itcould not detect a CJ inresponse to JM

(JM timeout).

• The calling terminal could not detect a JM due tonoise, etc.

• A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot passJM to the other end.


• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.

0-79 The called terminal detectedCI while waiting for a V.21signal.

Check for line noise or other line problems.

If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back toT.30 mode.

0-80 The line was disconnected

due to a timeout in V.34phase 2 – line probing.

0-81 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in V.34phase 3 – equalizer training.

0-82 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in the V.34phase 4 – control channelstart-up.

0-83 The line was disconnecteddue to a timeout in the V.34control channel restart

sequence.

• The guard timer expired while starting these

phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or lowsignal level can cause these errors.

If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:

• Try making a call at a later time.

• Try using V.17 or a slower modem usingdedicated tx parameters.

• Try increasing the tx level.

• Try adjusting the tx cable equalizer setting.

If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer setting.

• Try increasing the tx level.

• Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the sameerror is frequent when receiving from multiplesenders.

0-84 The line was disconnecteddue to abnormal signaling inV.34 phase 4 – controlchannel start-up.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s.

• Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-85 The line was disconnecteddue to abnormal signaling inV.34 control channel restart.

• The signal did not stop within 10 s.


• If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU.

0-86 The line was disconnectedbecause the other terminalrequested a data rate usingMPh that was not availablein the currently selectedsymbol rate.

• The other terminal was incompatible.

• Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.

0-87 The control channel startedafter an unsuccessfulprimary channel.

• The receiving terminal restarted the controlchannel because data reception in the primarychannel was not successful.

• This does not result in an error communication.

0-88 The line was disconnectedbecause PPR wastransmitted/received 9(default) times within thesame ECM frame.

• Try using a lower data rate at the start.

• Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.



ERROR CODES

B712 20 SM


2-11 Only one V.21 connectionflag was received

• Replace the FCU.

2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU.

2-13 Modem initialization error•

Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.• Update the modem ROM.


2-23 JBIG compression orreconstruction error


2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.

2-25 JBIG data reconstructionerror (BIH error)

2-26 JBIG data reconstructionerror (Float marker error)

2-27 JBIG data reconstructionerror (End marker error)

2-28 JBIG data reconstructionerror (Timeout)

• JBIG data error

• Check the sender’s JBIG function.

• Update the MBU ROM.

2-29 JBIG trailing edge makererror

• FCU defective

• Check the destination device.

2-50 The machine resets itself fora fatal FCU system error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace theFCU.

2-51 The machine resets itselfbecause of a fatalcommunication error

• If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace theFCU.

2-53 Snd msg() in the manualtask is an error because the

mailbox for the operationtask is full.

• The user did the same operation many times, andthis gave too much load to the machine.

4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.

• Check the connection between FCU and NCU.


• Replace the FCU or the NCU.

4-10 Communication failedbecause of an ID Codemismatch (Closed Network)or Tel. No./CSI mismatch(Protection against WrongConnections)

• Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSIsprogrammed correctly, then resend.

• The machine at the other end may be defective.

5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU.

5-20 Storage impossible becauseof a lack of memory

5-21 Memory overflow

• Temporary memory shortage.

• Test the SAF memory.

• Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board

5-23 Print data error whenprinting a substitute rx orconfidential rx message

• Test the SAF memory.

• Ask the other end to resend the message.

• Replace the FCU or optional EXMEM board.

5-25 SAF file access error • Replace the FCU or EXMEM board.

6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time outduring reception of facsimiledata

• Try adjusting the rx cable equalizer.

• Replace the FCU or NCU.





ERROR CODES

B712 22 SM


14-01 SMTP Connection Failed Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)because the server could not be found.

• The IP address for the SMTP server is not storedin the machine.

• The DNS IP address is not registered.

• Network not operating correctly.

• Defective PC that does file transfer

14-02 No Service by SMTPService (421)

SMTP server operating incorrectly.

14-03 Access to SMTP ServerDenied (450)

Failed to access the SMTP server because theaccess is denied.

• SMTP server operating incorrectly


14-04 Access to SMTP ServerDenied (550)

SMTP server operating incorrectly

14-05 SMTP Server HDD Full(452)

Failed to access the SMTP server because the HDDis full.

• SMTP Server hard disk full.

• Insufficient HDD space in the PC that does filetransfer

14-06 User Not Found on SMTPServer (551)

The user does not exist locally.

14-07 Data Send to SMTP ServerFailed (4XX)

Failed to access the SMTP server because thetransmission fails.



14-08 Data Send to SMTP ServerFailed (5XX)

Failed to access the SMTP server because thetransmission fails.


• Defective PC that does file transfer 14-09 Authorization Failed for

Sending to SMTP Server• POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization failed.

• Incorrect setting for file transfer

14-10 Addresses Exceeded Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the limitfor the SMTP server.

14-11 Buffer Full The send buffer is full so the transmission could notbe completed. Buffer is full due to using Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being used send mail at thesame time.

14-12 Data Size Too Large Transmission was cancelled because the detectedsize of the file was too large.

14-13 Send Cancelled Processing is interrupted because the user pressedStop.

14-30 MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:

• The number of files created with otherapplications on the Document Server hasexceeded the limit.

• HDD is full or not operating correctly.

• Software error.



ERROR CODES

SM 23 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


14-31 UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:

• Not enough space in UFS area to handle bothScan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.

•

HDD full or not operating correctly.• Software error.

14-32 Cancelled the Mail Due toError Detected by NFAX

Error detected with NFAX and send was cancelleddue to a software error.

14-33 No Mail Address For theMachine

Neither the mail address of the machine nor the mailaddress of the network administrator is registered.

14-50 Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU mail job task error, the send wascancelled:

• Address book was being edited during creation ofthe notification mail.

• Software error.

14-51 UCS Destination Download

Error

Not even one return notification can be downloaded:

• The address book was being edited.

• The number for the specified destination does notexist (it was deleted or edited after the job wascreated).

14-60 Send Cancel Failed The cancel operation by the user failed to cancel thesend operation.

14-61 Notification Mail Send Failedfor All Destinations

All addresses for return notification mail failed.

15-01 POP3/IMAP4 Server NotRegistered

At startup, the system detected that the IP addressof the POP3/IMAP4 server has not been registeredin the machine.

15-02 POP3/IMAP4 Mail AccountInformation Not Registered The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not beenregistered.

15-03 Mail Address Not Registered The mail address has not been registered.

15-10 DCS Mail Receive Error Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.

15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not befound:

• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server isnot stored in the machine.

• The DNS IP address is not registered.

• Network not operating correctly.

15-12 Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:

• Incorrect IFAX user name or password.

• Access was attempted by another device, such asthe PC.

• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.

15-13 Receive Buffer Full Occurs only during manual reception. Transmissioncannot be received due to insufficient buffer space.The buffer is being used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.

15-14 Mail Header Format Error The mail header is not standard format. Forexample, the Date line description is incorrect.

15-15 Mail Divide Error The e-mail is not in standard format. There is noboundary between parts of the e-mail, including the

header.



ERROR CODES

B712 24 SM


15-16 Mail Size Receive Error The mail cannot be received because it is too large.

15-17 Receive Timeout May occur during manual receiving only becausethe network is not operating correctly.

15-18 Incomplete Mail Received Only one portion of the mail was received.15-31 Final Destination forTransfer Request ReceptionFormat Error

The format of the final destination for the transferrequest was incorrect.

15-39 Send/Delivery DestinationError

The transmission cannot be delivered to the finaldestination:

• Destination file format is incorrect.

• Could not create the destination for the filetransmission.

15-41 SMTP Receive Error Reception rejected because the transactionexceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX” setting.

15-42 Off Ramp Gateway Error The delivery destination address was specified with

Off Ramp Gateway OFF.15-43 Address Format Error Format error in the address of the Off Ramp

Gateway.

15-44 Addresses Over The number of addresses for the Off RampGateway exceeded the limit of 30.

15-61 Attachment File FormatError

The attached file is not TIFF format.

15-62 TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:

Resolution error

• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi withoutextended memory.

•

Resolution is not supported.Page size error

• The page size was larger than A3.

Compression error

• File was compressed with other than MH, MR, orMMR.

15-63 TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not bereceived because the TIFF header is incorrect:

• The TIFF file attachment is a type not supported.

• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.

• Software error.

15-64 TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFFdecompression error:

• The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.

• Software error.

15-71 Not Binary Image Data The file could not be received because theattachment was not binary image data.

15-73 MDN Status Error Could not find the Disposition line in the header ofthe Return Receipt, or there is a problem with thefirmware.

15-74 MDN Message ID Error Could not find the Original Message ID line in theheader of the Return Receipt, or there is a problemwith the firmware.



ERROR CODES

SM 25 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


15-80 Mail Job Task Read Error Could not receive the transmission because thedestination buffer is full and the destination couldnot be created (this error may occur when receivinga transfer request or a request for notification of

reception).

15-81 Repeated DestinationRegistration Error

Could not repeat receive the transmission becausethe destination buffer is full and the destinationcould not be created (this error may occur whenreceiving a transfer request or a request fornotification of reception).

15-91 Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the finaldestination:

• The format of the final destination or the transferdestination is incorrect.

• Destinations are full so the final and transferdestinations could not be created.

15-92 Memory Overflow Transmission could not be received becausememory overflowed during the transaction.

15-93 Memory Access Error Transaction could not complete due to a malfunctionof SAF memory.

15-94 Incorrect ID Code The machine rejected an incoming e-mail fortransfer request, because the ID code in theincoming e-mail did not match the ID coderegistered in the machine.

15-95 Transfer Station Function The machine rejected an incoming e-mail fortransfer because the transfer function wasunavailable.

22-00 Original length exceeded themaximum scan length

Divide the original into more than one page.Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower the

scan resolution if possible.

Add optional page memory.

22-01 Memory overflow whilereceiving

Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.

Delete unnecessary files from memory.

Transfer the substitute reception files to an anotherfax machine, if the machine’s printer is busy or outof order.

Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.

22-02 Tx or rx job stalled due toline disconnection at the

other end

The job started normally but did not finish normally;data may or may not have been received fully.

Restart the machine.

22-04 The machine cannot storereceived data in the SAF

• Update the ROM


22-05 No G3 parameterconfirmation answer

• Defective FCU board or firmware.

23-00 Data read timeout duringconstruction

Restart the machine.

Replace the FCU

25-00 The machine softwareresets itself after a fataltransmission error occurred

• Update the ROM


F0-xx V.34 modem error Replace the FCU.



ERROR CODES

B712 26 SM


F6-xx SG3-V34 modem error Update the SG3-V34 modem ROM.

Replace the SG3-V34 board.


•

Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.



IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

SM 27 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

3.2 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES

Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part ofthe network is causing the problem.

CommunicationRoute

Item Action Remarks

1. Connection withthe LAN

• Check that the LANcable is connected tothe machine.

• Check that the LEDson the hub are lit.

General LAN2. LAN activity • Check that other

devices connected tothe LAN cancommunicate throughthe LAN.

1. Network settings onthe PC

• Check the networksettings on the PC.

• Is the IP addressregistered in theTCP/IP properties inthe network setupcorrect? Check the IPaddress with theadministrator of thenetwork.

2. Check that PC canconnect with themachine

• Use the “ping”command on the PCto contact themachine.

• At the MS-DOSprompt, type ping thenthe IP address of themachine, then pressEnter.

Between IFAXand PC

3. LAN settings in themachine

• Check the LANparameters

• Check if there is an IPaddress conflict withother PCs.

• Use the “Network”function in the UserTools.

• If there is an IPaddress conflict,inform theadministrator.

Betweenmachine and e-mail server

1. LAN settings in themachine

• Check the LANparameters

•

Check if there is an IPaddress conflict withother PCs.

• Use the “Network”function in the User

Tools.• If there is an IP

address conflict,inform theadministrator.




B712 28 SM

CommunicationRoute

Item Action Remarks

2. E-mail account onthe server

• Make sure that themachine can log intothe e-mail server.

• Check that theaccount andpassword stored inthe server are thesame as in themachine.

• Ask the administratorto check.

Betweenmachine and e-mail server

3. E-mail server • Make sure that theclient devices whichhave an account inthe server cansend/receive e-mail.


• Send a test e-mailwith the machine’sown number as thedestination. Themachine receives thereturned e-mail if thecommunication isperformedsuccessfully.

1. E-mail account onthe Server

• Make sure that the PCcan log into the e-mailserver.

• Check that theaccount andpassword stored inthe server are thesame as in themachine.


2. E-mail server • Make sure that theclient devices whichhave an account inthe server cansend/receive e-mail.


• Send a test e-mailwith the machine’sown number as thedestination. Themachine receives thereturned e-mail if thecommunication isperformedsuccessfully.

Between e-mailserver andinternet

3. Destination e-mailaddress

Make sure that the e-mail address is actuallyused.

Check that the e-mailaddress contains noincorrect characterssuch as spaces.




SM 29 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

CommunicationRoute

Item Action Remarks

Between e-mail

server andinternet

4. Router settings Use the “ping” commandto contact the router.

Check that other devicesconnected to the routercan sent data over therouter.

• Ask the administratorof the server to check.

Between e-mailserver andinternet

1. Error message bye-mail from thenetwork of thedestination.

• Check whether e-mailcan be sent to anotheraddress on the samenetwork, using theapplication e-mailsoftware.

• Check the error e-mailmessage.

• Inform theadministrator of theLAN.



FAX SC CODES

B712 30 SM

3.3 FAX SC CODES

3.3.1 OVERVIEW

When the FCU detects a Fax SC Code condition, it resets itself automatically(default setting). This initializes the FCU without erasing files in the SAF memory orresetting the switches.

For details on Fax SC Codes 1201, refer to the following sections.

If bit 7 of System Switch 1F is changed to “1”, when the FCU detects a Fax SCCode condition, it displays the code on the display and stops working until the faxunit is initialized using one of the following methods:

Hold down the “7” and “9” keys for more than10 s.

Turn off the main power switch and turn itback on.

3.3.2 SC1201

When the FCU detects an unrecoverable error in the SRAM, which requires acomplete SRAM initialization, the fax unit displays this SC Code and stops.There is no way to recover from this error condition without a complete SRAMinitialization (all the user and service programmed data will be erased).

The possible causes are:

• SRAM backup battery defect, or SW1 on the MBU is at the “OFF” position.• The SRAM on the MBU has a physical defect.• SD card connection was loose.



FAX SC CODES

SM 31 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

3.3.3 FAX SC CODE TABLE

SC Code DescriptionSuggested

ActionSys Switch1F bit 7 = 0

Sys Switch1F bit 7 = 1

1001 FCU error Initialize the fax unit.

(See section 2.3.1.forthe initializationprocedure)

Automaticreset

1201 Unrecoverable FCU -SRAM error

Refer to section 2.3.2. “Service Call”display

1299

1305

1310

1311

1312

1401

1405

Software error Initialize the fax unit. Automaticreset

SC Codedisplay




B712 32 SM

4. SERVICE TABLES

CAUTION

Never turn off the main power switch when the power LED is lit or flashing.To avoid damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation powerswitch to switch the power off, wait for the power LED to go off, and thenswitch the main power switch off.

NOTE: The main power LED ( ) lights or flashes while the platen cover or ARDF is open, while the main machine is communicating with a facsimileor the network server, or while the machine is accessing the hard disk ormemory for reading or writing data.

4.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE

4.1.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE OPERATION

The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change modes,and adjust values.

Entering and Exiting SP Mode

1. Press the Clear Mode key.

2. Use the keypad to enter “107”.

3. Hold down Clear/Stop for at least 3 seconds.

Fax SP 4. On the touch-panel, press Fax SP.

Exit 5. Press Exit twice to return to the copy window.




SM 33 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

SP Mode Button Summary

Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.

Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.

Not used for the Fax SP mode.

Enter the SP mode directly with the number keys if you know the SP number and then

press. (SP Mode must be highlighted before you can enter the number. Just press SPMode if it is not highlighted.)

Press twice to leave the SP mode return to the copy window to resume normal operation.

Press any Group number to open a list of SP modes and titles for that group. Forexample, to open the SP mode list for SP1-nnn , press Group1. If an SP has sublevels,click the appropriate button to expand the list.

Press to scroll the display to the previous or next group.

Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display(page).

Press to scroll the display to the previous or next line, line by line.

Press to move to the highlight to the previous or next selection in the list on the left.

B750S500.WMF




B712 34 SM

Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1) In the SP mode, select the test print and then press Copy Window.2) Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings

(paper size, etc.) for the test print.

3) Press Start to execute the test print.4) Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat

from step 1.

Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.

1. Before you begin, refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want toadjust. ( 4.1.2)

2. Click the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SPthat you want to adjust.

3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to display theSP number that you want to open, and then press that number to expand thelist.

4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the itemthat you want to set and press. The small entry box on the right is activated anddisplays the default or the current setting below.

NOTE: Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings. ( 4.1.2)

1. To enter a setting

•Press to toggle between plus and minus and then use the keypad to enterthe appropriate number. The number you enter write over the previoussetting.

• Press to enter the setting. (If you enter a number that is out of range, thekey press is ignored.)

• When you are prompted to complete the selection, press Yes.

2. When you are finished, press Exit twice to return to the copy window.

B712S501.WMF




SM 35 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.1.2 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE TABLES

SP1-XXX (Bit Switches) Section 3.2 Bit Switches

1 Mode No. Function

System Switch101

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for system settingsfor the fax option Section 4.2 Bit Switches

Ifax Switch102

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for internet faxsettings for the fax option Section 4.2 Bit Switches

Printer Switch103

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for printer settingsfor the fax option

Section 4.2 Bit SwitchesCommunication Switch104

001 – 032 00 – 1F Change the bit switches for communicationsettings for the fax option Section 4.2 Bit Switches

G3-1 Switch105

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocolsettings of the standard G3 board Section 4.2 Bit Switches

G3-2 Switch106

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocolsettings of the optional G3 board Section 4.2 Bit Switches

G3-3 Switch107

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for the protocolsettings of the optional G3 board Section 4.2 Bit Switches

G4 Internal Switch108

001 – 032 00 – 1F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

G4 Parameter Switch109

001 – 016 00 – 0F Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

IP fax Switch111

001 – 016 00 – 0F Change the bit switches for optional IP fax

parameters Section 4.2 Bit Switches

SP2-XXX (RAM Data)

2 Mode No. Function

RAM Read/Write101

001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly. Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses

Memory Dump102

001 G3-1 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the fax board. Section 4.5 Service RAM Addresses




B712 36 SM

2 Mode No. Function

002 G3-2 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3board.

003 G3-3 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the optional SG3

board.

102

004 G4 Memory Dump Print out RAM data for the SiG4 board.

G3-1 NCU Parameters103

001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standardG3 board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters


001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters


001 – 023 CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the optional G3board. Section 4.3 NCU Parameters

SP3-XXX (Tel Line Settings)

3 Mode No. Function

Service Station

001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.

101

002 Select Line Select the line type.

Serial Number102

000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.

PSTN-1 Port Settings

001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line.If the machine is installed on a PABX line,select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for theG3-1 line.

103

003 Memory LockDisabled

If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, turn this SP on.


001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-2 line. Ifthe machine is installed on a PABX line,select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-2 line.


If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, change this SP to on.

104

004 TransmissionDisabled

If you turn this SP on, the machine does notsend any fax messages on the G3-2 line.




SM 37 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

3 Mode No. Function


001 Select Line Select the line setting for the G3-3 line. Ifthe machine is installed on a PABX line,

select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or“PABX(FLASH)”.

002 PSTN Access Number Enter the PSTN access number for the G3-3 line.


If the customer does not want to receivetransmissions using Memory Lock on thisline, change this SP to on.

105


If you turn this SP on, the machine does notsend any fax messages on the G3-3 line.

ISDN Port Settings

001 Select Line

002 PSTN Access Number


106


Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

IPFAX Port Settings

001 H323 Port

002 SIP Port

003 RAS Port

004 Gatekeeper port

005 T.38 Port

006 SIP Server Port

107

007 IPFAX ProtocolPriority

Select "H323" or "SAP".

FAX SW201

001 – 032 00 – 1F

SP4-XXX (ROM Versions)

4 Mode No. Function

101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.

102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.

104 001 G3-2 ROM Version Displays the G3-2 modem version.

105 001 G3-3 ROM Version Displays the G3-3 modem version.

106 001 G4 ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)

107 001 Charge ROM Version Not used (Do not change the bit switches)




B712 38 SM

SP5-XXX (Initializing)

5 Mode No. Function

Initialize SRAM101

000 Initializes the bit switches and userparameters, user data in the SRAM, files inthe SAF memory, and clock.

Erase All Files102

000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.

Reset Bit Switches103

000 Resets the bit switches and userparameters.

Factory setting104

000 Resets the bit switches and userparameters, user data in the SRAM andfiles in the SAF memory.

SP6-XXX (Reports)

6 Mode No. Function

System Parameter List101

000 Touch the “ON” button to print the systemparameter list.

Service Monitor Report102

000 Touch the “ON” button to print the servicemonitor report.

G3 Protocol Dump List001 G3 AllCommunications

Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for all G3 lines.

103

002 G3-1 (AllCommunications)

Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for the G3-1 line.

003 G3-1(1 Communication)

Prints the protocol dump list of the lastcommunication for the G3-1 line.

004 G3-2(All Communications)

Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for the G3-2 line.



006 G3-3

(All Communications)

Prints the protocol dump list of all

communications for the G3-3 line.

103



G4 Protocol Dump List

001 Dch + Bch 1

002 Dch

003 Bch 1 Link Layer

004 Dch Link Layer

005 Dch +Bch 2

104

006 Bch 2 Link Layer

Not used (Do not change the bit switches)




SM 39 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

6 Mode No. Function

All Files print out105

000 Prints out all the user files in the SAFmemory, including confidential messages.

NOTE: Do not use this function, unless thecustomer is having trouble printingconfidential messages or recoveringfiles stored using the memory lockfeature.

Journal Print out

001 All Journals The machine prints all the communicationrecords on the report.

106

002 Specified Date The machine prints all communicationrecords after the specified date.

Log List Print out

001 All log files

002 Printer

003 SC/TRAP Stored

004 Decompression

005 Scanner

006 JOB/SAF

007 Reconstruction

008 JBIG

009 Fax Driver

010 G3CCU

011 Fax Job

012 CCU

107

013 Scanner Condition

These log print out functions are for

designer use only.

IP Protocol Dump List

001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of allcommunications for the IP fax line.

108

002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the lastcommunication for the IP fax line.




B712 40 SM

SP7-XXX (Test Modes)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.

7 Function

101 G3-1 Modem Tests102 G3-1 DTMF Tests

103 Ringer Test

104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)

105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)

106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)

107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)

108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)

109 Recorded Message Test

110 G3-2 Modem Tests

111 G3-2 DTMF Tests

112 G3-2 V34 (S2400baud)113 G3-2 V34 (S2800baud)

114 G3-2 V34 (S3000baud)

115 G3-2 V34 (S3200baud)

116 G3-2 V34 (S3429baud)

117 G3-3 Modem Tests

118 G3-3 DTMF Tests

119 G3-3 V34 (S2400baud)

120 G3-3 V34 (S2800baud)

121 G3-3 V34 (S3000baud)

122 G3-3 V34 (S3200baud)

123 G3-3 V34 (S3429baud)124 IG3-1 Modem Tests - Not used

125 IG3-1 DTMF Tests - Not used

126 IG3-1 V34 (S2400baud) - Not used





131 IG3-2 Modem Tests - Not used

132 IG3-2 DTMF Tests - Not used






SP9-XXX (Design Switch Mode)

9 Mode No. Function

702 Design Switch DFU



BIT SWITCHES

SM 41 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.2 BIT SWITCHES

WARNING

Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as “Not used”,as this may cause the machine to malfunction or to operate in a mannerthat is not accepted by local regulations. Such bits are for use only in otherareas, such as Japan.

NOTE: Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to theSystem Parameter List printed by the machine.

4.2.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 SP No. 1-101-001

No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Dedicated transmissionparameter programming0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicatedtransmission parameters.

Reset this bit to 0 after programming dedicatedtransmission parameters.

1 Confidential RX message printout without the password.0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: Confidential RX messages can be printed outwithout the password. Use this bit if the customerforgot the password for the confidential messages.Reset this bit to 0 after printing confidential RXmessages.

Technical data printout on the

Journal0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Instead of the personal name, the following data

are listed on the Journal for each G3communication.

2

e.g. 0000 32V34 288/264 L0100 03 04 (1) (2)(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)(3): Final modem type used(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)(5): Final data rate(6): Rx revel (refer to the note after this table for how to read the rx level)(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.

(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.Note: EQM and rx level are fixed at “FFFF” in tx mode.The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at “00” for transmission records andECM reception records.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 42 SM



2 Rx level calculation

Example: 0000 32 V34 288/264 L 01 00 03 04

The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after “L” indicates the rx level.The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to get the rx level.

In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB

3 Not used Do not change this setting.

4 Line error mark print

0: OFF, 1: ON (print)

When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed onthe printout if a line error occurs during reception.

5 G3/G4 communication

parameter display0: Disabled1: Enabled

This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key

parameters (see below). This is normally disabledbecause it cancels the CSI display for the user.Be sure to reset this bit to 0 after testing.

6 Protocol dump list output aftereach communication0: Off1: On

This is only used for communicationtroubleshooting. It shows the content of thetransmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always resetthis bit to 0 after finishing testing.If system switch 09 bit 6 is at “1”, the list is onlyprinted if there was an error during thecommunication.

7 Not used Do not change the setting.

G3 Communication Parameters

Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps

Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)

SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)

Compression mode MMR: MMR compressionMR: MR compressionMH: MH compressionJBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)

Communicationmode

ECM: With ECMNML: With no ECM



BIT SWITCHES

SM 43 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Width andreduction

A4: A4 (8.3"), no reductionB4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction

I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line 10: 10 ms/line25: 2.5 ms/line 20: 20 ms/line

5: 5 ms/line 40: 40 ms/lineNote: “40” is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI shortprotocol.

System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)



0-3 Not used Do not change these settings.

4 File retention time0: Depends on User Parameter

24 [18(H)]1: No limit

1: A file that had a communication error will not beerased unless the communication is successful.


6-7 Memory read/write by RDSBit 7 6 Setting

0 0 Always disabled0 1 User selectable1 0 User selectable1 1 Always enabled

(0,0): All RDS systems are always locked out.(0,1), (1,0): Normally, RDS systems are locked out,but the user can temporarily switch RDS on to allowRDS operations to take place. RDS willautomatically be locked out again after a certaintime, which is stored in System Switch 03. Note that

if an RDS operation takes place, RDS will not switchoff until this time limit has expired.(1,1): At any time, an RDS system can access themachine.



0to7

Length of time that RDS istemporarily switched on whenbits 6 and 7 of System Switch02 are set to “User selectable”

00 - 99 hours (BCD).

This setting is only valid if bits 6 and 7 of SystemSwitch 02 are set to “User selectable”.

The default setting is 24 hours.




3 Printing dedicated txparameters on Quick/SpeedDial Lists0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list isprinted with the dedicated tx parameters (10 byteseach).The first 10 bytes of data are the programmeddedicated tx parameters; 34 bytes of data areprinted (the other 24 bytes have no use for service

technicians).



BIT SWITCHES

B712 44 SM




System Switch 05 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)



0to7

Margin setting for CreateMargin Transmission

71 to 99 (BCD) %. This setting determines thereduction ratio when the user uses the CreateMargin Transmission feature.Default setting:1001 0011 (93%)

System Switch 07 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)System Switch 08 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)



0 Addition of image data fromconfidential transmissions onthe transmission result report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

If this feature is enabled, the top half of the firstpage of confidential messages will be printed ontransmission result reports.

1 Inclusion of communications onthe Journal when no image

data was exchanged.0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Communications that reached phase C (messagetx/rx) of the T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.

1: Communications that reached phase A (callsetup) of T.30 protocol are listed on the Journal.This will include telephone calls.

2 Automatic error report printout0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Error reports will not be printed.1: Error reports will be printed automatically afterfailed communications.

3 Printing of the error code on theerror report0: No 1: Yes

1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.


5 Power failure report0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: A power failure report will be automatically printedafter the power is switched on if a fax messagedisappeared from the memory when the power wasturned off last.

6 Conditions for printing theprotocol dump list0: Print for all communications1: Print only when there is acommunication error

This switch becomes effective only when systemswitch 00 bit 6 is set to 1.

1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocoldump list only for communications with errors.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 45 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



7 Priority given to various typesof remote terminal ID whenprinting reports0: RTI > CSI > Dial label > Tel.number1: Dial label > Tel. number >RTI > CSI

This bit determines which set of priorities themachine uses when listing remote terminal nameson reports.

Dial Label: The name stored, by the user, for theQuick/Speed Dial number.

System Switch 0A SP No. 1-101-011


0 Automatic port selection


When "1" is selected, a suitable port is automaticallyselected if the selected port is not used.


3 Continuous polling reception0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This feature allows a series of stations to be polledin a continuous cycle. This will continue until thepolling reception file is erased.The dialing interval is the same as memorytransmission.

4 Dialing on the ten-key padwhen the external telephone isoff-hook0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while theexternal telephone is off-hook. Use this setting whenthe external telephone is not by the machine, or if awireless telephone is connected as an externaltelephone.1: The user can dial on the machine’s ten-key padwhen the handset is off-hook.

5 On hook dial0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: On hook dial is disabled.

6-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings

System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

System Switch 0E SP No. 1-101-015


0-2 Not used Do not change the settings.

3 Action when the externalhandset goes off-hook0: Manual tx and rx operation1: Memory tx and rx operation(the display remains the same)

0: Manual tx and rx are possible while the externalhandset is off-hook. However, memory tx is notpossible.1: The display stays in standby mode even whenthe external handset is used, so that other peoplecan use the machine for memory tx operation.Note that manual tx and rx are not possible with thissetting.




BIT SWITCHES

B712 46 SM

System Switch 0F SP No. 1-101-016


0

to7

Country/area code for

functional settings (Hex)

00: France 11: USA01: Germany 12: Asia02: UK 13: Japan03: Italy 14: Hong Kong04: Austria 15: South Africa05: Belgium 16: Australia06: Denmark 17: New Zealand07: Finland 18: Singapore08: Ireland 19: Malaysia09: Norway 1A: China

0A: Sweden 1B: Taiwan0B: Switz. 1C: Korea0C: Portugal 20: Turkey0D: Holland 21: Greece0E: Spain 22: Hungary0F: Israel 23: Czech10: Canada 24: Poland

This country/area code determines the factory

settings of bit switches and RAM addresses.However, it has no effect on the NCU parametersettings and communication parameter RAMaddresses.

Cross reference NCU country code:

SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1

SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2

SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3



0

to7

Threshold memory level for

parallel memory transmission

Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB

N can be between 00 - FF(H)Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB



0 TTI printing position0: Superimposed on the pagedata1: Printed before the dataleading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints informationthat the customer considers to be important (G3transmissions).

1 TSI (G3) printing position

0: Superimposed on the pagedata1: Printed before the dataleading edge

Change this bit to 1 if the TSI (G3) overprints

information that the customer considers to beimportant.

2 Not used Do not change the factory settings.

3 TTI used for broadcasting

0: The TTIs selected for eachQuick/Speed dial are used1: The same TTI is used for alldestinations

1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for alldestinations during broadcasting.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 47 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



4 Type of TTI used fortransmission using the ten-keypad

0: TTI_11: TTI_2

1: The machine uses TTI_2 when the user dials thedestination using the ten-key pad. It is also used forpolling transmission and manual transmission usingthe handset.

5-7 Not used Do not change the factory settings.



0to7

TTI printing position in the mainscan direction

TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mmInput even numbers only.This setting determines the print start position forthe TTI from the left edge of the paper. If the TTI is

moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the filenumber which is on the top right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is moved over by more than 50mm, it may overwrite the page number.

System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)




0 Not used Do not change the settings.1 Going into the Energy Saver

mode automatically0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: The machine will restart from the Energy Savermode quickly, because the +5V power supply isactive even in the Energy Saver mode.


4-5 Interval for preventing themachine from entering EnergySaver mode if there is apending transmission file.Bit 5 4 Setting

0 0 1 min

0 1 30 min1 0 1 hour1 1 24 hours

If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machinedoes not go to Energy Saver mode during theselected period. After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting fortransmission, the machine goes to the Energy Savermode.

6 Print user codes on reports.

0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: User codes are printed out on the Journal orother reports.




BIT SWITCHES

B712 48 SM



0 Parallel Broadcasting

0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: The machine sends messages simultaneously

using all available ports during broadcasting.

1 Priority setting for the G3 line.

0: PSTN-1 > PSTN-2 or 31: PSTN-2 or 3 > PSTN-1

This function allows the user to select the default G3line type. The optional SG3 unit(s) are required touse the PSTN-2 or 3 setting.







6 Extended scanner pagememory after memory optionis installed0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: After installing the memory expansion option, thescanner page memory is extended to 4 MB from 2MB.

1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memoryexpansion option, the scanner page memory isextended to 12 MB. But the SAF memory decreasesto 18 MB.

7 Special Original mode

0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form

or letterhead which has a colored or printedbackground, change this bit to “1”. “Original 1” and“Original 2” can be selected in addition to the “Text”,“Text/Photo” and “Photo” modes.

System Switch 1A - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1D SP No. 1-101-030


0 RTI/CSI/CPS display0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: RTI/CSI/CPS is displayed on the top line of theLCD panel during communication.


2 Destination telephone numberdisplay limitation

0: OFF, 1: ON

When "1" is selected, the destination telephonenumber display is limited and redial is disabled.




BIT SWITCHES

SM 49 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

System Switch 1E SP No. 1-101-031


0 Communication after the

Journal data storage area hasbecome full0: Impossible1: Possible

This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal

printout is enabled but the machine cannot print thereport (e.g., no paper).

0: If the buffer memory of the communicationrecords for the Journal has become full, faxcommunications will become impossible, to preventoverwriting the communication records before themachine prints them out.1: If the buffer memory of the communicationrecords for the Journal is full, fax communicationsare still possible. But the machine will overwrite theoldest communication records.

Cross Reference

Automatic Journal output - User switch 03 bit 7 Number of communication records for the

Journal:200 records (standard)1000 records (with the Function Upgrade unit

installed)

1 Action when the SAF memoryhas become full duringscanning0: The current page is erased.1: The entire file is erased.

0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,the successfully scanned pages are transmitted.1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning,the file is erased and no pages are transmitted.

This bit switch is ignored for parallel memory

transmission.2 RTI/CSI display priority

0: RTI 1: CSIThis bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, isdisplayed on the LCD while the machine iscommunicating in G3 non-standard mode.

3 File No. printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.

4 Action when authorizedreception is enabled butauthorized RTIs/CSIs are notyet programmed

0: All fax reception is disabled1: Faxes can be received if thesender has an RTI or CSI

If authorized reception is enabled but the user hasstored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs, themachine will not be able to receive any faxmessages.

If the customer wishes to receive messages fromany sender that includes an RTI or CSI, and to blockmessages from senders that do not include an RTIor CSI, change this bit to “1”, then enable Authorized Reception.Otherwise, keep this bit at “0 (default setting)”.

5 Address display priority in the AI redial mode0: RTI/CSI1: Telephone number

0: When the machine has both RTI/CSI and thetelephone number information, the machine displaysRTI/CSI.1: The machine always displays the telephonenumber.

6-7 Not used Do not change the settings



BIT SWITCHES

B712 50 SM

System Switch 1F SP No. 1-101-032


0 Not used Do not change the settings.

1 Report printout after an original jam during SAF storage or ifthe SAF memory fills up

0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: When an original jams, or the SAF memoryoverflows during scanning, a report will be printed.

Change this bit to “1” if the customer does not wantto have a report in these cases.

Memory tx – Memory storage report

Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report


3 Received fax print start timing(G3 reception)0: After receiving each page1: After receiving all pages

0: The machine prints each page immediately afterthe machine receives it.

1: The machine prints the complete message afterthe machine receives all the pages in the memory.


7 Action when a fax SC hasoccurred0: Automatic reset1: Fax unit stops

0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code otherthan SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automaticallyresets itself.1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, thefax unit stops.

Cross Reference Fax SC codes - See “Troubleshooting”



BIT SWITCHES

SM 51 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.2.2 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-102-001

FUNCTION COMMENTSNo

Original Width of TX Attachment File This setting sets the maximum size of the originalthat the destination can receive. (Bits 3~7 arereserved for future use or not used.)

0 A4

1 B4

2 A3

3-6 Reserved

7 Not used

0: Off, 1: On

NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to“1”, the larger size has priority. For example,if both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to “1” then themaximum size is “A3” (Bit 2).

When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with thereceiving machine at the destination, so the sendingmachine cannot make a selection for the receivingcapabilities (original width setting) of the receiving

machine. The original width selected with this switchis used as the RX machine’s original width setting,and the original is reduced to this size beforesending. The default is A4.

If the width selected with this switch is higher thanthe receiving machine can accept, the machinedetects this and this causes an error.


FUNCTION COMMENTSNo

Original Line Resolution of TX Attachment File

This setting sets the maximum resolution of theoriginal that the destination can receive.

0 200x100 Standard

1 200x200 Detail

2 200x400 Fine

3 Reserved

4 400 x 400 Super Fine

5-6 Reserved

0: Not selected, 1: Selected

NOTE: If more than one of these three bits is set to “1”, the higher resolution has priority.For example, if both Bit 3 and Bit 2 are set to “1” then the resolution is set for"Reserve (300 x 300)" (Bit 3).



BIT SWITCHES

B712 52 SM


7 mm/inch

This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.

0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)

When on (set to “1”), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail.There is no switch for converting inches to millimeters.

NOTE: Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiverto determine the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; themm/inch selection is determined by the sender fax.

When this switch is Off (0):

• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.

• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.

• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.

When this switch is On (1):• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.

• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.

• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.Images received in mm are converted to inches.



RX Text Mail Header Processing0

This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mailswhen they are received.

0: Prints only text mail.

1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.

• When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the “From” address and“Subject” address are printed as header information.

• When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), thissetting is ignored and no header is printed.

Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error1

This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mailattachment are printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. Thisallows the customer to see which documents have not reached their intendeddestinations if sent to the wrong e-mail addresses, for example.

0: Prints 1st page only.

1: Prints all pages.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 53 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



Text String for Return Receipt

This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the

transmission was received normally at the destination.

2-3

00: “Dispatched”

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with“dispatched” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched

The “dispatched” string is included in the Subject string.

01: “Displayed”

Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with“displayed” in the 2nd part:

Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed

The “displayed” string is included in the Subject string.

10: Reserved11: Reserved

NOTE: A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to“00” (for “dispatched”) received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error.If any setting other than “displayed” (01) causes a problem, change the settingto “01” to enable normal sending of the Return Receipt.

Media accept feature4

This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail toconfirm a reception.

0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail

1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.

NOTE: Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answermail, which contains the media accept feature field.

5-6 Not Used

Image Resolution of RX Text Mail7

This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.

0: 200 x 200

1: 400 x 400

NOTE: The “1” setting requires installation of the Function Upgrade Card in order tohave enough SAF (Store and Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x400 resolution.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 54 SM



Original Output at Transfer Station0

This setting determines whether the original is output at the transfer station when it isreceived from the sender that initiated the transfer transmission. This feature is thesame as for G3 transfer transmissions.

0: Received original not output at the transfer station.

1: Received original output. The original is printed after the transfer station hastransferred it to the destinations, so its output confirms that the original has beentransferred.

Transfer Result Report1

This setting determines when a Transfer Result Report is generated and returned tothe transfer requestor.

0: Returns the report after each transfer.

1: Returns the report only if an error occurred during transfer.

Destination Error Handling for Reception Transfer Request2

This setting restricts transfer transmission based on whether the final destinations arecorrect or not.

0: The transfer station transmits to correct destinations only (addresses with no errors

in them).1: If any address has an error in it, the transfer station transfers no transmissions and

returns a transfer transmission failure report to the requestor that initiated thetransfer.

There is no negotiation between the transfer initiator and the transfer station todetermine whether the final destination addresses are correct or not. This settingdetermines whether or not the transfer station transfers the transmissions if there is amistake in even one of the final destination addresses.

Polling ID Check for Reception of Transfer Request3

This setting determines whether the polling IDs of incoming transmissions are checkedto ensure that the polling IDs match.

0: Receives and transfers only messages that have matching polling IDs.

1: Receives and transfers all messages, even if the polling IDs do not match.

4-7 Not Used



BIT SWITCHES

SM 55 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer0

This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSIof the originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.

0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTIor CSI is used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.

1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.

When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in theSubject line that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determineautomatically the destination folder for each e-mail.

1-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 05 SP No. 1-102-006 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients0

Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receivetransmissions broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.

For example:

"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcastto 9 destinations.

0: Not recorded

1: Recorded

1-7 Not Used

I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-007

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-008



Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception0-7

This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores

fax messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holdsincoming messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memoryavailable falls below this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is thenstored on the mail server.

00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)

NOTE: The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine theamount of memory.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 56 SM



0-3 Not used Do not change the settings

4-7 Restrict TX Retries This setting determines the number of retries whenconnection and transmission fails due to errors.

01-F (1-15 Hex)

I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-011

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-012

I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-013

I-fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-014

I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-102-015

I-fax Switch 0F SP No. 1-102-016


Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files0

This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered oroutput immediately.

0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.

1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.

1-7 Not used



BIT SWITCHES

SM 57 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.2.3 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 SP No. 1-103-001


0 Page separation mark0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: No marks are printed.1: If a received page has to be printed out on twosheets, an asterisk inside square brackets is printedat the bottom right hand corner of the first sheet,and a “2” inside a small box is printed at the top righthand corner of the second sheet. This helps theuser to identify pages that have been split.

1 Repetition of data when thereceived page is longer thanthe printer paper0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The next page continues from where the previouspage left off.1: The final few mm of the previous page arerepeated at the top of the next page. The amount ofrepeated data depends on printer switch 04, bits 5and 6.

2 Prints the date and time onreceived fax messages0: Disabled1: Enabled

This switch is only effective when user parameter 02- bit 2 (printing the received date and time onreceived fax messages) is enabled.1: The machine prints the received and printed dateand time at the bottom of each received page.





3-4 Maximum print width used inthe setup protocolBit 4 3 Setting

0 0 Not used0 1 A31 0 B41 1 A4

These bits are only effective when bit 7 of printerswitch 01 is “1”.


7 Received message widthrestriction in the protocol signalto the sender0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: The machine informs the transmitting machine ofthe print width depending on the paper sizeavailable from the paper feed stations.Refer to the table on the next page for how the

machine chooses the paper width used in the setupprotocol (NSF/DIS).1: The machine informs the transmitting machine ofthe fixed paper width which is specified by bits 3 and4 above.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 58 SM

Relationship between available paper sizes and printer width used in thesetup protocol

Available Paper Size Printer width used in the Protocol (NSF/DIS)

A4 or 8.5" x 11" 297 mm width

B5 256 mm width

A5 or 8.5" x 5.5" 216 mm width

No paper available (Paper end) 216 mm width



0 1st paper feed station usage forfax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

1 2nd paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled 1: Disabled

2 3rd paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled 1: Disabled

3 4th paper feed station usagefor fax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

4 LCT usage for fax printing0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: The paper feed station can be used to print faxmessages and reports.

1: The specified paper feed station will not be used

for printing fax messages and reports.

Note: Do not disable usage for a paper feed stationwhich has been specified by User Parameter Switch0F (15), or which is used for the Specified CassetteSelection feature.






BIT SWITCHES

B712 60 SM

Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 06 SP No. 1-103-007 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0 Printing while a paper cassetteis pulled out, when the JustSize Printing feature isenabled.0: Printing will not start1: Printing will start if anothercassette has a suitable size ofpaper, based on the paper sizeselection priority tables.

Cross reference

Just size printing on/off – User switch 05, bit 5

1-7 Not used. Do not change the settings.



0 Reduction for Journal printing0: Off1: On

1: The Journal is reduced to 91% to ensure thatthere is enough space in the left margin for punchholes or staples.


4 List of destinations in theCommunication Failure Reportfor broadcasting0: All destinations1: Only destinations wherecommunication failure occurred

1: Only destinations where communication failureoccurred are printed on the Communication FailureReport.




Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

Printer Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)



BIT SWITCHES

SM 61 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Printer Switch 0E SP No. 1-103-015


0 Paper size selection priority

0: Width1: Length

0: A paper size that has the same width as the

received data is selected first.1: A paper size which has enough length to print allthe received lines without reduction is selected first.

1 Paper size selected forprinting A4 width fax data0: 8.5" x 11" size1: A4 size

This switch determines which paper size is selectedfor printing A4 width fax data, when the machine hasboth A4 and 8.5" x 11" size paper.

2 Page separation0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: If all paper sizes in the machine require pageseparation to print a received fax message, themachine does not print the message (SubstituteReception is used). After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the

machine automatically prints the fax message.3to4

Printing the sample image onreportsBit 4 Bit 3 Setting

0 0 The upper halfonly

0 1 50% reductionin sub-scan only

1 0 Same size1 1 Not used

“Same size” means the sample image is printed at100%, even if page separation occurs.

User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to“0” to enable this switch.

Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more onthis feature.


7 Equalizing the reduction ratio

among separated pages(Page Separation)0: Enabled1: Disabled

0: When page separation has taken place, all the

pages are reduced with the same reduction ratio.1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selectedpaper size when page separation has taken place.Other pages are printed without reduction.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 62 SM

Printer Switch 0F SP No. 1-103-016


0

to1

Smoothing feature

Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Disabled1 0 Enabled1 1 Not used

(0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine

receives halftone images from other manufacturersfax machines frequently.

2 Duplex printing0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: The machine always prints received faxmessages in duplex printing mode:

3 Binding direction for Duplexprinting0: Left binding1: Top binding

4 Printing fax messages in usercode mode0: Enabled1: Disabled

1: The machine holds the received fax messagesuntil the machine exits the restricted access mode(user code or key counter).If the machine enters the restricted access modeagain while printing fax messages, the machinestops printing the machine exits the mode again.




BIT SWITCHES

SM 63 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.2.4 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 SP No. 1-104-001


0to1

Compression modes availablein receive mode Bit 1 0 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30protocol.

2to3

Compression modes availablein transmit modeBit 3 2 Modes

0 0 MH only0 1 MH/MR1 0 MH/MR/MMR1 1 MH/MR/MMR/

JBIG

These bits determine the compression capabilitiesto be used in the transmission and to be declared inphase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.


5 JBIG compression method:Reception0: Only basic supported1: Basic and optional bothsupported

Change the setting when communication problemsoccur using JBIG compression.

6 JBIG compression method:Transmission0: Basic mode priority1: Optional mode priority

Change the setting when communication problemsoccur using JBIG compression.

7 Closed network (reception)0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: Reception will not go ahead if the ID code of theother terminal does not match the ID code of thisterminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSSmode.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 64 SM



0 ECM

0: Off 1: On

If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all

communications.In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression areswitched off automatically.


2to3

Wrong connection preventionmethodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 None0 1 8 digit CSI1 0 4 digit CSI1 1 CSI/RTI

(0,1) - The machine will disconnect the line withoutsending a fax message, if the last 8 digits of thereceived CSI do not match the last 8 digits of thedialed telephone number. This does not work whenmanually dialed.(1,0) - The same as above, except that only the last4 digits are compared.(1,1) - The machine will disconnect the line without

sending a fax message, if the other end does notidentify itself with an RTI or CSI.(0,0) - Nothing is checked; transmission will alwaysgo ahead.

Note: This function does not work when dialing isdone from the external telephone.

4-5 Not used Do not change the setting.

6to7

Maximum printable page lengthavailableBit 7 6 Setting

0 0 No limit

0 1 B4 (364 mm)1 0 A4 (297 mm)1 1 Not used

The setting determined by these bits is informed tothe transmitting terminal in the pre-messageprotocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).



0 Burst error threshold 0: Low 1: High

If there are more consecutive error lines in thereceived page than the threshold, the machine willsend a negative response.The Low and High threshold values depend on thesub-scan resolution, and are as follows.

Resolution 100 dpi 200 dpi 400 dpi3.85 l/mm 7.7 l/mm 15.4 l/mm

Low settings 6 12 24High settings 12 24 48

1 Acceptable total error line ratio0: 5% 1: 10%

If the error line ratio for a page exceeds theacceptable ratio, RTN will be sent to the other end.

2 Treatment of pages receivedwith errors during G3 reception0: Deleted from memorywithout printing1: Printed

0: Pages received with errors are not printed.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 65 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



3 Hang-up decision when anegative code (RTN or PIN) isreceived during G3 immediatetransmission0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up

0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN isreceived.1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if itreceives RTN or PIN.

This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or ifECM is being used.




0to

7

Maximum number of pageretransmissions in a G3

memory transmission

00 - FF (Hex) times.This setting is not used if ECM is switched on.

Default setting - 03(H)

Communication Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)






Communication Switch 0A SP No. 1-104-011


0 Point of resumption of memorytransmission upon redialing0: From the error page1: From page 1

0: The transmission begins from the page wheretransmission failed the previous time.1: Transmission begins from the first page, usingnormal memory transmission.


7 Emergency calls using 9990: Enabled 1: Disabled

If this bit is at 1, the machine will not allow you todial 999 at the auto-dialer. This is a PTTrequirement in the Hong Kong.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 66 SM

Communication Switch 0B SP No. 1-104-012


0 Use of Economy Transmission

during a Transfer operation toend receivers0: Disabled 1: Enabled

These bits determine whether the machine uses the

Economy Transmission feature when it is carryingout a Transfer operation as a Transfer Station.

1 Use of Economy Transmissionduring a Transfer operation tothe Next Transfer Stations0: Disabled 1: Enabled

2 Use of Label Insertion for theEnd Receivers in a Transferoperation0: Disabled 1: Enabled

This bit determines whether the machine uses theLabel Insertion feature when it is carrying out aTransfer operation as a Transfer Station.

3 Conditions required for

Transfer Result Reporttransmission0: Always transmitted 1: Only transmitted if there wasan error

0: When acting as a Transfer Station, the machine

will always send a Transfer Result Report back tothe Requesting Station after completing the TransferRequest, even if there were no problems.1: The machine will only send back a TransferResult Report if there were errors duringcommunication, meaning one or more of the EndReceivers could not be contacted.

4 Printout of the message whenacting as a Transfer Station0: Disabled 1: Enabled

When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station,this bit determines whether the machine prints thefax message coming in from the RequestingTerminal.

5 Action when there is no fax

number in the programmedQuick/Speed dials which meetsthe requesting terminal’s ownfax number0: Transfer is disabled1: Transfer is enabled

After the machine receives a transfer request, the

machine compares the last N digits of therequesting terminal’s own fax number with all theQuick/Speed dials programmed in the machine. (Nis the number programmed in communication switch0C.)0: If there is no matching number programmed inthe machine, the machine rejects the transferrequest.1: Even if there is no matching number programmedin the machine, the machine accepts the transferrequest. The result report will be printed at thetransfer terminal, but will not be sent back to the

requesting terminal.6-7 Not used Do not change the settings.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 67 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Communication Switch 0C SP No. 1-104-013


0

to4

Number of digits compared to

find the requester’s fax numberfrom the programmedQuick/Speed Dials when actingas a Transfer Station

00 - 1F (0 to 31 digits)

After the machine receives a transfer request, themachine compares the own telephone number sentfrom the Requesting Terminal with all Quick/SpeedDials programmed in the machine, starting fromQuick Dial 01 to the end of the Speed Dials.This number determines how many digits from theend of the telephone numbers the machinecompares.If it is set to 00, the machine will send the report tothe first Quick/Speed Dial that the machinecompared. If Quick Dial 01 is programmed, themachine will send the report to Quick 01. If Quick

Dial 01 through 04 are not programmed and QuickDial 05 is programmed, the machine will send thereport to Quick 05.Default setting - 05(H) = 5 digits


Communication Switch 0D SP No. 1-104-014


0to7

The available memorythreshold, below which ringingdetection (and therefore

reception into memory) isdisabled

00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes(e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)One page is about 24 kbytes.

The machine refers to this setting before each faxreception. If the amount of remaining memory isbelow this threshold, the machine cannot receiveany fax messages.If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detectringing signals and go into receive mode even ifthere is no memory available. This will result incommunication failure.

Communication Switch 0E SP No. 1-104-015

No FUNCTION COMMENTS0to7

Minimum interval betweenautomatic dialing attempts

06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s(e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)This value is the minimum time that the machinewaits before it dials the next destination.

Communication Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings.)



BIT SWITCHES

B712 68 SM



0

to7

Memory transmission:

Maximum number of dialingattempts to the samedestination

01 - FE (Hex) times

Communication Switch 11 - Not used (do not change the settings.)



0to

7

Memory transmission: Intervalbetween dialing attempts to the

same destination

01 - FF (Hex) minutes

Communication Switch 13 - Not used (do not change the settings.)



0 Inch-to-mm conversion duringtransmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inchformat are transmitted without conversion.In memory transmission, data stored in the SAFmemory in mm format are transmitted withoutconversion.Note: When storing the scanned data into SAFmemory, the fax unit always converts the data intomm format.

1: The machine converts the scanned data or storeddata in the SAF memory to the format which wasspecified in the set-up protocol (DIS/NSF) beforetransmission.


6to7

Available unit of resolution inwhich fax messages arereceivedBit 7 Bit 6 Unit

0 0 mm0 1 inch1 0 mm and inch

(default)1 1 Not used

For the best performance, do not change the factorysettings.

The setting determined by these bits is informed tothe transmitting terminal in the pre-messageprotocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF frames).




BIT SWITCHES

SM 69 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2




1 Optional G3 unit (G3-2)0: Not installed1: Installed

Change this bit to 1 when installing the first optionalG3 unit.




0 SEP reception

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Polling transmission to another maker’s machineusing the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.

1 SUB reception0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Confidential reception to another maker’smachine using the SUB (Sub-address) signal isdisabled.

2 PWD reception

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

0: Disables features that require PWD (Password)signal reception.


7 Action when there is no boxwith an F-code that matchesthe received SUB code0: Disconnect the line1: Receive the message

(using normal reception mode)

Change this setting when the customer requires.



Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)



BIT SWITCHES

B712 70 SM

Communication Switch 1B SP No. 1-104-028


0

to7

Extension access code (0 to 7)

to turn V.8 protocol On/Off0: On1: Off

If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol

procedure, set this bit to “1” to disable V.8.Example: If “0” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0to 1. When the machine detects “0” as the firstdialed number, it automatically disables V.8protocol. (Alternatively, if “3” is the PSTN accesscode, set bit 3 to 1.)

Communication Switch 1C SP No. 1-104-029


0to1

Extension access code (8 and9) to turn V.8 protocol On/Off0: On1: Off

Refer to communication switch 1B.

Example: If “8” is the PSTN access code, set bit 0to 1. When the machine detects “8” as the firstdialed number, it automatically disables V.8protocol. (If “9” is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)


Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)



BIT SWITCHES

SM 71 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.2.5 G3 SWITCHES

G3 Switch 00 SP No. 1-105-001


01 Monitor speaker duringcommunication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Up to Phase B1 0 All the time1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all throughthe communication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B inthe T.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is onall through the communication. Make sure that youreset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.


G3 Switch 01 SP No. 1-105-002



4 DIS frame length0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte willnot be transmitted (set to 1 if there arecommunication problems with PC-based faxeswhich cannot receive the extended DIS frames).


6 CED/ANSam transmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

Do not change this setting, unless thecommunication problem is caused by theCED/ANSam transmission.


G3 Switch 02 SP No. 1-105-003


0 G3 protocol mode used0: Standard and non-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end canonly communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used innon-standard mode communication)


5 Use of modem rate history fortransmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials alwaysstart from the highest modem rate.1: The machine refers to the modem rate history forcommunications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6 AI short protocol (transmissionand reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about AI Short Protocol.

7 Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about Short Preamble.



BIT SWITCHES

B712 72 SM

G3 Switch 03 SP No. 1-105-004


0 DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)0: 11: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS frame twice.1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for thesecond DIS which is caused by echo on the line.

1 V.8 protocol in manualreception0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: The machine sends CED instead of ANSamwhen starting a manual reception.

1: The machine sends ANSam during manualreception.

2 V.8 protocol0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

Note:

Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is alwaysbad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbpsor lower.

3 ECM frame size0: 256 bytes1: 64 bytes

Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.

4 CTC transmission conditions0: Ricoh mode (PPR x 1)1: ITU-T mode (PPR x 4)

When using ECM, the machine will choose a slowermodem rate after receiving PPR once (Ricoh mode)or four times (ITU-T mode).This bit is ineffective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the nextpage after receiving a negativecode (RTN or PIN)0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back beforesending the next page if a negative code isreceived. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.

6 V.8 protocol in manualtransmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

1: The machine detects either ANSam or CEDduring manual transmission.


G3 Switch 04 SP No. 1-105-005


0to3

Training error detectionthreshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bitsIf the number of error bits in the received TCF isbelow this threshold, the machine informs the

sender that training has succeeded.4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 73 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

G3 Switch 05 SP No. 1-105-006


0

to3

Initial Tx modem rate

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k

1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k

Other settings - Not used

These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if youneed to change this for specific receivers.

If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8protocol should be disabled manually.

Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2

4to5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or7.2 kbps.Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting 0 0 V.290 1 V.171 0 V.341 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.


G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007


0to3

Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k

0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate forreception.

Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problemsduring reception.


Cross reference




BIT SWITCHES

B712 74 SM

G3 Switch 06 SP No. 1-105-007


4to7

Modem types available forreceptionBit 7 6 5 4 Setting

0 0 0 1 V.27ter0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.290 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29

V.330 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,

V.17/V.330 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,

V.17/V33,V.34


The setting of these bits is used to inform thetransmitting terminal of the available modem type forthe machine in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must bedisabled manually.

Cross reference


G3 Switch 07 SP No. 1-105-008


0to1

PSTN cable equalizer(tx mode: Internal)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 None0 1 Low1 0 Medium1 1 High

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers.

Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more ofthe following symptoms occurs.

• Communication error

• Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.

Note: This setting is not effective in V.34communications.

2to3

PSTN cable equalizer(rx mode: Internal)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.


• Communication error with error codes such as0-20, 0-23, etc.



4 PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

Keep this bit at “1”.

5 PSTN cable equalizer(V.34 rx mode; External)


6-7

Not used Do not change the settings.





BIT SWITCHES

B712 76 SM

G3 Switch 0B SP No. 1-105-012


0 Protocol requirements: Europe

0: Disabled 1: Enabled1 Protocol requirements: Spain


2 Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3 Protocol requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4 PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5 PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine does not automatically reset these bits

for each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.Change the required bits manually at installation.


7 DTS requirements : Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Change this bit manually if required.

G3 Switch 0C SP No. 1-105-013


01

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Normal(P=N)0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)

1 0 Sweden(N+1)

1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.


G3 Switch 0D SP No. 1-105-014



2to5

Data rate threshold during V.34receptionBit 5 4 3 2 Setting

0 0 0 0 Normal0 1 1 1 Lower by

one step1 1 1 1 Lower by

two steps

The machine changes the modulation parameters inthe MPh signal to lower the initial modem rateduring V.34 reception. If this switch is set to “0111”,

the machine lowers the initial speed one step, forexample, from 28,800 to 26,400 bps.This switch reduces transmission time if themachine frequently sends PPR signals during V.34reception.


7 B signal detection time for V.34polling transmission0: 75 ms (default setting)1: 65 ms

Change this switch only when there arecommunication errors during V.34 pollingtransmission to a machine with a Panasonicmodem.

G3 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)



BIT SWITCHES

SM 77 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

G3 Switch 0F SP No. 1-105-016


0 Alarm when an error occurred

in Phase C or later0: Disabled1: Enabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each

error communication, change this bit to “1”.

1 Alarm when the handset is off-hook at the end ofcommunication0: Disabled1: Enabled

If the customer wants to hear an alarm if thehandset is off-hook at the end of fax communication,change this bit to “1”.




BIT SWITCHES

B712 78 SM

4.2.6 G3-2/3 SWITCHES

These switches require an optional G3 interface unit.

G3-3 switches are the same as for G3-2 switches.

G3-2 Switch 00 SP No. 1-106-001 No FUNCTION COMMENTS

0-1 Monitor speaker duringcommunication (tx and rx)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting 0 0 Disabled0 1 Up to Phase B1 0 All the time1 1 Not used

(0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all throughthe communication.(0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B inthe T.30 protocol.(1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is onall through the communication. Make sure that youreset these bits after testing.

2 Monitor speaker duringmemory transmission0: Disabled 1: Enabled

1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memorytransmission.


G3-2 Switch 01 SP No. 1-106-002



4 DIS frame length0: 10 bytes 1: 4 bytes

1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte willnot be transmitted (set to 1 if there arecommunication problems with PC-based faxeswhich cannot receive the extended DIS frames).


6 CED/ANSam transmission0: Disabled1: Enabled

Do not change this setting, unless thecommunication problem is caused by theCED/ANSam transmission.


G3-2 Switch 02 SP No. 1-106-003


0 G3 protocol mode used0: Standard and non-standard1: Standard only

Change this bit to 1 only when the other end canonly communicate with machines that send T.30-standard frames only.1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in

non-standard mode communication)1-4 Not used Do not change the settings.

5 Use of modem rate history fortransmission usingQuick/Speed Dials0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: Communications using Quick/Speed Dials alwaysstart from the highest modem rate.1: The machine refers to the modem rate history forcommunications with the same machine whendetermining the most suitable rate for the currentcommunication.

6 AI short protocol (transmissionand reception)0: Disabled 1: Enabled


7 Short preamble0: Disabled 1: Enabled

Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 FacsimileManual for details about Short Preamble.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 79 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

G3-2 Switch 03 SP No. 1-106-004


0 DIS detection number

(Echo countermeasure)0: 11: 2

0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same

DIS frame twice.1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for thesecond DIS which is caused by echo on the line.


2 V.8 protocol0: Disabled1: Enabled

0: V.8/V.34 communications will not be possible.

Note:

Do not set to 0 unless the line condition is alwaysbad enough to slow down the data rate to 14.4 kbpsor lower.

3 ECM frame size0: 256 bytes1: 64 bytes

Keep this bit at “0” in most cases.

4 CTC transmission conditions0: After one PPR signalreceived1: After four PPR signalsreceived (ITU-T standard)

0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS)mode, the machine sends a CTC to drop back themodem rate after receiving a PPR, if the followingcondition is met in communications at 14.4, 12.0,9.6, and 7.2 kbps.

NTransmit N send≤ Re

NTransmit- Number of transmitted framesNResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted

1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC todrop back the modem rate after receiving fourPPRs.

PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.

This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.

5 Modem rate used for the nextpage after receiving a negativecode (RTN or PIN)0: No change 1: Fallback

1: The machine’s tx modem rate will fall back beforesending the next page if a negative code isreceived. This bit is ignored if ECM is being used.



G3-2 Switch 04 SP No. 1-106-005


0to3

Training error detectionthreshold

0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bitsIf the number of error bits in the received TCF isbelow this threshold, the machine informs thesender that training has succeeded.




BIT SWITCHES

B712 80 SM

G3-2 Switch 05 SP No. 1-106-006


0

to3


Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k

1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate for

transmission.

Use the dedicated transmission parameters if youneed to change this for specific receivers.


Cross reference

V.8 protocol on/off - SG3 switch 03, bit2

4to5

Initial modem type for 9.6 k or7.2 kbps.Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting

0 0 V.290 1 V.171 0 V.341 1 Not used

These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2kbps, if the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.


G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007


0to3

Initial Rx modem rate Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps)

0 0 0 1 2.4 k0 0 1 0 4.8 k0 0 1 1 7.2 k0 1 0 0 9.6 k0 1 0 1 12.0 k0 1 1 0 14.4 k

0 1 1 1 16.8 k1 0 0 0 19.2 k1 0 0 1 21.6 k1 0 1 0 24.0 k1 0 1 1 26.4 k1 1 0 0 28.8 k1 1 0 1 31.2 k1 1 1 0 33.6 k


These bits set the initial starting modem rate forreception.

Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problemsduring reception.


Cross reference




BIT SWITCHES

SM 81 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

G3-2 Switch 06 SP No. 1-106-007


4to7

Modem types available forreceptionBit 7 6 5 4 Setting

0 0 0 1 V.27ter0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.290 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29

V.330 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29,

V.17/V.330 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29,

V.17/V33,V.34


The setting of these bits is used to inform thetransmitting terminal of the available modem type forthe machine in receive mode.

If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must bedisabled manually.

Cross reference


G3-2 Switch 07 SP No. 1-106-008


0to1

PSTN cable equalizer(tx mode: Internal)Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.Use the dedicated transmission parameters forspecific receivers.


• Communication error



2to3

PSTN cable equalizer(rx mode: Internal)Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting


Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange.





4 PSTN cable equalizer

(V.8/V.17 rx mode: External)

0: Disabled

1: Enabled


5 PSTN cable equalizer(V.34 rx mode; External)





BIT SWITCHES

B712 82 SM

G3-2 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0A SP No. 1-106-011


01

Maximum allowable carrierdrop during image datareceptionBit 1 Bit 0 Value (ms)

0 0 2000 1 4001 0 8001 1 Not used

These bits set the acceptable modem carrier droptime.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-22 isfrequent.


4 Maximum allowable frameinterval during image datareception.0: 5 s 1: 13 s

This bit set the maximum interval between EOL(end-of-line) signals and the maximum intervalbetween ECM frames from the other end.Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 isfrequent.


6 Reconstruction time for the firstline in receive mode0: 6 s 1: 12 s

When the sending terminal is controlled by acomputer, there may be a delay in receiving pagedata after the local machine accepts set-up data andsends CFR. This is outside the T.30recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set thisbit to 1 to give the sending machine more time to

send data.Refer to error code 0-20.ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line shouldcome within 5 s of CFR.




BIT SWITCHES

SM 83 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

G3-2 Switch 0B SP No. 1-106-012


0 Protocol requirements: Europe

0: Disabled 1: Enabled1 Protocol requirements: Spain


2 Protocol requirements:Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

3 Protocol requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

4 PTT requirements: Germany0: Disabled 1: Enabled

5 PTT requirements: France0: Disabled 1: Enabled

The machine does not automatically reset these bits

for each country after a country code (SystemSwitch 0F) is programmed.Change the required bits manually at installation.



G3-2 Switch 0C SP No. 1-106-013


01

Pulse dialing methodBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Normal(P=N)0 1 Oslo (P=10 - N)1 0 Sweden

(N+1)1 1 Not used

P = Number of pulses sent out, N = Number dialed.


G3-2 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3-2 Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings)



BIT SWITCHES

B712 84 SM

4.2.7 G4 INTERNAL SWITCHES

The G4 internal switches (SW00 to 1F) are displayed but do not change thesesettings.

4.2.8 G4 PARAMETER SWITCHES

The G4 parameter switches (SW00 to 0F) are displayed but do not change thesesettings.

4.2.9 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 SP No. 1-111-001

No. FUNCTION COMMENTS


1IP Fax Transport

0: TCP, 1: UDP

2IP Fax single port selection

0: OFF, 1: ON (enable)

3

IP Fax double ports (single dataport) selection


4IP Fax Gatekeeper


5IP Fax T30 bit signal reverse

0: LSB first, 1: MSB first

Reverses the T30 bit signal.

6

IP Fax max bit rate setting

0: Not affected, 1: Affected

When "0" is selected, the max bit rate doesnot affect the value of the DIS/DCS.

When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affectsthe value of the DIS/DCS.

7

IP Fax received telephone numberconfirmation

0: No confirmation, 1: Confirmation

When "0" is selected, fax data is receivedwithout checking the telephone number.

When "1" is selected, fax data is received onlywhen confirming that the telephone numberfrom the sender matches the registeredtelephone number in this machine. If thisconfirmation fails, the line is disconnected.



BIT SWITCHES

SM 85 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



0-3

IP Fax delay level setting

Selects the acceptable delay level.Level 0 is the highest quality

Default is "0000" (level 0).

4-7

IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.

[00 to 0f]

There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switchcombination.

Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms

Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)The default is "0000" (00H).



0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting

0: Maker code setting

1: Internal bit switch setting

When "0" is selected, the bit signal reversemethod is decided by the maker code.

When "1" is selected, the bit signal reversemethod is decided by the internal bit switch.

NOTE: When communicating between IP Fax

devices, LSB first is selected.)1 IP Fax transmission speed setting

0: Modem speed

1: No limitation

Selects the transmit speed for IP Faxcommunication.

2 SIP transport setting

0: TCP

1: UDP

This bit switch sets the transport that haspriority for receiving IP Fax data.

This function is activated only when thesender has both TCP and UDP.


Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 0 0 0 Level 0

0 0 0 1 Level 1

0 0 1 0 Level 2

0 0 1 1 Level 3



BIT SWITCHES

B712 86 SM



0 Effective field limitation for G3

standard function information0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)

1 Switching between G3 standardand G3 non standard

0: Enable switching

1: G3 standard only

2 AI modem rate function


3 ECM frame size selection attransmitting

0: 256byte, 1: 64byte

4 DIS detection times for echoprevention

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

5 CTC transmission selection

0: PPRx1

1: PPRx4

When "0" is selected, the transmissioncondition is decided by error frame numbers.

When "1" is selected, the transmissioncondition is based on the ITU-T method.

6 Shift down setting at receivingnegative code

0: OFF, 1: ON




0

1

2

3

TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level.

[00 to 0f]

The default is "1111" (0fH).




BIT SWITCHES

SM 87 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



0-3

Modem bit rate setting for transmission

Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

4-5

Modem setting for transmission

Sets the modem for transmission.

The default is "00" (V29).



0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 0 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0K bps

0 1 1 0 14.4K bps

0 1 1 1 16.8K bps

1 0 0 0 19.2K bps

1 0 0 1 21.6K bps

1 0 1 0 24.0K bps1 0 1 1 26.4K bps

1 1 0 0 28.8K bps

1 1 0 1 31.2K bps

1 1 1 0 33.6K bps

Bit 5 Bit 4

0 0 V29

0 1 V17

1 0 V34

1 1 Not used



BIT SWITCHES

B712 88 SM



0-3

Modem bit rate setting for reception

Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).

4-7

Modem setting for reception

Sets the modem for reception. The default is "0010" (V27ter, V29).



0 TSI information

0: Not added, 1: Added

Adds or does not add TSI information toNSS(S).

1 DCN transmission setting at T1timeout

0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted

Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1timeout.


3 Hang up setting at DIS receptiondisabled

0: No hang up

1: Hang up after transmitting DCN

4 Number of times for training

0: 1 time, 1: 2 times

Selects the number of times training is done atthe same bit rate.

5 Space CSI transmission setting atno CSI registration

0: Not transmitted, 1: Transmitted

When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.

When "1" is selected, the transmitted data isall spaces.



0 0 0 1 2400 bps

0 0 1 0 4800 bps

0 0 1 1 7200 bps

0 1 0 0 9600 bps

0 1 0 1 12.0K bps

0 1 1 0 14.4K bps

0 1 1 1 16.8K bps

1 0 0 0 19.2K bps

1 0 0 1 21.6K bps

1 0 1 0 24.0K bps

1 0 1 1 26.4K bps1 1 0 0 28.8K bps

1 1 0 1 31.2K bps

1 1 1 0 33.6K bps


0 0 0 1 V27ter

0 0 1 0 V27ter, V29

0 0 1 1 V27ter, V29, V33 (invalid)

0 1 0 0 V27ter, V29, V170 1 0 1 V27ter, V29, V17, V34



BIT SWITCHES

SM 89 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2



0-1 T1 timer adjustment

Adjusts the T1 timer.The default is "00" (35 seconds).


Adjust the T4 timer.

The default is "00" (3 seconds).


Bit 5 Bit 4

0 0 75 sec

0 1 120 sec

1 0 180 sec

1 1 240 sec

Adjusts the fail safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup" datatransmission and T.38 phase decision.

If your destination return is late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust thelonger interval timer.

The default is "00" (75 seconds).


IP Fax Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-010

IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-011

IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-012

IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-013

IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-014IP Fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-015

IP Fax Switch 0F - Not used (do not change the settings) SP No. 1-111-016

Bit 1 Bit 0

0 0 35 sec

0 1 40 sec

1 0 50 sec

1 1 60 sec

Bit 3 Bit 2

0 0 3 sec

0 1 3.5 sec

1 0 4 sec1 1 5 sec



NCU PARAMETERS

B712 90 SM

4.3 NCU PARAMETERS

The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation unitsthat the machine uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The

factory settings for each country are also given. Most of these must be changed byRAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using NCU Parameterprogramming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, thiswill be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex codeunless (BCD) is included in the Unit column.

NOTE: The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.Change the fourth digit from “5” to “6” (e.g. 680500 to 680600) for thesettings for the first optional G3 interface unit and from “5” to “7” (e.g.680700) for the settings for the second optional G3 interface unit.



NCU PARAMETERS

SM 91 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Address Function Unit Remarks

680500 Country/Area code for NCUparameters

Use the Hex value to program the country/area code directly into this address, oruse the decimal value to program it using SP2-103-001

Country/Area Decimal Hex France 00 00 Hong Kong 20 14Germany 01 01 South Africa 21 15UK 02 02 Australia 22 16Italy 03 03 New Zealand 23 17 Austria 04 04 Singapore 24 18Belgium 05 05 Malaysia 25 19Denmark 06 06 China 26 1AFinland 07 07 Taiwan 27 1B

Ireland 08 08 Korea 28 1CNorway 09 09 Greece 33 21Sweden 10 0A Hungary 34 22Switzerland 11 0B Czech 35 23Portugal 12 0C Poland 36 24Holland 13 0DSpain 14 0EIsrael 15 0FUSA 17 11 Asia 18 12

680501 Line current detection time

680502 Line current wait time680503 Line current drop detect time

20 ms Line current detection is

disabled.Line current is notdetected if 680501contains FF.

680504 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit(high byte)

680505 PSTN dial tone frequency upper limit(low byte)

Hz (BCD) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

680506 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit(high byte)

680507 PSTN dial tone frequency lower limit(low byte)


680508 PSTN dial tone detection time680509 PSTN dial tone reset time (LOW)

68050A PSTN dial tone reset time (HIGH)

68050B PSTN dial tone continuous tone time

68050C PSTN dial tone permissible drop time

If 680508 contains FF(H),the machine pauses forthe pause time (address68050D / 68050E).

Italy: See Note 2.

68050D PSTN wait interval (LOW)

68050E PSTN wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

68050F PSTN ring-back tone detection time 20 ms Detection is disabled ifthis contains FF.

680510 PSTN ring-back tone off detectiontime

20 ms



NCU PARAMETERS

B712 92 SM


680511 PSTN detection time for silent periodafter ring-back tone detected (LOW)

20 ms

680512 PSTN detection time for silent periodafter ring-back tone detected (HIGH)

20 ms

680513 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (high byte)

680514 PSTN busy tone frequency upperlimit (low byte)


680515 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

680516 PSTN busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)


680517 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit(high byte)

680518 PABX dial tone frequency upper limit

(low byte)


680519 PABX dial tone frequency lower limit(high byte)

68051A PABX dial tone frequency lower limit(low byte)


68051B PABX dial tone detection time

68051C PABX dial tone reset time (LOW)

68051D PABX dial tone reset time (HIGH)

68051E PABX dial tone continuous tone time

68051F PABX dial tone permissible drop time

If 68051B contains FF,the machine pauses forthe pause time (680520 /680521).

680520 PABX wait interval (LOW)680521 PABX wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

680522 PABX ringback tone detection time 20 ms

680523 PABX ringback tone off detectiontime

20 ms

If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

680524 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tone detected(LOW)

20 ms

680525 PABX detection time for silentperiod after ringback tone detected(HIGH)

20 ms


680526 PABX busy tone frequency upper

limit (high byte)680527 PABX busy tone frequency upper

limit (low byte)

Hz (BCD) If both addresses contain

FF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

680528 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

680529 PABX busy tone frequency lowerlimit (low byte)


68052A Busy tone ON time: range 1

68052B Busy tone OFF time: range 1

68052C Busy tone ON time: range 2

68052D Busy tone OFF time: range 2

68052E Busy tone ON time: range 3

20 ms



NCU PARAMETERS

SM 93 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


68052F Busy tone OFF time: range 3

680530 Busy tone ON time: range 4

680531 Busy tone OFF time: range 4

680532 Busy tone continuous tone detectiontime

20 ms

680533 Busy tone signal state time tolerance for all ranges, and number of cyclesrequired for detection (a setting of 4 cycles means that ON-OFF-ON or OFF-ON-OFF must be detected twice).

Tolerance (±)Bit 1 0

0 0 75% Bits 2 and 3 must always0 1 50% be kept at 0.1 0 25%1 1 12.5%

Bits 7, 6, 5, 4 - number of cycles required for cadence detection

680534 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (high byte)

680535 International dial tone frequencyupper limit (low byte)


680536 International dial tone frequencylower limit (high byte)

680537 International dial tone frequencylower limit (low byte)


680538 International dial tone detection time

680539 International dial tone reset time

(LOW)68053A International dial tone reset time

(HIGH)

68053B International dial tone continuoustone time

68053C International dial tone permissibledrop time

If 680538 contains FF,the machine pauses for

the pause time (68053D /68053E).

Belgium: See Note 2.

68053D International dial wait interval (LOW)

68053E International dial wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

68053F Country dial tone upper frequencylimit (HIGH)

680540 Country dial tone upper frequencylimit (LOW)


680541 Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (HIGH)

680542 Country dial tone lower frequencylimit (LOW)

Hz (BCD)


680543 Country dial tone detection time

680544 Country dial tone reset time (LOW)

680545 Country dial tone reset time (HIGH)

If 680543 contains FF,the machine pauses forthe pause time (680548 /680549).

680546 Country dial tone continuous tonetime

20 ms



NCU PARAMETERS

B712 94 SM


680547 Country dial tone permissible droptime

680548 Country dial wait interval (LOW)

680549 Country dial wait interval (HIGH)

20 ms

68054A Time between opening or closing theDO relay and opening the OHDIrelay

1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.SP2-103-012 (parameter11).

68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.

SP2-103-013 (parameter12).

68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note 3.


68054D Time between final OHDI relayclosure and DO relay opening or

closing

1 ms See Notes 3, 6 and 8.

SP2-103-015 (parameter

14).This parameter is onlyvalid in Europe.

68054E Minimum pause between dialeddigits (pulse dial mode)

See Note 3 and 8. SP2-103-016 (parameter 15).

68054F Time waited when a pause isentered at the operation panel

20 ms

SP2-103-017 (parameter16). See Note 3.

680550 DTMF tone on time SP2-103-018 (parameter17).

680551 DTMF tone off time

1 ms


680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMFsignals while dialing

-N x 0.5 –3.5

dBmSP2-103-020 (parameter19).

See Note 5.

680553 Tone attenuation value differencebetween high frequency tone andlow frequency tone in DTMF signals

-dBm x 0.5 SP2-103-021 (parameter20).

The setting must be lessthan –5dBm, and shouldnot exceed the setting at680552h above.

See Note 5.

680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation levelafter dialling

-N x 0.5 –3.5dBm

SP2-103-022 (parameter21). See Note 5.

680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation levelafter dialling -dBm x 0.5 See Note 5

680556 Not used Do not change thesettings.

680557 Time between 68054Dh (NCUparameter 14) and 68054Eh (NCUparameter 15)

1 ms This parameter takeseffect when the countrycode is set to France.

680558 Not used Do not change thesetting.

680559 Grounding time (ground start mode) 20 ms The Gs relay is closed forthis interval.

68055A Break time (flash start mode) 1 ms The OHDI relay is open

for this interval.



NCU PARAMETERS

SM 95 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


68055B International dial access code (High)

68055C International dial access code (Low)

BCD For a code of 100:68055B - F168055C - 00

68055D PSTN access pause time 20 ms This time is waited foreach pause input afterthe PSTN access code. Ifthis address containsFF[H], the pause timestored in address 68054Fis used.

Do not set a numbermore than 7 in the UK.

68055E Progress tone detection level, andcadence detection enable flags

Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 dBm0 0 0 -25.00 0 1 -35.00 1 0 -30.0

1 0 0 -40.01 1 0 -49.0

Bits 2, 0 - See Note 2.

68055Fto

680564

Not used Do not change thesettings.

680565 Long distance call prefix (HIGH) BCD

680566 Long distance call prefix (LOW) BCD

For a code of 0:680565 - FF680566 - F0

680567to

680571


680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 1, upper limit


680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 1, lower limit


680574 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 2, upper limit


680575 Acceptable ringing signal frequency:range 2, lower limit

1000/ N(Hz).


680576 Number of rings until a call isdetected

1 SP2-103-007 (parameter06).

The setting must not bezero.

680577 Minimum required length of the firstring

20 ms See Note 4.


680578 Minimum required length of thesecond and subsequent rings

20 ms SP2-103-009 (parameter08).

680579 Ringing signal detection reset time(LOW)


68057A Ringing signal detection reset time(HIGH)

20 ms




NCU PARAMETERS

B712 96 SM


68057Bto

680580


680581 Interval between dialing the last digitand switching the Oh relay over tothe external telephone when dialingfrom the operation panel in handsetmode.

20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

680582 Bits 0 and 1 - Handset off-hook detection timeBit 1 0 Setting

0 0 200 ms0 1 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 2 and 3 - Handset on-hook detection timeBit 3 2 Setting

0 0 200 ms0 1 800 ms

Other Not used

Bits 4 to 7 - Not used

680583to

6805A0


6805A1 Acceptable CED detection frequencyupper limit (high byte)

6805A2 Acceptable CED detection frequencyupper limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

6805A3 Acceptable CED detection frequencylower limit (high byte)

6805A4 Acceptable CED detection frequencylower limit (low byte)


6805A5 CED detection time 20 ms

± 20 ms

Factory setting: 200 ms

6805A6 Acceptable CNG detection frequencyupper limit (high byte)

6805A7 Acceptable CNG detection frequencyupper limit (low byte)


6805A8 Acceptable CNG detection frequency

lower limit (high byte)6805A9 Acceptable CNG detection frequency

lower limit (low byte)

BCD (Hz) If both addresses contain

FF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

6805AA Not used Do not change thesetting.

6805AB CNG on time 20 ms Factory setting: 500 ms

6805AC CNG off time 20 ms Factory setting: 200 ms

6805AD Number of CNG cycles required fordetection

The data is coded in thesame way as address680533.

6805AE Not used Do not change thesettings.



NCU PARAMETERS

SM 97 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2


6805AF Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency upperlimit (high byte)

6805B0 Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency upperlimit (low byte)


6805B1 Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency lowerlimit (high byte)

6805B2 Acceptable AI short protocol tone(800Hz) detection frequency lowerlimit (low byte)

Hz(BCD) If both addresses containFF(H), tone detection isdisabled.

6805B3 Detection time for 800 Hz AI shortprotocol tone

20 ms Factory setting: 360 ms

6805B4 PSTN: Tx level from the modem -N – 3 dBm SP2-103-002 (parameter

01).6805B5 PSTN: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B5 –3.5 (dB)

See Note 7.

6805B6 PSTN: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N6805B4 - 0.5N 6805B6 –3 (dB)

See Note 7.

6805B7 PABX: Tx level from the modem - dBm

6805B8 PABX: 1100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B8 (dB)

6805B9 PABX: 2100 Hz tone transmissionlevel

- N 6805B7 - 0.5N 6805B9 (dB)

6805BD Modem turn-on level (incomingsignal detection level)

-37-0.5N(dBm)

6805BEto

6805C6


6805C7 Bits 0 to 3 – Not used.

Bit 4 – V.34 protocol dump 0: Simple, 1: Detailed (default)

Bits 5 to 7 – Not used.

6805C8to

6805D9


6805DA T.30 T1 timer 1 s

6805E0

bit 3

Maximum wait time for post

message

0: 12 s

1: 30 s

1: Maximum wait time for

post message(EOP/EOM/MPS) can bechanged to 30 s.

Change this bit to “1” ifcommunication errorsoccur frequently duringV.17 reception.

6805E5 Signal Detection Method 80h: AutoEdge

81h or 83h:Fixed Edge

Signal detection method, Auto Edge (80h) or FixedEdge (81h or 83h).

⇒

Rev. 03/2006



NCU PARAMETERS

B712 98 SM

NOTES

1. If a setting is not required, store FF in the address.

2. Italy and Belgium only

RAM address 68055E: the lower four bits have the following meaning.Bit 2 - 1: International dial tone cadence detection enabled (Belgium)Bit 1 - Not usedBit 0 - 1: PSTN dial tone cadence detection enabled (Italy)

If bit 0 or bit 2 is set to 1, the functions of the following RAM addresses arechanged.680508 (if bit 0 = 1) or 680538 (if bit 2 = 1): tolerance for on or off stateduration (%), and number of cycles required for detection, coded as in address680533.

68050B (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053B (if bit 2 = 1): on time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)68050C (if bit 0 = 1) or 68053C (if bit 2 = 1): off time, hex code (unit = 20 ms)

3. Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10pps. If 20 pps is used, the machine automatically compensates.

4. The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the timespecified by this parameter.

5. The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:High frequency tone: – 0.5 x N680552/680554 –3.5 dBm

– 0.5 x N680555 dBmLow frequency tone: – 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm – 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm

NOTE: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)

6. 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Dsclosing and Di opening68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Dsopening and Di closing

7. Tone signals which frequency is lower than 1500Hz (e.g., 800Hz tone for AIshort protocol) refer to the setting at 6805B5h. Tones which frequency is higher

than 1500Hz refer to the setting at 6805B6h.8. 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the

sum of the period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and68054E.



DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

SM 99 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.4 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmableparameters allocated to it. If transmissions to a particular machine often experience

problems, store that terminal’s fax number as a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, andadjust the parameters allocated to that number.

The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will bedescribed.

4.4.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.

2. Press "Dest. Management" in the facsimile standby mode.

3. Press "Program/Change/Delete Quick Dial".

4. Select the destination key you want to program.

5. When the programmed dialnumber is displayed, press“Start”.Make sure that the LED ofthe Start button is lit asgreen.

6. The settings for the switch01 are now displayed.Press the bit number thatyou wish to change.

7. To scroll through theparameter switches, either:

8. Select the next switch:

press “Next”orSelect the previous switch: “Prev.” until the correct switch is displayed.Then go back to step 6.

9. After the setting is changed, press “OK”.

10. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.

B712S104.WMF

B712S105.WMF




B712 100 SM

4.4.2 PARAMETERS

The initial settings of the following parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters aredisabled.

Switch 01

FUNCTION AND COMMENTS

ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting,adjust this byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1second.Range: 0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.

Switch 02


0to4

Tx levelBit 4 3 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 1 -10 0 0 1 0 -20 0 0 1 1 -30 0 1 0 0 -4

::

0 1 1 1 1 -151 1 1 1 1 Disabled

If communication with a particular remote terminaloften contains errors, the signal level may beinappropriate. Adjust the Tx level forcommunications with that terminal until the resultsare better.

If the setting is “Disabled”, the NCU parameter 01setting is used.

Note: Do not use settings other than listed on theleft.

5to7

Cable equalizerBit 7 6 5 Setting

0 0 0 None0 0 1 Low0 1 0 Medium0 1 1 High1 1 1 Disabled

Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higherfrequencies because of the length of wire betweenthe modem and the telephone exchange whencalling the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.





If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.




SM 101 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Switch 03


0

to3


Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting (bps) 0 0 0 0 Not used0 0 0 1 2,4000 0 1 0 4,8000 0 1 1 7,2000 1 0 0 9,6000 1 0 1 12,0000 1 1 0 14,4000 1 1 1 16,8001 0 0 0 19,2001 0 0 1 21,6001 0 1 0 24,000

1 0 1 1 26,4001 1 0 0 28,8001 1 0 1 31,2001 1 1 0 33,6001 1 1 1 Disabled

Other settings: Not used

If training with a particular remote terminal always

takes too long, the initial modem rate may be toohigh. Reduce the initial Tx modem rate using thesebits.

For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4must be changed to 0.




6 AI short protocol0: Off

1: Disabled




Switch 04


01

Inch-mm conversion before txBit 1 Bit 0 Setting

0 0 Inch-mmconversionavailable

0 1 Inch only1 0 Not used

1 1 Disabled

The machine uses inch-based resolutions forscanning. If “inch only” is selected, the printed copymay be slightly distorted at the other end if thatmachine uses mm-based resolutions.


2to3

DIS/NSF detection methodBit 3 Bit 2 Setting

0 0 First DIS orNSF

0 1 Second DIS orNSF

1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

(0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line areinterfering with the set-up protocol at the start oftransmission. The machine will then wait for thesecond DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.





B712 102 SM

Switch 04


4 V.8 protocol0: Off1: Disabled

If transmissions to a specific destination always endat a lower modem rate (14,400 bps or lower),disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34 protocol.

0: V.34 communication will not be possible.


5 Compression modes availablein transmit mode0: MH only1: Disabled

This bit determines the capabilities that are informedto the other terminal during transmission.If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.

67

ECM during transmissionBit 7 Bit 6 Setting

0 0 Off0 1 On

1 0 Not used1 1 Disabled

For example, if ECM is switched on but is notwanted when sending to a particular terminal, usethe (0, 0) setting.

Note that V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression

are automatically disabled if ECM is disabled.If the setting is “Disabled”, the bit switch setting isused.

Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)








SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

SM 103 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

4.5 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES

CAUTION Do not change the settings which are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”

680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only) 680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)680002(H) - Year (BCD)680003(H) - Month (BCD)680004(H) - Day (BCD)

680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)

680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)

680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00) : Not used6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01) : Not used

6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02) Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Center mark printing on received copies(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 2: Reception time printing(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 4: Checkered mark printing(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5: CIL printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 6: TID printing (G4) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 7: Not used

6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic reportprintout) Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Not usedBit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Polling clear report 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On




B712 104 SM

6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic reportprintout) Bit 0: Automatic confidential reception report output 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output

0: Off, 1: OnBits 2 to 3: Not usedBit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: IndicatedBit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Not usedBit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On

6800D5(H) - User parameter switch 05 (SWUSR_05) Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition0: Enabled, 1: DisabledBits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute rx when the machine cannot print messages

(Paper end, toner end, jam, and during night mode)Bit 2 1 Setting0 0 The machine receives all the fax messages.0 1 The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.1 0 The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.1 1 The machine does not receive anything.

Bit 3: Not usedBit 4: Not usedBit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: OnBit 6: Not usedBit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On

6800D6(H) - User parameter switch 06 (SWUSR_06) Bits 0 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Scan sequence in Book transmission

0: Left page then right page, 1: Right page then left pageBit 7: Not used

6800D7(H) - User parameter switch 07 (SWUSR_07) Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBits 3 to 7: Not used

6800D8(H) - User parameter switch 08 (SWUSR_08) Bits 0 and 1: Not used.Bit 2: Authorized reception

0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this featureare accepted.

1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this featureare accepted.

Bits 3 to 7: Not used.

6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09) : Not used

6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A) Bit 0: Not usedBit 1: 2 into 1 0: Off, 1: On




SM 105 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Bit 2: Not usedBit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Not usedBit 5: Reception file printout 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bits 6 and 7: Not used6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B) Bit 0: Not usedBit 1: Not usedBits 2 to 5: Not usedBit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station

0: Off, 1: OnBit 7: Polling Standby duration 0: Once, 1: No limit

6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used

6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used

6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E) Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: OffBit 1: Maximum document length detection

0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up to 1,200 mmBit 2: Batch transmission 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed

0: Not cleared, 1: ClearedBits 4 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Manual service call (sends the system parameter list to the service station)

0: Off, 1: On




B712 106 SM

6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout

Bit 2 1 0 Setting

0 0 1 1st paper feed station0 1 0 2nd paper feed station0 1 1 3rd paper feed station1 0 0 4th paper feed station1 0 1 LCT

Other settings Not usedBits 3 and 4: Not usedBit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: OffBits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)

(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size

paper is not available.0: A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority

Bits 3 to 7: Not used

6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11) Bits 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials isselected for broadcasting

0:Not needed, 1: Needed

Bits 3 to 6: Not usedBit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or theexternal telephone,

0: displays “Cannot detect original size”.1: Receives fax messages.

6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12) Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: OnBit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: OnBit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 4 to 7: Not used




SM 107 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

6800E3(H) - User parameter switch 19 (SWUSR_13) Bit 0: Offset sort function for the fax (only using the shift tray on the 1,000 sheetfinisher)


Bit 1: Journal format0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, G3-3 and G4 communications

Bit 2: Action when the paper cassette that was selected by the specified cassetteselection feature becomes empty.(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: The machine will not print any received files until paper is added.1: The machine will use other cassettes to print received files that are not

specified by this feature.

Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait Tx(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Off, 1: OnBit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions. (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and 4), 1: 50% reductionBit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)

0: Off, 1: OnBits 6 and 7: Not used

6800E4(H) - User parameter switch 20 (SWUSR_14)Bit 0: Automatic printing of the PC fax (LAN fax) error report

0: Off, 1: OnBit 1: Reprint the documents fail to print from PC fax (LAN fax) driver

0: Off, 1: OnBits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory which could not be printed from PC fax(LAN fax) driver

Bit 5 4 3 2 Setting0 0 0 0 0 min.0 0 0 1 1 min.

1 1 1 0 14 min.1 1 1 1 15 min.

Bits 6 and 7: Not used.

6800E5(H) - User parameter switch 21 (SWUSR_15) Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message

0: Disabled (print only when error occurs), 1: EnabledBit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request

0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 2: Not usedBit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1:PDFBit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 5: Not used

Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayedBit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled




B712 108 SM

6800E6(H) - User parameter switch 22 (SWUSR_16)(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Dial tone detection (PSTN 2) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Bit 2: Dial tone detection (PSTN 3) 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBits 3 to 7: Not used

6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17) : Not used

6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18) Bits 0 and 1: File retention time (Cross reference: System switch 02 bit 4)

Bit 1 0 Setting0 0 File retention impossible0 1 24 hours1 0 File retention impossible1 1 72 hours

Bits 2 to 7: Not used6800E9(H) - User parameter switch 25 (SWUSR_19) Bit 0 and 1: Not usedBit 2: Auto switching 0: Fax, 1: TelephoneBit 3: Not usedBit 4: RDS operation

0: Not acceptable1: Acceptable for the limit specified by system switch 03

NOTE: This bit is only effective when RDS operation can be selected by the user(see system switch 02).

Bits 5 to 7: Not used6800EA(H) to 6800EF(H) - User parameter switch 26 to 31 (SWUSR_1A to 1F)

: Not used

6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of thespecified type

0: Paper output priorityPriority order1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4. Folder

1: Electric putout order

Priority order1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax number

Bits 1 to 7: Not used

6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used

6800F2(H) - User parameter switch 34 (SWUSR_22)Bit 0: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: EnabledBit 1: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches




SM 109 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches

680190 to 6801AF(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)

6801B0 to 6801B0(H) - Own fax PABX extension number 6801BA to 6801C3(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) 6801C4 to 6801D7(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4)6801D8 to 6801E3(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) 6801E4 to 6801EF(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) 6801F0 to 6801FB(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4)6801FC to 680207(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4)

680208 to 68021B(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See thefollowing note.

68021C to 68022F(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See thefollowing note.

680230 to 680246(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See thefollowing note.

680247 to 680286(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.680287 to 680296(H) - TTI 2 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.680297 to 680306(H) - TTI 3 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.680307 to 68031A(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)68031B to 68032E(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)68032F to 680342(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)

680343(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)680344(H) - Number of PSTN-2 CSI characters (Hex)

680345(H) Number of PSTN-3 CSI characters (Hex)-NOTE: If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 64 for

TTI), add a stop code (FF[H]) after the last character.

680380 to 680387(H) - Last power off time (Read only)680380(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM),

02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)680381(H) - Year (BCD)680382(H) - Month (BCD)680383(H) - Day (BCD)680384(H) - Hour

680385(H) - Minute680386(H) - Second680387(H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ....... , 06: Sunday

680394(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 1: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBits 2 to 7; Not used

680395(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)Bits 0 to 3: Not usedBit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed

Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: InstalledBit 6 and 7: Not used




B712 110 SM

680406 to 68040A – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)680406(H) - Suffix (BCD)680407(H) - Version (BCD)680408(H) - Year (BCD)

680409(H) - Month (BCD)68040A(H) - Day (BCD)

68040B to 68040F – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)68040B(H) - Suffix (BCD)68040C(H) - Version (BCD)68040D(H) - Year (BCD)68040E(H) - Month (BCD)68040F(H) - Day (BCD)

680410(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)680412(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)

680414(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)680420(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)

680476(H) - Time for economy transmission (hour in 24h clock format - BCD)680477(H) - Time for economy transmission (minute - BCD)

680492(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680493(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680494(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680495(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)680496(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)680497(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)

69ED04 to 69F003(H) - SIP server address (Read only)69ED04(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69ED84(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69EE04(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69EF04(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

69F004(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69F084(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69F104(H) - Arias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69F184(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)69F204(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)

6A0DC0(H) - Stand-by port number for H.232 connection6A0DC2(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection6A0DC4(H) - RAS port number6A0DC6(H) - Gatekeeper port number6A0DC8(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.386A0DCA(H) - Port number of SIP server

6A0DCC(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP6A0DCD(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled6A0DCE(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled




SM 111 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

6A0DD0(H) - RAS/SIP back-up server: IP address (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A0DD4(H) - SIP back-up server: Host name (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A0E54(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Main

(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)

6A0ED4(H) - RAS back-up server: gatekeeper address - Sub(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A0F54(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Main

(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A0FD4(H) - SIP back-up server: registrar server address - Sub

(Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A1054(H) - RAS back-up server: Arias number (Max. 128 characters- ASCII)6A10D4(H) - RAS back-up server: Stand-by port number for H.232 connection6A10D6(H) - RAS back-up server: RAS port number



OVERVIEW

B712 112 SM


5.1 OVERVIEW

The basic fax unit consists of two PCBs: an FCU and an MBU.

The FCU controls all the fax communications and fax features, in cooperation withthe controller board. The MBU contains the ROM and SRAM. Also, the FCU has anNCU circuit.

Fax Options:

1. Extra G3 Interface option: This provides one more analog line interface. Thisallows full dual access. Two extra G3 interface options can be installed.

2. Memory Expansion: This expands the SAF memory and the page memory(used for image rotation); without this expansion, the page memory is not bigenough for image rotation at 400 dpi, so transmission at 400 dpi is not possible.

MBU

C C U D R V

CCUIF

SG3SG3

GWFCU3

FCUIF

Memory DIMM

to IPU

B712D501.WMF



BOARDS

SM 113 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

5.2 BOARDS

5.2.1 FCU

The FCU (Facsimile Control Unit) controls fax communications, the video interfaceto the base copier’s engine, and all the fax options.

FACE 3 (Fax Application Control Engine)

• CPU

• Data compression and reconstruction (DCR)

• DMA control

• Clock generation

• DRAM backup control

Modem (FAME)

• V.34, V33, V17, V.29, V.27ter, V.21, and V.8

I P U

FCU

FACE3

SAF

BACKUP

SDRAM

(16MB)

DIMM

(32 MB)

DMA BUS

CPU BUS

MBU

SRAM

(256kB)

FROM

(3MB)

BACKUP

& RESET

FCUIF

PCI BUS

CCUDRVCCUIF

v.34

MODEM

Speaker

Drive

Speaker

NCU

Circuit

Line

TEL

G3 G3

B712D502.WMF



BOARDS

B712 114 SM

DRAM

• The 16 MB of DRAM is shared as follows.SAF memory : 4MBWorking memory : 8MB

Page memory : 4MB• The SAF memory is backed up by a rechargeable battery.

Memory back-up

• A Rechargeable battery backs up the SAF memory (DRAM) for 1 hour.

5.2.2 MBU

On this board, the flash ROM contains the FCU firmware, and the SRAM containsthe system data and user parameters. Even if the FCU is changed, the system

data and user parameters are kept on the MBU board.

ROM

• 3MB flash ROMs for system software storage2MB (16bit x 1MB) + 1MB (16bit x 512K)

SRAM

• The 256 KB SRAM for system and user parameter storage is backed up by alithium battery.

Memory back-up

• A lithium battery backs up the system parameters and programmed items inthe SRAM, in case the base copier's main switch is turned off.

Switches

Item Description

SW1 Switches the SRAM backup battery on/off.



BOARDS

SM 115 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

5.2.3 SG3 BOARD

The SG3 board allows up to three simultaneous communications when used incombination with the FCU and optional G3 boards. The NCU is on the same boardas the common SG-3 board. This makes the total board structure smaller. But, the

specifications of the SG3 board do not change.

NCCP (New Communication Control Processor)• Controls the SG3 board.

• CPU (RU30)

• DPRAM (Dual Port RAM): Handshaking with the FCU is done through this block.

• DMA controller

• JBIG

• DSP V34 modem (RL5T892): Includes the DTMF Receiver function

• DCR for MH, MR, MMR, and JBIG compression and decompression

FROM

• 1Mbyte flash ROM for SG3 software storage and modem software storage

SDRAM

• 8Mbyte DRAM shared between ECM buffer, line buffer, and working memory

AFE (Analog Front End)

• Analog processing

CODEC (COder-DECoder)

• A/D & D/A conversions for modem

REG

• Generates +3.3 V from the +5V from the FCU

SG3-DSG3-D

FCU

NCCP

FROM(1MB)

SDRAM(8MB)

CODEC NCU

REG

DSP(modem)

DMAC

CPU(Ru30)

JBIG

DCR

DPRAM

AFE

+5V +3.3V

G3 Board

Line

B712D902.WMF



VIDEO DATA PATH

B712 116 SM

5.3 VIDEO DATA PATH

5.3.1 TRANSMISSION

SCANNER

IPU

FBI

FACE3

Page Memory

DCR

SAF

DCR QM-CODER

FCU

DCR QM-CODER

NCCP

SG3

Modem

NCU

Analog G3

Modem

NCU

Analog G3

B712D511.WMF



VIDEO DATA PATH

SM 117 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Memory Transmission and Parallel Memory Transmission

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution in inchformat. The IPU processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent doterase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’sscanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.

Then, the FCU converts the data to mm format, and compresses the data in MMRor raw format to store it in the SAF memory. If image rotation will be done, theimage is rotated in page memory before compression.

At the time of transmission, the FCU decompresses the stored data, then re-compresses and/or reduces the data if necessary for transmission. The NCUtransmits the data to the line.

Immediate TransmissionThe base copier's scanner scans the original at the resolution agreed with thereceiving terminal. The IPU video processes the data and transfers it to the FCU.

NOTE: When scanning a fax original, the IPU uses the MTF, independent doterase and thresholding parameter settings programmed in the fax unit’sscanner bit switches, not the copier's SP modes.

Then the FCU stores the data in page memory, and compresses the data fortransmission. The NCU transmits the data to the line.

JBIG Transmission

• Memory transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goesfrom the DCR to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to the line.When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as the linetype, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.

• Immediate transmission: If the receiver has JBIG compression, the data goesfrom the page memory to the QM-Coder. Then the NCU transmits the data to theline. When an optional G3 unit (SG3) is installed and PSTN2 is selected as theline type, JBIG compression is available, but only for the PSTN-2 line.

Adjustments

•

Priority for the line used for G3 transmissions (PSTN 1/PSTN 2 or 3): Systemswitch 16 bit 1



VIDEO DATA PATH

B712 118 SM

5.3.2 RECEPTION

First, the FCU stores the incoming data from either an analog line to the SAFmemory. (The data goes to the FACE3 at the same time, and is checked for errorlines/frames.)

The FCU then decompresses the data and transfers it to page memory. If imagerotation will be done, the image is rotated in the page memory. The data is

transferred to the IPU.If the optional G3 unit is installed, the line that the message comes in on dependson the telephone number dialed by the other party (the optional G3 unit has adifferent telephone number from the main fax board).

JBIG Reception

When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-1 (the standard analog line),the data is sent to the QM-CODER for decompression. Then the data is stored inthe page memory, and transferred to the IPU.

When data compressed with JBIG comes in on PSTN-2 (optional extra analog

line), the data is sent to the QM-CODER on the SG3 board for decompression.

SG3

SAF

DCR

Page Memory

FACE3

FBI

QM-CODER

DCR

IPU

Printer

CCD (DCR)

QM-CODER

FCU

NCCP

NCU

Analog G3

Modem

NCU

Analog G3

Modem

B712D512.WMF



FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

SM 119 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

5.4 FAX COMMUNICATION FEATURES

5.4.1 MULTI-PORT

When the optional extra G3 Interface Unit is installed, communication can takeplace at the same time through the two or three lines at once.

Option Available Line TypeAvailable protocol

Combinations

Standard only PSTN G3

Extra G3 Interface Unit (single) PSTN + PSTN G3 + G3

Extra G3 Interface Unit (double) PSTN + PSTN +PSTN G3 + G3 +G3




B712 120 SM

5.4.2 DOCUMENT SERVER

The base copier's scanner scans the original at the selected resolution. The IPUvideo processes the data and transfers it to the controller board.

Then the controller stores the data in the page memory for the copier function, andcompresses the data in MMR (by software) to store it in the HDD. If image rotationwill be done, the image is rotated in the page memory before compression.

For transmission, the stored image data is transferred to the FCU. The FCUdecompresses the image data, then recompresses and/or reduces the data ifnecessary for transmission. the NCU transmits the data to the line.

The documents can be stored in the HDD (Document Server) from the faxapplication. The stored documents in the document sever can be used for the faxtransmission in many times. More than one document and the scanned documentcan be combined into one file and then the file can be transmitted.

• When using the document server, the SAF memory is not used.

• The document is compressed with MMR and stored.

• Up to 9,000 pages can be stored. (1 file: Up to 1,000 pages) from the fax

application.• Only stored documents from the fax application can be transmitted.

• Scanned documents are given a name automatically, such as “FAX001”. But it ispossible to change the file name, user name and password.

• Up to 30 files can be selected at once.

NOTE: 1) The compression method of the fax application is different from the copyapplication. The storing time is longer than the copier storing.

2) When selecting “Print 1st page”, the stored document will be reduced to A4 size.

Scanner

IPU

HDD

Page

Memory

Comoressed

MMR

Controller

FBI

FACE3 DCR Modem NCU

DATA/ADDRESS BUS

To

PSTN

FCU

B712D514.WMF




SM 121 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

5.4.3 INTERNET MAIL COMMUNICATION

Mail Transmission

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –

Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Transmission

Data Formats

The scanned data is converted into a TIFF-F formatted file (only MH compressioncan be used).

The fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From Mail address of the sender

Reply To Destination requested for reply

To Mail address of the destination

Bcc Backup mail addressSubject From CSI or RTI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content Type Multipart/mixed Attached files: image/tiff

Content Transfer Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Message Body MIME-converted TIFF-F (MIME standards specify how filesare attached to e-mail messages)

Selectable Options

These options are available for selection:

•

With the default settings, the scan resolution can be either standard or detail.Inch-mm conversion before TX depends on IFAX SW01 Bit 7. Detail resolutionwill be used if Super Fine resolution is selected, unless Fine resolution is enabledwith IFAX SW01.

• The requirements for originals (document size, scan width, and memorycapacity) are the same as for G3 fax memory tx.

• The default compression is TIFF-F format.

• IFAX SW00: Acceptable paper widths for sending

• IFAX SW09: Maximum number of attempts to the same destination

Secure Internet Transmission• SMTP Authentication:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> SMTP Authentication

• POP Before SMTP:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP Before SMTP




B712 122 SM

Mail Reception

This machine supports three types of e-mail reception:

• POP3 (Post Office Protocol Ver. 3.)

•

IMAP4 (Internet Messaging Access Protocol)• SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Mail Reception

POP3/IMAP4 Mail Reception Procedure

The machine automatically picks up e-mail from the server at an interval which isadjustable in the range 2 to 1440 min. in 1-minute steps:User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> E-mail Reception Interval

SMTP Reception• The IFAX must be registered as an SMTP server in the MX record of the DNS

server, and the address of the received mail must specify the IFAX.

• Enable SMTP reception:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

Even if the MX record on the DNS server includes the IFAX, mail cannot bereceived with SMTP until SMTP reception is enabled:

However, if SMTP reception is selected and the machine is not registered in theMX record of the DNS server, then either IMAP4 or POP3 is used, depending on

the setting:User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Reception Protocol

Mail Delivery Conditions: Transferring Mail Received With SMTP

1) The machine must be set up for SMTP mail delivery:

User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX File DeliverySettings

2) If the user wishes to limit this feature so that the machine will only delivermail from designated senders, the machine’s “Auth. E-mail RX” feature mustbe set (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX FileDelivery Settings).

3) If the “SMTP RX File Delivery Setting” is set to 0 to prohibit SMTP receiving, and if there is mail designated for delivery, then the machine responds withan error. (User Tools> Facsimile Features> E-mail Settings> SMTP RX FileDelivery Settings)

4) If the quick dial, speed dial, or group dial entry is incorrect, the mailtransmission is lost, and the IFAX issues an error to the SMTP server andoutputs an error report.




SM 123 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Auth. E-mail RX

In order to limit access to mail delivery with IFAX, the addresses of senders mustbe limited using the Access Limit Entry. Only one entry can be registered.

1) Access Limit EntryFor example, to limit access to @IFAX.ricoh.co.jp:

[email protected] Matches and is delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

[email protected] Does not match and is not delivered.

2) Conditions

• The length of the Access Limit Entry is limited to 127 characters.

• If the Access Limit Entry address and the mail address of the incoming

mail do not match, the incoming mail is discarded and not delivered, andthe SMTP server responds with an error. However, in this case an errorreport is not output.

• If the Access Limit Entry address is not registered, and if the incomingmail specifies a delivery destination, then the mail is deliveredunconditionally.




B712 124 SM

Handling Mail Reception Errors

Abnormal files

When an error of this type occurs, the machine stops receiving and commands the

server to erase the message. Then the machine prints an error report and sendsinformation about the error by e-mail to the sender address (specified in the “From”or “Reply-to” field of the message). If there is an incomplete received message inthe machine memory, it will be erased.

The machine prints an error message when it fails to send the receive errornotification after a certain number of attempts.

The following types of files are judged to be abnormal if one or more of thefollowing are detected:

1. Unsupported MIME headers.

Supported types of MIME headerHeader Supported Types

Content-Type Multipart/mixed, text/plain, message/rfc822 Image/tiff

Charset US-ASCII, ISO 8859 X. Other types cannot be handled,and some garbage may appear in the data.

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

2. MIME decoding errors

3. File format not recognized as TIFF-F format

4. Resolution, document size, or compression type cannot be accepted

Remaining SAF capacity error

The machine calls the server but does not receive e-mail if the remaining SAFcapacity is less than a certain value (the value depends on IFAX Switch 08. The e-mail will be received when the SAF capacity increases (for example, aftersubstitute reception files have been printed). The error handling method for thistype of error is the same as for “Abnormal files”.

If the capacity of the SAF memory drops to zero during reception, the machineoperates in the same way as when receiving an abnormal file (refer to “Abnormalfiles” above).

Secure Internet Reception

To enable password encryption and higher level security:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> POP3/IMAP4 Settings> Encryption(set to “On”)




SM 125 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Transfer Request

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –Internet/LAN Fax Boards – Transfer Request

Request by MailThe fields of the e-mail and their contents are as follows:

Field Content

From E-mail address of the requesting terminal

To Destination address (Transfer Station address)

Bcc Backup mail address

Subject From TSI (Fax Message No. xxxx)

Content-Type Multipart/mixedText/Plain (for a text part), image/tiff (for attached files)

Content-Transfer-Encoding Base 64, 7-Bit, 8-bit, Quoted Printable

Mail body (text part) RELAY-ID-: xxxx (xxxx: 4 digits for an ID code)RELAY: #01#*X#**01….

Message body MIME-converted TIFF-F.






SM 127 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

E-mail Messages

After entering the subject, you can enter a message with:

Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

An e-mail message (up to 5 lines) can be pre-registered with:

User Tools> System Settings> File Transfer> Program/Change/Delete E-mailMessage

Limitations on Entries

Item Maximum

Number of Lines 5 lines

Line Length 80 characters

Name Length 20 characters




B712 128 SM

Message Disposition Notification (MDN)

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –Internet/LAN Fax Boards – E-mail Options

The network system administrator can confirm whether a sent mail has beenreceived correctly or not. This confirmation is done in four steps.

1. Send request for confirmation of mail reception. To enable or disable thisrequest (known as MDN):

Sub TX Mode> E-mail Options

2. Mail reception (receive confirmation request)3. Send confirmation of mail reception4. Receive confirmation of mail reception

The other party’s machine will not respond to the request unless the two conditionsbelow are met:

• The other party’s machine must be set up to respond to the confirmation request.• The other party’s machine must support MDN (Message Disposition Notification).

- Setting up the Receiving Party -

The receiving party will respond to the confirmation request if:

1) The “Disposition Notification To” field is in the received mail header(automatically inserted in the 4th line in the upper table on the previous page,if MDN is enabled), and

2) Sending the disposition notification must be enabled (User ParameterSetting SW21 (15 [H]) Bit 1 for this model). The content of the response isas follows:

Normal reception: “Return Receipt (dispatched)” in the Subject line

IFAX SW02 (Bit 2, 3) “Return Receipt (displayed)” in the Subject line

Error: “Return Receipt (processed/error)” in the Subject line




SM 129 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

Handling Reports

1. Sending a Request for a Return Receipt by Mail

After the mail sender transmits a request for a return receipt, the mail sender’s

journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result column and a “Q” in theMode column.

2. Mail Receipt (Request for Receipt Confirmation) and Sending Mail ReceiptResponse

After the mail receiver sends a response to the request for a return receipt, themail receiver’s journal is annotated with two hyphens (--) in the Result columnand an “A” in the Mode column.

3. Receiving the Return Receipt Mail

• After the mail sender receives a return receipt, the information in the mail

sender’s journal about the receipt request is replaced, i.e. the journal isannotated with “OK” in the Result column.

• When the return receipt reports an error, the journal is annotated with an “E”in the Result column.

• The arrival of the return receipt is not recorded in the journal as a separatecommunication. Its arrival is only reported by the presence of “OK” or “E” inthe Result column.

• If the mail address used by the sender specifies a mailing list (i.e., a Groupdestination; the machine sends the mail to more than one location. See “Howto set up Mail Delivery”), the Result column of the Journal is updated everytime a return receipt is received. For example, if the mailing list was to 5

destinations, the Result column indicates the result of the communicationwith the 5

th destination only. The results of the communications to the first 4

destinations are not shown.Exceptions:If one of the communications had an error, the Result column will indicate E,even if subsequent communications were OK.If two of the communications had an error, the Journal will indicate thedestination for the first error only.

Report Sample

DATE TIME ADDRESS MODE TIME PAGE RESULT

MAY. 5 10:15 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SM 0'09" 2 --

10:16 fuser_01@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'05" 1 --

10:17 s_tadashi@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMQ 0'09" 2 OK

10:19 m_masataka@dom1g. ricoh. co. Mail SMA 0'05" 1 --

IFAXD921.WMF



IP-FAX

B712 130 SM

5.5 IP-FAX

What is IP-FAX?

For details: Core Technology Manual – Facsimile Processes – Faxing from a PC –Internet/LAN Fax Boards – IP-FAX

T.38 Packet Format

TCP is selected by default for NIC FAX; you can change this to UDP with LANswitch 10 bit 1.

UDP Related Switches

IP-Fax Switch 01


0-3 Select IP FAX Delay Level

Bit 3 2 1 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 Level 00 0 0 1 Level 10 0 1 0 Level 20 0 1 1 Level 3

Raise the level by selecting a higher setting if too

many transmission errors are occurring on thenetwork.

If TCP/UDP is enabled on the network, raise thissetting on the T.30 machine. Increasing the delaytime allows the recovery of more lost packets.

If only UDP is enabled, increase the number ofredundant packets.

Level 1~2: 3 Redundant packets

Level 3: 4 Redundant packets

4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.

Settings

User parameter switch 32 (20[H]), bit 0IP-Fax Gate Keeper usage 0: No, 1: Yes

LAN switches 10 to 12: Various IP-FAX settings (see the bit switch table)



SPECIFICATIONS

SM 131 B712

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Type: Desktop type transceiver

Circuit: PSTN (max. 3ch.)PABX

Connection: Direct couple

Original Size: Book (Face down)Maximum Length: 432 mm [17 ins]Maximum Width: 297 mm [11.7 ins]

ARDF (Face up)(single sided document)

Length: 128 - 1200 mm [5.0 - 47.2 ins]Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

(double sided document)Length: 128 - 432 mm [5.0 - 17 inch]Width: 105 - 297 mm [4.1 - 11.7 inch]

Scanning Method: Flat bed, with CCD

Resolution: G38 x 3.85 lines/mm (Standard)8 x 7.7 lines/mm (Detail)8 x 15.4 line/mm (Fine) Note116 x15.4 line/mm (Super Fine) See Note.

200 x 100 dpi (Standard)200 x 200 dpi (Detail)400 x 400 dpi (Super Fine) See Note.

NOTE: Note 1: Optional Expansion Memory required

Transmission Time: G3: 3 s at 28800 bps; Measured with G3 ECM usingmemory for an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) atstandard resolution

Data Compression: MH, MR, MMR

JBIGProtocol: Group 3 with ECM

Modulation: V.34, V.33, V.17 (TCM), V.29 (QAM),V.27ter (PHM), V.8, V.21 (FM)

Data Rate: G3: 33600/31200/28800/26400/24000/21600/19200/16800/14400/12000/9600/7200/4800/2400 bps Automatic fallback

I/O Rate: With ECM: 0 ms/lineWithout ECM: 2.5, 5, 10, 20, or 40 ms/line



SPECIFICATIONS

B712 132 SM

Memory Capacity: ECM: 128 KB

SAFStandard: 4 MBWith optional Expansion Memory: 28 MB (4 MB+ 24 MB)

Page MemoryStandard: 4 MB (Print: 2 MB + Scanner: 2 MB)With optional Expansion Memory: 12 MB (8 MB + 4 MB)

(Print 8 MB + Scanner: 4 MB)

2. CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows how the capabilities of each programmable item willchange after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit is installed.

Item Standard

Quick Dial 2000

Groups 100

Destination per Group 500

Destinations dialed from the ten-key pad overall 500

Programs 100

Auto Document 6

Communication records for Journal stored in thememory

200

Specific Senders 30

The following table shows how the capabilities of the document memory willchange after the optional Fax Function Upgrade Unit and the Expansion Memoryare installed.

Without theExpansion Memory

With theExpansion

Memory

MemoryTransmission file

400 400

Maximum number ofpage for memorytransmission

1,000 1,000

Memory capacity formemory transmission

(Note1)

320 2,240

NOTE: 1) Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at thestandard resolution, the auto image density mode and the Text mode.



SPECIFICATIONS

F a x O p t i o n

T y p e 3 2 4 5

B 7 1 2

3. IFAX SPECIFICATIONS

Type Fax Unit and Printer/Scanner Unit

Connectivity

E-mail File Format Single/multi-part

MIME conversion( )